US20140369927A1 - Camptothecin Conjugates of Anti-CD22 Antibodies for Treatment of B Cell Diseases - Google Patents

Camptothecin Conjugates of Anti-CD22 Antibodies for Treatment of B Cell Diseases Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20140369927A1
US20140369927A1 US14/337,336 US201414337336A US2014369927A1 US 20140369927 A1 US20140369927 A1 US 20140369927A1 US 201414337336 A US201414337336 A US 201414337336A US 2014369927 A1 US2014369927 A1 US 2014369927A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
antibody
seq
cell
antibodies
fragment
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US14/337,336
Inventor
Serengulam V. Govindan
David M. Goldenberg
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Immunomedics Inc
Original Assignee
Immunomedics Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from US10/734,589 external-priority patent/US7585491B2/en
Priority claimed from US11/388,032 external-priority patent/US8877901B2/en
Priority claimed from US12/026,811 external-priority patent/US7591994B2/en
Priority claimed from US12/629,404 external-priority patent/US7999083B2/en
Application filed by Immunomedics Inc filed Critical Immunomedics Inc
Priority to US14/337,336 priority Critical patent/US20140369927A1/en
Assigned to IMMUNOMEDICS, INC. reassignment IMMUNOMEDICS, INC. ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: GOLDENBERG, DAVID M., GOVINDAN, SERENGULAM V.
Publication of US20140369927A1 publication Critical patent/US20140369927A1/en
Priority to US15/432,278 priority patent/US20170151356A1/en
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K16/00—Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies
    • C07K16/08—Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies against material from viruses
    • C07K16/10—Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies against material from viruses from RNA viruses
    • C07K16/1036—Retroviridae, e.g. leukemia viruses
    • C07K16/1045—Lentiviridae, e.g. HIV, FIV, SIV
    • C07K16/1063—Lentiviridae, e.g. HIV, FIV, SIV env, e.g. gp41, gp110/120, gp160, V3, PND, CD4 binding site
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K51/00—Preparations containing radioactive substances for use in therapy or testing in vivo
    • A61K51/02—Preparations containing radioactive substances for use in therapy or testing in vivo characterised by the carrier, i.e. characterised by the agent or material covalently linked or complexing the radioactive nucleus
    • A61K51/04—Organic compounds
    • A61K51/08—Peptides, e.g. proteins, carriers being peptides, polyamino acids, proteins
    • A61K51/10—Antibodies or immunoglobulins; Fragments thereof, the carrier being an antibody, an immunoglobulin or a fragment thereof, e.g. a camelised human single domain antibody or the Fc fragment of an antibody
    • A61K51/1027—Antibodies or immunoglobulins; Fragments thereof, the carrier being an antibody, an immunoglobulin or a fragment thereof, e.g. a camelised human single domain antibody or the Fc fragment of an antibody against receptors, cell-surface antigens or cell-surface determinants
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K39/00—Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies
    • A61K39/395—Antibodies; Immunoglobulins; Immune serum, e.g. antilymphocytic serum
    • A61K39/39533—Antibodies; Immunoglobulins; Immune serum, e.g. antilymphocytic serum against materials from animals
    • A61K39/39558—Antibodies; Immunoglobulins; Immune serum, e.g. antilymphocytic serum against materials from animals against tumor tissues, cells, antigens
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/06—Organic compounds, e.g. natural or synthetic hydrocarbons, polyolefins, mineral oil, petrolatum or ozokerite
    • A61K47/26—Carbohydrates, e.g. sugar alcohols, amino sugars, nucleic acids, mono-, di- or oligo-saccharides; Derivatives thereof, e.g. polysorbates, sorbitan fatty acid esters or glycyrrhizin
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
    • A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
    • A61K47/68—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an antibody, an immunoglobulin or a fragment thereof, e.g. an Fc-fragment
    • A61K47/6801—Drug-antibody or immunoglobulin conjugates defined by the pharmacologically or therapeutically active agent
    • A61K47/6803—Drugs conjugated to an antibody or immunoglobulin, e.g. cisplatin-antibody conjugates
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
    • A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
    • A61K47/68—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an antibody, an immunoglobulin or a fragment thereof, e.g. an Fc-fragment
    • A61K47/6801—Drug-antibody or immunoglobulin conjugates defined by the pharmacologically or therapeutically active agent
    • A61K47/6803—Drugs conjugated to an antibody or immunoglobulin, e.g. cisplatin-antibody conjugates
    • A61K47/68037—Drugs conjugated to an antibody or immunoglobulin, e.g. cisplatin-antibody conjugates the drug being a camptothecin [CPT] or derivatives
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
    • A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
    • A61K47/68—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an antibody, an immunoglobulin or a fragment thereof, e.g. an Fc-fragment
    • A61K47/6801—Drug-antibody or immunoglobulin conjugates defined by the pharmacologically or therapeutically active agent
    • A61K47/6803—Drugs conjugated to an antibody or immunoglobulin, e.g. cisplatin-antibody conjugates
    • A61K47/6807—Drugs conjugated to an antibody or immunoglobulin, e.g. cisplatin-antibody conjugates the drug or compound being a sugar, nucleoside, nucleotide, nucleic acid, e.g. RNA antisense
    • A61K47/6809—Antibiotics, e.g. antitumor antibiotics anthracyclins, adriamycin, doxorubicin or daunomycin
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
    • A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
    • A61K47/68—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an antibody, an immunoglobulin or a fragment thereof, e.g. an Fc-fragment
    • A61K47/6835—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an antibody, an immunoglobulin or a fragment thereof, e.g. an Fc-fragment the modifying agent being an antibody or an immunoglobulin bearing at least one antigen-binding site
    • A61K47/6849—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an antibody, an immunoglobulin or a fragment thereof, e.g. an Fc-fragment the modifying agent being an antibody or an immunoglobulin bearing at least one antigen-binding site the antibody targeting a receptor, a cell surface antigen or a cell surface determinant
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
    • A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
    • A61K47/68—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an antibody, an immunoglobulin or a fragment thereof, e.g. an Fc-fragment
    • A61K47/6835—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an antibody, an immunoglobulin or a fragment thereof, e.g. an Fc-fragment the modifying agent being an antibody or an immunoglobulin bearing at least one antigen-binding site
    • A61K47/6851—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an antibody, an immunoglobulin or a fragment thereof, e.g. an Fc-fragment the modifying agent being an antibody or an immunoglobulin bearing at least one antigen-binding site the antibody targeting a determinant of a tumour cell
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
    • A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
    • A61K47/68—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an antibody, an immunoglobulin or a fragment thereof, e.g. an Fc-fragment
    • A61K47/6835—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an antibody, an immunoglobulin or a fragment thereof, e.g. an Fc-fragment the modifying agent being an antibody or an immunoglobulin bearing at least one antigen-binding site
    • A61K47/6851—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an antibody, an immunoglobulin or a fragment thereof, e.g. an Fc-fragment the modifying agent being an antibody or an immunoglobulin bearing at least one antigen-binding site the antibody targeting a determinant of a tumour cell
    • A61K47/6859—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an antibody, an immunoglobulin or a fragment thereof, e.g. an Fc-fragment the modifying agent being an antibody or an immunoglobulin bearing at least one antigen-binding site the antibody targeting a determinant of a tumour cell the tumour determinant being from liver or pancreas cancer cell
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
    • A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
    • A61K47/68—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an antibody, an immunoglobulin or a fragment thereof, e.g. an Fc-fragment
    • A61K47/6835—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an antibody, an immunoglobulin or a fragment thereof, e.g. an Fc-fragment the modifying agent being an antibody or an immunoglobulin bearing at least one antigen-binding site
    • A61K47/6851—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an antibody, an immunoglobulin or a fragment thereof, e.g. an Fc-fragment the modifying agent being an antibody or an immunoglobulin bearing at least one antigen-binding site the antibody targeting a determinant of a tumour cell
    • A61K47/6867—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an antibody, an immunoglobulin or a fragment thereof, e.g. an Fc-fragment the modifying agent being an antibody or an immunoglobulin bearing at least one antigen-binding site the antibody targeting a determinant of a tumour cell the tumour determinant being from a cell of a blood cancer
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
    • A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
    • A61K47/68—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an antibody, an immunoglobulin or a fragment thereof, e.g. an Fc-fragment
    • A61K47/6835—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an antibody, an immunoglobulin or a fragment thereof, e.g. an Fc-fragment the modifying agent being an antibody or an immunoglobulin bearing at least one antigen-binding site
    • A61K47/6883—Polymer-drug antibody conjugates, e.g. mitomycin-dextran-Ab; DNA-polylysine-antibody complex or conjugate used for therapy
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
    • A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
    • A61K47/68—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an antibody, an immunoglobulin or a fragment thereof, e.g. an Fc-fragment
    • A61K47/6889—Conjugates wherein the antibody being the modifying agent and wherein the linker, binder or spacer confers particular properties to the conjugates, e.g. peptidic enzyme-labile linkers or acid-labile linkers, providing for an acid-labile immuno conjugate wherein the drug may be released from its antibody conjugated part in an acidic, e.g. tumoural or environment
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K51/00—Preparations containing radioactive substances for use in therapy or testing in vivo
    • A61K51/02—Preparations containing radioactive substances for use in therapy or testing in vivo characterised by the carrier, i.e. characterised by the agent or material covalently linked or complexing the radioactive nucleus
    • A61K51/04—Organic compounds
    • A61K51/08—Peptides, e.g. proteins, carriers being peptides, polyamino acids, proteins
    • A61K51/10—Antibodies or immunoglobulins; Fragments thereof, the carrier being an antibody, an immunoglobulin or a fragment thereof, e.g. a camelised human single domain antibody or the Fc fragment of an antibody
    • A61K51/1045—Antibodies or immunoglobulins; Fragments thereof, the carrier being an antibody, an immunoglobulin or a fragment thereof, e.g. a camelised human single domain antibody or the Fc fragment of an antibody against animal or human tumor cells or tumor cell determinants
    • A61K51/1069—Antibodies or immunoglobulins; Fragments thereof, the carrier being an antibody, an immunoglobulin or a fragment thereof, e.g. a camelised human single domain antibody or the Fc fragment of an antibody against animal or human tumor cells or tumor cell determinants the tumor cell being from blood cells, e.g. the cancer being a myeloma
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K51/00—Preparations containing radioactive substances for use in therapy or testing in vivo
    • A61K51/02—Preparations containing radioactive substances for use in therapy or testing in vivo characterised by the carrier, i.e. characterised by the agent or material covalently linked or complexing the radioactive nucleus
    • A61K51/04—Organic compounds
    • A61K51/08—Peptides, e.g. proteins, carriers being peptides, polyamino acids, proteins
    • A61K51/10—Antibodies or immunoglobulins; Fragments thereof, the carrier being an antibody, an immunoglobulin or a fragment thereof, e.g. a camelised human single domain antibody or the Fc fragment of an antibody
    • A61K51/1093—Antibodies or immunoglobulins; Fragments thereof, the carrier being an antibody, an immunoglobulin or a fragment thereof, e.g. a camelised human single domain antibody or the Fc fragment of an antibody conjugates with carriers being antibodies
    • A61K51/1096—Antibodies or immunoglobulins; Fragments thereof, the carrier being an antibody, an immunoglobulin or a fragment thereof, e.g. a camelised human single domain antibody or the Fc fragment of an antibody conjugates with carriers being antibodies radioimmunotoxins, i.e. conjugates being structurally as defined in A61K51/1093, and including a radioactive nucleus for use in radiotherapeutic applications
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents
    • A61P35/02—Antineoplastic agents specific for leukemia
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K16/00—Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies
    • C07K16/18—Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies against material from animals or humans
    • C07K16/28—Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies against material from animals or humans against receptors, cell surface antigens or cell surface determinants
    • C07K16/2803—Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies against material from animals or humans against receptors, cell surface antigens or cell surface determinants against the immunoglobulin superfamily
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K16/00—Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies
    • C07K16/18—Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies against material from animals or humans
    • C07K16/28—Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies against material from animals or humans against receptors, cell surface antigens or cell surface determinants
    • C07K16/2803—Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies against material from animals or humans against receptors, cell surface antigens or cell surface determinants against the immunoglobulin superfamily
    • C07K16/2833—Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies against material from animals or humans against receptors, cell surface antigens or cell surface determinants against the immunoglobulin superfamily against MHC-molecules, e.g. HLA-molecules
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K16/00—Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies
    • C07K16/18—Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies against material from animals or humans
    • C07K16/28—Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies against material from animals or humans against receptors, cell surface antigens or cell surface determinants
    • C07K16/2863—Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies against material from animals or humans against receptors, cell surface antigens or cell surface determinants against receptors for growth factors, growth regulators
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K16/00—Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies
    • C07K16/18—Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies against material from animals or humans
    • C07K16/28—Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies against material from animals or humans against receptors, cell surface antigens or cell surface determinants
    • C07K16/2887—Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies against material from animals or humans against receptors, cell surface antigens or cell surface determinants against CD20
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K16/00—Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies
    • C07K16/18—Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies against material from animals or humans
    • C07K16/28—Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies against material from animals or humans against receptors, cell surface antigens or cell surface determinants
    • C07K16/30—Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies against material from animals or humans against receptors, cell surface antigens or cell surface determinants from tumour cells
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K16/00—Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies
    • C07K16/18—Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies against material from animals or humans
    • C07K16/28—Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies against material from animals or humans against receptors, cell surface antigens or cell surface determinants
    • C07K16/30—Immunoglobulins [IGs], e.g. monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies against material from animals or humans against receptors, cell surface antigens or cell surface determinants from tumour cells
    • C07K16/3061—Blood cells
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K39/00—Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies
    • A61K2039/505—Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies comprising antibodies
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K39/00—Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies
    • A61K2039/505—Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies comprising antibodies
    • A61K2039/507—Comprising a combination of two or more separate antibodies
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K9/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by special physical form
    • A61K9/14—Particulate form, e.g. powders, Processes for size reducing of pure drugs or the resulting products, Pure drug nanoparticles
    • A61K9/19—Particulate form, e.g. powders, Processes for size reducing of pure drugs or the resulting products, Pure drug nanoparticles lyophilised, i.e. freeze-dried, solutions or dispersions
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K2317/00—Immunoglobulins specific features
    • C07K2317/20—Immunoglobulins specific features characterized by taxonomic origin
    • C07K2317/24—Immunoglobulins specific features characterized by taxonomic origin containing regions, domains or residues from different species, e.g. chimeric, humanized or veneered
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K2317/00—Immunoglobulins specific features
    • C07K2317/30—Immunoglobulins specific features characterized by aspects of specificity or valency
    • C07K2317/31—Immunoglobulins specific features characterized by aspects of specificity or valency multispecific
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K2317/00—Immunoglobulins specific features
    • C07K2317/30—Immunoglobulins specific features characterized by aspects of specificity or valency
    • C07K2317/35—Valency
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K2317/00—Immunoglobulins specific features
    • C07K2317/50—Immunoglobulins specific features characterized by immunoglobulin fragments
    • C07K2317/51—Complete heavy chain or Fd fragment, i.e. VH + CH1
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K2317/00—Immunoglobulins specific features
    • C07K2317/50—Immunoglobulins specific features characterized by immunoglobulin fragments
    • C07K2317/55—Fab or Fab'
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K2317/00—Immunoglobulins specific features
    • C07K2317/50—Immunoglobulins specific features characterized by immunoglobulin fragments
    • C07K2317/56—Immunoglobulins specific features characterized by immunoglobulin fragments variable (Fv) region, i.e. VH and/or VL
    • C07K2317/565—Complementarity determining region [CDR]
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K2317/00—Immunoglobulins specific features
    • C07K2317/70—Immunoglobulins specific features characterized by effect upon binding to a cell or to an antigen
    • C07K2317/73—Inducing cell death, e.g. apoptosis, necrosis or inhibition of cell proliferation
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K2317/00—Immunoglobulins specific features
    • C07K2317/70—Immunoglobulins specific features characterized by effect upon binding to a cell or to an antigen
    • C07K2317/73—Inducing cell death, e.g. apoptosis, necrosis or inhibition of cell proliferation
    • C07K2317/732—Antibody-dependent cellular cytotoxicity [ADCC]
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K2317/00—Immunoglobulins specific features
    • C07K2317/70—Immunoglobulins specific features characterized by effect upon binding to a cell or to an antigen
    • C07K2317/73—Inducing cell death, e.g. apoptosis, necrosis or inhibition of cell proliferation
    • C07K2317/734—Complement-dependent cytotoxicity [CDC]
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K2317/00—Immunoglobulins specific features
    • C07K2317/70—Immunoglobulins specific features characterized by effect upon binding to a cell or to an antigen
    • C07K2317/77—Internalization into the cell
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K2319/00—Fusion polypeptide
    • C07K2319/70—Fusion polypeptide containing domain for protein-protein interaction

Definitions

  • the present invention concerns compositions and methods of use of immunoconjugates, comprising one or more camptothecin moieties attached to an anti-CD22 antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof.
  • the anti-CD22 antibody is epratuzumab and the camptothecin is SN-38.
  • the immunoconjugate is of use to treat B cell diseases, such as hematologic tumors, B cell leukemia or lymphoma (e.g., mantle cell lymphoma, multiple myeloma, Hodgkin's lymphoma, non-Hodgkin's lymphoma, diffuse large B cell lymphoma, Burkitt lymphoma, follicular lymphoma, acute lymphocytic leukemia, chronic lymphocytic leukemia, and hairy cell leukemia), autoimmune disease, immune dysfunction disease and type 1 or type 2 diabetes.
  • B cell leukemia or lymphoma e.g., mantle cell lymphoma, multiple myeloma, Hodgkin's lymphoma, non-Hodgkin's lymphoma, diffuse large B cell lymphoma, Burkitt lymphoma, follicular lymphoma, acute lymphocytic leukemia, chronic lymphocytic leukemia,
  • the immunoconjugate may be used alone or may be combined with another anti-B cell antibody or fragment thereof, such as antibodies against CD19, CD20, CD21, CD23, CD37, CD40, CD40L, CD52, CD80 or HLA-DR.
  • the immunoconjugate may be used in combination with another therapeutic agent, such as an immunomodulator, a cytotoxic agent, a drug, a toxin, an anti-angiogenic agent, a proapoptotic agent or a radionuclide.
  • the anti-CD22 immunoconjugate may also be administered as part of a dock-and-lock (DNL) complex, as described in detail below.
  • the combination of anti-CD22 antibody and other therapeutic agent is significantly more efficacious for treating a B cell disease than either agent administered alone or the sum of effects of the agents administered separately.
  • MAbs monoclonal antibodies
  • suitable toxic agents have been developed, but have had mixed success in the therapy of cancer, and virtually no application in other diseases, such as autoimmune diseases.
  • the toxic agent is most commonly a chemotherapeutic drug, although particle-emitting radionuclides, or bacterial or plant toxins have also been conjugated to MAbs, especially for the therapy of cancer (Sharkey and Goldenberg, C A Cancer J. Clin. 2006 July-August; 56(4):226-243).
  • MAb-chemotherapeutic drug conjugates are that (a) the chemotherapeutic drug itself is structurally well defined; (b) the chemotherapeutic drug is linked to the MAb protein using very well defined conjugation chemistries, often at specific sites remote from the MAb antigen binding regions; (c) MAb-chemotherapeutic drug conjugates can be made more reproducibly than chemical conjugates involving MAbs and bacterial or plant toxins, and as such are more amenable to commercial development and regulatory approval; and (d) the MAb-chemotherapeutic drug conjugates are orders of magnitude less toxic systemically than radionuclide MAb conjugates.
  • the first approved MAb-drug conjugate, Gemtuzumab Ozogamicin incorporated a similar acid-labile hydrazone bond between an anti-CD33 antibody, humanized P67.6, and a potent calicheamicin derivative. Sievers et al., J Clin Oncol.
  • the MAb-chemotherapeutic drug conjugates were made with reductively labile hindered disulfide bonds between the chemotherapeutic drugs and the MAb (Liu et al., Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 93: 8618-8623 (1996)).
  • cleavable linker involves cathepsin B-labile dipeptide spacers, such as Phe-Lys or Val-Cit, similar to the lysosomally labile peptide spacers of Trouet et al. containing from one to four amino acids, which additionally incorporated a collapsible spacer between the drug and the dipeptide (Dubowchik, et al., Bioconjugate Chem. 13:855-869 (2002); Firestone et al., U.S. Pat. No. 6,214,345 B1; Doronina et al., Nat Biotechnol. 21: 778-784 (2003)).
  • cathepsin B-labile dipeptide spacers such as Phe-Lys or Val-Cit
  • the conjugates of the instant invention possess greater efficacy, in many cases, than unconjugated or “naked” antibodies or antibody fragments, although such unconjugated targeting molecules have been of use in specific situations.
  • naked antibodies have come to play a role in the treatment of lymphomas (CAMPATH® and RITUXAN®), colorectal and other cancers (ERBITUX® and AVASTIN®), breast cancer (HERECEPTIN®), as well as a large number now in clinical development (e.g., epratuzumab).
  • cancer for example, naked antibodies have come to play a role in the treatment of lymphomas (CAMPATH® and RITUXAN®), colorectal and other cancers (ERBITUX® and AVASTIN®), breast cancer (HERECEPTIN®), as well as a large number now in clinical development (e.g., epratuzumab).
  • cancer for example, naked antibodies have come to play a role in the treatment of lymphomas (CAMP
  • a variety of antibodies are also in use for the treatment of autoimmune and other immune dysregulatory diseases, such as tumor necrosis factor (TNF) and B-cell (RITUXAN®) antibodies in arthritis, and are being investigated in other such diseases, such as the B-cell antibodies, RITUXAN® and epratuzumab, in systemic lupus erythematosus and Sjögren's syndrome, as well as juvenile diabetes and multiple sclerosis. Naked antibodies are also being studied in sepsis and septic shock, Alzheimer's disease, and infectious diseases.
  • TNF tumor necrosis factor
  • RITUXAN® B-cell antibodies
  • epratuzumab in systemic lupus erythematosus and Sjögren's syndrome
  • juvenile diabetes and multiple sclerosis as well as juvenile diabetes and multiple sclerosis.
  • naked antibodies are also being studied in sepsis and septic shock, Alzheimer's disease, and infectious diseases.
  • the first clinical evidence of an apparent advantage of combining two antibodies against different cancer cell antigens involved the administration of rituximab (chimeric anti-CD20) and epratuzumab (humanized anti-CD22 antibody) in patients with non-Hodgkin lymphoma (NHL).
  • rituximab chimeric anti-CD20
  • epratuzumab humanized anti-CD22 antibody
  • NHL non-Hodgkin lymphoma
  • the present invention concerns compositions and methods of use of combination therapy with at least one anti-CD22 antibody or fragment thereof and one or more therapeutic agents.
  • the therapeutic agent may be selected from the group consisting of an immunomodulator, a cytotoxic agent, a drug, a toxin, an anti-angiogenic agent, a proapoptotic agent, a radionuclide a second antibody or fragment thereof, an siRNA or other inhibitory oligonucleotide or any other known therapeutic agent.
  • the therapeutic agent is conjugated to the anti-CD22 antibody or fragment thereof to form an immunoconjugate.
  • one or more additional therapeutic agents such as a second antibody or fragment thereof, may also be separately administered, either before, simultaneously with or after the immunoconjugate.
  • the one or more therapeutic agents may comprise a camptothecin, such as SN-38.
  • camptothecin (CPT) and its analogs and derivatives are preferred chemotherapeutic moieties
  • other chemotherapeutic agents of use may include taxanes (e.g., baccatin III, paclitaxel), epothilones, anthracycline drugs (e.g., doxorubicin, epirubicin, morpholinodoxorubicin, cyanomorpholino-doxorubicin, 2-pyrrolinodoxorubicin, see Priebe W (ed.), ACS symposium series 574, American Chemical Society, Washington D.C., 1995; Nagy et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci.
  • taxanes e.g., baccatin III, paclitaxel
  • anthracycline drugs e.g., doxorubicin, epirubicin, morpholinodoxorubicin, cyanomorpholino-doxorubicin, 2-pyrrolino
  • the antibody is conjugated to at least one chemotherapeutic moiety; preferably 1 to about 5 chemotherapeutic moieties; most preferably about 6 to 12 chemotherapeutic moieties.
  • CPT group of drugs issues of insolubility in aqueous buffers and the lability of the ⁇ -lactone moiety of the E-ring of their structures under physiological conditions are relevant.
  • One approach has been to acylate the 20-hydroxyl group with an amino acid, and couple the ⁇ -amino group of the amino acid to poly-L-glutamic acid (Singer et al. in The Camptothecins: Unfolding Their Anticancer Potential , Liehr J. G., Giovanella, B. C. and Verschraegen (eds), NY Acad Sci., NY 922:136-150, 2000).
  • This approach relies on the passive diffusion of a polymeric molecule into tumor sites.
  • This glycine conjugation has also been reported as a method of making a water-soluble derivative of CPT (Vishnuvajjala et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,943,579) and in the preparation of a PEG-derivatized CPT (Greenwald, et al. J. Med. Chem. 39: 1938-1940, 1996).
  • the approach has been devised in the context of developing water-soluble and long acting forms of CPT, whereby CPT's in vivo half-life is enhanced, and the drug is gradually released from its conjugate while in circulation in vivo.
  • An example of a water soluble CPT derivative is CPT-11.
  • the invention relates to a process of preparing immunoconjugates, wherein a drug is derivatized with a first linker, which contains a reactive moiety that is capable of combining with a second linker that contains an antibody-coupling group; wherein the first linker also possesses a defined polyethylene glycol (PEG) moiety for water-solubility, and optionally an intracellularly-cleavable moiety cleavable by intracellular peptidases or by the low pH environment of endosomal and lysosomal vesicles. Also optionally there is an amino acid spacer between the drug and the first linker.
  • PEG polyethylene glycol
  • the second linker may also contain a reactive group capable of reacting with drug-(first linker) conjugate by the copper (+1) ion-catalyzed acetylene-azide cycloaddition reaction, referred to as ‘click chemistry’.
  • the defined PEG moiety is a low molecular weight PEG with a defined number of monomeric subunits, as discussed below.
  • Another embodiment relates to a process of preparing conjugates as discussed in the paragraph above, wherein the second linker has a single antibody-coupling group, but multiples of the reactive group capable of reacting with drug-(first linker) conjugate, thereby amplifying the number of drug molecules conjugated to the antibody.
  • a further embodiment relates to a process of preparing conjugates, wherein the linker is first conjugated to a drug, thereby producing a drug-linker conjugate; wherein said drug-linker conjugate preparation involves the selective protection and deprotection of a more reactive group in a drug containing multiple functional groups; wherein said drug-linker conjugate is optionally not purified; and wherein said drug-linker conjugate is subsequently conjugated to a monoclonal antibody or fragment.
  • the intracellularly-cleavable moiety is a carbonate comprising an activated hydroxyl group of the chemotherapeutic moiety and a substituted ethanolamine moiety or a 4-aminobenzyl alcohol, and the latter is attached, via its amino group, to a cross-linker terminating in the antibody-binding group; and wherein the substituted ethanolamine moiety is derived from a natural L amino acid, with the carboxylic acid group of the latter replaced with a hydroxymethyl moiety; and wherein the 4-aminobenzyl alcohol is optionally substituted with a C 1 -C 10 alkyl group at the benzylic position.
  • the intracellularly-cleavable moiety is a carbonate comprising an activated hydroxyl group of the chemotherapeutic moiety and a substituted ethanolamine moiety, and the latter, via its amino group, is attached to an L-amino acid or a polypeptide comprising up to four L-amino acid moieties; wherein the N-terminus is attached to a cross-linker terminating in the antibody-binding group; and wherein the substituted ethanolamine moiety is optionally derived from an L amino acid, with the carboxylic acid group of the latter replaced with a hydroxymethyl moiety.
  • the intracellularly-cleavable moiety is a carbonate comprising an activated hydroxyl group of the chemotherapeutic moiety and a 4-aminobenzyl alcohol or substituted 4-aminobenzyl alcohol substituted with a C 1 -C 10 alkyl group at the benzylic position, and the latter, via its amino group, is attached to an L-amino acid or a polypeptide comprising up to four L-amino acid moieties; wherein the N-terminus is attached to a cross-linker terminating in the antibody-binding group.
  • an amino group of a chemotherapeutic moiety is coupled to the activated hydroxyl group of a substituted, and amine-protected, ethanolamine moiety or a 4-aminobenzyl alcohol, and the latter is attached, via its amino group, to an L-amino acid or a polypeptide comprising up to four L-amino acid moieties; wherein the N-terminus is attached to a cross-linker terminating in the antibody-binding group; wherein said substituted ethanolamine moiety is optionally derived from an L amino acid, with the carboxylic acid group of the latter replaced with a hydroxymethyl moiety; and wherein the 4-aminobenzyl alcohol is optionally substituted with a C 1 -C 10 alkyl group at the benzylic position.
  • the bifunctional drug derivative is then conjugated to an antibody to obtain an immunoconjugate as discussed above.
  • the immunoconjugate Upon targeting the disease site with the immunoconjugate, the immunoconjugate is endocytosed and catabolized to release the drug-linker moiety; wherein the free amino group of the substituted ethanolamine moiety assists in the liberation of free drug by nucleophilic attack at the carbonyl group of the carbamate moiety.
  • the anti-CD22 antibody or fragment thereof is administered as part of a trivalent, tetravalent or hexavalent construct made by the dock-and-lock (DNL) technique (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos.
  • DNL dock-and-lock
  • the DNL technique takes advantage of the specific, high-affinity binding interaction between a dimerization and docking domain (DDD) sequence from the regulatory subunit of human cAMP-dependent protein kinase (PKA), such as human PKA RI ⁇ , RI ⁇ , RII ⁇ or RII ⁇ , and an anchor domain (AD) sequence from any of a variety of AKAP proteins.
  • DDD dimerization and docking domain
  • PKA human cAMP-dependent protein kinase
  • AD anchor domain
  • the DDD and AD peptides may be attached to any protein, peptide or other molecule.
  • the DNL technique allows the formation of complexes between any selected molecules that may be attached to DDD or AD sequences.
  • the standard DNL complex comprises a trimer with two DDD-linked molecules attached to one AD-linked molecule
  • variations in complex structure allow the formation of dimers, trimers, tetramers, pentamers, hexamers and other multimers.
  • the DNL complex may comprise two or more antibodies, antibody fragments or fusion proteins which bind to the same antigenic determinant or to two or more different antigens.
  • the DNL complex may also comprise one or more other effectors, such as a cytokine, toxin or PEG moiety.
  • the anti-CD22 antibody is an hLL2 antibody (also known as epratuzumab) that comprises the light chain CDR sequences CDR1 (KSSQSVLYSANHKYLA, SEQ ID NO:1), CDR2 (WASTRES, SEQ ID NO:2), and CDR3 (HQYLSSWTF, SEQ ID NO:3) and the heavy chain CDR sequences CDR1 (SYWLH, SEQ ID NO:4), CDR2 (YINPRNDYTEYNQNFKD, SEQ ID NO:5), and CDR3 (RDITTFY, SEQ ID NO:6).
  • hLL2 antibody also known as epratuzumab
  • a humanized LL2 anti-CD22 antibody suitable for use is disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 6,187,287, incorporated herein by reference from Col. 11, line 40 through Col. 20, line 38 and FIGS. 1 , 4 and 5 .
  • other known and/or commercially available anti-CD22 antibodies may be utilized, such as 1F5; HIB22 (ABBIOTEC®, San Diego, Calif.); FPC1, LT22, MEM-1, RFB4 (ABCAM®, Cambridge, Mass.); bu59, fpc1, mc64-12 (ABD SEROTEC®, Raleigh, N.C.); IS7 (ABNOVA®, Taipei City, Taiwan) and any other anti-CD22 antibody known in the art.
  • the anti-CD22 antibody may be selected such that it competes with or blocks binding to CD22 of an LL2 antibody comprising the light chain CDR sequences CDR1 (KSSQSVLYSANHKYLA, SEQ ID NO:1), CDR2 (WASTRES, SEQ ID NO:2), and CDR3 (HQYLSSWTF, SEQ ID NO:3) and the heavy chain CDR sequences CDR1 (SYWLH, SEQ ID NO:4), CDR2 (YINPRNDYTEYNQNFKD, SEQ ID NO:5), and CDR3 (RDITTFY, SEQ ID NO:6).
  • the anti-CD22 antibody may bind to the same epitope of CD22 as an LL2 antibody.
  • the anti-CD22 antibody may optionally be administered in combination with an anti-CD20 antibody or fragment thereof.
  • anti-CD20 antibodies are known in the art and any such known antibody or fragment thereof may be utilized.
  • the anti-CD20 antibody is an hA20 antibody (also known as veltuzumab) that comprises the light chain complementarity-determining region (CDR) sequences CDR1 (RASSSVSYIH; SEQ ID NO:7), CDR2 (ATSNLAS; SEQ ID NO:8), and CDR3 (QQWTSNPPT; SEQ ID NO:9) and the heavy chain variable region CDR sequences CDR1 (SYNMH; SEQ ID NO:10), CDR2 (AIYPGNGDTSYNQKFKG; SEQ ID NO:11), and CDR3 (STYYGGDWYFDV; SEQ ID NO:12).
  • CDR light chain complementarity-determining region
  • a humanized anti-CD20 antibody suitable for use is disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 7,435,803, incorporated herein by reference from Col. 36, line 4 through Col. 46, line 52 and FIGS. 1 , 2 , 4 , 5 and 7 .
  • anti-CD20 antibodies may be utilized, such as rituximab; ofatumumab; ibritumomab; tositumomab; ocrelizumab; GA101; BCX-301; DXL 625; L26, B-Ly1, MEM-97, LT20, 2H7, AT80, B-H20 (ABCAM®, Cambridge, Mass.); HI20a, HI47, 13.6E12 (ABBIOTEC®, San Diego, Calif.); 4f11, 5c11, 7d1 (ABD SEROTEC®, Raleigh, N.C.) and any other anti-CD20 antibody known in the art.
  • rituximab ofatumumab
  • ibritumomab tositumomab
  • ocrelizumab GA101
  • BCX-301 DXL 625; L26, B-Ly1, MEM-97, LT20, 2H7, AT80, B-H
  • the anti-CD20 antibody may be selected such that it competes with or blocks binding to CD20 of an hA20 antibody comprising the light chain complementarity-determining region (CDR) sequences CDR1 (RASSSVSYIH; SEQ ID NO:7), CDR2 (ATSNLAS; SEQ ID NO:8), and CDR3 (QQWTSNPPT; SEQ ID NO:9) and the heavy chain variable region CDR sequences CDR1 (SYNMH; SEQ ID NO:10), CDR2 (AIYPGNGDTSYNQKFKG; SEQ ID NO:11), and CDR3 (STYYGGDWYFDV; SEQ ID NO:12).
  • the anti-CD20 antibody may bind to the same epitope of CD20 as a hA20 antibody.
  • the anti-CD22 antibody may be conjugated to or separately administered with one or more therapeutic agents.
  • the therapeutic agent may be selected from the group consisting of aplidin, azaribine, anastrozole, azacytidine, bleomycin, bortezomib, bryostatin-1, busulfan, calicheamycin, camptothecin, 10-hydroxycamptothecin, carmustine, celebrex, chlorambucil, cisplatin, irinotecan (CPT-11), SN-38, carboplatin, cladribine, cyclophosphamide, cytarabine, dacarbazine, docetaxel, dactinomycin, daunomycin glucuronide, daunorubicin, dexamethasone, diethylstilbestrol, doxorubicin, doxorubicin glucuronide, epirubicin glucuronide, ethinyl estradiol,
  • the therapeutic agent may comprise a radionuclide selected from the group consisting of 103m Rh, 130 Ru, 105 Rh, 105 Ru, 107 Hg, 109 Pd, 109 Pt, 111 Ag, 111 In, 113m In, 119 Sb, 11 C, 121m Te, 122m Te, 125 I, 125m Te, 126 I, 131 I, 133 I, 13 N, 142 Pr, 143 Pr, 149 Pm, 152 Dy, 153 Sm, 15 O, 161 Ho, 161 Tb, 165 Tm, 166 Dy, 166 Ho, 167 Tm, 168 Tm, 169 Er, 169 Yb, 177 Lu, 186 Re, 188 Re, 189m Os, 189 Re, 192 Ir, 194 Ir, 197 Pt, 198 Au, 199 Au, 201 Tl, 203 Hg, 211 At, 211 Bi, 211 Pb, 212 Bi, 212 Pb, 213 Bi, 2
  • the therapeutic agent may be an enzyme selected from the group consisting of malate dehydrogenase, staphylococcal nuclease, delta-V-steroid isomerase, yeast alcohol dehydrogenase, alpha-glycerophosphate dehydrogenase, triose phosphate isomerase, horseradish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, asparaginase, glucose oxidase, beta-galactosidase, ribonuclease, urease, catalase, glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase, glucoamylase and acetylcholinesterase.
  • malate dehydrogenase staphylococcal nuclease
  • delta-V-steroid isomerase yeast alcohol dehydrogenase
  • alpha-glycerophosphate dehydrogenase alpha-glycerophosphate dehydrogenase
  • triose phosphate isomerase horseradish peroxida
  • the therapeutic agent may be an immunomodulator selected from the group consisting of a cytokine, a stem cell growth factor, a lymphotoxin, a hematopoietic factor, a colony stimulating factor (CSF), an interferon (IFN), erythropoietin, thrombopoietin and combinations thereof.
  • immunomodulators may include IL-1, IL-2, IL-3, IL-6, IL-10, IL-12, IL-18, IL-21, interferon- ⁇ , interferon- ⁇ , interferon- ⁇ , G-CSF, GM-CSF, and mixtures thereof.
  • the therapeutic agent may be an anti-angiogenic agent selected from the group consisting of angiostatin, endostatin, baculostatin, canstatin, maspin, anti-VEGF binding molecules, anti-placental growth factor binding molecules and anti-vascular growth factor binding molecules.
  • the anti-CD22 antibody or fragment may comprise one or more chelating moieties, such as NOTA, DOTA, DTPA, TETA, Tscg-Cys, or Tsca-Cys.
  • the chelating moiety may form a complex with a therapeutic or diagnostic cation, such as Group II, Group III, Group IV, Group V, transition, lanthanide or actinide metal cations, Tc, Re, Bi, Cu, As, Ag, Au, At, or Pb.
  • the anti-CD22 antibody or fragment thereof may be a human, chimeric, or humanized antibody or fragment thereof.
  • a humanized antibody or fragment thereof may comprise the complementarity-determining regions (CDRs) of a murine antibody and the constant and framework (FR) region sequences of a human antibody, which may be substituted with at least one amino acid from corresponding FRs of a murine antibody.
  • a chimeric antibody or fragment thereof may include the light and heavy chain variable regions of a murine antibody, attached to human antibody constant regions.
  • the antibody or fragment thereof may include human constant regions of IgG1, IgG2a, IgG3, or IgG4.
  • Exemplary known antibodies of use include, but are not limited to, hR1 (anti-IGF-1R), hPAM4 (anti-mucin), hA20 (anti-CD20), hA19 (anti-CD 19), hIMMU31 (anti-AFP), hLL1 (anti-CD74), hLL2 (anti-CD22), hMu-9 (anti-CSAp), hL243 (anti-HLA-DR), hMN-14 (anti-CEACAM5), hMN-15 (anti-CEACAM6), 29H2 (anti-CEACAM1, ABCAM®), hRS7 (anti-EGP-1) and hMN-3 (anti-CEACAM6).
  • hR1 anti-IGF-1R
  • hPAM4 anti-mucin
  • hA20 anti-CD20
  • hA19 anti-CD 19
  • hIMMU31 anti-AFP
  • hLL1 anti-CD74
  • hLL2 anti-CD22
  • antibodies or fragments of use may bind to one or more target antigens selected from the group consisting of carbonic anhydrase IX, alpha-fetoprotein, ⁇ -actinin-4, A3, antigen specific for A33 antibody, ART-4, B7, Ba 733, BAGE, BrE3-antigen, CA125, CAMEL, CAP-1, CASP-8/m, CCCL19, CCCL21, CD1, CD1a, CD2, CD3, CD4, CD5, CD8, CD11A, CD14, CD15, CD16, CD18, CD19, CD20, CD21, CD22, CD23, CD25, CD29, CD30, CD32b, CD33, CD37, CD38, CD40, CD40L, CD45, CD46, CD52, CD54, CD55, CD59, CD64, CD66a-e, CD67, CD70, CD74, CD79a, CD80, CD83, CD95, CD126, CD132, CD133, CD138, CD147, CD154
  • a method for treating and/or diagnosing a disease or disorder that includes administering to a patient a therapeutic and/or diagnostic composition that includes any of the aforementioned antibodies or immunoconjugates or fragments thereof.
  • the composition is administered to the patient intravenously, intramuscularly or subcutaneously at a dose of 20-5000 mg.
  • the disease or disorder is a B-cell lymphoma or leukemia, an immune dysregulation disease, an autoimmune disease, organ-graft rejection or graft-versus-host disease. More preferably, the disease is a B-cell lymphoma or leukemia.
  • Exemplary malignancies that may be treated using the claimed methods and compositions include, but are not limited to, indolent forms of B-cell lymphomas, aggressive forms of B-cell lymphomas, acute lymphocytic leukemia, chronic lymphocytic leukemia, Hodgkin's lymphoma, non-Hodgkin's lymphoma, mantle cell lymphoma, diffuse large B-cell lymphoma, follicular lymphoma, marginal zone lymphoma, Burkitt's lymphoma and multiple myeloma
  • Exemplary autoimmune diseases include acute immune thrombocytopenia, chronic immune thrombocytopenia, dermatomyositis, Sydenham's chorea, myasthenia gravis, systemic lupus erythematosus, lupus nephritis, rheumatic fever, polyglandular syndromes, bullous pemphigoid, pemphigus vulgaris, diabetes mellitus (e.g., juvenile diabetes), Henoch-Schonlein purpura, post-streptococcal nephritis, erythema nodosum, Takayasu's arteritis, Addison's disease, rheumatoid arthritis, multiple sclerosis, sarcoidosis, ulcerative colitis, erythema multiforme, IgA nephropathy, polyarteritis nodosa, ankylosing spondylitis, Goodpasture's syndrome, thromboang
  • FIG. 1 Preclinical in vivo therapy of athymic nude mice, bearing Capan 1 human pancreatic carcinoma, with MAb-CL2A-SN-38 conjugates.
  • FIG. 2 Preclinical in vivo therapy of athymic nude mice, bearing BxPC3 human pancreatic carcinoma, with MAb-CL2A-SN-38 conjugates.
  • FIG. 3 Preclinical in vivo therapy of athymic nude mice, bearing LS 174T human colon carcinoma, with hMN-14-CL2A-SN-38 conjugate.
  • FIG. 4 Epratuzumab-SN-38 in combination with veltuzumab for treatment of follicular B cell lymphoma (WSU-FSCCL) (Experiment A).
  • FIG. 5 Epratuzumab-SN-38 in combination with veltuzumab for treatment of follicular B cell lymphoma (WSU-FSCCL) (Experiment B).
  • FIG. 6 Epratuzumab-SN-38 used alone for treatment of 697 cell line (ALL).
  • FIG. 7 Dose-response data for epratuzumab-CL2A-SN38 vs. control MAb-CL2A-SN38 for SC Ramos lymphoma in nude mice.
  • an “antibody” refers to a full-length (i.e., naturally occurring or formed by normal immunoglobulin gene fragment recombinatorial processes) immunoglobulin molecule (e.g., an IgG antibody) or an immunologically active (i.e., antigen-binding) portion of an immunoglobulin molecule, like an antibody fragment.
  • an “antibody fragment” is a portion of an antibody such as F(ab′) 2 , F(ab) 2 , Fab′, Fab, Fv, scFv, single domain antibodies (DABs or VHHs) and the like, including half-molecules of IgG4 (van der Neut Kolfschoten et al. (Science 2007; 317(14 Sep.):1554-1557). Regardless of structure, an antibody fragment binds with the same antigen that is recognized by the intact antibody. For example, an anti-CD22 antibody fragment binds with an epitope of CD22.
  • antibody fragment also includes isolated fragments consisting of the variable regions, such as the “Fv” fragments consisting of the variable regions of the heavy and light chains and recombinant single chain polypeptide molecules in which light and heavy chain variable regions are connected by a peptide linker (“scFv proteins”).
  • scFv proteins peptide linker
  • antibody fragment does not include fragments such as Fc fragments that do not contain antigen-binding sites.
  • a “chimeric antibody” is a recombinant protein that contains the variable domains including the complementarity determining regions (CDRs) of an antibody derived from one species, preferably a rodent antibody, while the constant domains of the antibody molecule are derived from those of a human antibody.
  • the constant domains of the chimeric antibody may be derived from that of other species, such as a cat or dog.
  • a “humanized antibody” is a recombinant protein in which the CDRs from an antibody from one species; e.g., a rodent antibody, are transferred from the heavy and light variable chains of the rodent antibody into human heavy and light variable domains. Additional FR amino acid substitutions from the parent, e.g. murine, antibody may be made. The constant domains of the antibody molecule are derived from those of a human antibody.
  • a “human antibody” is, for example, an antibody obtained from transgenic mice that have been genetically engineered to produce human antibodies in response to antigenic challenge.
  • elements of the human heavy and light chain locus are introduced into strains of mice derived from embryonic stem cell lines that contain targeted disruptions of the endogenous heavy chain and light chain loci.
  • the transgenic mice can synthesize human antibodies specific for human antigens, and the mice can be used to produce human antibody-secreting hybridomas. Methods for obtaining human antibodies from transgenic mice are described by Green et al., Nature Genet. 7:13 (1994), Lonberg et al., Nature 368:856 (1994), and Taylor et al., Int. Immun. 6:579 (1994).
  • a fully human antibody also can be constructed by genetic or chromosomal transfection methods, as well as phage display technology, all of which are known in the art. (See, e.g., McCafferty et al., Nature 348:552-553 (1990) for the production of human antibodies and fragments thereof in vitro, from immunoglobulin variable domain gene repertoires from unimmunized donors).
  • antibody variable domain genes are cloned in-frame into either a major or minor coat protein gene of a filamentous bacteriophage, and displayed as functional antibody fragments on the surface of the phage particle.
  • the filamentous particle contains a single-stranded DNA copy of the phage genome, selections based on the functional properties of the antibody also result in selection of the gene encoding the antibody exhibiting those properties. In this way, the phage mimics some of the properties of the B cell.
  • Phage display can be performed in a variety of formats, for their review, see, e.g. Johnson and Chiswell, Current Opinion in Structural Biology 3:5564-571 (1993). Human antibodies may also be generated by in vitro activated B cells. (See, U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,567,610 and 5,229,275).
  • a “therapeutic agent” is an atom, molecule, or compound that is useful in the treatment of a disease.
  • therapeutic agents include but are not limited to antibodies, antibody fragments, drugs, toxins, enzymes, nucleases, hormones, immunomodulators, antisense oligonucleotides, chelators, boron compounds, photoactive agents, dyes and radioisotopes.
  • a “diagnostic agent” is an atom, molecule, or compound that is useful in diagnosing a disease.
  • useful diagnostic agents include, but are not limited to, radioisotopes, dyes, contrast agents, fluorescent compounds or molecules and enhancing agents (e.g., paramagnetic ions).
  • the diagnostic agents are selected from the group consisting of radioisotopes, enhancing agents, and fluorescent compounds.
  • an “immunoconjugate” is a conjugate of an antibody, antibody fragment, antibody fusion protein, bispecific antibody or multispecific antibody with an atom, molecule, or a higher-ordered structure (e.g., with a carrier, a therapeutic agent, or a diagnostic agent).
  • a “naked antibody” is an antibody that is not conjugated to any other agent.
  • antibody fusion protein is a recombinantly produced antigen-binding molecule in which an antibody or antibody fragment is covalently linked to another protein or peptide, such as the same or different antibody or antibody fragment or a DDD or AD peptide.
  • the fusion protein may comprise a single antibody component, a multivalent or multispecific combination of different antibody components or multiple copies of the same antibody component.
  • the fusion protein may additionally comprise an antibody or an antibody fragment and a therapeutic agent. Examples of therapeutic agents suitable for such fusion proteins include immunomodulators and toxins.
  • One preferred toxin comprises a ribonuclease (RNase), preferably a recombinant RNase.
  • a “multispecific antibody” is an antibody that can bind simultaneously to at least two targets that are of different structure, e.g., two different antigens, two different epitopes on the same antigen, or a hapten and/or an antigen or epitope.
  • a “multivalent antibody” is an antibody that can bind simultaneously to at least two targets that are of the same or different structure. Valency indicates how many binding arms or sites the antibody has to a single antigen or epitope; i.e., monovalent, bivalent, trivalent or multivalent. The multivalency of the antibody means that it can take advantage of multiple interactions in binding to an antigen, thus increasing the avidity of binding to the antigen.
  • Specificity indicates how many antigens or epitopes an antibody is able to bind; i.e., monospecific, bispecific, trispecific, multispecific.
  • a natural antibody e.g., an IgG
  • Multispecific, multivalent antibodies are constructs that have more than one binding site of different specificity. For example, a diabody, where one binding site reacts with one antigen and the other with another antigen.
  • a “bispecific antibody” is an antibody that can bind simultaneously to two targets which are of different structure.
  • CPT is an abbreviation for camptothecin, and represents camptothecin itself or an analog or derivative of camptothecin.
  • the structures of camptothecin and some of its analogs, with the numbering indicated and the rings labeled with letters A-E, are given in formula 1 in Chart 1 below.
  • Solubility of the drug may be enhanced by placing a defined polyethyleneglycol (PEG) moiety (i.e., a PEG containing a defined number of monomeric units) between the drug and the targeting vector, wherein the defined PEG is a low molecular weight PEG, preferably containing 1-30 monomeric units, more preferably containing 1-12 monomeric units.
  • PEG polyethyleneglycol
  • a first linker connects the drug at one end and terminates with an acetylene or an azide group at the other end.
  • This first linker comprises a defined PEG moiety with an azide or acetylene group at one end and a different reactive group, such as carboxylic acid or hydroxyl group, at the other end.
  • Said bifunctional defined PEG is attached to the amine group of an amino alcohol, and the hydroxyl group of the latter is attached to the hydroxyl group on the drug in the form of a carbonate.
  • the non-azide (or acetylene) moiety of said defined bifunctional PEG is attached to the N-terminus of an L-amino acid or a polypeptide, with the C-terminus attached to the amino group of amino alcohol, and the hydroxy group of the latter is attached to the hydroxyl group of the drug in the form of carbonate or carbamate, respectively.
  • a second linker comprising an antibody-coupling group and a reactive group complementary to the azide (or acetylene) group of the first linker, namely acetylene (or azide), reacts with the drug-(first linker) conjugate via acetylene-azide cycloaddition reaction to furnish the final bifunctional drug product that is useful for conjugating to the disease-targeting antibodies.
  • the antibody-coupling group is designed to be either a thiol or a thiol-reactive group.
  • Methods are devised for selective regeneration of the 10-hydroxyl group in the presence of the C-20 carbonate in preparations of drug-linker precursor involving CPT analogs such as SN-38.
  • the azide part may be on L2 with the acetylene part on L3.
  • L2 may contain acetylene, with L3 containing azide.
  • Click chemistry is a copper (+1)-catalyzed cycloaddition reaction between an acetylene moiety and an azide moiety, and is a relatively recent technique in bioconjugation (Kolb HC and Sharpless KB, Drug Discov Today 2003; 8: 1128-37). Alternative methods of copper-free click chemistry are described below. Click chemistry takes place in aqueous solution at near-neutral pH conditions, and is thus amenable for drug conjugation.
  • click chemistry is that it is chemoselective, and complements other well-known conjugation chemistries such as the thiol-maleimide reaction.
  • a conjugate comprises an antibody or antibody fragment
  • another type of binding moiety such as an aptamer, avimer or targeting peptide, may be substituted.
  • An exemplary preferred embodiment is directed to a conjugate of a drug derivative and an antibody of the general formula 2,
  • MAb is a disease-targeting antibody, such as an anti-CD22 antibody
  • L2 is a component of the cross-linker comprising an antibody-coupling moiety and one or more of acetylene (or azide) groups
  • L1 comprises a defined PEG with azide (or acetylene) at one end, complementary to the acetylene (or azide) moiety in L2, and a reactive group such as carboxylic acid or hydroxyl group at the other end
  • AA is an L-amino acid
  • m is an integer with values of 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4
  • A′ is an additional spacer, selected from the group of ethanolamine, 4-hydroxybenzyl alcohol, 4-aminobenzyl alcohol, or substituted or unsubstituted ethylenediamine.
  • the L amino acids of ‘AA’ are selected from alanine, arginine, asparagine, aspartic acid, cysteine, glutamine, glutamic acid, glycine, histidine, isoleucine, leucine, lysine, methionine, phenylalanine, proline, serine, threonine, tryptophan, tyrosine, and valine. If the A′ group contains a hydroxyl, it is linked to the hydroxyl group or amino group of the drug in the form of a carbonate or carbamate, respectively.
  • A′ is a substituted ethanolamine derived from an L-amino acid, wherein the carboxylic acid group of the amino acid is replaced by a hydroxymethyl moiety.
  • A′ may be derived from any one of the following L-amino acids: alanine, arginine, asparagine, aspartic acid, cysteine, glutamine, glutamic acid, glycine, histidine, isoleucine, leucine, lysine, methionine, phenylalanine, proline, serine, threonine, tryptophan, tyrosine, and valine.
  • m is 1 and represented by a derivatized L-lysine, A′ is L-valinol, and the drug is exemplified by SN-38.
  • the structure is shown in formula 4.
  • an amide bond is first formed between the carboxylic acid of an amino acid such as lysine and the amino group of valinol, using orthogonal protecting groups for the lysine amino groups.
  • the protecting group on the N-terminus of lysine is removed, keeping the protecting group on the side chain of lysine intact, and the N-terminus is coupled to the carboxyl group on the defined PEG with azide (or acetylene) at the other end.
  • the small MW SN-38 product namely valinol-SN-38 carbonate, generated after intracellular proteolysis, has the additional pathway of liberation of intact SN-38 through intramolecular cyclization involving the amino group of valinol and the carbonyl of the carbonate.
  • A′ of the general formula 2 is A-OH, whereby A-OH is a collapsible moiety such as 4-aminobenzyl alcohol or a substituted 4-aminobenzyl alcohol substituted with a C 1 -C 10 alkyl group at the benzylic position, and the latter, via its amino group, is attached to an L-amino acid or a polypeptide comprising up to four L-amino acid moieties; wherein the N-terminus is attached to a cross-linker terminating in the antibody-binding group.
  • A-OH is a collapsible moiety such as 4-aminobenzyl alcohol or a substituted 4-aminobenzyl alcohol substituted with a C 1 -C 10 alkyl group at the benzylic position, and the latter, via its amino group, is attached to an L-amino acid or a polypeptide comprising up to four L-amino acid moieties; wherein the N-terminus is attached to a cross-
  • the structure is represented below (formula 5, referred to as MAb-CLX-SN-38).
  • the single amino acid AA is selected from any one of the following L-amino acids: alanine, arginine, asparagine, aspartic acid, cysteine, glutamine, glutamic acid, glycine, histidine, isoleucine, leucine, lysine, methionine, phenylalanine, proline, serine, threonine, tryptophan, tyrosine, and valine.
  • the substituent R on 4-aminobenzyl alcohol moiety is hydrogen or an alkyl group selected from C1-C10 alkyl groups.
  • A′ is a substituted ethylenediamine.
  • AA comprises a polypeptide moiety, preferably a di, tri or tetrapeptide, that is cleavable by intracellular peptidase.
  • polypeptide moiety preferably a di, tri or tetrapeptide, that is cleavable by intracellular peptidase. Examples are: Ala-Leu, Leu-Ala-Leu, and Ala-Leu-Ala-Leu (SEQ ID NO:13) (Trouet et al., 1982).
  • the L1 component of the conjugate contains a defined polyethyleneglycol (PEG) spacer with 1-30 repeating monomeric units.
  • PEG polyethyleneglycol
  • PEG is a defined PEG with 1-12 repeating monomeric units.
  • the introduction of PEG may involve using heterobifunctionalized PEG derivatives which are available commercially.
  • the heterobifunctional PEG may contain an azide or acetylene group.
  • An example of a heterobifunctional defined PEG containing 8 repeating monomeric units, with ‘NHS’ being succinimidyl, is given below in formula 8:
  • L2 has a plurality of acetylene (or azide) groups, ranging from 2-40, but preferably 2-20, and more preferably 2-5, and a single targeting vector-binding moiety.
  • a representative SN-38 conjugate of an antibody containing multiple drug molecules and a single targeting vector-binding moiety is shown below.
  • the 12′ component of this structure is appended to 2 acetylenic groups, resulting in the attachment of two azide-appended SN-38 molecules.
  • the bonding to MAb is represented as a succinimide.
  • the thiols on the antibody are generated on the lysine groups of the antibody using a thiolating reagent.
  • Methods for introducing thiol groups onto antibodies by modifications of MAb's lysine groups are well known in the art (Wong in Chemistry of protein conjugation and cross - linking , CRC Press, Inc., Boca Raton, Fla. (1991), pp 20-22).
  • mild reduction of interchain disulfide bonds on the antibody (Willner et al., Bioconjugate Chem.
  • DTT dithiothreitol
  • the chemotherapeutic moiety is selected from the group consisting of doxorubicin (DOX), epirubicin, morpholinodoxorubicin (morpholino-DOX), cyanomorpholino-doxorubicin (cyanomorpholino-DOX), 2-pyrrolino-doxorubicin (2-PDOX), CPT, 10-hydroxy camptothecin, SN-38, topotecan, lurtotecan, 9-aminocamptothecin, 9-nitrocamptothecin, taxanes, geldanamycin, ansamycins, and epothilones.
  • the chemotherapeutic moiety is SN-38.
  • the antibody links to at least one chemotherapeutic moiety; preferably 1 to about 12 chemotherapeutic moieties; most preferably about 6 to about 12 chemotherapeutic moieties.
  • the linker component 12′ comprises a thiol group that reacts with a thiol-reactive residue introduced at one or more lysine side chain amino groups of said antibody.
  • the antibody is pre-derivatized with a thiol-reactive group such as a maleimide, vinylsulfone, bromoacetamide, or iodoacetamide by procedures well described in the art.
  • CPT drug-linkers can be prepared wherein CPT additionally has a 10-hydroxyl group.
  • This process involves, but is not limited to, the protection of the 10-hydroxyl group as a t-butyloxycarbonyl (BOC) derivative, followed by the preparation of the penultimate intermediate of the drug-linker conjugate.
  • BOC t-butyloxycarbonyl
  • removal of BOC group requires treatment with strong acid such as trifluoroacetic acid (TFA).
  • TFA trifluoroacetic acid
  • the CPT 20-O-linker carbonate, containing protecting groups to be removed is also susceptible to cleavage, thereby giving rise to unmodified CPT.
  • An alternative approach involves protecting the CPT analog's 10-hydroxy position with a group other than ‘BOC’, such that the final product is ready for conjugation to antibodies without a need for deprotecting the 10-OH protecting group.
  • the 10-hydroxy protecting group which converts the 10-OH into a phenolic carbonate or a phenolic ester, is readily deprotected by physiological pH conditions or by esterases after in vivo administration of the conjugate.
  • the faster removal of a phenolic carbonate at the 10 position vs. a tertiary carbonate at the 20 position of 10-hydroxycamptothecin under physiological condition has been described by He et al. (He et al., Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry 12: 4003-4008 (2004)).
  • a 10-hydroxy protecting group on SN-38 can be TOR′ where R can be a substituted alkyl such as “N(CH 3 ) 2 —(CH 2 ) n —” where n is 1-10 and wherein the terminal amino group is optionally in the form of a quaternary salt for enhanced aqueous solubility, or a simple alkyl residue such as “CH 3 —(CH 2 ) n —” where n is 0-10, or it can be an alkoxy moiety such as “CH 3 —(CH 2 )n-O—” where n is 0-10, or “N(CH 3 ) 2 —(CH 2 ) n —O—” where n is 2-10, or “R 1 O—(CH 2 —CH 2 —O) n —CH 2 —CH 2 —O—” where R 1 is ethyl or methyl and n is an integer with values of 0-10.
  • 10-hydroxy derivatives are readily prepared by treatment with the chloroformate of the chosen reagent, if the final derivative is to be a carbonate.
  • the 10-hydroxy-containing camptothecin such as SN-38 is treated with a molar equivalent of the chloroformate in dimethylformamide using triethylamine as the base. Under these conditions, the 20-OH position is unaffected.
  • the acid chloride of the chosen reagent is used.
  • the cross-linker, [L1]-[AA] m [A-OH], is attached to drug's hydroxyl or amino group, and this is followed by attachment to the L1 moiety, by taking recourse to the reaction between azide (or acetylene) and acetylene (or azide) groups in L1 and L2 via click chemistry.
  • the purified conjugate is contained in the pH range of 5.5 to 7.5 in any of the following Good's biological buffers derived from: 2-(N-morpholino)ethanesulfonic acid (MES), N-(2-acetamido)-2-iminodiacetic acid (ADA), 1,4-piperazinediethanesulfonic acid (PIPES), N-(2-acetamido)-2-aminoethanesulfonic acid (ACES), N,N-bis(2-hydroxyethyl)-2-aminoethanesulfonic acid (BES), N-tris(hydroxymethyl)methyl-2-aminoethanesulfonic acid (TES), and N-(2-hydroxyethyl)piperazine-N′-(2-ethanesulfonic acid) or HEP
  • MES 2-(N-morpholino)ethanesulfonic acid
  • ADA N-(2-acetamido)-2-iminodiacetic acid
  • PPES 1,4
  • the most preferred buffer is 25 mM MES, pH 6.5.
  • the conjugate solution is formulated with excipients such as trehalose and polysorbate 80 and lyophilized, and the lyophilized preparations are preferably stored at 2-8 deg.
  • the antibody is a monoclonal antibody (MAb).
  • the antibody may be a multivalent and/or multispecific MAb.
  • the antibody may be a murine, chimeric, humanized, or human monoclonal antibody, and said antibody may be in intact, fragment (Fab, Fab′, F(ab) 2 , F(ab′) 2 ), or sub-fragment (single-chain constructs) form, or of an IgG1, IgG2a, IgG3, IgG4, IgA isotype, or submolecules therefrom.
  • the intracellularly-cleavable moiety may be cleaved after it is internalized into the cell upon binding by the MAb-drug conjugate to a receptor thereof, and particularly cleaved by esterases and peptidases.
  • the complexes described herein may comprise one or more monoclonal antibodies or fragments thereof.
  • Rodent monoclonal antibodies to specific antigens may be obtained by methods known to those skilled in the art. (See, e.g., Kohler and Milstein, Nature 256: 495 (1975), and Coligan et al. (eds.), CURRENT PROTOCOLS IN IMMUNOLOGY, VOL. 1, pages 2.5.1-2.6.7 (John Wiley & Sons 1991)).
  • This publication also provides the nucleotide sequences of the LL2 light and heavy chain variable regions, V k and V H , respectively.
  • Techniques for producing humanized antibodies are disclosed, for example, by Jones et al., Nature 321: 522 (1986), Riechmann et al., Nature 332: 323 (1988), Verhoeyen et al., Science 239: 1534 (1988), Carter et al., Proc. Nat'l Acad. Sci. USA 89: 4285 (1992), Sandhu, Crit. Rev. Biotech. 12: 437 (1992), and Singer et al., J. Immun. 150: 2844 (1993).
  • a chimeric antibody is a recombinant protein that contains the variable domains including the CDRs derived from one species of animal, such as a rodent antibody, while the remainder of the antibody molecule; i.e., the constant domains, is derived from a human antibody. Accordingly, a chimeric monoclonal antibody can also be humanized by replacing the sequences of the murine FR in the variable domains of the chimeric antibody with one or more different human FR. Specifically, mouse CDRs are transferred from heavy and light variable chains of the mouse immunoglobulin into the corresponding variable domains of a human antibody.
  • a fully human antibody can be obtained from a transgenic non-human animal.
  • Methods for producing fully human antibodies using either combinatorial approaches or transgenic animals transformed with human immunoglobulin loci are known in the art (e.g., Mancini et al., 2004 , New Microbiol. 27:315-28; Conrad and Scheller, 2005 , Comb. Chem. High Throughput Screen. 8:117-26; Brekke and Loset, 2003 , Curr. Opin. Pharmacol. 3:544-50).
  • Such fully human antibodies are expected to exhibit even fewer side effects than chimeric or humanized antibodies and to function in vivo as essentially endogenous human antibodies.
  • the claimed methods and procedures may utilize human antibodies produced by such techniques.
  • the phage display technique may be used to generate human antibodies (e.g., Dantas-Barbosa et al., 2005 , Genet. Mol. Res. 4:126-40).
  • Human antibodies may be generated from normal humans or from humans that exhibit a particular disease state, such as a hematopoietic cancer (Dantas-Barbosa et al., 2005).
  • the advantage to constructing human antibodies from a diseased individual is that the circulating antibody repertoire may be biased towards antibodies against disease-associated antigens.
  • RNAs were converted to cDNAs and used to make Fab cDNA libraries using specific primers against the heavy and light chain immunoglobulin sequences (Marks et al., 1991 , J. Mol. Biol. 222:581-97).
  • transgenic animals that have been genetically engineered to produce human antibodies may be used to generate antibodies against essentially any immunogenic target, using standard immunization protocols as discussed above.
  • Methods for obtaining human antibodies from transgenic mice are described by Green et al., Nature Genet. 7:13 (1994), Lonberg et al., Nature 368:856 (1994), and Taylor et al., Int. Immun. 6:579 (1994).
  • a non-limiting example of such a system is the XENOMOUSE® (e.g., Green et al., 1999 , J. Immunol. Methods 231:11-23) from Abgenix (Fremont, Calif.).
  • the mouse antibody genes have been inactivated and replaced by functional human antibody genes, while the remainder of the mouse immune system remains intact.
  • the XENOMOUSE® was transformed with germline-configured YACs (yeast artificial chromosomes) that contained portions of the human IgH and Ig kappa loci, including the majority of the variable region sequences, along accessory genes and regulatory sequences.
  • the human variable region repertoire may be used to generate antibody producing B cells, which may be processed into hybridomas by known techniques.
  • a XENOMOUSE® immunized with a target antigen will produce human antibodies by the normal immune response, which may be harvested and/or produced by standard techniques discussed above.
  • a variety of strains of XENOMOUSE® are available, each of which is capable of producing a different class of antibody.
  • Transgenically produced human antibodies have been shown to have therapeutic potential, while retaining the pharmacokinetic properties of normal human antibodies (Green et al., 1999).
  • the skilled artisan will realize that the claimed compositions and methods are not limited to use of the XENOMOUSE® system but may utilize any transgenic animal that has been genetically engineered to produce human antibodies.
  • the V genes of an antibody from a cell that expresses a murine antibody can be cloned by PCR amplification and sequenced.
  • the cloned V L and V H genes can be expressed in cell culture as a chimeric Ab as described by Orlandi et al., ( Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., USA, 86: 3833 (1989)).
  • a humanized antibody can then be designed and constructed as described by Leung et al. ( Mol. Immunol., 32: 1413 (1995)).
  • cDNA can be prepared from any known hybridoma line or transfected cell line producing a murine antibody by general molecular cloning techniques (Sambrook et al., Molecular Cloning, A laboratory manual, 2 nd Ed (1989)).
  • the V ⁇ sequence for the antibody may be amplified using the primers VK1BACK and VK1FOR (Orlandi et al., 1989) or the extended primer set described by Leung et al. (BioTechniques, 15: 286 (1993)).
  • V H sequences can be amplified using the primer pair VH1BACK/VH1FOR (Orlandi et al., 1989) or the primers annealing to the constant region of murine IgG described by Leung et al. (Hybridoma, 13:469 (1994)).
  • Humanized V genes can be constructed by a combination of long oligonucleotide template syntheses and PCR amplification as described by Leung et al. ( Mol. Immunol., 32: 1413 (1995)).
  • PCR products for V ⁇ can be subcloned into a staging vector, such as a pBR327-based staging vector, VKpBR, that contains an Ig promoter, a signal peptide sequence and convenient restriction sites.
  • PCR products for V H can be subcloned into a similar staging vector, such as the pBluescript-based VHpBS.
  • Expression cassettes containing the V ⁇ and V H sequences together with the promoter and signal peptide sequences can be excised from VKpBR and VHpBS and ligated into appropriate expression vectors, such as pKh and pG1g, respectively (Leung et al., Hybridoma, 13:469 (1994)).
  • the expression vectors can be co-transfected into an appropriate cell and supernatant fluids monitored for production of a chimeric, humanized or human antibody.
  • the V ⁇ and V H expression cassettes can be excised and subcloned into a single expression vector, such as pdHL2, as described by Gillies et al. ( J. Immunol. Methods 125:191 (1989) and also shown in Losman et al., Cancer, 80:2660 (1997)).
  • expression vectors may be transfected into host cells that have been pre-adapted for transfection, growth and expression in serum-free medium.
  • Exemplary cell lines that may be used include the Sp/EEE, Sp/ESF and Sp/ESF-X cell lines (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,531,327; 7,537,930 and 7,608,425; the Examples section of each of which is incorporated herein by reference). These exemplary cell lines are based on the Sp2/0 myeloma cell line, transfected with a mutant Bcl-EEE gene, exposed to methotrexate to amplify transfected gene sequences and pre-adapted to serum-free cell line for protein expression.
  • Immunogenicity of therapeutic antibodies is associated with increased risk of infusion reactions and decreased duration of therapeutic response (Baert et al., 2003, N Engl J Med 348:602-08).
  • the extent to which therapeutic antibodies induce an immune response in the host may be determined in part by the allotype of the antibody (Stickler et al., 2011, Genes and Immunity 12:213-21).
  • Antibody allotype is related to amino acid sequence variations at specific locations in the constant region sequences of the antibody.
  • the allotypes of IgG antibodies containing a heavy chain ⁇ -type constant region are designated as Gm allotypes (1976, J Immunol 117:1056-59).
  • G1m1 For the common IgG1 human antibodies, the most prevalent allotype is G1m1 (Stickler et al., 2011, Genes and Immunity 12:213-21). However, the G1m3 allotype also occurs frequently in Caucasians (Id.). It has been reported that G1m1 antibodies contain allotypic sequences that tend to induce an immune response when administered to non-G1m1 (nG1m1) recipients, such as G1m3 patients (Id.). Non-G1m1 allotype antibodies are not as immunogenic when administered to G1m1 patients (Id.).
  • the human G1m1 allotype comprises the amino acids D12 (Kabat position 356) and L14 (Kabat position 358) in the CH3 sequence of the heavy chain IgG1.
  • the nG1m1 allotype comprises the amino acids E12 and M14 at the same locations.
  • Both G1m1 and nG1m1 allotypes comprise an E13 residue in between the two variable sites and the allotypes are sometimes referred to as DEL and EEM allotypes.
  • a non-limiting example of the heavy chain constant region sequence for an nG1m1 (G1m3) allotype antibody is shown in Example 1 below for the exemplary antibody veltuzumab (SEQ ID NO:14).
  • veltuzumab (G1m3) and rituximab (G1m17,1) are, respectively, humanized and chimeric IgG1 antibodies against CD20, of use for therapy of a wide variety of hematological malignancies and/or autoimmune diseases.
  • Table 1 compares the allotype sequences of the heavy chain constant region sequences of rituximab vs. veltuzumab. The light chain constant region sequences of the two antibodies are identical.
  • rituximab (G1m17,1) is a DEL allotype IgG1, with an additional sequence variation at Kabat position 214 (heavy chain CH1) of lysine in rituximab vs. arginine in veltuzumab. It has been reported that veltuzumab is less immunogenic in subjects than rituximab (see, e.g., Morchhauser et al., 2009, J Clin Oncol 27:3346-53; Goldenberg et al., 2009, Blood 113:1062-70; Robak & Robak, 2011, BioDrugs 25:13-25), an effect that has been attributed to the difference between humanized and chimeric antibodies. However, the difference in allotypes between the EEM and DEL allotypes likely also accounts for the lower immunogenicity of veltuzumab.
  • the allotype of the antibody In order to reduce the immunogenicity of therapeutic antibodies in individuals of nG1m1 genotype, it is desirable to select the allotype of the antibody to correspond to the EEM allotype, with a glutamate residue at Kabat position 356, a methionine at Kabat position 358, and preferably an arginine residue at Kabat position 214. Surprisingly, it was found that repeated subcutaneous administration of G1m3 antibodies over a long period of time did not result in a significant immune response.
  • the claimed methods and compositions may utilize any of a variety of antibodies known in the art.
  • Antibodies of use may be commercially obtained from a number of known sources.
  • a variety of antibody secreting hybridoma lines are available from the American Type Culture Collection (ATCC, Manassas, Va.).
  • ATCC American Type Culture Collection
  • a large number of antibodies against various disease targets have been deposited at the ATCC and/or have published variable region sequences and are available for use in the claimed methods and compositions. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos.
  • antibody sequences or antibody-secreting hybridomas against almost any disease-associated antigen may be obtained by a simple search of the ATCC, NCBI and/or USPTO databases for antibodies against a selected disease-associated target of interest.
  • the antigen binding domains of the cloned antibodies may be amplified, excised, ligated into an expression vector, transfected into an adapted host cell and used for protein production, using standard techniques well known in the art.
  • Exemplary known antibodies that may be of use for therapy of cancer or autoimmune disease within the scope of the claimed methods and compositions include, but are not limited to, LL1 (anti-CD74), LL2 and RFB4 (anti-CD22), RS7 (anti-epithelial glycoprotein-1 (EGP-1)), PAM4 and KC4 (both anti-mucin), MN-14 (anti-carcinoembryonic antigen (CEA or CEACAM5, also known as CD66e)), Mu-9 (anti-colon-specific antigen-p), Immu-31 (an anti-alpha-fetoprotein), TAG-72 (e.g., CC49), Tn, J591 or HuJ591 (anti-PSMA (prostate-specific membrane antigen)), AB-PG1-XG1-026 (anti-PSMA dimer), D2/B (anti-PSMA), G250 (an anti-carbonic anhydrase IX MAb), hL243 (anti-HLA-DR), R1 (anti-
  • hPAM4 U.S. Pat. No. 7,282,567
  • hA20 U.S. Pat. No. 7,251,164
  • hA19 U.S. Pat. No. 7,109,304
  • hIMMU31 U.S. Pat. No. 7,300,655
  • hLL1 U.S. Pat. No. 7,312,318,
  • hLL2 U.S. Pat. No. 7,074,403
  • hMu-9 U.S. Pat. No. 7,387,773
  • hL243 U.S. Pat. No. 7,612,180
  • hMN-14 U.S. Pat. No.
  • Anti-TNF- ⁇ antibodies are known in the art and may be of use to treat immune diseases, such as autoimmune disease, immune dysfunction (e.g., graft-versus-host disease, organ transplant rejection) or diabetes.
  • Known antibodies against TNF- ⁇ include the human antibody CDP571 (Ofei et al., 2011, Diabetes 45:881-85); murine antibodies MTNFAI, M2TNFAI, M3TNFAI, M3TNFABI, M302B and M303 (Thermo Scientific, Rockford, Ill.); infliximab (Centocor, Malvern, Pa.); certolizumab pegol (UCB, Brussels, Belgium); and adalimumab (Abbott, Abbott Park, Ill.).
  • anti-B-cell antibodies such as veltuzumab, epratuzumab, milatuzumab or hL243; tocilizumab (anti-IL-6 receptor); basiliximab (anti-CD25); daclizumab (anti-CD25); efalizumab (anti-CD11a); GA101 (anti-CD20; Glycart Roche); muromonab-CD3 (anti-CD3 receptor); Benlysta (Human Genome Sciences); anti-CD40L (UCB, Brussels, Belgium); natalizumab (anti- ⁇ 4 integrin) and omalizumab (anti-IgE).
  • anti-B-cell antibodies such as veltuzumab, epratuzumab, milatuzumab or hL243; tocilizumab (anti-IL-6 receptor); basiliximab (anti-CD25); daclizumab (anti-CD25); efalizumab (anti-CD11a);
  • Type-1 and Type-2 diabetes may be treated using known antibodies against B-cell antigens, such as CD22 (epratuzumab), CD74 (milatuzumab), CD19 (hA19), CD20 (veltuzumab) or HLA-DR (hL243) (see, e.g., Winer et al., 2011, Nature Med 17:610-18).
  • Anti-CD3 antibodies also have been proposed for therapy of type 1 diabetes (Cernea et al., 2010, Diabetes Metab Rev 26:602-05).
  • Macrophage migration inhibitory factor is an important regulator of innate and adaptive immunity and apoptosis. It has been reported that CD74 is the endogenous receptor for MIF (Leng et al., 2003, J Exp Med 197:1467-76).
  • the therapeutic effect of antagonistic anti-CD74 antibodies on MIF-mediated intracellular pathways may be of use for treatment of a broad range of disease states, such as cancers of the bladder, prostate, breast, lung, colon and chronic lymphocytic leukemia (e.g., Meyer-Siegler et al., 2004, BMC Cancer 12:34; Shachar & Haran, 2011, Leuk Lymphoma 52:1446-54); autoimmune diseases such as rheumatoid arthritis and systemic lupus erythematosus (Morand & Leech, 2005, Front Biosci 10:12-22; Shachar & Haran, 2011, Leuk Lymphoma 52:1446-54); kidney diseases such as renal allograft rejection (Lan, 2008, Nephron Exp Nephrol.
  • a broad range of disease states such as cancers of the bladder, prostate, breast, lung, colon and chronic lymphocytic leukemia (e.g., Meyer-Siegler et al., 2004, BMC Cancer 12
  • Antibody fragments which recognize specific epitopes can be generated by known techniques.
  • the antibody fragments are antigen binding portions of an antibody, such as F(ab) 2 , Fab′, Fab, Fv, scFv and the like.
  • Other antibody fragments include, but are not limited to, F(ab′) 2 fragments which can be produced by pepsin digestion of the antibody molecule and Fab′ fragments which can be generated by reducing disulfide bridges of the F(ab′) 2 fragments.
  • Fab′ expression libraries can be constructed (Huse et al., 1989, Science, 246:1274-1281) to allow rapid and easy identification of monoclonal Fab′ fragments with the desired specificity.
  • a single chain Fv molecule comprises a VL domain and a VH domain.
  • the VL and VH domains associate to form a target binding site.
  • These two domains are further covalently linked by a peptide linker (L).
  • L peptide linker
  • An antibody fragment can be prepared by known methods, for example, as disclosed by Goldenberg, U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,036,945 and 4,331,647 and references contained therein. Also, see Nisonoff et al., Arch Biochem. Biophys. 89: 230 (1960); Porter, Biochem. J. 73: 119 (1959), Edelman et al., in METHODS IN ENZYMOLOGY VOL. 1, page 422 (Academic Press 1967), and Coligan at pages 2.8.1-2.8.10 and 2.10.-2.10.4.
  • a single complementarity-determining region is a segment of the variable region of an antibody that is complementary in structure to the epitope to which the antibody binds and is more variable than the rest of the variable region. Accordingly, a CDR is sometimes referred to as hypervariable region.
  • a variable region comprises three CDRs.
  • CDR peptides can be obtained by constructing genes encoding the CDR of an antibody of interest. Such genes are prepared, for example, by using the polymerase chain reaction to synthesize the variable region from RNA of antibody-producing cells.
  • dAb single-domain antibody
  • Techniques for producing single-domain antibodies are well known in the art (see, e.g., Cossins et al., Protein Expression and Purification, 2007, 51:253-59; Shuntao et al., Molec Immunol 2006, 43:1912-19; Tanha et al., J. Biol. Chem. 2001, 276:24774-780).
  • Single domain antibodies may be obtained, for example, from camels, alpacas or llamas by standard immunization techniques.
  • Alpacas may be immunized with known antigens, such as TNF- ⁇ , and single domain antibodies can be isolated that bind to and neutralize the target antigen (Maass et al., 2007).
  • PCR primers that amplify virtually all alpaca antibody coding sequences have been identified and may be used to construct single domain phage display libraries, which can be used for antibody fragment isolation by standard biopanning techniques well known in the art (Maass et al., 2007).
  • the sequences of antibodies or antibody fragments, such as the Fc portions of antibodies may be varied to optimize their physiological characteristics, such as the half-life in serum.
  • Methods of substituting amino acid sequences in proteins are widely known in the art, such as by site-directed mutagenesis (e.g. Sambrook et al., Molecular Cloning, A laboratory manual, 2 nd Ed, 1989).
  • the variation may involve the addition or removal of one or more glycosylation sites in the Fc sequence (e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,254,868, the Examples section of which is incorporated herein by reference).
  • specific amino acid substitutions in the Fc sequence may be made (e.g., Hornick et al., 2000, J Nucl Med 41:355-62; Hinton et al., 2006, J Immunol 176:346-56; Petkova et al. 2006, Int Immunol 18:1759-69; U.S. Pat. No. 7,217,797).
  • an anti-CD22 antibody or fragment thereof and an anti-CD20 antibody or fragment thereof may be joined together by means such as the dock-and-lock technique described above.
  • Other combinations of antibodies or fragments thereof may be utilized.
  • the anti-CD22 antibody could be combined with another antibody against a different epitope of the same antigen, or alternatively with an antibody against another antigen, such as CD4, CD5, CD8, CD14, CD15, CD19, CD20, CD21, CD22, CD23, CD25, CD33, CD37, CD38, CD40, CD40L, CD46, CD52, CD54, CD74, CD80, CD126, CD138, B7, HM1.24, HLA-DR, an angiogenesis factor, tenascin, VEGF, PlGF, ED-B fibronectin, an oncogene, an oncogene product, NCA 66a-d, necrosis antigens, Ii (HLA-DR invariant chain), IL-2, T101, TAC, IL-6, MUC-1, TRAIL-R1 (DR4) or TRAIL-R2 (DR5).
  • another antigen such as CD4, CD5, CD8, CD14, CD15, CD19, CD20, CD21, CD22
  • bispecific antibodies include engineered recombinant antibodies which have additional cysteine residues so that they crosslink more strongly than the more common immunoglobulin isotypes. (See, e.g., FitzGerald et al, Protein Eng 10:1221-1225, 1997). Another approach is to engineer recombinant fusion proteins linking two or more different single-chain antibody or antibody fragment segments with the needed dual specificities. (See, e.g., Coloma et al., Nature Biotech. 15:159-163, 1997). A variety of bispecific antibodies can be produced using molecular engineering.
  • the bispecific antibody may consist of, for example, a scFv with a single binding site for one antigen and a Fab fragment with a single binding site for a second antigen.
  • the bispecific antibody may consist of, for example, an IgG with two binding sites for one antigen and two scFv with two binding sites for a second antigen.
  • multivalent monospecific or bispecific antibodies may be produced using the dock-and-lock (DNL) technology (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,521,056; 7,550,143; 7,534,866; 7,527,787 and 7,666,400; the Examples section of each of which is incorporated herein by reference).
  • DNL dock-and-lock
  • the DNL method exploits specific protein/protein interactions that occur between the regulatory (R) subunits of cAMP-dependent protein kinase (PKA) and the anchoring domain (AD) of A-kinase anchoring proteins (AKAPs) (Baillie et al., FEBS Letters. 2005; 579: 3264. Wong and Scott, Nat. Rev. Mol. Cell Biol.
  • PKA which plays a central role in one of the best studied signal transduction pathways triggered by the binding of the second messenger cAMP to the R subunits
  • the structure of the holoenzyme consists of two catalytic subunits held in an inactive form by the R subunits (Taylor, J. Biol. Chem. 1989; 264:8443). Isozymes of PKA are found with two types of R subunits (RI and RII), and each type has ⁇ ⁇ isoforms (Scott, Pharmacol. Ther. 1991; 50:123).
  • PKA regulatory subunits there are four types of PKA regulatory subunits—RI ⁇ , RI ⁇ , RII ⁇ and RII ⁇ .
  • the R subunits have been isolated only as stable dimers and the dimerization domain has been shown to consist of the first 44 amino-terminal residues (Newlon et al., Nat. Struct. Biol. 1999; 6:222). Binding of cAMP to the R subunits leads to the release of active catalytic subunits for a broad spectrum of serine/threonine kinase activities, which are oriented toward selected substrates through the compartmentalization of PKA via its docking with AKAPs (Scott et al., J. Biol. Chem. 1990; 265; 21561).
  • AKAP microtubule-associated protein-2
  • the amino acid sequences of the AD are quite varied among individual AKAPs, with the binding affinities reported for RII dimers ranging from 2 to 90 nM (Alto et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA. 2003; 100:4445). AKAPs will only bind to dimeric R subunits.
  • human RII ⁇ the AD binds to a hydrophobic surface formed by the 23 amino-terminal residues (Colledge and Scott, Trends Cell Biol. 1999; 6:216).
  • the dimerization domain and AKAP binding domain of human RII ⁇ are both located within the same N-terminal 44 amino acid sequence (Newlon et al., Nat. Struct. Biol. 1999; 6:222; Newlon et al., EMBO J. 2001; 20:1651), which is termed the DDD herein.
  • Entity B is constructed by linking an AD sequence to a precursor of B, resulting in a second component hereafter referred to as b.
  • the dimeric motif of DDD contained in a 2 will create a docking site for binding to the AD sequence contained in b, thus facilitating a ready association of a 2 and b to form a binary, trimeric complex composed of a 2 b.
  • This binding event is made irreversible with a subsequent reaction to covalently secure the two entities via disulfide bridges, which occurs very efficiently based on the principle of effective local concentration because the initial binding interactions should bring the reactive thiol groups placed onto both the DDD and AD into proximity (Chmura et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA.
  • DNL constructs of different stoichiometry may be produced and used, including but not limited to dimeric, trimeric, tetrameric, pentameric and hexameric DNL constructs (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,550,143; 7,521,056; 7,534,866; 7,527,787 and 7,666,400.)
  • fusion proteins A variety of methods are known for making fusion proteins, including nucleic acid synthesis, hybridization and/or amplification to produce a synthetic double-stranded nucleic acid encoding a fusion protein of interest.
  • double-stranded nucleic acids may be inserted into expression vectors for fusion protein production by standard molecular biology techniques (see, e.g. Sambrook et al., Molecular Cloning, A laboratory manual, 2 nd Ed, 1989).
  • the AD and/or DDD moiety may be attached to either the N-terminal or C-terminal end of an effector protein or peptide.
  • site of attachment of an AD or DDD moiety to an effector moiety may vary, depending on the chemical nature of the effector moiety and the part(s) of the effector moiety involved in its physiological activity.
  • Site-specific attachment of a variety of effector moieties may be performed using techniques known in the art, such as the use of bivalent cross-linking reagents and/or other chemical conjugation techniques.
  • the DNL technique may be utilized to produce complexes comprising multiple copies of the same anti-CD22 or anti-CD20 antibodies, or to attach one or more anti-CD22 antibodies to one or more anti-CD20 antibodies or an antibody against a different target antigen expressed by B-cells.
  • the DNL technique may be used to attach antibodies to different effector moieties, such as toxins, cytokines, carrier proteins for siRNA and other known effectors.
  • AD or DDD sequences may be utilized. Exemplary DDD and AD sequences are provided below.
  • DDD1 (SEQ ID NO: 15) SHIQIPPGLTELLQGYTVEVLRQQPPDLVEFAVEYFTRLREARA DDD2 (SEQ ID NO: 16) CGHIQIPPGLTELLQGYTVEVLRQQPPDLVEFAVEYFTRLREARA AD1 (SEQ ID NO: 17) QIEYLAKQIVDNAIQQA AD2 (SEQ ID NO: 18) CGQIEYLAKQIVDNAIQQAGC
  • DDD1 and DDD2 are based on the DDD sequence of the human RII ⁇ isoform of protein kinase A.
  • the DDD and AD moieties may be based on the DDD sequence of the human RI ⁇ form of protein kinase A and a corresponding AKAP sequence, as exemplified in DDD3, DDD3C and AD3 below.
  • DDD3 (SEQ ID NO: 19) SLRECELYVQKHNIQALLKDSIVQLCTARPERPMAFLREYFERLEKEEAK
  • DDD3C (SEQ ID NO: 20) MSCGGSLRECELYVQKHNIQALLKDSIVQLCTARPERPMAFLREYFERL EKEEAK AD3 (SEQ ID NO: 21) CGFEELAWKIAKMIWSDVFQQGC
  • AD and/or DDD moieties may be utilized in construction of the DNL complexes.
  • there are only four variants of human PKA DDD sequences corresponding to the DDD moieties of PKA RI ⁇ , RII ⁇ , RI ⁇ and RII ⁇ .
  • the RII ⁇ DDD sequence is the basis of DDD1 and DDD2 disclosed above.
  • the four human PKA DDD sequences are shown below.
  • the DDD sequence represents residues 1-44 of RII ⁇ , 1-44 of RII ⁇ , 12-61 of RI ⁇ and 13-66 of RI ⁇ . (Note that the sequence of DDD1 is modified slightly from the human PKA RII ⁇ DDD moiety.)
  • PKA RI ⁇ (SEQ ID NO: 22) SLRECELYVQKHNIQALLKDVSIVQLCTARPERPMAFLREYFEKLEKEE AK PKA RI ⁇ (SEQ ID NO: 23) SLKGCELYVQLHGIQQVLKDCIVHLCISKPERPMKFLREHFEKLEKEEN RQILA PKA RII ⁇ (SEQ ID NO: 24) SHIQIPPGLTELLQGYTVEVGQQPPDLVDFAVEYFTRLREARRQ PKA RII ⁇ (SEQ ID NO: 25) SIEIPAGLTELLQGFTVEVLRHQPADLLEFALQHFTRLQQENER
  • Alto et al. (2003, Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 100:4445-50) performed a bioinformatic analysis of the AD sequence of various AKAP proteins to design an RII selective AD sequence called AKAP-IS (SEQ ID NO:17), with a binding constant for DDD of 0.4 nM.
  • the AKAP-IS sequence was designed as a peptide antagonist of AKAP binding to PKA. Residues in the AKAP-IS sequence where substitutions tended to decrease binding to DDD are underlined in SEQ ID NO:17 below.
  • AKAP-IS (SEQ ID NO: 17) QIEYL A KQ IV DN AI QQA
  • the SuperAKAP-IS sequence may be substituted for the AKAP-IS AD moiety sequence to prepare DNL constructs.
  • Other alternative sequences that might be substituted for the AKAP-IS AD sequence are shown in SEQ ID NO:65-67. Substitutions relative to the AKAP-IS sequence are underlined. It is anticipated that, as with the AD2 sequence shown in SEQ ID NO:18, the AD moiety may also include the additional N-terminal residues cysteine and glycine and C-terminal residues glycine and cysteine.
  • FIG. 2 of Gold et al. disclosed additional DDD-binding sequences from a variety of AKAP proteins, shown below.
  • RII-Specific AKAPs AKAP-KL SEQ ID NO: 68) PLEYQAGLLVQNAIQQAI AKAP79 (SEQ ID NO: 69) LLIETASSLVKNAIQLSI AKAP-Lbc (SEQ ID NO: 70) LIEEAASRIVDAVIEQVK RI-Specific AKAPs AKAPce (SEQ ID NO: 71) ALYQFADRFSELVISEAL RIAD (SEQ ID NO: 72) LEQVANQLADQIIKEAT PV38 (SEQ ID NO: 73) FEELAWKIAKMIWSDVF Dual-Specificity AKAPs AKAP7 (SEQ ID NO: 74) ELVRLSKRLVENAVLKAV MAP2D (SEQ ID NO: 75) TAEEVSARIVQVVTAEAV DAKAP1 (SEQ ID NO: 76) QIKQAAFQLISQVILEAT DAKAP2 (SEQ ID NO: 77) LAWKI
  • Ht31 (SEQ ID NO: 78) DLIEEAASRIVDAVIEQVKAAGAY RIAD (SEQ ID NO: 79) LEQYANQLADQIIKEATE PV-38 (SEQ ID NO: 80) FEELAWKIAKMIWSDVFQQC
  • AKAPIS represents a synthetic RII subunit-binding peptide. All other peptides are derived from the RII-binding domains of the indicated AKAPs.
  • AKAP Peptide sequences Peptide Sequence AKAPIS QIEYLAKQIVDNAIQQA (SEQ ID NO: 17) AKAPIS-P QIEYLAKQIPDNAIQQA (SEQ ID NO: 81) Ht31 KGADLIEEAASRIVDAVIEQVKAAG (SEQ ID NO: 82) Ht31-P KGADLIEEAASRIPDAPIEQVKAAG (SEQ ID NO: 83) AKAP7 ⁇ - PEDAELVRLSKRLVENAVLKAVQQY wt-pep (SEQ ID NO: 84) AKAP7 ⁇ - PEDAELVRTSKRLVENAVLKAVQQY L304T-pep (SEQ ID NO: 85) AKAP7 ⁇ - PEDAELVRLSKRDVENAVLKAVQQY L308D-pep (SEQ ID NO: 86) AKAP7 ⁇ - PEDAELVRLSKRLPENAVLKAVQQY P-pep (SEQ ID NO: 87
  • Residues that were highly conserved among the AD domains of different AKAP proteins are indicated below by underlining with reference to the AKAP IS sequence (SEQ ID NO:17). The residues are the same as observed by Alto et al. (2003), with the addition of the C-terminal alanine residue. (See FIG. 4 of Hundsrucker et al. (2006), incorporated herein by reference.)
  • the sequences of peptide antagonists with particularly high affinities for the RII DDD sequence were those of AKAP-IS, AKAP7 ⁇ -wt-pep, AKAP7 ⁇ -L304T-pep and AKAP7 ⁇ -L308D-pep.
  • AKAP-IS (SEQ ID NO: 17) QIEYL A KQ IV DN AI QQ A
  • the disclosed methods and compositions may involve production and use of proteins or peptides with one or more substituted amino acid residues.
  • the DDD and/or AD sequences used to make DNL constructs may be modified as discussed above.
  • amino acid substitutions typically involve the replacement of an amino acid with another amino acid of relatively similar properties (i.e., conservative amino acid substitutions).
  • conservative amino acid substitutions The properties of the various amino acids and effect of amino acid substitution on protein structure and function have been the subject of extensive study and knowledge in the art.
  • the hydropathic index of amino acids may be considered (Kyte & Doolittle, 1982, J. Mol. Biol., 157:105-132).
  • the relative hydropathic character of the amino acid contributes to the secondary structure of the resultant protein, which in turn defines the interaction of the protein with other molecules.
  • Each amino acid has been assigned a hydropathic index on the basis of its hydrophobicity and charge characteristics (Kyte & Doolittle, 1982), these are: isoleucine (+4.5); valine (+4.2); leucine (+3.8); phenylalanine (+2.8); cysteine/cystine (+2.5); methionine (+1.9); alanine (+1.8); glycine ( ⁇ 0.4); threonine ( ⁇ 0.7); serine ( ⁇ 0.8); tryptophan ( ⁇ 0.9); tyrosine ( ⁇ 1.3); proline ( ⁇ 1.6); histidine ( ⁇ 3.2); glutamate ( ⁇ 3.5); glutamine ( ⁇ 3.5); aspartate ( ⁇ 3.5); asparagine ( ⁇ 3.5); lysine ( ⁇ 3.9); and arginine ( ⁇ 4.5).
  • the use of amino acids whose hydropathic indices are within ⁇ 2 is preferred, within ⁇ 1 are more preferred, and within ⁇ 0.5 are even more preferred.
  • Amino acid substitution may also take into account the hydrophilicity of the amino acid residue (e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 4,554,101). Hydrophilicity values have been assigned to amino acid residues: arginine (+3.0); lysine (+3.0); aspartate (+3.0); glutamate (+3.0); serine (+0.3); asparagine (+0.2); glutamine (+0.2); glycine (0); threonine ( ⁇ 0.4); proline ( ⁇ 0.5.+ ⁇ 0.1); alanine ( ⁇ 0.5); histidine ( ⁇ 0.5); cysteine ( ⁇ 1.0); methionine ( ⁇ 1.3); valine ( ⁇ 1.5); leucine ( ⁇ 1.8); isoleucine ( ⁇ 1.8); tyrosine ( ⁇ 2.3); phenylalanine ( ⁇ 2.5); tryptophan ( ⁇ 3.4). Replacement of amino acids with others of similar hydrophilicity is preferred.
  • amino acid side chain For example, it would generally not be preferred to replace an amino acid with a compact side chain, such as glycine or serine, with an amino acid with a bulky side chain, e.g., tryptophan or tyrosine.
  • a compact side chain such as glycine or serine
  • an amino acid with a bulky side chain e.g., tryptophan or tyrosine.
  • the effect of various amino acid residues on protein secondary structure is also a consideration. Through empirical study, the effect of different amino acid residues on the tendency of protein domains to adopt an alpha-helical, beta-sheet or reverse turn secondary structure has been determined and is known in the art (see, e.g., Chou & Fasman, 1974, Biochemistry, 13:222-245; 1978, Ann. Rev. Biochem., 47: 251-276; 1979, Biophys. J., 26:367-384).
  • amino acid substitutions include whether or not the residue is located in the interior of a protein or is solvent exposed.
  • conservative substitutions would include: Asp and Asn; Ser and Thr; Ser and Ala; Thr and Ala; Ala and Gly; Ile and Val; Val and Leu; Leu and Ile; Leu and Met; Phe and Tyr; Tyr and Trp.
  • conservative substitutions would include: Asp and Asn; Asp and Glu; Glu and Gln; Glu and Ala; Gly and Asn; Ala and Pro; Ala and Gly; Ala and Ser; Ala and Lys; Ser and Thr; Lys and Arg; Val and Leu; Leu and Ile; Ile and Val; Phe and Tyr.
  • amino acid substitutions In determining amino acid substitutions, one may also consider the existence of intermolecular or intramolecular bonds, such as formation of ionic bonds (salt bridges) between positively charged residues (e.g., His, Arg, Lys) and negatively charged residues (e.g., Asp, Glu) or disulfide bonds between nearby cysteine residues.
  • ionic bonds salt bridges
  • positively charged residues e.g., His, Arg, Lys
  • negatively charged residues e.g., Asp, Glu
  • disulfide bonds between nearby cysteine residues.
  • an antibody or antibody fragment may be directly attached to one or more therapeutic agents to form an immunoconjugate.
  • Therapeutic agents may be attached, for example to reduced SH groups and/or to carbohydrate side chains.
  • a therapeutic agent can be attached at the hinge region of a reduced antibody component via disulfide bond formation.
  • such agents can be attached using a heterobifunctional cross-linker, such as N-succinyl 3-(2-pyridyldithio)propionate (SPDP). Yu et al., Int. J. Cancer 56: 244 (1994). General techniques for such conjugation are well-known in the art.
  • the therapeutic agent can be conjugated via a carbohydrate moiety in the Fc region of the antibody.
  • the Fc region may be absent if the antibody component of the immunoconjugate is an antibody fragment.
  • a carbohydrate moiety into the light chain variable region of a full length antibody or antibody fragment. See, for example, Leung et al., J. Immunol. 154: 5919 (1995); U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,443,953 and 6,254,868, the Examples section of which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • the engineered carbohydrate moiety is used to attach the therapeutic or diagnostic agent.
  • click chemistry reaction An alternative method for attaching therapeutic agents to an antibody or fragment involves use of click chemistry reactions.
  • the click chemistry approach was originally conceived as a method to rapidly generate complex substances by joining small subunits together in a modular fashion.
  • Various forms of click chemistry reaction are known in the art, such as the Huisgen 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition copper catalyzed reaction (Tornoe et al., 2002, J Organic Chem 67:3057-64), which is often referred to as the “click reaction.”
  • Other alternatives include cycloaddition reactions such as the Diels-Alder, nucleophilic substitution reactions (especially to small strained rings like epoxy and aziridine compounds), carbonyl chemistry formation of urea compounds and reactions involving carbon-carbon double bonds, such as alkynes in thiol-yne reactions.
  • the azide alkyne Huisgen cycloaddition reaction uses a copper catalyst in the presence of a reducing agent to catalyze the reaction of a terminal alkyne group attached to a first molecule.
  • a second molecule comprising an azide moiety
  • the azide reacts with the activated alkyne to form a 1,4-disubstituted 1,2,3-triazole.
  • the copper catalyzed reaction occurs at room temperature and is sufficiently specific that purification of the reaction product is often not required.
  • a copper-free click reaction has been proposed for covalent modification of biomolecules.
  • the copper-free reaction uses ring strain in place of the copper catalyst to promote a [3+2] azide-alkyne cycloaddition reaction (Id.)
  • cyclooctyne is an 8-carbon ring structure comprising an internal alkyne bond.
  • the closed ring structure induces a substantial bond angle deformation of the acetylene, which is highly reactive with azide groups to form a triazole.
  • cyclooctyne derivatives may be used for copper-free click reactions (Id.)
  • the specificity of the click chemistry reaction may be used as a substitute for the antibody-hapten binding interaction used in pretargeting with bispecific antibodies.
  • the specific reactivity of e.g., cyclooctyne moieties for azide moieties or alkyne moieties for nitrone moieties may be used in an in vivo cycloaddition reaction.
  • An antibody, antibody fragment or antibody-based complex is activated by incorporation of a substituted cyclooctyne, an azide or a nitrone moiety.
  • a targetable construct is labeled with one or more diagnostic or therapeutic agents and a complementary reactive moiety.
  • the targetable construct will comprise an azide; where the antibody comprises a nitrone, the targetable construct will comprise an alkyne, etc.
  • the activated antibody or fragment is administered to a subject and allowed to localize to a targeted cell, tissue or pathogen, as disclosed for pretargeting protocols.
  • the reactive labeled targetable construct is then administered. Because the cyclooctyne, nitrone or azide on the targetable construct is unreactive with endogenous biomolecules and highly reactive with the complementary moiety on the antibody, the specificity of the binding interaction results in the highly specific binding of the targetable construct to the tissue-localized antibody.
  • a wide variety of therapeutic reagents can be administered concurrently or sequentially with the subject anti-CD22 antibodies or antibody combinations.
  • the therapeutic agents recited here are those agents that also are useful for administration separately with an antibody or fragment thereof as described above.
  • Therapeutic agents include, for example, cytotoxic agents such as vinca alkaloids, anthracyclines, gemcitabine, epipodophyllotoxins, taxanes, antimetabolites, alkylating agents, antibiotics, SN-38, COX-2 inhibitors, antimitotics, anti-angiogenic and pro-apoptotic agents, particularly doxorubicin, methotrexate, taxol, CPT-11, camptothecins, proteosome inhibitors, mTOR inhibitors, HDAC inhibitors, tyrosine kinase inhibitors, and others.
  • cytotoxic agents such as vinca alkaloids, anthracyclines, gemcitabine, epipodophyllotoxins, taxanes, antimetabolites, alkylating agents, antibiotics, SN-38, COX-2 inhibitors, antimitotics, anti-angiogenic and pro-apoptotic agents, particularly doxorubicin, methotrexate, taxol, CPT-11, camptothecin
  • cytotoxic agents include nitrogen mustards, alkyl sulfonates, nitrosoureas, triazenes, folic acid analogs, COX-2 inhibitors, antimetabolites, pyrimidine analogs, purine analogs, platinum coordination complexes, mTOR inhibitors, tyrosine kinase inhibitors, proteosome inhibitors, HDAC inhibitors, camptothecins, hormones, and the like.
  • Suitable cytotoxic agents are described in REMINGTON'S PHARMACEUTICAL SCIENCES, 19th Ed. (Mack Publishing Co. 1995), and in GOODMAN AND GILMAN'S THE PHARMACOLOGICAL BASIS OF THERAPEUTICS, 7th Ed. (MacMillan Publishing Co. 1985), as well as revised editions of these publications.
  • conjugates of camptothecins and related compounds may be conjugated to an antibody, for example as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 7,591,994, the Examples section of which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • the therapeutic agent may be selected from the group consisting of aplidin, azaribine, anastrozole, azacytidine, bleomycin, bortezomib, bryostatin-1, busulfan, calicheamycin, camptothecin, 10-hydroxycamptothecin, carmustine, celebrex, chlorambucil, cisplatin, irinotecan (CPT-11), SN-38, carboplatin, cladribine, cyclophosphamide, cytarabine, dacarbazine, docetaxel, dactinomycin, daunomycin glucuronide, daunorubicin, dexamethasone, diethylstilbestrol, doxorubicin, doxorubicin glucuronide, epirubicin glucuronide, ethinyl estradiol, estramustine, etoposide, etoposide glucuronide,
  • a toxin can be of animal, plant or microbial origin.
  • a toxin such as Pseudomonas exotoxin, may also be complexed to or form the therapeutic agent portion of an immunoconjugate.
  • Other toxins include ricin, abrin, ribonuclease (RNase), DNase I, Staphylococcal enterotoxin-A, pokeweed antiviral protein, onconase, gelonin, diphtheria toxin, Pseudomonas exotoxin, and Pseudomonas endotoxin.
  • the therapeutic agent may be an enzyme selected from the group consisting of malate dehydrogenase, staphylococcal nuclease, delta-V-steroid isomerase, yeast alcohol dehydrogenase, alpha-glycerophosphate dehydrogenase, triose phosphate isomerase, horseradish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, asparaginase, glucose oxidase, beta-galactosidase, ribonuclease, urease, catalase, glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase, glucoamylase and acetylcholinesterase.
  • malate dehydrogenase staphylococcal nuclease
  • delta-V-steroid isomerase yeast alcohol dehydrogenase
  • alpha-glycerophosphate dehydrogenase alpha-glycerophosphate dehydrogenase
  • triose phosphate isomerase horseradish peroxida
  • the term “immunomodulator” includes cytokines, lymphokines, monokines, stem cell growth factors, lymphotoxins, hematopoietic factors, colony stimulating factors (CSF), interferons (IFN), parathyroid hormone, thyroxine, insulin, proinsulin, relaxin, prorelaxin, follicle stimulating hormone (FSH), thyroid stimulating hormone (TSH), luteinizing hormone (LH), hepatic growth factor, prostaglandin, fibroblast growth factor, prolactin, placental lactogen, OB protein, transforming growth factor (TGF), TGF- ⁇ , TGF- ⁇ , insulin-like growth factor (IGF), erythropoietin, thrombopoietin, tumor necrosis factor (TNF), TNF- ⁇ , TNF- ⁇ , mullerian-inhibiting substance, mouse gonadotropin-associated peptide, inhibin, activin, vascular endothelial growth factor, integr
  • CSF
  • anti-angiogenic agents may include angiostatin, endostatin, vasculostatin, canstatin, maspin, anti-VEGF binding molecules, anti-placental growth factor binding molecules, or anti-vascular growth factor binding molecules.
  • the antibody or complex may comprise one or more chelating moieties, such as NOTA, DOTA, DTPA, TETA, Tscg-Cys, or Tsca-Cys.
  • the chelating moiety may form a complex with a therapeutic or diagnostic cation, such as Group II, Group III, Group IV, Group V, transition, lanthanide or actinide metal cations, Tc, Re, Bi, Cu, As, Ag, Au, At, or Pb.
  • the antibody or fragment thereof may be administered as an immunoconjugate comprising one or more radioactive isotopes useful for treating diseased tissue.
  • Particularly useful therapeutic radionuclides include, but are not limited to 111 In, 177 Lu, 212 Bi, 213 Bi, 211 At, 62 Cu, 64 Cu, 67 Cu, 90 Y, 125 I, 131 , 32 P, 33 P, 47 Sc, 111 Ag, 67 Ga, 142 Pr, 153 Sm, 161 Tb, 166 Dy, 166 Ho, 186 Re, 188 Re, 189 Re, 212 Pb, 223 Ra, 225 Ac, 59 Fe, 75 Se, 77 As, 89 Sr, 99 Mo, 105 Rh, 109 Pd, 143 Pr, 149 Pm, 169 Er, 194 Ir, 198 Au, 199 Au, and 211 Pb.
  • the therapeutic radionuclide preferably has a decay energy in the range of 20 to 6,000 keV, preferably in the ranges 60 to 200 keV for an Auger emitter, 100-2,500 keV for a beta emitter and 4,000-6,000 keV for an alpha emitter.
  • Maximum decay energies of useful beta-particle-emitting nuclides are preferably 20-5,000 keV, more preferably 100-4,000 keV and most preferably 500-2,500 keV. Also preferred are radionuclides that substantially decay with Auger-emitting particles.
  • Decay energies of useful beta-particle-emitting nuclides are preferably ⁇ 1,000 keV, more preferably ⁇ 100 keV, and most preferably ⁇ 70 keV.
  • radionuclides that substantially decay with generation of alpha-particles. Such radionuclides include, but are not limited to: Dy-152, At-211, Bi-212, Ra-223, Rn-219, Po-215, Bi-211, Ac-225, Fr-221, At-217, Bi-213 and Fm-255. Decay energies of useful alpha-particle-emitting radionuclides are preferably 2,000-10,000 keV, more preferably 3,000-8,000 keV, and most preferably 4,000-7,000 keV.
  • Additional potential therapeutic radioisotopes include 11 C, 13 N, 15 O, 75 Br, 198 Au, 224 Ac, 126 I, 133 I, 77 Br, 113m In, 95 Ru, 97 Ru, 103 Ru, 105 Ru, 107 Hg, 203 Hg, 121m Te, 122m Te, 125m Te, 165 Tm, 167 Tm, 168 Tm, 197 Pt, 109 Pd, 105 Rh, 142 Pr, 143 Pr, 161 Tb, 166 Ho, 199 Au, 57 Co, 58 Co, 51 Cr, 59 Fe, 75 Se, 201 Tl, 225 Ac, 76 Br, 169 Yb, and the like.
  • the therapeutic agent may be a siRNA or interference RNA species.
  • the siRNA, interference RNA or therapeutic gene may be attached to a carrier moiety that is conjugated to an antibody or fragment thereof.
  • carrier moieties for siRNA have been reported and any such known carrier may be incorporated into a therapeutic antibody for use.
  • Non-limiting examples of carriers include protamine (Rossi, 2005, Nat Biotech 23:682-84; Song et al., 2005, Nat Biotech 23:709-17); dendrimers such as PAMAM dendrimers (Pan et al., 2007, Cancer Res.
  • Patent Application Publ. No. 20100121043 discloses chitosan-thiamine pyrophosphate (Rojanarata et al., 2008, Pharm Res 25:2807-14).
  • siRNA carriers can also be used to carry other oligonucleotide or nucleic acid species, such as anti-sense oligonucleotides or short DNA genes.
  • siRNA species of potential use include those specific for IKK-gamma (U.S. Pat. No. 7,022,828); VEGF, Flt-1 and Flk-1/KDR (U.S. Pat. No. 7,148,342); Bcl2 and EGFR (U.S. Pat. No. 7,541,453); CDC20 (U.S. Pat. No. 7,550,572); transducin (beta)-like 3 (U.S. Pat. No. 7,576,196); K-ras (U.S. Pat. No. 7,576,197); carbonic anhydrase II (U.S. Pat. No. 7,579,457); complement component 3 (U.S. Pat. No.
  • siRNA species are available from known commercial sources, such as Sigma-Aldrich (St Louis, Mo.), Invitrogen (Carlsbad, Calif.), Santa Cruz Biotechnology (Santa Cruz, Calif.), Ambion (Austin, Tex.), Dharmacon (Thermo Scientific, Lafayette, Colo.), Promega (Madison, Wis.), Minis Bio (Madison, Wis.) and Qiagen (Valencia, Calif.), among many others.
  • Other publicly available sources of siRNA species include the siRNAdb database at the Sweden Bioinformatics Centre, the MIT/ICBP siRNA Database, the RNAi Consortium shRNA Library at the Broad Institute, and the Probe database at NCBI.
  • siRNA species there are 30,852 siRNA species in the NCBI Probe database.
  • the skilled artisan will realize that for any gene of interest, either a siRNA species has already been designed, or one may readily be designed using publicly available software tools. Any such siRNA species may be delivered using the subject antibodies, antibody fragments or antibody complexes.
  • siRNA species known in the art are listed in Table 6. Although siRNA is delivered as a double-stranded molecule, for simplicity only the sense strand sequences are shown in Table 6.
  • VEGF vascular endothelial growth factor
  • AATGCGGCGGTGGTGACAGTA SEQ ID NO: 99
  • VEGF R2 AAGCTCAGCACACAGAAAGAC
  • 100 CXCR4 UAAAAUCUUCCUGCCCACCdTdT
  • 101 CXCR4 GGAAGCUGUUGGCUGAAAAdTdT
  • 102 PPARC 1 AAGACCAGCCUCUUUGCCCAG
  • 103 Dynamin 2 GGACCAGGCAGAAAACGAG
  • 104 Catenin CUAUCAGGAUGACGCGG
  • Plasminogen GGTGAAGAAGGGCGTCCAA SEQ ID NO: 107 activator K-ras GATCCGTTGGAGCTGTTGGCGTAGTT SEQ ID NO: 108 CAAGAGACTCGCCAACAGCTCCA
  • Table 6 represents a very small sampling of the total number of siRNA species known in the art, and that any such known siRNA may be utilized in the claimed methods and compositions.
  • Rap is a single-chain ribonuclease of 104 amino acids originally isolated from the oocytes of Rana pipiens . Rap exhibits cytostatic and cytotoxic effects on a variety of tumor cell lines in vitro, as well as antitumor activity in vivo.
  • the amphibian ribonuclease enters cells via receptor-mediated endocytosis and once internalized into the cytosol, selectively degrades tRNA, resulting in inhibition of protein synthesis and induction of apoptosis.
  • Rap has completed a randomized Phase Mb clinical trial, which compared the effectiveness of Rap plus doxorubicin with that of doxorubicin alone in patients with unresectable malignant mesothelioma, with the interim analysis showing that the MST for the combination was 12 months, while that of the monotherapy was 10 months (Mutti and Gaudino, Oncol Rev 2008; 2:61-5). Rap can be administered repeatedly to patients without an untoward immune response, with reversible renal toxicity reported to be dose-limiting (Mikulski et al., J Clin Oncol 2002; 20:274-81; Int J Oncol 1993; 3:57-64).
  • 2L-Rap-hLL1- ⁇ 4P allowed us to develop a series of structurally similar immunotoxins, referred to in general as 2L-Rap-X, all of which consist of two Rap molecules, each connected via a flexible linker to the N-terminus of one L chain of an antibody of interest (X).
  • 2L-Rap-X a series of structurally similar immunotoxins
  • Rap(Q) Rap(Q)
  • IgG IgG1( ⁇ 1) or IgG4( ⁇ 4), and to prevent the formation of IgG4 half molecules (Aalberse and Schuurman, Immunology 2002; 105:9-19), we converted the serine residue in the hinge region (S228) of IgG4 to proline ( ⁇ 4P).
  • S2228 of IgG4 proline
  • ⁇ 4P proline
  • a pyroglutamate residue at the N-terminus of Rap is required for the RNase to be fully functional (Liao et al., Nucleic Acids Res 2003; 31:5247-55).
  • cytotoxic RNase moieties suitable for use in the present invention include polypeptides having a native ranpirnase structure and all enzymatically active variants thereof. These molecules advantageously have an N-terminal pyroglutamic acid resides that appears essential for RNase activity and are not substantially inhibited by mammalian RNase inhibitors.
  • Nucleic acid that encodes a native cytotoxic RNase may be prepared by cloning and restriction of appropriate sequences, or using DNA amplification with polymerase chain reaction (PCR).
  • the amino acid sequence of Rana pipiens ranpirnase can be obtained from Ardelt et al., J. Biol.
  • Rap conjugates of targeting antibodies may be made using the DNL technology.
  • the DNL Rap-antibody constructs show potent cytotoxic activity that can be targeted to disease-associated cells.
  • the antibodies, antibody fragments or antibody complexes may be conjugated to, or may bind a targetable construct comprising one or more diagnostic agents.
  • Diagnostic agents are preferably selected from the group consisting of a radionuclide, a radiological contrast agent, a paramagnetic ion, a metal, a fluorescent label, a chemiluminescent label, an ultrasound contrast agent and a photoactive agent.
  • diagnostic agents are well known and any such known diagnostic agent may be used.
  • Non-limiting examples of diagnostic agents may include a radionuclide such as 18 F, 52 Fe, 110 In, 111 In, 177 Lu, 18 F, 52 Fe, 62 Cu, 64 Cu, 67 Cu, 67 Ga, 68 Ga, 86 Y, 90 Y, 89 Zr, 94m Tc, 94 Tc, 99m Tc, 120 I, 123 I, 124 I, 125 I, 131 I, 154-158 Gd, 32 P, 11 C, 13 N, 15 O, 186 Re, 188 Re, 51 Mn, 52m Mn, 55 Co, 72 As, 75 Br, 76 Br, 82m Rb, 83 Sr, or other gamma-, beta-, or positron-emitters.
  • a radionuclide such as 18 F, 52 Fe, 110 In, 111 In, 177 Lu, 18 F, 52 Fe, 62 Cu, 64 Cu, 67 Cu, 67 Ga, 68 Ga, 86 Y, 90 Y, 89 Z
  • Paramagnetic ions of use may include chromium (III), manganese (II), iron (III), iron (II), cobalt (II), nickel (II), copper (II), neodymium (III), samarium (III), ytterbium (III), gadolinium (III), vanadium (II), terbium (III), dysprosium (III), holmium (III) or erbium (III).
  • Metal contrast agents may include lanthanum (III), gold (III), lead (II) or bismuth (III).
  • Ultrasound contrast agents may comprise liposomes, such as gas filled liposomes.
  • Radiopaque diagnostic agents may be selected from compounds, barium compounds, gallium compounds, and thallium compounds.
  • fluorescent labels are known in the art, including but not limited to fluorescein isothiocyanate, rhodamine, phycoerytherin, phycocyanin, allophycocyanin, o-phthaldehyde and fluorescamine.
  • Chemiluminescent labels of use may include luminol, isoluminol, an aromatic acridinium ester, an imidazole, an acridinium salt or an oxalate ester.
  • the claimed methods and compositions are of use for treating disease states, such as B-cell lymphomas or leukemias, autoimmune disease or immune system dysfunction (e.g., graft-versus-host disease).
  • the methods may comprise administering a therapeutically effective amount of an anti-CD22 antibody or fragment thereof or immunoconjugate, either alone or in combination with one or more other therapeutic agents, administered either concurrently or sequentially.
  • the anti-CD22 antibody or fragment thereof may be administered in the form of a DNL complex in combination with one or more other therapeutic agents, such as a second antibody or fragment thereof.
  • Multimodal therapies may include therapy with other antibodies, such as antibodies against CD4, CD5, CD8, CD14, CD15, CD19, CD20, CD21, CD22, CD23, CD25, CD33, CD37, CD38, CD40, CD40L, CD46, CD52, CD54, CD74, CD80, CD126, CD138, B7, HM1.24, HLA-DR, an angiogenesis factor, tenascin, VEGF, PlGF, ED-B fibronectin, an oncogene, an oncogene product, NCA 66a-d, necrosis antigens, Ii, IL-2, T101, TAC, IL-6, MUC-1, TRAIL-R1 (DR4) or TRAIL-R2 (DR5) in the form of naked antibodies, fusion proteins, or as immunoconjugates.
  • subjects may receive therapeutic anti-CD22 antibodies or antibody combinations in conjunction with standard chemotherapy.
  • CVB “1.5 g/m 2 cyclophosphamide, 200-400 mg/m 2 etoposide, and 150-200 mg/m 2 carmustine) is a regimen used to treat non-Hodgkin's lymphoma. Patti et al., Eur. J. Haematol. 51: 18 (1993).
  • Other suitable combination chemotherapeutic regimens are well-known to those of skill in the art.
  • first generation chemotherapeutic regimens for treatment of intermediate-grade non-Hodgkin's lymphoma include C-MOPP (cyclophosphamide, vincristine, procarbazine and prednisone) and CHOP (cyclophosphamide, doxorubicin, vincristine, and prednisone).
  • a useful second generation chemotherapeutic regimen is m-BACOD (methotrexate, bleomycin, doxorubicin, cyclophosphamide, vincristine, dexamethasone and leucovorin), while a suitable third generation regimen is MACOP-B (methotrexate, doxorubicin, cyclophosphamide, vincristine, prednisone, bleomycin and leucovorin).
  • Additional useful drugs include phenyl butyrate, bendamustine, and bryostatin-1.
  • Therapeutic antibodies or complexes can be formulated according to known methods to prepare pharmaceutically useful compositions, whereby the therapeutic antibody complex is combined in a mixture with a pharmaceutically suitable excipient.
  • Sterile phosphate-buffered saline is one example of a pharmaceutically suitable excipient.
  • Other suitable excipients are well-known to those in the art. See, for example, Ansel et al., PHARMACEUTICAL DOSAGE FORMS AND DRUG DELIVERY SYSTEMS, 5th Edition (Lea & Febiger 1990), and Gennaro (ed.), REMINGTON'S PHARMACEUTICAL SCIENCES, 18th Edition (Mack Publishing Company 1990), and revised editions thereof.
  • the therapeutic antibody complex can be formulated for intravenous administration via, for example, bolus injection or continuous infusion.
  • the therapeutic antibody complex is infused over a period of less than about 4 hours, and more preferably, over a period of less than about 3 hours.
  • the first 25-50 mg could be infused within 30 minutes, preferably even 15 min, and the remainder infused over the next 2-3 hrs.
  • Formulations for injection can be presented in unit dosage form, e.g., in ampoules or in multi-dose containers, with an added preservative.
  • the compositions can take such forms as suspensions, solutions or emulsions in oily or aqueous vehicles, and can contain formulatory agents such as suspending, stabilizing and/or dispersing agents.
  • the active ingredient can be in powder form for constitution with a suitable vehicle, e.g., sterile pyrogen-free water, before use.
  • the therapeutic antibody complex may also be administered to a mammal subcutaneously or even by other parenteral routes. Moreover, the administration may be by continuous infusion or by single or multiple boluses. In most preferred embodiments, the therapeutic antibody or combination is administered subcutaneously in a volume of 1, 2 or 3 ml and at a concentration of at least 80 mg/ml, at least 100 mg/ml, at least 125 mg/ml, at least 150 mg/ml, at least 200 mg/ml, at least 250 mg/ml or at least 300 mg/ml.
  • Methods of antibody concentration and subcutaneous formulations are disclosed in provisional U.S. Patent No. 61/509,850, filed Jul. 20, 2011, the Examples section of which (from paragraph 0133, page 48 to paragraph 0195, page 64) is incorporated herein by reference.
  • the dosage of an administered therapeutic antibody complex for humans will vary depending upon such factors as the patient's age, weight, height, sex, general medical condition and previous medical history. It may be desirable to provide the recipient with a dosage of therapeutic antibody complex that is in the range of from about 1 mg/kg to 25 mg/kg as a single intravenous infusion, although a lower or higher dosage also may be administered as circumstances dictate.
  • the dosage may be repeated as needed, for example, once per week for 4-10 weeks, once per week for 8 weeks, or once per week for 4 weeks. It may also be given less frequently, such as every other week for several months, or monthly or quarterly for many months, as needed in a maintenance therapy.
  • a therapeutic antibody complex may be administered as one dosage every 2 or 3 weeks, repeated for a total of at least 3 dosages.
  • the therapeutic antibody complex may be administered twice per week for 4-6 weeks. If the dosage is lowered to approximately 200-300 mg/m 2 (340 mg per dosage for a 1.7-m patient, or 4.9 mg/kg for a 70 kg patient), it may be administered once or even twice weekly for 4 to 10 weeks.
  • the dosage schedule may be decreased, namely every 2 or 3 weeks for 2-3 months. It has been determined, however, that even higher doses, such as 20 mg/kg once weekly or once every 2-3 weeks can be administered by slow i.v. infusion, for repeated dosing cycles.
  • the dosing schedule can optionally be repeated at other intervals and dosage may be given through various parenteral routes, with appropriate adjustment of the dose and schedule.
  • Control release preparations can be prepared through the use of polymers to complex or adsorb the antibody.
  • biocompatible polymers include matrices of poly(ethylene-co-vinyl acetate) and matrices of a polyanhydride copolymer of a stearic acid dimer and sebacic acid. Sherwood et al., Bio/Technology 10: 1446 (1992). The rate of release of an antibody from such a matrix depends upon the molecular weight of the antibody, the amount of antibody within the matrix, and the size of dispersed particles. Saltzman et al., Biophys. J.
  • the anti-CD22 antibodies, combinations or complexes are of use for therapy of cancer.
  • cancers include, but are not limited to, carcinoma, lymphoma, glioblastoma, melanoma, sarcoma, and leukemia, myeloma, or lymphoid malignancies.
  • squamous cell cancer e.g., epithelial squamous cell cancer
  • Ewing sarcoma e.g., Ewing sarcoma
  • Wilms tumor astrocytomas
  • lung cancer including small-cell lung cancer, non-small cell lung cancer, adenocarcinoma of the lung and squamous carcinoma of the lung, cancer of the peritoneum, hepatocellular cancer, gastric or stomach cancer including gastrointestinal cancer, pancreatic cancer, glioblastoma multiforme, cervical cancer, ovarian cancer, liver cancer, bladder cancer, hepatoma, hepatocellular carcinoma, neuroendocrine tumors, medullary thyroid cancer, differentiated thyroid carcinoma, breast cancer, ovarian cancer, colon cancer, rectal cancer, endometrial cancer or uterine carcinoma, salivary gland carcinoma, kidney or renal cancer, prostate cancer, vulvar cancer, anal carcinoma, penile carcinoma, as well as head-and-neck cancer.
  • cancer includes primary malignant cells or tumors (e.g., those whose cells have not migrated to sites in the subject's body other than the site of the original malignancy or tumor) and secondary malignant cells or tumors (e.g., those arising from metastasis, the migration of malignant cells or tumor cells to secondary sites that are different from the site of the original tumor).
  • primary malignant cells or tumors e.g., those whose cells have not migrated to sites in the subject's body other than the site of the original malignancy or tumor
  • secondary malignant cells or tumors e.g., those arising from metastasis, the migration of malignant cells or tumor cells to secondary sites that are different from the site of the original tumor.
  • cancers or malignancies include, but are not limited to: Acute Childhood Lymphoblastic Leukemia, Acute Lymphoblastic Leukemia, Acute Lymphocytic Leukemia, Acute Myeloid Leukemia, Adrenocortical Carcinoma, Adult (Primary) Hepatocellular Cancer, Adult (Primary) Liver Cancer, Adult Acute Lymphocytic Leukemia, Adult Acute Myeloid Leukemia, Adult Hodgkin's Lymphoma, Adult Lymphocytic Leukemia, Adult Non-Hodgkin's Lymphoma, Adult Primary Liver Cancer, Adult Soft Tissue Sarcoma, AIDS-Related Lymphoma, AIDS-Related Malignancies, Anal Cancer, Astrocytoma, Bile Duct Cancer, Bladder Cancer, Bone Cancer, Brain Stem Glioma, Brain Tumors, Breast Cancer, Cancer of the Renal Pelvis and Ureter, Central Nervous System (Primary) Lymphoma,
  • compositions described and claimed herein may be used to treat malignant or premalignant conditions and to prevent progression to a neoplastic or malignant state, including but not limited to those disorders described above.
  • Such uses are indicated in conditions known or suspected of preceding progression to neoplasia or cancer, in particular, where non-neoplastic cell growth consisting of hyperplasia, metaplasia, or most particularly, dysplasia has occurred (for review of such abnormal growth conditions, see Robbins and Angell, Basic Pathology, 2d Ed., W. B. Saunders Co., Philadelphia, pp. 68-79 (1976)).
  • Dysplasia is frequently a forerunner of cancer, and is found mainly in the epithelia. It is the most disorderly form of non-neoplastic cell growth, involving a loss in individual cell uniformity and in the architectural orientation of cells. Dysplasia characteristically occurs where there exists chronic irritation or inflammation.
  • Dysplastic disorders which can be treated include, but are not limited to, anhidrotic ectodermal dysplasia, anterofacial dysplasia, asphyxiating thoracic dysplasia, atriodigital dysplasia, bronchopulmonary dysplasia, cerebral dysplasia, cervical dysplasia, chondroectodermal dysplasia, cleidocranial dysplasia, congenital ectodermal dysplasia, craniodiaphysial dysplasia, craniocarpotarsal dysplasia, craniometaphysial dysplasia, dentin dysplasia, diaphysial dysplasia, ectodermal dysplasia, enamel dysplasia, encephalo-ophthalmic dysplasia, dysplasia epiphysialis hemimelia, dysplasia epiphysialis multiplex, dysplasia epiphysialis punctata, epi
  • Additional pre-neoplastic disorders which can be treated include, but are not limited to, benign dysproliferative disorders (e.g., benign tumors, fibrocystic conditions, tissue hypertrophy, intestinal polyps or adenomas, and esophageal dysplasia), leukoplakia, keratoses, Bowen's disease, Farmer's Skin, solar cheilitis, and solar keratosis.
  • benign dysproliferative disorders e.g., benign tumors, fibrocystic conditions, tissue hypertrophy, intestinal polyps or adenomas, and esophageal dysplasia
  • leukoplakia keratoses
  • Bowen's disease keratoses
  • Farmer's Skin Farmer's Skin
  • solar cheilitis solar cheilitis
  • the method of the invention is used to inhibit growth, progression, and/or metastasis of cancers, in particular those listed above.
  • Additional hyperproliferative diseases, disorders, and/or conditions include, but are not limited to, progression, and/or metastases of malignancies and related disorders such as leukemia (including acute leukemias (e.g., acute lymphocytic leukemia, acute myelocytic leukemia (including myeloblastic, promyelocytic, myelomonocytic, monocytic, and erythroleukemia)) and chronic leukemias (e.g., chronic myelocytic (granulocytic) leukemia and chronic lymphocytic leukemia)), polycythemia vera, lymphomas (e.g., Hodgkin's disease and non-Hodgkin's disease), multiple myeloma, Waldenstrom's macroglobulinemia, heavy chain disease, and solid tumors including, but not limited to, sarcomas and carcinomas such as fibrosarcoma, myxosarcoma, liposarcoma
  • Immune diseases may include acute immune thrombocytopenia, Addison's disease, adult respiratory distress syndrome (ARDS), agranulocytosis, allergic conditions, allergic encephalomyelitis, allergic neuritis, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), ankylosing spondylitis, antigen-antibody complex mediated diseases, anti-glomerular basement membrane disease, anti-phospholipid antibody syndrome, aplastic anemia, arthritis, asthma, atherosclerosis, autoimmune disease of the testis and ovary, autoimmune endocrine diseases, autoimmune myocarditis, autoimmune neutropenia, autoimmune polyendocrinopathies, autoimmune polyglandular syndromes (or polyglandular endocrinopathy syndromes), autoimmune thrombocytopenia, Bechet disease, Berger's disease (IgA nephropathy), bronchiolitis obliterans (n
  • Type-1 and Type-2 diabetes may be treated using known antibodies against B-cell antigens, such as CD22 (epratuzumab), CD74 (milatuzumab), CD19 (hA19), CD20 (veltuzumab) or HLA-DR (hL243) (see, e.g., Winer et al., 2011, Nature Med 17:610-18).
  • Anti-CD3 antibodies also have been proposed for therapy of type 1 diabetes (Cernea et al., 2010, Diabetes Metab Rev 26:602-05).
  • kits containing anti-CD22 antibodies, antibody combinations and/or antibody constructs and/or other components may concern kits containing anti-CD22 antibodies, antibody combinations and/or antibody constructs and/or other components.
  • Such components may include a targetable construct.
  • a targetable construct may be attached to one or more different therapeutic and/or diagnostic agents.
  • composition containing components for administration is not formulated for delivery via the alimentary canal, such as by oral delivery
  • a device capable of delivering the kit components through some other route may be included.
  • the kit components may be packaged together or separated into two or more containers.
  • the containers may be vials that contain sterile, lyophilized formulations of a composition that are suitable for reconstitution.
  • a kit may also contain one or more buffers suitable for reconstitution and/or dilution of other reagents.
  • Other containers that may be used include, but are not limited to, a pouch, tray, box, tube, or the like.
  • Kit components may be packaged and maintained sterilely within the containers. Another component that can be included is instructions to a person using a kit for its use.
  • DCC dicyclohexylcarbodiimide
  • NHS N-hydroxysuccinimide
  • DMAP 4-dimethylaminopyridine
  • EEDQ 2-ethoxy-1-ethoxycarbonyl-1,2-dihydroquinoline
  • MMT monomethoxytrityl
  • PABOH p-aminobenzyl alcohol
  • PEG polyethylene glycol
  • SMCC succinimidyl 4-(N-maleimidomethyl)cyclohexane-1-carboxylate
  • TBAF tetrabutylammonium fluoride
  • TBDMS tert-butyldimethylsilyl chloride.
  • Chloroformates of hydroxy compounds in the following examples were prepared using triphosgene and DMAP according to the procedure described in Moon et al. (J. Medicinal Chem. 51:6916-6926, 2008). Extractive work-up refers to extraction with chloroform, dichloromethane or ethyl acetate, and washing optionally with saturated bicarbonate, water, and with saturated sodium chloride. Flash chromatography was done using 230-400 mesh silica gel and a methanol-dichloromethane gradient, using up to 15% v/v methanol-dichloromethane, unless otherwise stated.
  • Reverse phase HPLC was performed by Method A using a 7.8 ⁇ 300 mm C18 HPLC column, fitted with a precolumn filter, and using a solvent gradient of 100% solvent A to 100% solvent B in 10 minutes at a flow rate of 3 mL per minute and maintaining at 100% solvent B at a flow rate of 4.5 mL per minute for 5 or 10 minutes; or by Method B using a 4.6 ⁇ 30 mm C18, 2.5 ⁇ m, column, fitted with a precolumn filter, using the solvent gradient of 100% solvent A to 100% of solvent B at a flow rate of 1.5 mL per minutes for 4 min and 100% of solvent B at a flow rate of 2 mL per minutes for 1 minutes.
  • Solvent A was 0.3% aqueous ammonium acetate, pH 4.46 while solvent B was 9:1 acetonitrile-aqueous ammonium acetate (0.3%), pH 4.46.
  • HPLC was monitored by a dual in-line absorbance detector set at 360 nm and 254 nm.
  • a maleimide-containing acetylenic reagent 4-(N-maleimidomethyl)-N-(2-propynyl)cyclohexane-1-carboxamide, required for click cycloaddition, was prepared by reacting 0.107 g of SMCC and 0.021 mL of propargylamine (0.018 g; 1.01 equiv.) in dichloromethane using 1.1 equiv. of diisopropylethylamine. After 1 h, the solvent was removed and the product was purified by flash chromatography to obtain 83 mg of the product (colorless powder).
  • Electrospray mass spectrum showed peaks at m/e 275 (M+H) and a base peak at m/e 192 in the positive ion mode, consistent with the structure calculated for C 15 H 18 N 2 O 3 : 275.1390 (M+H). found: 275.1394 (exact mass).
  • This intermediate (200 mg) was deprotected with diethylamine (10 mL), and the product (135 mg) was obtained in ⁇ 90% purity after flash chromatography. HPLC: t R 10.91 min; electrospray mass spectrum: M+Na at m/z 527.
  • This product (135 mg) was coupled with the commercially available O-(2-azidoethyl)-O′—(N-diglycolyl-2-aminoethyl)heptaethyleneglycol (‘PEG-N 3 ’; 150 mg, 1.1 equiv.) in presence of EEDQ (72 mg, 1.1 equiv.) in 10 mL of dichloromethane, and stirred overnight at ambient temperature.
  • R can be a substituted alkyl such as (CH 2 ) n —N(CH 3 ) 2 where n is 2-10, or a simple alkyl such as (CH 2 )n-CH 3 where n is 0-10, or it can be an alkoxy moiety such as “CH 3 —(CH 2 )n-O—” where n is 0-10, or a substituted alkoxy moiety such as such as O—(CH 2 ) n —N(CH 3 ) 2 where n is 2-10 and wherein the terminal amino group is optionally in the form of a quaternary salt for enhanced aqueous solubility, or “R 1 O—(CH 2 —CH 2 —O) n —CH 2 —CH 2 —O—” where R 1 is ethyl or methyl and n is an integer with values of 0-10.
  • R “—O—(CH 2 ) 2 —OCH 3 ”.
  • These 10-hydroxy derivatives are readily prepared by treatment with the chloroformate of the chosen reagent, if the final derivative is to be a carbonate.
  • the 10-hydroxy-containing camptothecin such as SN-38 is treated with a molar equivalent of the chloroformate in dimethylformamide using triethylamine as the base. Under these conditions, the 20-OH position is unaffected.
  • the acid chloride of the chosen reagent is used.
  • Such derivatizations are conveniently accomplished using advanced intermediates as illustrated for simple ethyl carbonates of Examples 3 and 4.
  • Valinol is coupled to ‘PEG-N3’ of Scheme 1 according to the procedure described in Example 1.
  • the product is reacted with 0.4 molar equivalent of triphosgene, 3.1 molar equivalent of DMAP, in dichloromethane.
  • the chloroformate so formed is reacted with an equimolar amount of paclitaxel for 15 minutes at ambient temperature.
  • the reactive 2′-hydroxyl group of paclitaxel (the side chain secondary hydroxyl group) reacts with the chloroformate of the cross-linker.
  • the product is isolated by flash chromatography.
  • This intermediate (0.1 mmol) is dissolved in DMSO (1.5 mL) and water (0.4 mL), and reacted with 60 mg of 4-(N-maleimidomethyl)-N-(2-propynyl)cyclohexane-1-carboxamide (prepared as described in Example 1) and 15 mg of cuprous bromide and stirred for 30 min at ambient temperature. Flash chromatography, after work up of the reaction mixture, furnishes the bifunctional paclitaxel, namely CL6-paclitaxel.
  • L-Valinol (40 mg) is reacted with commercially available Fmoc-Lys(MMT)-OH, and the product is then reacted with O-(2-azidoethyl)-O′—(N-diglycolyl-2-aminoethyl)heptaethyleneglycol (‘PEG-N 3 ’), as described in Example 2.
  • the chloroformate of this derivative is formed by the method of Example-6, and reacted with an equimolar amount of paclitaxel.
  • the reactive 2′-hydroxyl group of paclitaxel (the side chain secondary hydroxyl group) reacts with the chloroformate of the cross-linker.
  • Valinol is coupled to ‘PEG-N3’ of Scheme 1 according to the procedure described in Example 1.
  • the product is reacted with 0.4 molar equivalent of triphosgene, 3.1 molar equivalent of DMAP, in dichloromethane.
  • the chloroformate so formed is reacted with an equimolar amount of morpholino doxorubicin for 15 minutes at ambient temperature.
  • the primary hydroxyl group of morpholino doxorubicin reacts with the chloroformate of the cross-linker.
  • the product is isolated by flash chromatography.
  • This intermediate (0.1 mmol) is dissolved in DMSO (1.5 mL) and water (0.4 mL), and reacted with 60 mg of 4-(N-maleimidomethyl)-N-(2-propynyl)cyclohexane-1-carboxamide (prepared as described in Example 1) and 15 mg of cuprous bromide and stirred for 30 min at ambient temperature. Flash chromatography, after work up of the reaction mixture, furnishes the bifunctional paclitaxel, namely CL6-[morpholino doxorubicin].
  • L-Valinol (40 mg) is reacted with commercially available Fmoc-Lys(MMT)-OH, and the product is then reacted with O-(2-azidoethyl)-O′—(N-diglycolyl-2-aminoethyl)heptaethyleneglycol (‘PEG-N 3 ’), as described in Example 2.
  • the chloroformate of this derivative is formed by the method of Example-6, and reacted with an equimolar amount of morpholino doxorubicin.
  • the primary hydroxyl group of morpholino doxorubicin reacts with the chloroformate of the cross-linker.
  • This intermediate ((1) in Scheme 4; 0.93 g) was added in situ to activated SN-38, and the latter ((2) in Scheme 4) was prepared by reacting SN-38 (0.3 g) with p-nitrophenylchloroformate (0.185 g) and DIEA (0.293 mL) in DMF for 1 h. After removing solvent, the residue was purified on deactivated silica gel to obtain 0.442 g as white solid.
  • This intermediate (0.442 g) was deprotected with a mixture of trifluoroacetic acid (1 mL) and anisole (0.1 mL) in methylene chloride (5 mL), followed by precipitation with ether to obtain 0.197 g of the product ((3) in Scheme 4) as white solid.
  • This intermediate (0.197 g) was coupled with activated azide-containing-dipeptide incorporated-PEG-linker ((5) in Scheme 4), which activation was done by reacting PEG-linker ((4) in Scheme 4; 0.203 g) with bis(4-nitrophenyl) carbonate (0.153 g) and DIEA (0.044 mL) in methylene chloride (8 mL). Flash chromatography yielded 0.2 g of azide-derivatized SN-38 intermediate product ((6) in Scheme 4) as a glassy solid. HPLC ret. time: 2.8 min.
  • Electrospray mass spectrum showed peaks at m/e 1740.5 (M+H), m/e 1762.9 (M+Na), m/e 1774.9 (M+Cl ⁇ ), consistent with structure.
  • This intermediate ((6) in Scheme 4; 0.2 g) was subjected to click cycloaddition with 4-(N-maleimidomethyl)-N-(2-propynyl)cyclohexane-1-carboxamide (0.067 g) in methylene chloride in the presence of CuBr (0.007 g), DIEA (0.008 mL) and triphenylphosphine (0.012 g) for 18 h.
  • Each antibody was reduced with dithiothreitol (DTT), used in a 50-to-70-fold molar excess, in 40 mM PBS, pH 7.4, containing 5.4 mM EDTA, in a 37° C. bath for 45 min.
  • DTT dithiothreitol
  • the reduced product was purified by size-exclusion chromatography and/or diafiltration, and was buffer-exchanged into a suitable buffer at pH 6.5.
  • the thiol content was determined by Ellman's assay, and was in the 6.5-to-8.5 SH/IgG range.
  • the antibodies were reduced with Tris(2-carboxyethyl) phosphine (TCEP) in phosphate buffer at a pH in the range of 5 to 7, followed by in situ conjugation.
  • TCEP Tris(2-carboxyethyl) phosphine
  • the reduced MAb was reacted with ⁇ 10-to-15-fold molar excess of CL6-SN-38 of Example 1, or CL7-SN-38 of Example 2, or CL6-SN-38-10-O-CO 2 Et of Example 3, or CL7-SN-38-10-O-CO 2 Et of Example 4, or CL2A-SN-38 of Example 10, or CL2E-SN-38 of Example 11 using DMSO at 7-15% v/v as a co-solvent, and incubating for 20 min at ambient temperature.
  • the conjugate was purified by centrifuged SEC, passage through a hydrophobic column, and finally by ultrafiltration-diafiltration.
  • the product was assayed for SN-38 by absorbance at 366 nm and correlating with standard values, while the protein concentration was deduced from absorbance at 280 nm, corrected for spillover of SN-38 absorbance at this wavelength.
  • the SN-38/MAb substitution ratios were determined.
  • the purified conjugates were stored as lyophilized formulations in glass vials, capped under vacuum and stored in a ⁇ 20° C. freezer.
  • MSR SN-38 molar substitution ratios
  • the purified conjugates are contained in the pH range of 5.5 to 7.5 in any of the following Good's biological buffers derived from: 2-(N-morpholino)ethanesulfonic acid (MES), N-(2-acetamido)-2-iminodiacetic acid (ADA), 1,4-piperazinediethanesulfonic acid (PIPES), N-(2-acetamido)-2-aminoethanesulfonic acid (ACES), N,N-bis(2-hydroxyethyl)-2-aminoethanesulfonic acid (BES), N-tris(hydroxymethyl)methyl-2-aminoethanesulfonic acid (TES), and N-(2-hydroxyethyl)piperazine-N′-(2-ethanesulfonic acid) or HEPES.
  • MES 2-(N-morpholino)ethanesulfonic acid
  • ADA N-(2-acetamido)-2-iminodiacetic acid
  • PPES
  • the most preferred buffer is 25 mM MES, pH 6.5.
  • a solution (69 mL; 16.78 mg/mL protein concentration) of the purified CL2A-SN-38 conjugate of the anti-CD22 antibody, hLL2, namely hLL2-CL2A-SN-38, in 25 mM MES, pH 6.5 buffer was diluted with 34.1 mL of the same buffer, and mixed with 11.6 mL of 250 mM trehalose and 1.16 mL of 1% polysorbate 80.
  • the formulated solution was aliquotted in 50-mg aliquots in various vials, and lyophilized.
  • the vials containing lyophilized immunoconjugate were sealed under vacuum, and stored at 2-8° C. in a refrigerator. The lyophilized immunoconjugate was stable under these conditions.
  • FIG. 1 shows a Capan 1 pancreatic tumor model, wherein specific CL2A-SN-38 conjugates of hRS7 (anti-EGP-1), hPAM4 (anti-mucin), and hMN-14 (anti-CEACAM5) antibodies showed better efficacies than control hA20-CL2A-SN-38 conjugate (anti-CD20) and untreated control.
  • ADC antibody-drug conjugate
  • Epratuzumab humanized anti-CD22 MAb
  • Epratuzumab is an internalizing antibody that has been shown to be safe and therapeutically effective as a naked antibody alone and in combination with rituximab. Epratuzumab is currently being studied in pediatric ALL, as well as a radioconjugate in NHL. (See, e.g., Leonard et al., 2008, Cancer 113:2714-23; Raetz et al., 2008, J Clin Oncol 26:3756-62; Morschhauser et al., 2010, J Clin Oncol 28:3709-16).
  • epratuzumab is not limited to B cell malignancies, but has also been proposed for autoimmune diseases such as systemic lupus erythematosus (SLE) (Domer et al., 2006, Arthritis Res Ther 8:R74; Daridon et al., 2010, Arthritis Res Ther 12:R204).
  • SLE systemic lupus erythematosus
  • Veltuzumab (humanized anti-CD20) has shown anti-proliferative, apoptotic and ADCC effects in vitro similar to rituximab, but with significantly slower off-rates and increased CDC in several human lymphoma cell lines (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 7,919,273, incorporated herein by reference from Col. 34, line 15 to Col. 72, line 2). Very low doses of veltuzumab, given either intravenously or subcutaneously, depleted B cells in normal cynomolgus monkeys and controlled tumor growth in mice bearing human lymphomas. Veltuzumab has been clinically studied in over 150 patients with lymphomas and autoimmune diseases.
  • non-Hodgkin lymphoma In non-Hodgkin lymphoma (NHL), infusions of 80-750 mg/m 2 were well tolerated when given once-weekly for four doses, with the only toxicity being transient mild-moderate infusion reactions. Objective tumor responses, including durable complete responses, occurred at all dose levels. Subcutaneous injections of low doses (80-320 mg) have also proved to be safe and pharmacologically active, producing objective responses, including durable complete responses, at rates comparable to those reported with rituximab, in patients with NHL and immune thrombocytopenia.
  • Epratuzumab was conjugated with SN-38 (E-SN-38) at a mole ratio of ⁇ 6:1, using a CL2A linker as described in Examples 10 and 12 above. Conjugation had no effect on the affinity of the antibody for the target antigen (data not shown).
  • the conjugate was designed to be released slowly in the presence of serum (50% released over ⁇ 1.5 days), allowing liberation of the drug when internalized, but also being released locally after binding to the tumor.
  • serum 50% released over ⁇ 1.5 days
  • In vitro and in vivo studies were performed to assess the activity of the conjugate against several subcutaneously- or intravenously-inoculated B-cell lymphoma cell lines. In vivo studies also examined combination therapy using E-SN-38 and the anti-CD20 antibody veltuzumab (V).
  • Nude or SCID mice were implanted SC with Ramos cells (Burkitt's lymphoma) or IV with WSU-FSCCL (follicular lymphoma, FIG. 4 , FIG. 5 ) or 697 (ALL, FIG. 6 ) cell lines. All doses of immunoconjugates or drugs were given intraperitoneally, twice weekly for 4 weeks. Irinotecan (CPT-11) was administered at the same mole equivalent as the antibody-conjugated SN-38. All dose levels were well tolerated in mice, with toxicity only found at doses of 2 ⁇ 30 mg (2 ⁇ 1500 mg/kg) For Ramos, the endpoint was time to progression to 3.0 cm 3 tumor size. For WSU-FSCCL and 697, therapy was started 5 days after tumor cell injection. The end of study was progression to hind-leg paralysis, 20% or greater loss in body weight, or other signs of stress. Statistical analysis was by log-rank test.
  • E-SN-38 was active in mice at a dose of 2 x ⁇ 0.5 mg weekly for 4 weeks (50 mg/kg per week). Toxicology studies in monkeys and rabbits of other IgG-SN-38 conjugatesw have found a human equivalent of 40 mg/kg/week to be non-toxic, which is approximately 25 mg SN-38 equivalents/m 2 . Thus, the therapeutic window of emab-SN-38 is at least 10:1.
  • Nude mice bearing SC Ramos human lymphoma had significant selective anti-tumor activity compared to a control, non-targeting, IgG-SN-38 conjugate, at a dosing regimen of 75 to 250 ⁇ g of the conjugates given twice-weekly for 4 weeks ( FIG. 7 ). Responses improved in a dose-dependent manner for both the specific and irrelevant immunoconjugates.
  • E-SN-38 conjugate combined with V was significantly better than all other treatment or control groups (P ⁇ 0.05).
  • E-SN-38 ADC is a potent therapeutic, even at non-toxic dose levels, and shows significantly enhanced efficacy when combined with anti-CD20 immunotherapy, representing an important new ADC treatment regimen for B cell diseases.
  • the hLL1, hLL2, hA20 and hL243 antibodies were prepared as previously described and as summarized below.
  • the constant region sequences of each of the hLL1, hLL2, hA20 and hL243 antibodies are as shown below in SEQ ID NO:14 (heavy chain constant region amino acid sequence); SEQ ID NO:134 (heavy chain constant region DNA sequence); SEQ ID NO:135 (light chain constant region amino acid sequence); and SEQ ID NO:136 (light chain constant region amino acid sequence).
  • SEQ ID NO:14 heavy chain constant region amino acid sequence
  • SEQ ID NO:134 heavy chain constant region DNA sequence
  • SEQ ID NO:135 light chain constant region amino acid sequence
  • SEQ ID NO:136 light chain constant region amino acid sequence
  • Heavy chain constant region amino acid sequence (CH1-Hinge-CH2-CH3) (SEQ ID NO: 14) ASTKGPSVFPLAPSSKSTSGGTAALGCLVKDYFPEPVTVSWNSGALTSGVHTFPAVLQ SSGLYSLSSVVTVPSSSLGTQTYICNVNHKPSNTKVDKRVEPKSCDKTHTCPPCPAPEL LGGPSVFLFPPKPKDTLMISRTPEVTCVVVDVSHEDPEVKFNWYVDGVEVHNAKTKP REEQYNSTYRVVSVVSVLTVLHQDWLNGKEYKCKVSNKALPAPIEKTISKAKGQPREPQV YTLPPSREEMTKNQVSLTCLVKGFYPSDIAVEWESNGQPENNYKTTPPVLDSDGSFFL YSKLTVDKSRWQQGNVFSCSVMHEALHNHYTQKSLSPGK Heavy chain constant region DNA sequence (SEQ ID NO: 134) GCCTCCACCAAGGGCCCATCGGTCTTC
  • the hLL1 anti-CD74 antibody was prepared as described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,772,373 (incorporated by reference from Col. 3, line 54 to Col. 5, line 32 and Col. 34, line 15 to Col. 40, line 45, FIGS. 1A , 1 B, 2 A, 2 B, 3 A, 3 B, 4 A, 4 B).
  • the variable region sequences of the light and heavy chains of the hLL1 antibody are as described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,772,373 (e.g., FIG. 3 and FIG. 4 ).
  • the hLL1 VHB sequence represented the minus strand of the hLL1 VH domain complementary to nt 173 to 337.
  • the 3′-terminal sequences (22 nt residues) of hLL1VHA and B were complementary to each other.
  • the 3′-ends of hLL1 VHA and B annealed to form a short double stranded DNA.
  • Each annealed end served as a primer for the transcription of single stranded DNA, resulting in a double strand DNA composed of the nt 20 to 337 of hLL1VH.
  • This DNA was further amplified in the presence of two short oligonucleotides, hLL1VHBACK and hLL1VHFOR (U.S.
  • Double-stranded PCR-amplified product for hLL1VH was gel-purified, restriction-digested with PstI and BstEII and cloned into the complementary PstI/BstEII sites of the heavy chain staging vector, VHpBS2.
  • hLL1VKA 159-mer
  • hLL1VKB 169-mer
  • the hLL1 VKA sequence represented nt 16 to 174 of the hLL1VK domain.
  • the hLL1VKB sequence represented the minus strand of the hLL1VK domain complementary to nt 153 to 321.
  • hLL1VKA and B were amplified by two short oligonucleotides hLL1VKBACK and hLL1VKFOR (U.S. Pat. No. 7,772,373) to form double-stranded DNA.
  • the final expression vector hLL1pdHL2 was constructed by sequentially subcloning the XbaI-BamHI and XhoI/BamHI fragments of hLL1VK and VH, respectively, into pdHL2.
  • the pdHL2 vector is known in the art (see, e.g., Gillies et al., 1989, J Immunol Methods 125:191).
  • the pdHL2 vector provides expression of both IgG heavy and light chain genes that are independently controlled by two metallothionine promoters and IgH enhancers.
  • Use of pdHL2 as an expression vector for antibody production has been disclosed, for example, in Losman et al., 1999, Clin Cancer Res 5:3101s-05s.
  • the resulting vector was designated as hLL1VKpdHL2.
  • hLL1pdHL2 The fragment was subcloned into the XhoI and HindIII site of hLL1VKpdHL2 with the aid of linker comparable to both BamHI and HindIII ends, resulting in the final expression vector, designated as hLL1pdHL2.
  • hLL1pdHL2 Approximately 30 ⁇ g of hLL1pdHL2 was linearized by digestion with Sal I and transfected into Sp2/0-Ag14 cells by electroporation. The transfected cells were plated into 96-well plate for 2 days and then selected for MTX resistance. Supernatants from colonies surviving selection were monitored for chimeric antibody secretion by ELISA assay. Positive cell clones were expanded and hLL1 was purified from cell culture supernatant.
  • the hLL2 anti-CD22 antibody was prepared as described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,187,287 (incorporated by reference from Col. 3, line 35 to Col. 4, line 34 and Col. 11, line 40 to Col. 20, line 38, FIGS. 1 , 4 A, 4 B, 5 A, 5 B).
  • the variable region sequences of the light and heavy chains of the hLL2 antibody are as described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,187,287 (e.g., FIG. 1 , FIG. 5 ).
  • the LL2 antibody was deposited on May 27, 2005, with the American Type Culture Collection, Manassas, Va. (ATCC Accession No.
  • PTA-6735 formerly the EPB-2 monoclonal antibody, which was produced against human Raji cells derived from a Burkitt lymphoma. (Pawlak-Byczkowska et al., 1989, Cancer Res. 49:4568.) The cloning, transfection and protein production were performed as described above for the hLL1 antibody.
  • the hA20 anti-CD20 antibody was prepared as described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,919,273 (incorporated by reference from Col. 7, line 25 to Col. 9, line 4 and Col. 34, line 15 to Col. 72, line 2, FIGS. 1A , 1 B, 2 A, 2 B, 3 A, 3 B).
  • the variable region sequences of the light and heavy chains of the hA20 antibody are as described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,919,273 (e.g., FIG. 2 , FIG. 3 ).
  • the cloning, transfection and protein production were performed as described above for the hLL1 antibody.
  • the hL243 anti-HLA-DR antibody was prepared as described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,612,180 (incorporated by reference from Col. 4, line 16 to Col. 6, line 38 and Col. 46, line 50 to Col. 60, line 67, FIGS. 1 to 6 ).
  • the variable region sequences of the light and heavy chains of the hL243 antibody are as described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,612,180 (e.g., FIG. 3 , FIG. 4 , FIG. 5 , FIG. 6 ).
  • the cloning, transfection and protein production were performed as described above for the hLL1 antibody.
  • hPAM4 U.S. Pat. No. 7,282,567
  • hA19 U.S. Pat. No. 7,109,304
  • hIMMU31 U.S. Pat. No. 7,300,655
  • hMu-9 U.S. Pat. No. 7,387,773
  • hMN-14 U.S. Pat. No. 6,676,924
  • hMN-15 U.S. Pat. No. 7,541,440
  • hR1 U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/689,336)
  • hRS7 U.S. Pat. No. 7,238,785
  • hMN-3 U.S. Pat. No.
  • the DNL technique can be used to make dimers, trimers, tetramers, hexamers, etc. comprising virtually any antibody, antibody fragment, immunomodulator, cytokine, enzyme, peptide, PEG moiety, toxin, xenoantigen or other effector moiety.
  • antibodies, cytokines or toxins may be produced as fusion proteins comprising either a dimerization and docking domain (DDD) or anchoring domain (AD) sequence.
  • DDD and AD moieties may be joined to antibodies, antibody fragments, cytokines, toxins or other effector moieties as fusion proteins, the skilled artisan will realize that other methods of conjugation exist, such as chemical cross-linking, click chemistry reaction, etc.
  • the technique is not limiting and any protein or peptide of use may be produced as an AD or DDD fusion protein for incorporation into a DNL construct.
  • the AD and DDD conjugates may comprise any molecule that may be cross-linked to an AD or DDD sequence using any cross-linking technique known in the art.
  • a dendrimer or other polymeric moiety such as polyethyleneimine or polyethylene glycol (PEG), may be incorporated into a DNL construct, as described in further detail below.
  • the plasmid vector pdHL2 has been used to produce a number of antibodies and antibody-based constructs. See Gillies et al., J Immunol Methods (1989), 125:191-202; Losman et al., Cancer (Phila) (1997), 80:2660-6.
  • the di-cistronic mammalian expression vector directs the synthesis of the heavy and light chains of IgG.
  • the vector sequences are mostly identical for many different IgG-pdHL2 constructs, with the only differences existing in the variable domain (V H and V L ) sequences. Using molecular biology tools known to those skilled in the art, these IgG expression vectors can be converted into Fab-DDD or Fab-AD expression vectors.
  • Fab-DDD expression vectors To generate Fab-DDD expression vectors, the coding sequences for the hinge, CH2 and CH3 domains of the heavy chain were replaced with a sequence encoding the first 4 residues of the hinge, a 14 residue Gly-Ser linker and a DDD moiety, such as the first 44 residues of human RII ⁇ (referred to as DDD1, SEQ ID NO:15).
  • Fab-AD expression vectors To generate Fab-AD expression vectors, the sequences for the hinge, CH2 and CH3 domains of IgG were replaced with a sequence encoding the first 4 residues of the hinge, a 15 residue Gly-Ser linker and an AD moiety, such as a 17 residue synthetic AD called AKAP-IS (referred to as AD1, SEQ ID NO:17), which was generated using bioinformatics and peptide array technology and shown to bind RII ⁇ dimers with a very high affinity (0.4 nM). See Alto, et al. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., U.S.A (2003), 100:4445-50.
  • Two shuttle vectors were designed to facilitate the conversion of IgG-pdHL2 vectors to either Fab-DDD1 or Fab-AD1 expression vectors, as described below.
  • the CH1 domain was amplified by PCR using the pdHL2 plasmid vector as a template.
  • the left PCR primer consisted of the upstream (5′) end of the CH1 domain and a SacII restriction endonuclease site, which is 5′ of the CH1 coding sequence.
  • the right primer consisted of the sequence coding for the first 4 residues of the hinge followed by four glycines and a serine, with the final two codons (GS) comprising a Bam HI restriction site.
  • the 410 bp PCR amplimer was cloned into the PGEMT® PCR cloning vector (PROMEGA®, Inc.) and clones were screened for inserts in the T7 (5′) orientation.
  • a duplex oligonucleotide was synthesized to code for the amino acid sequence of DDD1 preceded by 11 residues of the linker peptide, with the first two codons comprising a BamHI restriction site. A stop codon and an EagI restriction site are appended to the 3′ end.
  • the encoded polypeptide sequence is shown below.
  • oligonucleotides designated RIIA1-44 top and RIIA1-44 bottom, which overlap by 30 base pairs on their 3′ ends, were synthesized and combined to comprise the central 154 base pairs of the 174 bp DDD1 sequence.
  • the oligonucleotides were annealed and subjected to a primer extension reaction with Taq polymerase. Following primer extension, the duplex was amplified by PCR. The amplimer was cloned into PGEMT® and screened for inserts in the T7 (5′) orientation.
  • a duplex oligonucleotide was synthesized to code for the amino acid sequence of AD1 preceded by 11 residues of the linker peptide with the first two codons comprising a BamHI restriction site. A stop codon and an EagI restriction site are appended to the 3′ end.
  • the encoded polypeptide sequence is shown below.
  • AKAP-IS Top and AKAP-IS Bottom Two complimentary overlapping oligonucleotides encoding the above peptide sequence, designated AKAP-IS Top and AKAP-IS Bottom, were synthesized and annealed. The duplex was amplified by PCR. The amplimer was cloned into the PGEMT® vector and screened for inserts in the T7 (5′) orientation.
  • a 190 bp fragment encoding the DDD1 sequence was excised from PGEMT® with BamHI and NotI restriction enzymes and then ligated into the same sites in CH1-PGEMT® to generate the shuttle vector CH1-DDD1-PGEMT®.
  • a 110 bp fragment containing the AD1 sequence was excised from PGEMT® with BamHI and NotI and then ligated into the same sites in CH1-PGEMT® to generate the shuttle vector CH1-AD1-PGEMT®.
  • CH1-DDD1 or CH1-AD1 can be incorporated into any IgG construct in the pdHL2 vector.
  • the entire heavy chain constant domain is replaced with one of the above constructs by removing the SacII/EagI restriction fragment (CH1-CH3) from pdHL2 and replacing it with the SacII/EagI fragment of CH1-DDD1 or CH1-AD1, which is excised from the respective PGEMT® shuttle vector.
  • h679-Fd-AD1-pdHL2 is an expression vector for production of h679 Fab with AD1 coupled to the carboxyl terminal end of the CH1 domain of the Fd via a flexible Gly/Ser peptide spacer composed of 14 amino acid residues.
  • a pdHL2-based vector containing the variable domains of h679 was converted to h679-Fd-AD1-pdHL2 by replacement of the SacII/EagI fragment with the CH1-AD1 fragment, which was excised from the CH1-AD1-SV3 shuttle vector with SacII and EagI.
  • the h679-Fd-AD1-pdHL2 vector was linearized by digestion with Sal I restriction endonuclease and transfected into Sp/EEE myeloma cells (U.S. Pat. No. 7,785,880) by electroporation.
  • the di-cistronic expression vector directs the synthesis and secretion of both h679 kappa light chain and h679 Fd-AD1, which combine to form h679 Fab-AD1.
  • the cells were plated in 96-well tissue culture plates and transfectant clones were selected with 0.05 ⁇ M methotrexate (MTX).
  • Clones were screened for protein expression by ELISA using microtiter plates coated with a BSA-IMP260 (HSG) conjugate and detection with HRP-conjugated goat anti-human Fab.
  • HSG BSA-IMP260
  • HRP-conjugated goat anti-human Fab HRP-conjugated goat anti-human Fab.
  • BIACORE® analysis using an HSG (IMP239) sensorchip was used to determine the productivity by measuring the initial slope obtained from injection of diluted media samples. The highest producing clone had an initial productivity of approximately 30 mg/L.
  • a total of 230 mg of h679-Fab-AD1 was purified from 4.5 liters of roller bottle culture by single-step IMP291 affinity chromatography. Culture media was concentrated approximately 10-fold by ultrafiltration before loading onto an IMP291-affigel column.
  • C-DDD1-Fd-hMN-14-pdHL2 is an expression vector for production of a stable dimer that comprises two copies of a fusion protein C-DDD1-Fab-hMN-14, in which DDD1 is linked to hMN-14 Fab at the carboxyl terminus of CH1 via a flexible peptide spacer.
  • the plasmid vector hMN-14(I)-pdHL2 which has been used to produce hMN-14 IgG, was converted to C-DDD1-Fd-hMN-14-pdHL2 by digestion with SacII and EagI restriction endonucleases to remove the CH1-CH3 domains and insertion of the CH1-DDD1 fragment, which was excised from the CH1-DDD1-SV3 shuttle vector with SacII and EagI.
  • the same technique has been utilized to produce plasmids for Fab expression of a wide variety of known antibodies, such as hLL1, hLL2, hPAM4, hR1, hRS7, hMN-14, hMN-15, hA19, hA20 and many others.
  • the antibody variable region coding sequences were present in a pdHL2 expression vector and the expression vector was converted for production of an AD- or DDD-fusion protein as described above.
  • AD- and DDD-fusion proteins comprising a Fab fragment of any of such antibodies may be combined, in an approximate ratio of two DDD-fusion proteins per one AD-fusion protein, to generate a trimeric DNL construct comprising two Fab fragments of a first antibody and one Fab fragment of a second antibody.
  • C-DDD1-Fd-hMN-14-pdHL2 vector was transfected into Sp2/0-derived myeloma cells by electroporation.
  • C-DDD1-Fd-hMN-14-pdHL2 is a di-cistronic expression vector, which directs the synthesis and secretion of both hMN-14 kappa light chain and hMN-14 Fd-DDD1, which combine to form C-DDD1-hMN-14 Fab.
  • the fusion protein forms a stable homodimer via the interaction of the DDD1 domain.
  • Clones were screened for protein expression by ELISA using microtiter plates coated with WI2 (a rat anti-id monoclonal antibody to hMN-14) and detection with HRP-conjugated goat anti-human Fab.
  • the initial productivity of the highest producing C-DDD1-Fab-hMN14 Fab clone was 60 mg/L.
  • AD1-C is a peptide that was made synthetically consisting of the AD1 sequence and a carboxyl terminal cysteine residue, which was used to couple the peptide to Affigel following reaction of the sulfhydryl group with chloroacetic anhydride.
  • DDD-containing dimer structures specifically bind to the AD1-C-Affigel resin at neutral pH and can be eluted at low pH (e.g., pH 2.5).
  • C-DDD1-Fab-hMN-14 A total of 81 mg of C-DDD1-Fab-hMN-14 was purified from 1.2 liters of roller bottle culture by single-step AD1-C affinity chromatography. Culture media was concentrated approximately 10-fold by ultrafiltration before loading onto an AD1-C-affigel column. The column was washed to baseline with PBS and C-DDD1-Fab-hMN-14 was eluted with 0.1 M Glycine, pH 2.5. SE-HPLC analysis of the eluate showed a single protein peak with a retention time consistent with a 107 kDa protein (not shown). The purity was also confirmed by reducing SDS-PAGE, showing only two bands of molecular size expected for the two polypeptide constituents of C-DDD1-Fab-hMN-14 (not shown).
  • C-DDD1-Fab-hMN-14 The binding activity of C-DDD1-Fab-hMN-14 was determined by SE-HPLC analysis of samples in which the test article was mixed with various amounts of WI2.
  • a sample prepared by mixing WI2 Fab and C-DDD1-Fab-hMN-14 at a molar ratio of 0.75:1 showed three peaks, which were attributed to unbound C-DDD1-Fab-hMN14 (8.71 min), C-DDD1-Fab-hMN-14 bound to one WI2 Fab (7.95 min), and C-DDD1-Fab-hMN14 bound to two WI2 Fabs (7.37 min) (not shown).
  • C-DDD2-Fd-hMN-14-pdHL2 is an expression vector for production of C-DDD2-Fab-hMN-14, which possesses a dimerization and docking domain sequence of DDD2 (SEQ ID NO:16) appended to the carboxyl terminus of the Fd of hMN-14 via a 14 amino acid residue Gly/Ser peptide linker.
  • the fusion protein secreted is composed of two identical copies of hMN-14 Fab held together by non-covalent interaction of the DDD2 domains.
  • the expression vector was engineered as follows. Two overlapping, complimentary oligonucleotides, which comprise the coding sequence for part of the linker peptide and residues 1-13 of DDD2, were made synthetically. The oligonucleotides were annealed and phosphorylated with T4 PNK, resulting in overhangs on the 5′ and 3′ ends that are compatible for ligation with DNA digested with the restriction endonucleases BamHI and PstI, respectively.
  • the duplex DNA was ligated with the shuttle vector CH1-DDD1-PGEMT®, which was prepared by digestion with BamHI and PstI, to generate the shuttle vector CH1-DDD2-PGEMT®.
  • a 507 bp fragment was excised from CH1-DDD2-PGEMT® with SacII and EagI and ligated with the IgG expression vector hMN-14(I)-pdHL2, which was prepared by digestion with SacII and EagI.
  • the final expression construct was designated C-DDD2-Fd-hMN-14-pdHL2. Similar techniques have been utilized to generated DDD2-fusion proteins of the Fab fragments of a number of different humanized antibodies.
  • h679-Fab-AD2 was designed to pair to C-DDD2-Fab-hMN-14.
  • h679-Fd-AD2-pdHL2 is an expression vector for the production of h679-Fab-AD2, which possesses an anchoring domain sequence of AD2 (SEQ ID NO:18) appended to the carboxyl terminal end of the CH1 domain via a 14 amino acid residue Gly/Ser peptide linker.
  • AD2 has one cysteine residue preceding and another one following the anchor domain sequence of AD1.
  • the expression vector was engineered as follows. Two overlapping, complimentary oligonucleotides (AD2 Top and AD2 Bottom), which comprise the coding sequence for AD2 and part of the linker sequence, were made synthetically. The oligonucleotides were annealed and phosphorylated with T4 PNK, resulting in overhangs on the 5′ and 3′ ends that are compatible for ligation with DNA digested with the restriction endonucleases BamHI and SpeI, respectively.
  • duplex DNA was ligated into the shuttle vector CH1-AD1-PGEMT®, which was prepared by digestion with BamHI and SpeI, to generate the shuttle vector CH1-AD2-PGEMT®.
  • a 429 base pair fragment containing CH1 and AD2 coding sequences was excised from the shuttle vector with SacII and EagI restriction enzymes and ligated into h679-pdHL2 vector that prepared by digestion with those same enzymes.
  • the final expression vector is h679-Fd-AD2-pdHL2.
  • a trimeric DNL construct designated TF2 was obtained by reacting C-DDD2-Fab-hMN-14 with h679-Fab-AD2.
  • a pilot batch of TF2 was generated with >90% yield as follows.
  • Protein L-purified C-DDD2-Fab-hMN-14 200 mg was mixed with h679-Fab-AD2 (60 mg) at a 1.4:1 molar ratio.
  • the total protein concentration was 1.5 mg/ml in PBS containing 1 mM EDTA.
  • Subsequent steps involved TCEP reduction, HIC chromatography, DMSO oxidation, and IMP 291 affinity chromatography. Before the addition of TCEP, SE-HPLC did not show any evidence of a 2 b formation.
  • TF2 was purified to near homogeneity by IMP 291 affinity chromatography (not shown).
  • IMP 291 is a synthetic peptide containing the HSG hapten to which the 679 Fab binds (Rossi et al., 2005, Clin Cancer Res 11:7122s-29s).
  • SE-HPLC analysis of the IMP 291 unbound fraction demonstrated the removal of a 4 , a 2 and free kappa chains from the product (not shown).
  • TF2 The functionality of TF2 was determined by BIACORE® assay.
  • TF2, C-DDD1-hMN-14+h679-AD1 (used as a control sample of noncovalent a 2 b complex), or C-DDD2-hMN-14+h679-AD2 (used as a control sample of unreduced a 2 and b components) were diluted to 1 ⁇ g/ml (total protein) and passed over a sensorchip immobilized with HSG.
  • the response for TF2 was approximately two-fold that of the two control samples, indicating that only the h679-Fab-AD component in the control samples would bind to and remain on the sensorchip.
  • TF10 DNL construct A similar protocol was used to generate a trimeric TF10 DNL construct, comprising two copies of a C-DDD2-Fab-hPAM4 and one copy of C-AD2-Fab-679.
  • the TF10 bispecific ([hPAM4] 2 x h679) antibody was produced using the method disclosed for production of the (anti CEA) 2 x anti HSG bsAb TF2, as described above.
  • the TF10 construct bears two humanized PAM4 Fabs and one humanized 679 Fab.
  • the two fusion proteins (hPAM4-DDD2 and h679-AD2) were expressed independently in stably transfected myeloma cells.
  • the tissue culture supernatant fluids were combined, resulting in a two-fold molar excess of hPAM4-DDD2.
  • the reaction mixture was incubated at room temperature for 24 hours under mild reducing conditions using 1 mM reduced glutathione. Following reduction, the DNL reaction was completed by mild oxidation using 2 mM oxidized glutathione.
  • TF10 was isolated by affinity chromatography using IMP291-affigel resin, which binds with high specificity to the h679 Fab.
  • the IgG and Fab fusion proteins shown in Table 7 were constructed and incorporated into DNL constructs.
  • the fusion proteins retained the antigen-binding characteristics of the parent antibodies and the DNL constructs exhibited the antigen-binding activities of the incorporated antibodies or antibody fragments.
  • Cationic polymers such as polylysine, polyethylenimine, or polyamidoamine (PAMAM)-based dendrimers, form complexes with nucleic acids.
  • PAMAM polyamidoamine
  • One approach to improve selectivity and potency of a dendrimeric nanoparticle may be achieved by conjugation with an antibody that internalizes upon binding to target cells.
  • E1-G5/2 We synthesized and characterized a novel immunoconjugate, designated E1-G5/2, which was made by the DNL method to comprise half of a generation 5 (G5) PAMAM dendrimer (G5/2) site-specifically linked to a stabilized dimer of Fab derived from hRS7, a humanized antibody that is rapidly internalized upon binding to the Trop-2 antigen expressed on various solid cancers.
  • G5 generation 5
  • G5/2 PAMAM dendrimer
  • E1-G5/2 was prepared by combining two self-assembling modules, AD2-G5/2 and hRS7-Fab-DDD2, under mild redox conditions, followed by purification on a Protein L column.
  • AD2-G5/2 we derivatized the AD2 peptide with a maleimide group to react with the single thiol generated from reducing a G5 PAMAM with a cystamine core and used reversed-phase HPLC to isolate AD2-G5/2.
  • hRS7-Fab-DDD2 as a fusion protein in myeloma cells, as described in the Examples above.
  • E1-G5/2 The molecular size, purity and composition of E1-G5/2 were analyzed by size-exclusion HPLC, SDS-PAGE, and Western blotting. The biological functions of E1-G5/2 were assessed by binding to an anti-idiotype antibody against hRS7, a gel retardation assay, and a DNase protection assay.
  • E1-G5/2 was shown by size-exclusion HPLC to consist of a major peak (>90%) flanked by several minor peaks (not shown).
  • the three constituents of E1-G5/2 (Fd-DDD2, the light chain, and AD2-G5/2) were detected by reducing SDS-PAGE and confirmed by Western blotting (not shown).
  • Anti-idiotype binding analysis revealed E1-G5/2 contained a population of antibody-dendrimer conjugates of different size, all of which were capable of recognizing the anti-idiotype antibody, thus suggesting structural variability in the size of the purchased G5 dendrimer (not shown).
  • the DNL technique can be used to build dendrimer-based nanoparticles that are targetable with antibodies.
  • agents have improved properties as carriers of drugs, plasmids or siRNAs for applications in vitro and in vivo.
  • anti-B-cell antibodies such as anti-CD22 and/or anti-CD20, may be utilized to deliver cytotoxic or cytostatic siRNA species to targeted B-cells for therapy of lymphoma, leukemia, autoimmune or other diseases and conditions.
  • RNA interference has been shown to down-regulate the expression of various proteins such as HER2, VEGF, Raf-1, bcl-2, EGFR and numerous others in preclinical studies. Despite the potential of RNAi to silence specific genes, the full therapeutic potential of RNAi remains to be realized due to the lack of an effective delivery system to target cells in vivo.
  • a DDD2-L-thP14 module comprising truncated human protamine (thP1, residues 8 to 29 of human protamine 1) was produced, in which the sequences of DDD2 and thP1 were fused respectively to the N- and C-terminal ends of a humanized antibody light chain (not shown).
  • the sequence of the truncated hP1 (thP1) is shown below.
  • E1-L-thP1 The purity and molecular integrity of E1-L-thP1 following Protein A purification were determined by size-exclusion HPLC and SDS-PAGE (not shown). In addition, the ability of E1-L-thP1 to bind plasmid DNA or siRNA was demonstrated by the gel shift assay (not shown). E1-L-thP1 was effective at binding short double-stranded oligonucleotides (not shown) and in protecting bound DNA from digestion by nucleases added to the sample or present in serum (not shown).
  • E1-L-thP1 construct The ability of the E1-L-thP1 construct to internalize siRNAs into Trop-2-expressing cancer cells was confirmed by fluorescence microscopy using FITC-conjugated siRNA and the human Calu-3 lung cancer cell line (not shown).
  • the DNL technique was employed to generate E1-L-thP1.
  • the hRS7 IgG-AD module constructed as described in the Examples above, was expressed in myeloma cells and purified from the culture supernatant using Protein A affinity chromatography.
  • the DDD2-L-thP1 module was expressed as a fusion protein in myeloma cells and was purified by Protein L affinity chromatography. Since the CH3-AD2-IgG module possesses two AD2 peptides and each can bind to a DDD2 dimer, with each DDD2 monomer attached to a protamine moiety, the resulting E1-L-thP1 conjugate comprises four protamine groups.
  • E1-L-thp1 was formed in nearly quantitative yield from the constituent modules and was purified to near homogeneity (not shown) with Protein A.
  • DDD2-L-thP1 was purified using Protein L affinity chromatography and assessed by size exclusion HPLC analysis and SDS-PAGE under reducing and nonreducing conditions (data not shown). A major peak was observed at 9.6 min (not shown). SDS-PAGE showed a major band between 30 and 40 kDa in reducing gel and a major band about 60 kDa (indicating a dimeric form of DDD2-L-thP1) in nonreducing gel (not shown). The results of Western blotting confirmed the presence of monomeric DDD2-L-tP1 and dimeric DDD2-L-tP1 on probing with anti-DDD antibodies (not shown).
  • E1-L-thP1 To prepare the E1-L-thP1, hRS7-IgG-AD2 and DDD2-L-thP1 were combined in approximately equal amounts and reduced glutathione (final concentration 1 mM) was added. Following an overnight incubation at room temperature, oxidized glutathione was added (final concentration 2 mM) and the incubation continued for another 24 h.
  • E1-L-thP1 was purified from the reaction mixture by Protein A column chromatography and eluted with 0.1 M sodium citrate buffer (pH 3.5). The product peak (not shown) was neutralized, concentrated, dialyzed with PBS, filtered, and stored in PBS containing 5% glycerol at 2 to 8° C. The composition of E1-L-thP1 was confirmed by reducing SDS-PAGE (not shown), which showed the presence of all three constituents (AD2-appended heavy chain, DDD2-L-htP1, and light chain).
  • DDD2-L-thP1 and E1-L-thP1 were evaluated by gel shift assay.
  • DDD2-L-thP1 retarded the mobility of 500 ng of a linear form of 3-kb DNA fragment in 1% agarose at a molar ratio of 6 or higher (not shown).
  • E1-L-thP1 retarded the mobility of 250 ng of a linear 200-bp DNA duplex in 2% agarose at a molar ratio of 4 or higher (not shown), whereas no such effect was observed for hRS7-IgG-AD2 alone (not shown).
  • the ability of E1-L-thP1 to protect bound DNA from degradation by exogenous DNase and serum nucleases was also demonstrated (not shown).
  • E1-L-thP1 The ability of E1-L-thP1 to promote internalization of bound siRNA was examined in the Trop-2 expressing ME-180 cervical cell line (not shown). Internalization of the E1-L-thP1 complex was monitored using FITC conjugated goat anti-human antibodies. The cells alone showed no fluorescence (not shown). Addition of FITC-labeled siRNA alone resulted in minimal internalization of the siRNA (not shown). Internalization of E1-L-thP1 alone was observed in 60 minutes at 37° C. (not shown). E1-L-thP1 was able to effectively promote internalization of bound FITC-conjugated siRNA (not shown).
  • E1-L-thP1 (10 ⁇ g) was mixed with FITC-siRNA (300 nM) and allowed to form E1-L-thP1-siRNA complexes which were then added to Trop-2-expressing Calu-3 cells. After incubation for 4 h at 37° C. the cells were checked for internalization of siRNA by fluorescence microscopy (not shown).
  • E1-L-thP1 The ability of E1-L-thP1 to induce apoptosis by internalization of siRNA was examined.
  • E1-L-thP1 (10 ⁇ g) was mixed with varying amounts of siRNA (AllStars Cell Death siRNA, Qiagen, Valencia, Calif.).
  • the E1-L-thP1-siRNA complex was added to ME-180 cells. After 72 h of incubation, cells were trypsinized and annexin V staining was performed to evaluate apoptosis.
  • the DNL technology provides a modular approach to efficiently tether multiple protamine molecules to the anti-Trop-2 hRS7 antibody resulting in the novel molecule E1-L-thP1.
  • SDS-PAGE demonstrated the homogeneity and purity of E1-L-thP1.
  • DNase protection and gel shift assays showed the DNA binding activity of E1-L-thP1.
  • E1-L-thP1 internalized in the cells like the parental hRS7 antibody and was able to effectively internalize siRNA molecules into Trop-2-expressing cells, such as ME-180 and Calu-3.
  • the DNL technique is not limited to any specific antibody or siRNA species. Rather, the same methods and compositions demonstrated herein can be used to make targeted delivery complexes comprising any antibody, any siRNA carrier and any siRNA species.
  • the use of a bivalent IgG in targeted delivery complexes would result in prolonged circulating half-life and higher binding avidity to target cells, resulting in increased uptake and improved efficacy.
  • Rap-DDD Rap-DDD
  • humanized IgG-AD modules which were produced in myeloma cells and targeted B-cell lymphomas and leukemias via binding to CD20 (hA20, veltuzumab), CD22 (hLL2, epratuzumab) or HLA-DR (hL243, IMMU-114), to generate 20-Rap, 22-Rap and C2-Rap, respectively.
  • a dimer of Rap was covalently tethered to the C-terminus of each heavy chain of the respective IgG.
  • a control construct, 14-Rap was made similarly, using labetuzumab (hMN-14), that binds to an antigen (CEACAM5) not expressed on B-cell lymphomas/leukemias.
  • Rap-DDD2 (SEQ ID NO: 140) pQDWLTFQKKHITNTRDVDCDNIMSTNLFHCKDKNTFIYSRPEPVKAIC KGIIASKNVLTTSEFYLSDCNVTSRPCKYKLKKSTNKFCVTCENQAPVH FVGVGSC GGGGSLE CGHIQIPPGLTELLQGYTVEVLRQQPPDLVEFAVE YFTRLREARA VE HHHHHHHH
  • Rap-DDD2 The deduced amino acid sequence of secreted Rap-DDD2 is shown above (SEQ ID NO:140). Rap, underlined; linker, italics; DDD2, bold; pQ , amino-terminal glutamine converted to pyroglutamate. Rap-DDD2 was produced in E. coli as inclusion bodies, which were purified by IMAC under denaturing conditions, refolded and then dialyzed into PBS before purification by anion exchange chromatography. SDS-PAGE under reducing conditions resolved a protein band with a Mr appropriate for Rap-DDD2 (18.6 kDa) (not shown). The final yield of purified Rap-DDD2 was 10 mg/L of culture.
  • the DNL method was employed to rapidly generate a panel of IgG-Rap conjugates.
  • the IgG-AD modules were expressed in myeloma cells and purified from the culture supernatant using Protein A affinity chromatography.
  • the Rap-DDD2 module was produced and mixed with IgG-AD2 to form a DNL complex. Since the CH3-AD2-IgG modules possess two AD2 peptides and each can tether a Rap dimer, the resulting IgG-Rap DNL construct comprises four Rap groups and one IgG. IgG-Rap is formed nearly quantitatively from the constituent modules and purified to near homogeneity with Protein A.
  • the CH3-AD2-IgG Prior to the DNL reaction, the CH3-AD2-IgG exists as both a monomer, and a disulfide-linked dimer (not shown).
  • the IgG-Rap resolves as a cluster of high molecular weight bands of the expected size between those for monomeric and dimeric CH3-AD2-IgG (not shown).
  • Reducing conditions which reduces the conjugates to their constituent polypeptides, show the purity of the IgG-Rap and the consistency of the DNL method, as only bands representing heavy-chain-AD2 (HC-AD2), kappa light chain and Rap-DDD2 were visualized (not shown).
  • Rap-DDD2 Reversed phase HPLC analysis of 22-Rap (not shown) resolved a single protein peak at 9.10 min eluting between the two peaks of CH3-AD2-IgG-hLL2, representing the monomeric (7.55 min) and the dimeric (8.00 min) forms.
  • the Rap-DDD2 module was isolated as a mixture of dimer and tetramer (reduced to dimer during DNL), which were eluted at 9.30 and 9.55 min, respectively (not shown).
  • 20-Rap was the most potent IgG-Rap, suggesting that antigen density may be more important than internalization rate. Similar results were obtained for Daudi and Ramos, where 20-Rap (EC50-0.1 nM) was 3-6-fold more potent than 22-Rap (not shown).
  • the rituximab-resistant mantle cell lymphoma line, Jeko-1 exhibits increased CD20 but decreased CD22, compared to Daudi and Ramos.
  • 20-Rap exhibited very potent cytotoxicity (EC 50 ⁇ 20 pM) in Jeko-1, which was 25-fold more potent than 22-Rap (not shown).
  • the DNL method provides a modular approach to efficiently tether multiple cytotoxins onto a targeting antibody, resulting in novel immunotoxins that are expected to show higher in vivo potency due to improved pharmacokinetics and targeting specificity.
  • Targeting Rap with a MAb to a cell surface antigen enhanced its tumor-specific cytotoxicity.
  • Antigen density and internalization rate are both critical factors for the observed in vitro potency of IgG-Rap.
  • In vitro results show that CD20-, CD22-, or HLA-DR-targeted IgG-Rap have potent biologic activity for therapy of B-cell lymphomas and leukemias.
  • the skilled artisan will realize that the modular DNL technique may be utilized to produce Rap DNL constructs targeted to CD22.
  • trimeric DNL constructs may comprise three different effector moieties, for example two different antibody moieties and a cytokine moiety.
  • 20-C2-2b which comprises two copies of IFN- ⁇ 2b and a stabilized F(ab) 2 of hL243 (humanized anti-HLA-DR; IMMU-114) site-specifically linked to veltuzumab (humanized anti-CD20).
  • 20-C22b inhibited each of four lymphoma and eight myeloma cell lines, and was more effective than monospecific CD20-targeted MAb-IFN ⁇ or a mixture comprising the parental antibodies and IFN ⁇ in all but one (HLA-DR ⁇ /CD20 ⁇ ) myeloma line (not shown), suggesting that 20-C2-2b should be useful in the treatment of various hematopoietic disorders.
  • the 20-C2-2b displayed greater cytotoxicity against KMS12-BM (CD20 + /HLA-DR + myeloma) than monospecific MAb-IFN ⁇ that targets only HLA-DR or CD20 (not shown), indicating that all three components in 20-C2-2b can contribute to toxicity.
  • Our findings indicate that a given cell's responsiveness to MAb-IFN ⁇ depends on its sensitivity to IFN ⁇ and the specific antibodies, as well as the expression and density of the targeted antigens.
  • 20-C2-2b has antibody-dependent cellular cytotoxicity (ADCC), but not CDC, and can target both CD20 and HLA-DR, it is useful for therapy of a broad range of hematopoietic disorders that express either or both antigens.
  • ADCC antibody-dependent cellular cytotoxicity
  • the following MAbs were provided by Immunomedics, Inc.: veltuzumab or v-mab (anti-CD20 IgG 1 ), hL243 ⁇ 4p (Immu-114, anti-HLA-DR IgG 4 ), a murine anti-IFN ⁇ MAb, and rat anti-idiotype MAbs to v-mab (WR2) and hL243 (WT).
  • Monospecific MAb-IFN ⁇ (20-2b-2b, 734-2b-2b and C2-2b-2b) and the bispecific HexAb (20-C2-C2) were generated by combination of an IgG-AD2-module with DDD2-modules using the DNL method, as described in the preceding Examples.
  • the 734-2b-2b which comprises tetrameric IFN ⁇ 2b and MAb h734 [anti-Indium-DTPA IgG 1 ], was used as a non-targeting control MAb-IFN ⁇ .
  • the construction of the mammalian expression vector as well as the subsequent generation of the production clones and the purification of C H 3-AD2-IgG-v-mab are disclosed in the preceding Examples.
  • the expressed recombinant fusion protein has the AD2 peptide linked to the carboxyl terminus of the C H 3 domain of v-mab via a 15 amino acid long flexible linker peptide.
  • Co-expression of the heavy chain-AD2 and light chain polypeptides results in the formation of an IgG structure equipped with two AD2 peptides.
  • the expression vector was transfected into Sp/ESF cells (an engineered cell line of Sp2/0) by electroporation.
  • the pdHL2 vector contains the gene for dihydrofolate reductase, thus allowing clonal selection, as well as gene amplification with methotrexate (MTX).
  • Stable clones were isolated from 96-well plates selected with media containing 0.2 ⁇ M MTX. Clones were screened for C H 3-AD2-IgG-vmab productivity via a sandwich ELISA. The module was produced in roller bottle culture with serum-free media.
  • the DDD-module, IFN ⁇ 2b-DDD2 was generated as discussed above by recombinant fusion of the DDD2 peptide to the carboxyl terminus of human IFN ⁇ 2b via an 18 amino acid long flexible linker peptide. As is the case for all DDD-modules, the expressed fusion protein spontaneously forms a stable homodimer.
  • the C H 1-DDD2-Fab-hL243 expression vector was generated from hL243-IgG-pdHL2 vector by excising the sequence for the C H 1-Hinge-C H 2-C H 3 domains with SacII and EagI restriction enzymes and replacing it with a 507 bp sequence encoding C H 1-DDD2, which was excised from the C-DDD2-hMN-14-pdHL2 expression vector with the same enzymes.
  • C H 3-AD2-IgG-v-mab and IFN ⁇ 2b-DDD2 were purified from the culture broths by affinity chromatography using MABSELECTTM (GE Healthcare) and HIS-SELECT® HF Nickel Affinity Gel (Sigma), respectively, as described previously (Rossi et al., Blood 2009, 114:3864-71).
  • MABSELECTTM GE Healthcare
  • HIS-SELECT® HF Nickel Affinity Gel Sigma
  • DNL modules C H 3-AD2-IgG-v-mab, C H 1-DDD2-Fab-hL243, and IFN- ⁇ 2b-DDD2
  • C H 3-AD2-IgG-v-mab, C H 1-DDD2-Fab-hL243, and IFN- ⁇ 2b-DDD2 were combined in equimolar quantities to generate the bsMAb-IFN ⁇ , 20-C2-2b.
  • oxidized glutathione was added (2 mM) to facilitate disulfide bond formation (locking).
  • the 20-C2-2b was purified to near homogeneity using three sequential affinity chromatography steps, first with Protein A (MABSELECTTM), second by IMAC using HIS-SELECT® HF Nickel Affinity Gel, and third by an hL243-anti-idiotype affinity chromatography. Only those DNL constructs comprising each of the 3 desired monomers bound to all three columns.
  • MABSELECTTM Protein A
  • IMAC HIS-SELECT® HF Nickel Affinity Gel
  • hL243-anti-idiotype affinity chromatography Only those DNL constructs comprising each of the 3 desired monomers bound to all three columns.
  • affinity chromatography may be used to purify DNL complexes comprising any combination of effector moieties, so long as ligands for each of the three effector moieties can be obtained and attached to the column material.
  • the selected DNL construct is the one that binds to each of three columns containing the ligand for each of the three effector moieties and can be eluted after washing to remove unbound complexes.
  • the bispecific MAb-IFN ⁇ was generated by combining the IgG-AD2 module, C H 3-AD2-IgG-v-mab, with two different dimeric DDD-modules, C H 1-DDD2-Fab-hL243 and IFN ⁇ 2b-DDD2. Due to the random association of either DDD-module with the two AD2 groups, two side-products, 20-C2-C2 and 20-2b-2b are expected to form, in addition to 20-C2-2b.
  • Non-reducing SDS-PAGE resolved 20-C2-2b ( ⁇ 305 kDa) as a cluster of bands positioned between those of 20-C2-C2 ( ⁇ 365 kDa) and 20-2b-2b (255 kDa).
  • Reducing SDS-PAGE resolved the five polypeptides (v-mab HC-AD2, hL243 Fd-DDD2, IFN ⁇ 2b-DDD2 and co-migrating v-mab and hL243 kappa light chains) comprising 20-C2-2b (not shown).
  • IFN ⁇ 2b-DDD2 and hL243 Fd-DDD2 are absent in 20-C2-C2 and 20-2b-2b.
  • MABSELECTTM binds to all three of the major species produced in the DNL reaction, but removes any excess IFN ⁇ 2b-DDD2 and C H 1-DDD2-Fab-hL243.
  • the HIS-SELECT® unbound fraction contained mostly 20-C2-C2 (not shown).
  • the unbound fraction from WT affinity chromatography comprised 20-2b-2b (not shown).
  • Each of the samples was subjected to SE-HPLC and immunoreactivity analyses, which corroborated the results and conclusions of the SDS-PAGE analysis.
  • Immunoreactivity assays demonstrated the homogeneity of 20-C2-2b with each molecule containing the three functional groups (not shown). Incubation of 20-C2-2b with an excess of antibodies to any of the three constituent modules resulted in quantitative formation of high molecular weight immune complexes and the disappearance of the 20-C2-2b peak (not shown). The MAb-IFN ⁇ showed similar binding avidity to their parental MAbs (not shown).
  • the specific activities for various MAb-IFN ⁇ were measured using a cell-based reporter gene assay and compared to peginterferon alfa-2b (not shown).
  • the specific activity of 20-C2-2b 2454 IU/pmol
  • 734-2b-2b 3764 IU/pmol
  • peginterferon alfa-2b P ⁇ 0.001
  • the difference between 20-2b-2b and 734-2b-2b was not significant.
  • the specific activity among all agents varies minimally when normalized to IU/pmol of total IFN ⁇ . Based on these data, the specific activity of each IFN ⁇ 2b group of the MAb-IFN ⁇ is approximately 30% of recombinant IFN ⁇ 2b (4000 IU/pmol).
  • the 20-C2-2b DNL construct depleted lymphoma cells more effectively than normal B cells and had no effect on T cells (not shown). However, it did efficiently eliminate monocytes (not shown). Where v-mab had no effect on monocytes, depletion was observed following treatment with hL243 ⁇ 4p and MAb-IFN ⁇ , with 20-2b-2b and 734-2b-2b exhibiting similar toxicity (not shown). Therefore, the predictably higher potency of 20-C2-2b is attributed to the combined actions of anti-HLA-DR and IFN ⁇ , which may be augmented by HLA-DR targeting.
  • hexavalent IgG-based DNL structures HIDS
  • Fab-DDD2 modules were as described above.
  • the Fab-DDD2 modules form stable homodimers that bind to AD2-containing modules.
  • C-H-AD2-IgG modules were created to pair with the Fab-DDD2 modules.
  • C-H-AD2-IgG modules have an AD2 peptide fused to the carboxyl terminus (C) of the heavy (H) chain of IgG via a peptide linker.
  • the DNA coding sequences for the linker peptide followed by the AD2 peptide are coupled to the 3′ end of the CH3 (heavy chain constant domain 3) coding sequence by standard recombinant DNA methodologies, resulting in a contiguous open reading frame.
  • the C-H-AD2-IgG module can be combined with any Fab-DDD2 module to generate a wide variety of hexavalent structures composed of an Fc fragment and six Fab fragments. If the C-H-AD2-IgG module and the Fab-DDD2 module are derived from the same parental monoclonal antibody (MAb) the resulting HIDS is monospecific with 6 binding arms to the same antigen. If the modules are instead derived from two different MAbs then the resulting HIDS are bispecific, with two binding arms for the specificity of the C-H-AD2-IgG module and 4 binding arms for the specificity of the Fab-DDD2 module.
  • MAb parental monoclonal antibody
  • DNL complexes comprising an IgG moiety attached to four effector moieties, such as cytokines.
  • an IgG moiety was attached to four copies of interferon- ⁇ 2b.
  • the antibody-cytokine DNL construct exhibited superior pharmacokinetic properties and/or efficacy compared to PEGylated forms of interferon- ⁇ 2b.
  • the pdHL2 mammalian expression vector has been used to mediate the expression of many recombinant IgGs.
  • a plasmid shuttle vector was produced to facilitate the conversion of any IgG-pdHL2 vector into a C-H-AD2-IgG-pdHL2 vector.
  • the gene for the Fc was amplified using the pdHL2 vector as a template and a pair of primers. The amplimer was cloned in the PGEMT® PCR cloning vector.
  • the Fc insert fragment was excised from PGEMT® with XbaI and BamHI restriction enzymes and ligated with AD2-pdHL2 vector that was prepared by digestion of h679-Fab-AD2-pdHL2 with XbaI and BamHI, to generate the shuttle vector Fc-AD2-pdHL2.
  • an 861 bp BsrGI/NdeI restriction fragment is excised from the former and replaced with a 952 bp BsrGI/NdeI restriction fragment excised from the Fc-AD2-pdHL2 vector.
  • BsrGI cuts in the CH3 domain and NdeI cuts downstream (3′) of the expression cassette.
  • Epratuzumab, or hLL2 IgG is a humanized anti-human CD22 MAb.
  • An expression vector for C-H-AD2-hLL2 IgG was generated from hLL2 IgG-pdHL2, as described above, and used to transfect Sp2/0 myeloma cells by electroporation. Following transfection, the cells were plated in 96-well plates and transgenic clones were selected in media containing methotrexate. Clones were screened for C-H-AD2-hLL2 IgG productivity by a sandwich ELISA using 96-well microtiter plates coated with an hLL2-specific anti-idiotype MAb and detection with peroxidase-conjugated anti-human IgG.
  • Clones were expanded to roller bottles for protein production and C-H-AD2-hLL2 IgG was purified from the spent culture media in a single step using Protein-A affinity chromatography.
  • SDS-PAGE analysis demonstrated that the purified C-H-AD2-hLL2-IgG consisted of both monomeric and disulfide-linked dimeric forms of the module (not shown). Protein bands representing these two forms are evident by SDS-PAGE under non-reducing conditions, while under reducing conditions all of the forms are reduced to two bands representing the constituent polypeptides (Heavy chain-AD2 and kappa chain) (not shown). No other contaminating bands were detected.
  • hA20 IgG is a humanized anti-human CD20 MAb.
  • An expression vector for C-H-AD2-hA20 IgG was generated from hA20 IgG-pDHL2, as described above, and used to transfect Sp2/0 myeloma cells by electroporation. Following transfection, the cells were plated in 96-well plates and transgenic clones were selected in media containing methotrexate. Clones were screened for C-H-AD2-hA20 IgG productivity by a sandwich ELISA using 96-well microtiter plates coated with a hA20-specific anti-idiotype MAb and detection with peroxidase-conjugated anti-human IgG.
  • Clones were expanded to roller bottles for protein production and C-H-AD2-hA20 IgG was purified from the spent culture media in a single step using Protein-A affinity chromatography. SE-HPLC and SDS-PAGE analyses gave very similar results to those obtained for C-H-AD2-hLL2 IgG (not shown).
  • the DNL method was used to create Hex-hA20, a monospecific anti-CD20 HIDS, by combining C-H-AD2-hA20 IgG with hA20-Fab-DDD2.
  • the Hex-hA20 structure contains six anti-CD20 Fab fragments and an Fc fragment, arranged as four Fab fragments and one IgG antibody.
  • Hex-hA20 was made as described below.
  • the reaction mixture was loaded directly onto a Protein-A affinity chromatography column.
  • the column was washed with PBS and the Hex-hA20 was eluted with 0.1 M glycine, pH 2.5. Since excess hA20-Fab-DDD2 was used in the reaction, there was no unconjugated C-H-AD2-hA20 IgG, or incomplete DNL structures containing only one (hA20-Fab-DDD2) 2 moiety.
  • the unconjugated excess hA20-Fab-DDD2 does not bind to the affinity resin.
  • the calculated molecular weight from the deduced amino acid sequences of the constituent polypeptides is 386 kDa. Size exclusion HPLC analysis showed a single protein peak with a retention time consistent with a protein structure of 375-400 kDa (not shown).
  • the DNL method was used to create a monospecific anti-CD22 HIDS (Hex-hLL2) by combining C-H-AD2-hLL2 IgG with hLL2-Fab-DDD2.
  • the DNL reaction was accomplished as described above for Hex-hA20.
  • the calculated molecular weight from the deduced amino acid sequences of the constituent polypeptides is 386 kDa.
  • Size exclusion HPLC analysis showed a single protein peak with a retention time consistent with a protein structure of 375-400 kDa (not shown).
  • SDS-PAGE analysis under non-reducing conditions showed a cluster of high molecular weight bands, which were eliminated under reducing conditions to leave only the three expected polypeptide chains: HC-AD2, Fd-DDD2, and the kappa chain (not shown).
  • the DNL method was used to create bispecific HIDS by combining C-H-AD2-hLL2 IgG with either hA20-Fab-DDD2 to obtain DNL1 or hMN-14-DDD2 to obtain DNL1C.
  • DNL1 has four binding arms for CD20 and two for CD22.
  • hMN-14 is a humanized MAb to carcinoembryonic antigen (CEACAM5)
  • CEACAM5 humanized MAb to carcinoembryonic antigen
  • the DNL reactions were accomplished as described for Hex-hA20 above. HPLC and SDS-PAGE were consistent with the desired products.
  • the DNL method was used to create bispecific HIDS by combining C-H-AD2-hA20 IgG with either hLL2-Fab-DDD2 to obtain DNL2 or hMN-14-DDD2 to obtain DNL2C.
  • DNL2 has four binding arms for CD22 and two for CD20.
  • DNL2C has four binding arms for CEACAM5 and two for CD20.
  • the DNL reactions were accomplished as described for Hex-hA20. HPLC and SDS-PAGE were consistent with the desired products.
  • the stability of DNL1 and DNL2 in human serum was determined using a bispecific ELISA assay.
  • the protein structures were incubated at 10 ⁇ g/ml in fresh pooled human sera at 37° C. and 5% CO 2 for five days. For day 0 samples, aliquots were frozen in liquid nitrogen immediately after dilution in serum. ELISA plates were coated with an anti-Id to hA20 IgG and bispecific binding was detected with an anti-Id to hLL2 IgG. Both DNL1 and DNL2 were highly stable in serum and maintained complete bispecific binding activity (not shown).
  • HIDS generated as described above retained the binding properties of their parental Fab/IgGs.
  • Competitive ELISAs were used to investigate the binding avidities of the various HIDS using either a rat anti-idiotype MAb to hA20 (WR2) to assess the binding activity of the hA20 components or a rat anti-idiotype MAb to hLL2 (WN) to assess the binding activity of the hLL2 components.
  • WR2 rat anti-idiotype MAb to hA20
  • WN rat anti-idiotype MAb to hLL2
  • DNL1 which has two CD20 binding groups, showed a similar binding avidity to hLL2 IgG, which also has two CD22-binding arms (not shown).
  • both DNL2 and DNL3 contain two hA20 Fabs and four hLL2 Fabs, they showed similar strength in binding to the same anti-id antibody (not shown).
  • the HIDS were shown to have therapeutic efficacy in vivo using a human Burkitt Lymphoma model in mice.
  • Low doses (12 ⁇ g) of DNL2 and Hex-hA20 more than doubled the survival times of tumor bearing mice.
  • Treatment with higher doses (60 ⁇ g) resulted in long-term survivors.
  • DNL1, DNL2 and Hex-hA20 inhibited cell growth of Daudi Burkitt Lymphoma cells in vitro (not shown). Treatment of the cells with 10 nM concentrations was substantially more effective for the HIDS compared to rituximab (not shown). Using a cell counting assay, the potency of DNL1 and DNL2 was estimated to be more than 100-fold greater than that of rituximab, while the Hex-hA20 was shown to be even more potent (not shown).
  • Dose-response curves for HIDS (DNL1, DNL2, Hex-hA20) versus a parent IgG (hA20 IgG) were compared for three different lymphoma cell lines, using an MTS proliferation assay.
  • the bispecific structures DNL1 and DNL2 showed >100-fold more potent anti-proliferative activity and Hex-hA20 showed >10.000-fold more potent activity than the parent hA20 IgG (not shown).
  • Hex-hLL2 and the control structures (DNL1-C and DNL2-C) had very little anti-proliferative activity in this assay (not shown).
  • anti-CD20 monoclonal antibodies such as rituximab and hA20 can utilize complement-dependent cytotoxicity (CDC), antibody-dependent cellular cytotoxicity (ADCC) and signal transduction induced growth inhibition/apoptosis for tumor cell killing.
  • CDC complement-dependent cytotoxicity
  • ADCC antibody-dependent cellular cytotoxicity
  • the hexavalent DNL structures were tested for CDC activity using Daudi cells in an in vitro assay.
  • none of the hexavalent structures that bind CD20 exhibited CDC activity (not shown).
  • the parent hA20 IgG exhibited potent CDC activity (not shown), while as expected the hLL2 antibody against CD22 showed no activity (not shown).
  • the lack of effect of DNL2 and Hex-hA20 was of interest, since they comprise hA20-IgG-Ad2, which showed similar positive CDC activity to hA20 IgG (not shown).
  • DNL1 was assayed for ADCC activity using freshly isolated peripheral blood mononuclear cells. Both rituximab and hA20 IgG showed potent activity on Daudi cells, while DNL1 did not exhibit any detectable ADCC activity (not shown).

Abstract

Disclosed herein are compositions and methods of use comprising combinations of anti-CD22 antibodies with a therapeutic agent. The therapeutic agent may be attached to the anti-CD22 antibody or may be separately administered, either before, simultaneously with or after the anti-CD22 antibody. In preferred embodiments, the therapeutic agent is an antibody or fragment thereof that binds to an antigen different from CD22, such as CD19, CD20, CD21, CD22, CD23, CD37, CD40, CD40L, CD52, CD80 and HLA-DR. However, the therapeutic agent may an immunomodulator, a cytokine, a toxin or other therapeutic agent known in the art. More preferably, the anti-CD22 antibody is part of a DNL complex, such as a hexavalent DNL complex. Most preferably, combination therapy with the anti-CD22 antibody or fragment and the therapeutic agent is more effective than the antibody alone, the therapeutic agent alone, or the combination of anti-CD22 antibody and therapeutic agent that are not conjugated to each other. Administration of the anti-CD22 antibody and therapeutic agent induces apoptosis and cell death of target cells in diseases such as B-cell lymphomas or leukemias, autoimmune disease or immune dysfunction disease.

Description

    CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
  • This application is a divisional of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/774,526, filed Feb. 22, 2013, which was a divisional of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/213,245 (now issued U.S. Pat. No. 8,420,086), filed Aug. 19, 2011, which claimed the benefit under 35 U.S.C. 119(e) of provisional U.S. Patent Appl. Ser. No. 61/375,068, filed Aug. 19, 2010. U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/213,245 was a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/164,275 (now issued U.S. Pat. No. 8,080,250), filed Jun. 20, 2011; which was a divisional of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/629,404 (now issued U.S. Pat. No. 7,999,083), filed Dec. 2, 2009; which was a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/026,811 (now issued U.S. Pat. No. 7,591,994), filed Feb. 6, 2008; which was a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/388,032, filed Mar. 23, 2006; which was a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/734,589 (now issued U.S. Pat. No. 7,585,491), filed Dec. 15, 2003. Those applications claimed the benefit under 35 U.S.C. 119(e) of U.S. Provisional Patent Appl. Ser. Nos. 61/207,890, filed Feb. 13, 2009; 60/751,196, filed Dec. 16, 2005; 60/728,292, filed Oct. 19, 2005; 60/668,603, filed Apr. 6, 2005 and 60/433,017, filed Dec. 13, 2002. The text of each priority application is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
    • SEQUENCE LISTING
  • The instant application contains a Sequence Listing which has been submitted in ASCII format via EFS-Web and is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. Said ASCII copy, created on Aug. 18, 2011, is named IMM317US.txt and is 59,124 bytes in size.
    • FIELD OF THE INVENTION
  • The present invention concerns compositions and methods of use of immunoconjugates, comprising one or more camptothecin moieties attached to an anti-CD22 antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof. Preferably, the anti-CD22 antibody is epratuzumab and the camptothecin is SN-38. The immunoconjugate is of use to treat B cell diseases, such as hematologic tumors, B cell leukemia or lymphoma (e.g., mantle cell lymphoma, multiple myeloma, Hodgkin's lymphoma, non-Hodgkin's lymphoma, diffuse large B cell lymphoma, Burkitt lymphoma, follicular lymphoma, acute lymphocytic leukemia, chronic lymphocytic leukemia, and hairy cell leukemia), autoimmune disease, immune dysfunction disease and type 1 or type 2 diabetes. The immunoconjugate may be used alone or may be combined with another anti-B cell antibody or fragment thereof, such as antibodies against CD19, CD20, CD21, CD23, CD37, CD40, CD40L, CD52, CD80 or HLA-DR. Alternatively, the immunoconjugate may be used in combination with another therapeutic agent, such as an immunomodulator, a cytotoxic agent, a drug, a toxin, an anti-angiogenic agent, a proapoptotic agent or a radionuclide. The anti-CD22 immunoconjugate may also be administered as part of a dock-and-lock (DNL) complex, as described in detail below. In most preferred embodiments, the combination of anti-CD22 antibody and other therapeutic agent is significantly more efficacious for treating a B cell disease than either agent administered alone or the sum of effects of the agents administered separately.
    • BACKGROUND
  • An aim of targeted drug therapy is to use monoclonal antibodies (MAbs) for the specific delivery of toxic agents to human cancers. Conjugates of tumor-associated MAbs and suitable toxic agents have been developed, but have had mixed success in the therapy of cancer, and virtually no application in other diseases, such as autoimmune diseases. The toxic agent is most commonly a chemotherapeutic drug, although particle-emitting radionuclides, or bacterial or plant toxins have also been conjugated to MAbs, especially for the therapy of cancer (Sharkey and Goldenberg, C A Cancer J. Clin. 2006 July-August; 56(4):226-243).
  • The advantages of using MAb-chemotherapeutic drug conjugates are that (a) the chemotherapeutic drug itself is structurally well defined; (b) the chemotherapeutic drug is linked to the MAb protein using very well defined conjugation chemistries, often at specific sites remote from the MAb antigen binding regions; (c) MAb-chemotherapeutic drug conjugates can be made more reproducibly than chemical conjugates involving MAbs and bacterial or plant toxins, and as such are more amenable to commercial development and regulatory approval; and (d) the MAb-chemotherapeutic drug conjugates are orders of magnitude less toxic systemically than radionuclide MAb conjugates.
  • Early work on protein-drug conjugates indicated that a drug preferably is released in its original form, once it has been internalized into a target cell, for the protein-chemotherapeutic drug conjugate to be a useful therapeutic. Trouet et al. (Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 79:626-629 (1982)) showed the advantage of using specific peptide linkers, between the drug and the antibody, which are cleaved lysosomally to liberate the intact drug. MAb-chemotherapeutic drug conjugates prepared using mild acid-cleavable linkers, such as those containing a hydrazone, were developed, based on the observation that the pH inside tumors was often lower than normal physiological pH (Willner et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,708,146; Trail et al. (Science 261:212-215 (1993)). The first approved MAb-drug conjugate, Gemtuzumab Ozogamicin, incorporated a similar acid-labile hydrazone bond between an anti-CD33 antibody, humanized P67.6, and a potent calicheamicin derivative. Sievers et al., J Clin Oncol. 19:3244-3254 (2001); Hamann et al., Bioconjugate Chem. 13: 47-58 (2002). In some cases, the MAb-chemotherapeutic drug conjugates were made with reductively labile hindered disulfide bonds between the chemotherapeutic drugs and the MAb (Liu et al., Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 93: 8618-8623 (1996)).
  • Yet another cleavable linker involves cathepsin B-labile dipeptide spacers, such as Phe-Lys or Val-Cit, similar to the lysosomally labile peptide spacers of Trouet et al. containing from one to four amino acids, which additionally incorporated a collapsible spacer between the drug and the dipeptide (Dubowchik, et al., Bioconjugate Chem. 13:855-869 (2002); Firestone et al., U.S. Pat. No. 6,214,345 B1; Doronina et al., Nat Biotechnol. 21: 778-784 (2003)). The latter approaches were also utilized in the preparation of an immunoconjugate of camptothecin (Walker et al., Bioorg Med Chem Lett. 12:217-219 (2002)). Another cleavable moiety that has been explored is an ester linkage incorporated into the linker between the antibody and the chemotherapeutic drug. Gillimard and Saragovi have found that when an ester of paclitaxel was conjugated to anti-rat p75 MAb, MC192, or anti-human TrkA MAb, 5C3, the conjugate was found to exhibit target-specific toxicity. Gillimard and Saragovi, Cancer Res. 61:694-699 (2001).
  • The conjugates of the instant invention possess greater efficacy, in many cases, than unconjugated or “naked” antibodies or antibody fragments, although such unconjugated targeting molecules have been of use in specific situations. In cancer, for example, naked antibodies have come to play a role in the treatment of lymphomas (CAMPATH® and RITUXAN®), colorectal and other cancers (ERBITUX® and AVASTIN®), breast cancer (HERECEPTIN®), as well as a large number now in clinical development (e.g., epratuzumab). In most of these cases, clinical use has involved combining these naked, or unconjugated, antibodies with other therapies, such as chemotherapy or radiation therapy.
  • A variety of antibodies are also in use for the treatment of autoimmune and other immune dysregulatory diseases, such as tumor necrosis factor (TNF) and B-cell (RITUXAN®) antibodies in arthritis, and are being investigated in other such diseases, such as the B-cell antibodies, RITUXAN® and epratuzumab, in systemic lupus erythematosus and Sjögren's syndrome, as well as juvenile diabetes and multiple sclerosis. Naked antibodies are also being studied in sepsis and septic shock, Alzheimer's disease, and infectious diseases.
  • There is a need to develop more potent immunoconjugated antibodies against B cell diseases, such as cancer, autoimmune disease, immune dysfunction disease, type 1 and type 2 diabetes. There is a further need to develop more effective antibody conjugates with intracellularly cleavable linkers. In the case of delivering drug/toxin or radionuclide conjugates, this can be accomplished by direct antibody conjugation or by indirect methods, referred to as pretargeting, where a bispecific antibody is used to target to the lesion, while the therapeutic agent is secondarily targeted by binding to one of the arms of the bispecific antibody that has localized at the site of the diseased cell (Goldenberg et al., J Clin Oncol. 2006 Feb. 10; 24(5):823-34.; Goldenberg et al., J Nucl Med. 2008 January; 49(1):158-63).
  • Because signaling pathway redundancies can result in lack of response to a single antibody, diverse strategies to use combination therapy with antibodies that bind to different epitopes or different antigens on the same target cell have been proposed. Combinations such as anti-CD20 and anti-CD22 (Stein et al., Clin Cancer Res 2004, 10:2868-2878), anti-CD20 and anti-HLA-DR (Tobin et al., Leuk Lymphoma 2007, 48:944-956), anti-CD20 and anti-TRAIL-R1 (Maddipatla et al., Clin Cancer Res 2007, 13:4556-4564), anti-IGF-1R and anti-EGFR (Goetsche et al., Int J Cancer 2005, 113:316-328), anti-IGF-1R and anti-VEGF (Shang et al., Mol Cancer Ther 2008, 7:2599-2608), or trastuzumab and pertuzumab that target different regions of human EGFR2 (Nahta et al., Cancer Res 2004, 64:2343-2346) have been evaluated preclinically, showing enhanced or synergistic antitumor activity in vitro and in vivo.
  • The first clinical evidence of an apparent advantage of combining two antibodies against different cancer cell antigens involved the administration of rituximab (chimeric anti-CD20) and epratuzumab (humanized anti-CD22 antibody) in patients with non-Hodgkin lymphoma (NHL). The combination was found to enhance anti-lymphoma efficacy without a commensurate increase in toxicity, based on 3 independent clinical trials (Leonard et al., J Clin Oncol 2005, 23:5044-5051). Although these results are promising, a need exists in the field for more effective antibody-based combination therapies.
    • SUMMARY
  • The present invention concerns compositions and methods of use of combination therapy with at least one anti-CD22 antibody or fragment thereof and one or more therapeutic agents. The therapeutic agent may be selected from the group consisting of an immunomodulator, a cytotoxic agent, a drug, a toxin, an anti-angiogenic agent, a proapoptotic agent, a radionuclide a second antibody or fragment thereof, an siRNA or other inhibitory oligonucleotide or any other known therapeutic agent. Preferably, the therapeutic agent is conjugated to the anti-CD22 antibody or fragment thereof to form an immunoconjugate. However, one or more additional therapeutic agents, such as a second antibody or fragment thereof, may also be separately administered, either before, simultaneously with or after the immunoconjugate. In most preferred embodiments, the one or more therapeutic agents may comprise a camptothecin, such as SN-38.
  • Although camptothecin (CPT) and its analogs and derivatives are preferred chemotherapeutic moieties, other chemotherapeutic agents of use may include taxanes (e.g., baccatin III, paclitaxel), epothilones, anthracycline drugs (e.g., doxorubicin, epirubicin, morpholinodoxorubicin, cyanomorpholino-doxorubicin, 2-pyrrolinodoxorubicin, see Priebe W (ed.), ACS symposium series 574, American Chemical Society, Washington D.C., 1995; Nagy et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 93:2464-2469, 1996), benzoquinoid ansamycins exemplified by geldanamycin (DeBoer et al., Journal of Antibiotics 23:442-447, 1970; Neckers et al., Invest. New Drugs 17:361-373, 1999), and the like. Preferably, the antibody is conjugated to at least one chemotherapeutic moiety; preferably 1 to about 5 chemotherapeutic moieties; most preferably about 6 to 12 chemotherapeutic moieties.
  • With regard to the CPT group of drugs, issues of insolubility in aqueous buffers and the lability of the δ-lactone moiety of the E-ring of their structures under physiological conditions are relevant. One approach has been to acylate the 20-hydroxyl group with an amino acid, and couple the α-amino group of the amino acid to poly-L-glutamic acid (Singer et al. in The Camptothecins: Unfolding Their Anticancer Potential, Liehr J. G., Giovanella, B. C. and Verschraegen (eds), NY Acad Sci., NY 922:136-150, 2000). This approach relies on the passive diffusion of a polymeric molecule into tumor sites. This glycine conjugation has also been reported as a method of making a water-soluble derivative of CPT (Vishnuvajjala et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,943,579) and in the preparation of a PEG-derivatized CPT (Greenwald, et al. J. Med. Chem. 39: 1938-1940, 1996). In the latter case, the approach has been devised in the context of developing water-soluble and long acting forms of CPT, whereby CPT's in vivo half-life is enhanced, and the drug is gradually released from its conjugate while in circulation in vivo. An example of a water soluble CPT derivative is CPT-11. Extensive clinical data are available concerning CPT-11's pharmacology and its in vivo conversion to the active SN-38 (Iyer and Ratain, Cancer Chemother Pharmacol. 42:S31-43, 1998; Mathijssen et al., Clin Cancer Res. 7:2182-2194, 2002; Rivory, Ann NY Acad Sci. 922:205-215, 2000). The active form SN-38 is about 2 to 3 orders of magnitude more potent than CPT-11.
  • In one embodiment, the invention relates to a process of preparing immunoconjugates, wherein a drug is derivatized with a first linker, which contains a reactive moiety that is capable of combining with a second linker that contains an antibody-coupling group; wherein the first linker also possesses a defined polyethylene glycol (PEG) moiety for water-solubility, and optionally an intracellularly-cleavable moiety cleavable by intracellular peptidases or by the low pH environment of endosomal and lysosomal vesicles. Also optionally there is an amino acid spacer between the drug and the first linker. The second linker may also contain a reactive group capable of reacting with drug-(first linker) conjugate by the copper (+1) ion-catalyzed acetylene-azide cycloaddition reaction, referred to as ‘click chemistry’. Preferably, the defined PEG moiety is a low molecular weight PEG with a defined number of monomeric subunits, as discussed below.
  • Another embodiment relates to a process of preparing conjugates as discussed in the paragraph above, wherein the second linker has a single antibody-coupling group, but multiples of the reactive group capable of reacting with drug-(first linker) conjugate, thereby amplifying the number of drug molecules conjugated to the antibody.
  • A further embodiment relates to a process of preparing conjugates, wherein the linker is first conjugated to a drug, thereby producing a drug-linker conjugate; wherein said drug-linker conjugate preparation involves the selective protection and deprotection of a more reactive group in a drug containing multiple functional groups; wherein said drug-linker conjugate is optionally not purified; and wherein said drug-linker conjugate is subsequently conjugated to a monoclonal antibody or fragment.
  • In one embodiment, the intracellularly-cleavable moiety is a carbonate comprising an activated hydroxyl group of the chemotherapeutic moiety and a substituted ethanolamine moiety or a 4-aminobenzyl alcohol, and the latter is attached, via its amino group, to a cross-linker terminating in the antibody-binding group; and wherein the substituted ethanolamine moiety is derived from a natural L amino acid, with the carboxylic acid group of the latter replaced with a hydroxymethyl moiety; and wherein the 4-aminobenzyl alcohol is optionally substituted with a C1-C10 alkyl group at the benzylic position.
  • In a preferred embodiment, the intracellularly-cleavable moiety is a carbonate comprising an activated hydroxyl group of the chemotherapeutic moiety and a substituted ethanolamine moiety, and the latter, via its amino group, is attached to an L-amino acid or a polypeptide comprising up to four L-amino acid moieties; wherein the N-terminus is attached to a cross-linker terminating in the antibody-binding group; and wherein the substituted ethanolamine moiety is optionally derived from an L amino acid, with the carboxylic acid group of the latter replaced with a hydroxymethyl moiety.
  • In another preferred embodiment, the intracellularly-cleavable moiety is a carbonate comprising an activated hydroxyl group of the chemotherapeutic moiety and a 4-aminobenzyl alcohol or substituted 4-aminobenzyl alcohol substituted with a C1-C10 alkyl group at the benzylic position, and the latter, via its amino group, is attached to an L-amino acid or a polypeptide comprising up to four L-amino acid moieties; wherein the N-terminus is attached to a cross-linker terminating in the antibody-binding group.
  • In certain embodiments, an amino group of a chemotherapeutic moiety is coupled to the activated hydroxyl group of a substituted, and amine-protected, ethanolamine moiety or a 4-aminobenzyl alcohol, and the latter is attached, via its amino group, to an L-amino acid or a polypeptide comprising up to four L-amino acid moieties; wherein the N-terminus is attached to a cross-linker terminating in the antibody-binding group; wherein said substituted ethanolamine moiety is optionally derived from an L amino acid, with the carboxylic acid group of the latter replaced with a hydroxymethyl moiety; and wherein the 4-aminobenzyl alcohol is optionally substituted with a C1-C10 alkyl group at the benzylic position. The bifunctional drug derivative is then conjugated to an antibody to obtain an immunoconjugate as discussed above. Upon targeting the disease site with the immunoconjugate, the immunoconjugate is endocytosed and catabolized to release the drug-linker moiety; wherein the free amino group of the substituted ethanolamine moiety assists in the liberation of free drug by nucleophilic attack at the carbonyl group of the carbamate moiety.
  • In certain embodiments, the anti-CD22 antibody or fragment thereof is administered as part of a trivalent, tetravalent or hexavalent construct made by the dock-and-lock (DNL) technique (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,521,056; 7,527,787; 7,534,866; 7,550,143; 7,666,400; 7,858,070; 7,871,622; 7,901,680; 7,906,118 and 7,906,121, the Examples section of each of which is incorporated herein by reference.) The DNL technique takes advantage of the specific, high-affinity binding interaction between a dimerization and docking domain (DDD) sequence from the regulatory subunit of human cAMP-dependent protein kinase (PKA), such as human PKA RIα, RIβ, RIIα or RIIβ, and an anchor domain (AD) sequence from any of a variety of AKAP proteins. The DDD and AD peptides may be attached to any protein, peptide or other molecule.
  • Because the DDD sequences spontaneously dimerize and bind to the AD sequence, the DNL technique allows the formation of complexes between any selected molecules that may be attached to DDD or AD sequences. Although the standard DNL complex comprises a trimer with two DDD-linked molecules attached to one AD-linked molecule, variations in complex structure allow the formation of dimers, trimers, tetramers, pentamers, hexamers and other multimers. In some embodiments, the DNL complex may comprise two or more antibodies, antibody fragments or fusion proteins which bind to the same antigenic determinant or to two or more different antigens. The DNL complex may also comprise one or more other effectors, such as a cytokine, toxin or PEG moiety.
  • Many examples of anti-CD22 antibodies are also known in the art and any such known antibody or fragment thereof may be utilized. In a preferred embodiment, the anti-CD22 antibody is an hLL2 antibody (also known as epratuzumab) that comprises the light chain CDR sequences CDR1 (KSSQSVLYSANHKYLA, SEQ ID NO:1), CDR2 (WASTRES, SEQ ID NO:2), and CDR3 (HQYLSSWTF, SEQ ID NO:3) and the heavy chain CDR sequences CDR1 (SYWLH, SEQ ID NO:4), CDR2 (YINPRNDYTEYNQNFKD, SEQ ID NO:5), and CDR3 (RDITTFY, SEQ ID NO:6). A humanized LL2 anti-CD22 antibody suitable for use is disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 6,187,287, incorporated herein by reference from Col. 11, line 40 through Col. 20, line 38 and FIGS. 1, 4 and 5. However, in alternative embodiments, other known and/or commercially available anti-CD22 antibodies may be utilized, such as 1F5; HIB22 (ABBIOTEC®, San Diego, Calif.); FPC1, LT22, MEM-1, RFB4 (ABCAM®, Cambridge, Mass.); bu59, fpc1, mc64-12 (ABD SEROTEC®, Raleigh, N.C.); IS7 (ABNOVA®, Taipei City, Taiwan) and any other anti-CD22 antibody known in the art.
  • The anti-CD22 antibody may be selected such that it competes with or blocks binding to CD22 of an LL2 antibody comprising the light chain CDR sequences CDR1 (KSSQSVLYSANHKYLA, SEQ ID NO:1), CDR2 (WASTRES, SEQ ID NO:2), and CDR3 (HQYLSSWTF, SEQ ID NO:3) and the heavy chain CDR sequences CDR1 (SYWLH, SEQ ID NO:4), CDR2 (YINPRNDYTEYNQNFKD, SEQ ID NO:5), and CDR3 (RDITTFY, SEQ ID NO:6). Alternatively, the anti-CD22 antibody may bind to the same epitope of CD22 as an LL2 antibody.
  • The anti-CD22 antibody may optionally be administered in combination with an anti-CD20 antibody or fragment thereof. Many examples of anti-CD20 antibodies are known in the art and any such known antibody or fragment thereof may be utilized. In a preferred embodiment, the anti-CD20 antibody is an hA20 antibody (also known as veltuzumab) that comprises the light chain complementarity-determining region (CDR) sequences CDR1 (RASSSVSYIH; SEQ ID NO:7), CDR2 (ATSNLAS; SEQ ID NO:8), and CDR3 (QQWTSNPPT; SEQ ID NO:9) and the heavy chain variable region CDR sequences CDR1 (SYNMH; SEQ ID NO:10), CDR2 (AIYPGNGDTSYNQKFKG; SEQ ID NO:11), and CDR3 (STYYGGDWYFDV; SEQ ID NO:12).
  • A humanized anti-CD20 antibody suitable for use is disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 7,435,803, incorporated herein by reference from Col. 36, line 4 through Col. 46, line 52 and FIGS. 1, 2, 4, 5 and 7. However, in alternative embodiments, other known and/or commercially available anti-CD20 antibodies may be utilized, such as rituximab; ofatumumab; ibritumomab; tositumomab; ocrelizumab; GA101; BCX-301; DXL 625; L26, B-Ly1, MEM-97, LT20, 2H7, AT80, B-H20 (ABCAM®, Cambridge, Mass.); HI20a, HI47, 13.6E12 (ABBIOTEC®, San Diego, Calif.); 4f11, 5c11, 7d1 (ABD SEROTEC®, Raleigh, N.C.) and any other anti-CD20 antibody known in the art.
  • The anti-CD20 antibody may be selected such that it competes with or blocks binding to CD20 of an hA20 antibody comprising the light chain complementarity-determining region (CDR) sequences CDR1 (RASSSVSYIH; SEQ ID NO:7), CDR2 (ATSNLAS; SEQ ID NO:8), and CDR3 (QQWTSNPPT; SEQ ID NO:9) and the heavy chain variable region CDR sequences CDR1 (SYNMH; SEQ ID NO:10), CDR2 (AIYPGNGDTSYNQKFKG; SEQ ID NO:11), and CDR3 (STYYGGDWYFDV; SEQ ID NO:12). Alternatively, the anti-CD20 antibody may bind to the same epitope of CD20 as a hA20 antibody.
  • The anti-CD22 antibody may be conjugated to or separately administered with one or more therapeutic agents. The therapeutic agent may be selected from the group consisting of aplidin, azaribine, anastrozole, azacytidine, bleomycin, bortezomib, bryostatin-1, busulfan, calicheamycin, camptothecin, 10-hydroxycamptothecin, carmustine, celebrex, chlorambucil, cisplatin, irinotecan (CPT-11), SN-38, carboplatin, cladribine, cyclophosphamide, cytarabine, dacarbazine, docetaxel, dactinomycin, daunomycin glucuronide, daunorubicin, dexamethasone, diethylstilbestrol, doxorubicin, doxorubicin glucuronide, epirubicin glucuronide, ethinyl estradiol, estramustine, etoposide, etoposide glucuronide, etoposide phosphate, floxuridine (FUdR), 3′,5′-O-dioleoyl-FudR (FUdR-dO), fludarabine, flutamide, fluorouracil, fluoxymesterone, gemcitabine, hydroxyprogesterone caproate, hydroxyurea, idarubicin, ifosfamide, L-asparaginase, leucovorin, lomustine, mechlorethamine, medroprogesterone acetate, megestrol acetate, melphalan, mercaptopurine, 6-mercaptopurine, methotrexate, mitoxantrone, mithramycin, mitomycin, mitotane, phenyl butyrate, prednisone, procarbazine, paclitaxel, pentostatin, PSI-341, semustine streptozocin, tamoxifen, taxanes, taxol, testosterone propionate, thalidomide, thioguanine, thiotepa, teniposide, topotecan, uracil mustard, velcade, vinblastine, vinorelbine, vincristine, ricin, abrin, ribonuclease, onconase, rapLR1, DNase I, Staphylococcal enterotoxin-A, pokeweed antiviral protein, gelonin, diphtheria toxin, Pseudomonas exotoxin, and Pseudomonas endotoxin.
  • The therapeutic agent may comprise a radionuclide selected from the group consisting of 103mRh, 130Ru, 105Rh, 105Ru, 107Hg, 109Pd, 109Pt, 111Ag, 111In, 113mIn, 119Sb, 11C, 121mTe, 122mTe, 125I, 125mTe, 126I, 131I, 133I, 13N, 142Pr, 143Pr, 149Pm, 152Dy, 153Sm, 15O, 161Ho, 161Tb, 165Tm, 166Dy, 166Ho, 167Tm, 168Tm, 169Er, 169Yb, 177Lu, 186Re, 188Re, 189mOs, 189Re, 192Ir, 194Ir, 197Pt, 198Au, 199Au, 201Tl, 203Hg, 211At, 211Bi, 211Pb, 212Bi, 212Pb, 213Bi, 215Po, 217At, 219Rn, 221Fr, 233Ra, 224Ac, 225Ac, 225Fm, 32P, 33P, 47Sc, 51Cr, 57Co, 58Co, 59Fe, 62Cu, 67Cu, 67Ga, 75Br, 75Se, 76Br, 77As, 77Br, 80mBr, 89Sr, 90Y, 95Ru, 99Mo and 99mTc.
  • The therapeutic agent may be an enzyme selected from the group consisting of malate dehydrogenase, staphylococcal nuclease, delta-V-steroid isomerase, yeast alcohol dehydrogenase, alpha-glycerophosphate dehydrogenase, triose phosphate isomerase, horseradish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, asparaginase, glucose oxidase, beta-galactosidase, ribonuclease, urease, catalase, glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase, glucoamylase and acetylcholinesterase.
  • The therapeutic agent may be an immunomodulator selected from the group consisting of a cytokine, a stem cell growth factor, a lymphotoxin, a hematopoietic factor, a colony stimulating factor (CSF), an interferon (IFN), erythropoietin, thrombopoietin and combinations thereof. Exemplary immunomodulators may include IL-1, IL-2, IL-3, IL-6, IL-10, IL-12, IL-18, IL-21, interferon-α, interferon-β, interferon-γ, G-CSF, GM-CSF, and mixtures thereof.
  • Alternatively, the therapeutic agent may be an anti-angiogenic agent selected from the group consisting of angiostatin, endostatin, baculostatin, canstatin, maspin, anti-VEGF binding molecules, anti-placental growth factor binding molecules and anti-vascular growth factor binding molecules.
  • In certain embodiments, the anti-CD22 antibody or fragment may comprise one or more chelating moieties, such as NOTA, DOTA, DTPA, TETA, Tscg-Cys, or Tsca-Cys. In certain embodiments, the chelating moiety may form a complex with a therapeutic or diagnostic cation, such as Group II, Group III, Group IV, Group V, transition, lanthanide or actinide metal cations, Tc, Re, Bi, Cu, As, Ag, Au, At, or Pb.
  • In some embodiments, the anti-CD22 antibody or fragment thereof may be a human, chimeric, or humanized antibody or fragment thereof. A humanized antibody or fragment thereof may comprise the complementarity-determining regions (CDRs) of a murine antibody and the constant and framework (FR) region sequences of a human antibody, which may be substituted with at least one amino acid from corresponding FRs of a murine antibody. A chimeric antibody or fragment thereof may include the light and heavy chain variable regions of a murine antibody, attached to human antibody constant regions. The antibody or fragment thereof may include human constant regions of IgG1, IgG2a, IgG3, or IgG4.
  • Exemplary known antibodies of use include, but are not limited to, hR1 (anti-IGF-1R), hPAM4 (anti-mucin), hA20 (anti-CD20), hA19 (anti-CD 19), hIMMU31 (anti-AFP), hLL1 (anti-CD74), hLL2 (anti-CD22), hMu-9 (anti-CSAp), hL243 (anti-HLA-DR), hMN-14 (anti-CEACAM5), hMN-15 (anti-CEACAM6), 29H2 (anti-CEACAM1, ABCAM®), hRS7 (anti-EGP-1) and hMN-3 (anti-CEACAM6).
  • In alternative embodiments, antibodies or fragments of use may bind to one or more target antigens selected from the group consisting of carbonic anhydrase IX, alpha-fetoprotein, α-actinin-4, A3, antigen specific for A33 antibody, ART-4, B7, Ba 733, BAGE, BrE3-antigen, CA125, CAMEL, CAP-1, CASP-8/m, CCCL19, CCCL21, CD1, CD1a, CD2, CD3, CD4, CD5, CD8, CD11A, CD14, CD15, CD16, CD18, CD19, CD20, CD21, CD22, CD23, CD25, CD29, CD30, CD32b, CD33, CD37, CD38, CD40, CD40L, CD45, CD46, CD52, CD54, CD55, CD59, CD64, CD66a-e, CD67, CD70, CD74, CD79a, CD80, CD83, CD95, CD126, CD132, CD133, CD138, CD147, CD154, CDC27, CDK-4/m, CDKN2A, CXCR4, colon-specific antigen-p (CSAp), CEA (CEACAM5), CEACAM1, CEACAM6, c-met, DAM, EGFR, EGFRvIII, EGP-1, EGP-2, ELF2-M, Ep-CAM, Flt-1, Flt-3, folate receptor, G250 antigen, GAGE, gp100, GROB, HLA-DR, HM1.24, human chorionic gonadotropin (HCG) and its subunits, HER2/neu, HMGB-1, hypoxia inducible factor (HIF-1), HSP70-2M, HST-2, Ia, IGF-1R, IFN-γ, IFN-α, IFN-β, IL-2, IL-4R, IL-6R, IL-13R, IL-15R, IL-17R, IL-18R, IL-6, IL-8, IL-12, IL-15, IL-17, IL-18, IL-23, IL-25, insulin-like growth factor-1 (IGF-1), KC4-antigen, KS-1-antigen, KS1-4, Le-Y, LDR/FUT, macrophage migration inhibitory factor (MIF), MAGE, MAGE-3, MART-1, MART-2, NY-ESO-1, TRAG-3, mCRP, MCP-1, MIP-1A, MIP-1B, MIF, MUC1, MUC2, MUC3, MUC4, MUC5, MUM-1/2, MUM-3, NCA66, NCA95, NCA90, antigen specific for PAM-4 antibody, placental growth factor, p53, PLAGL2, prostatic acid phosphatase, PSA, PRAME, PSMA, PlGF, IGF, IGF-1R, IL-6, RS5, RANTES, T101, SAGE, 5100, survivin, survivin-2B, TAC, TAG-72, tenascin, TRAIL receptors, TNF-α, Tn antigen, Thomson-Friedenreich antigens, tumor necrosis antigens, VEGFR, ED-B fibronectin, WT-1, 17-1A-antigen, complement factors C3, C3a, C3b, C5a, C5, an angiogenesis marker, bcl-2, bcl-6, Kras, cMET, an oncogene marker and an oncogene product (see, e.g., Sensi et al., Clin Cancer Res 2006, 12:5023-32; Parmiani et al., J Immunol 2007, 178:1975-79; Novellino et al. Cancer Immunol Immunother 2005, 54:187-207). Reports on tumor associated antigens include Mizukami et al., (2005, Nature Med. 11:992-97); Hatfield et al., (2005, Curr. Cancer Drug Targets 5:229-48); Vallbohmer et al. (2005, J. Clin. Oncol. 23:3536-44); and Ren et al. (2005, Ann. Surg. 242:55-63).
  • Also disclosed is a method for treating and/or diagnosing a disease or disorder that includes administering to a patient a therapeutic and/or diagnostic composition that includes any of the aforementioned antibodies or immunoconjugates or fragments thereof. Typically, the composition is administered to the patient intravenously, intramuscularly or subcutaneously at a dose of 20-5000 mg. In preferred embodiments, the disease or disorder is a B-cell lymphoma or leukemia, an immune dysregulation disease, an autoimmune disease, organ-graft rejection or graft-versus-host disease. More preferably, the disease is a B-cell lymphoma or leukemia. Exemplary malignancies that may be treated using the claimed methods and compositions include, but are not limited to, indolent forms of B-cell lymphomas, aggressive forms of B-cell lymphomas, acute lymphocytic leukemia, chronic lymphocytic leukemia, Hodgkin's lymphoma, non-Hodgkin's lymphoma, mantle cell lymphoma, diffuse large B-cell lymphoma, follicular lymphoma, marginal zone lymphoma, Burkitt's lymphoma and multiple myeloma
  • Exemplary autoimmune diseases include acute immune thrombocytopenia, chronic immune thrombocytopenia, dermatomyositis, Sydenham's chorea, myasthenia gravis, systemic lupus erythematosus, lupus nephritis, rheumatic fever, polyglandular syndromes, bullous pemphigoid, pemphigus vulgaris, diabetes mellitus (e.g., juvenile diabetes), Henoch-Schonlein purpura, post-streptococcal nephritis, erythema nodosum, Takayasu's arteritis, Addison's disease, rheumatoid arthritis, multiple sclerosis, sarcoidosis, ulcerative colitis, erythema multiforme, IgA nephropathy, polyarteritis nodosa, ankylosing spondylitis, Goodpasture's syndrome, thromboangitis obliterans, Sjogren's syndrome, primary biliary cirrhosis, Hashimoto's thyroiditis, thyrotoxicosis, scleroderma, chronic active hepatitis, polymyositis/dermatomyositis, polychondritis, pemphigus vulgaris, Wegener's granulomatosis, membranous nephropathy, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, tabes dorsalis, giant cell arteritis/polymyalgia, pernicious anemia, rapidly progressive glomerulonephritis, psoriasis, or fibrosing alveolitis.
    • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
  • The following Figures are provided to illustrate exemplary, but non-limiting, preferred embodiments of the invention.
  • FIG. 1. Preclinical in vivo therapy of athymic nude mice, bearing Capan 1 human pancreatic carcinoma, with MAb-CL2A-SN-38 conjugates.
  • FIG. 2. Preclinical in vivo therapy of athymic nude mice, bearing BxPC3 human pancreatic carcinoma, with MAb-CL2A-SN-38 conjugates.
  • FIG. 3. Preclinical in vivo therapy of athymic nude mice, bearing LS 174T human colon carcinoma, with hMN-14-CL2A-SN-38 conjugate.
  • FIG. 4. Epratuzumab-SN-38 in combination with veltuzumab for treatment of follicular B cell lymphoma (WSU-FSCCL) (Experiment A).
  • FIG. 5. Epratuzumab-SN-38 in combination with veltuzumab for treatment of follicular B cell lymphoma (WSU-FSCCL) (Experiment B).
  • FIG. 6. Epratuzumab-SN-38 used alone for treatment of 697 cell line (ALL).
  • FIG. 7. Dose-response data for epratuzumab-CL2A-SN38 vs. control MAb-CL2A-SN38 for SC Ramos lymphoma in nude mice.
    •  DETAILED DESCRIPTION Definitions
  • As used herein, the terms “a”, “an” and “the” may refer to either the singular or plural, unless the context otherwise makes clear that only the singular is meant.
  • An “antibody” refers to a full-length (i.e., naturally occurring or formed by normal immunoglobulin gene fragment recombinatorial processes) immunoglobulin molecule (e.g., an IgG antibody) or an immunologically active (i.e., antigen-binding) portion of an immunoglobulin molecule, like an antibody fragment.
  • An “antibody fragment” is a portion of an antibody such as F(ab′)2, F(ab)2, Fab′, Fab, Fv, scFv, single domain antibodies (DABs or VHHs) and the like, including half-molecules of IgG4 (van der Neut Kolfschoten et al. (Science 2007; 317(14 Sep.):1554-1557). Regardless of structure, an antibody fragment binds with the same antigen that is recognized by the intact antibody. For example, an anti-CD22 antibody fragment binds with an epitope of CD22. The term “antibody fragment” also includes isolated fragments consisting of the variable regions, such as the “Fv” fragments consisting of the variable regions of the heavy and light chains and recombinant single chain polypeptide molecules in which light and heavy chain variable regions are connected by a peptide linker (“scFv proteins”). As used herein, the term “antibody fragment” does not include fragments such as Fc fragments that do not contain antigen-binding sites.
  • A “chimeric antibody” is a recombinant protein that contains the variable domains including the complementarity determining regions (CDRs) of an antibody derived from one species, preferably a rodent antibody, while the constant domains of the antibody molecule are derived from those of a human antibody. For veterinary applications, the constant domains of the chimeric antibody may be derived from that of other species, such as a cat or dog.
  • A “humanized antibody” is a recombinant protein in which the CDRs from an antibody from one species; e.g., a rodent antibody, are transferred from the heavy and light variable chains of the rodent antibody into human heavy and light variable domains. Additional FR amino acid substitutions from the parent, e.g. murine, antibody may be made. The constant domains of the antibody molecule are derived from those of a human antibody.
  • A “human antibody” is, for example, an antibody obtained from transgenic mice that have been genetically engineered to produce human antibodies in response to antigenic challenge. In this technique, elements of the human heavy and light chain locus are introduced into strains of mice derived from embryonic stem cell lines that contain targeted disruptions of the endogenous heavy chain and light chain loci. The transgenic mice can synthesize human antibodies specific for human antigens, and the mice can be used to produce human antibody-secreting hybridomas. Methods for obtaining human antibodies from transgenic mice are described by Green et al., Nature Genet. 7:13 (1994), Lonberg et al., Nature 368:856 (1994), and Taylor et al., Int. Immun. 6:579 (1994). A fully human antibody also can be constructed by genetic or chromosomal transfection methods, as well as phage display technology, all of which are known in the art. (See, e.g., McCafferty et al., Nature 348:552-553 (1990) for the production of human antibodies and fragments thereof in vitro, from immunoglobulin variable domain gene repertoires from unimmunized donors). In this technique, antibody variable domain genes are cloned in-frame into either a major or minor coat protein gene of a filamentous bacteriophage, and displayed as functional antibody fragments on the surface of the phage particle. Because the filamentous particle contains a single-stranded DNA copy of the phage genome, selections based on the functional properties of the antibody also result in selection of the gene encoding the antibody exhibiting those properties. In this way, the phage mimics some of the properties of the B cell. Phage display can be performed in a variety of formats, for their review, see, e.g. Johnson and Chiswell, Current Opinion in Structural Biology 3:5564-571 (1993). Human antibodies may also be generated by in vitro activated B cells. (See, U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,567,610 and 5,229,275).
  • A “therapeutic agent” is an atom, molecule, or compound that is useful in the treatment of a disease. Examples of therapeutic agents include but are not limited to antibodies, antibody fragments, drugs, toxins, enzymes, nucleases, hormones, immunomodulators, antisense oligonucleotides, chelators, boron compounds, photoactive agents, dyes and radioisotopes.
  • A “diagnostic agent” is an atom, molecule, or compound that is useful in diagnosing a disease. Useful diagnostic agents include, but are not limited to, radioisotopes, dyes, contrast agents, fluorescent compounds or molecules and enhancing agents (e.g., paramagnetic ions). Preferably, the diagnostic agents are selected from the group consisting of radioisotopes, enhancing agents, and fluorescent compounds.
  • An “immunoconjugate” is a conjugate of an antibody, antibody fragment, antibody fusion protein, bispecific antibody or multispecific antibody with an atom, molecule, or a higher-ordered structure (e.g., with a carrier, a therapeutic agent, or a diagnostic agent). A “naked antibody” is an antibody that is not conjugated to any other agent.
  • As used herein, the term “antibody fusion protein” is a recombinantly produced antigen-binding molecule in which an antibody or antibody fragment is covalently linked to another protein or peptide, such as the same or different antibody or antibody fragment or a DDD or AD peptide. The fusion protein may comprise a single antibody component, a multivalent or multispecific combination of different antibody components or multiple copies of the same antibody component. The fusion protein may additionally comprise an antibody or an antibody fragment and a therapeutic agent. Examples of therapeutic agents suitable for such fusion proteins include immunomodulators and toxins. One preferred toxin comprises a ribonuclease (RNase), preferably a recombinant RNase.
  • A “multispecific antibody” is an antibody that can bind simultaneously to at least two targets that are of different structure, e.g., two different antigens, two different epitopes on the same antigen, or a hapten and/or an antigen or epitope. A “multivalent antibody” is an antibody that can bind simultaneously to at least two targets that are of the same or different structure. Valency indicates how many binding arms or sites the antibody has to a single antigen or epitope; i.e., monovalent, bivalent, trivalent or multivalent. The multivalency of the antibody means that it can take advantage of multiple interactions in binding to an antigen, thus increasing the avidity of binding to the antigen. Specificity indicates how many antigens or epitopes an antibody is able to bind; i.e., monospecific, bispecific, trispecific, multispecific. Using these definitions, a natural antibody, e.g., an IgG, is bivalent because it has two binding arms but is monospecific because it binds to one epitope. Multispecific, multivalent antibodies are constructs that have more than one binding site of different specificity. For example, a diabody, where one binding site reacts with one antigen and the other with another antigen.
  • A “bispecific antibody” is an antibody that can bind simultaneously to two targets which are of different structure.
  • As used herein, “CPT” is an abbreviation for camptothecin, and represents camptothecin itself or an analog or derivative of camptothecin. The structures of camptothecin and some of its analogs, with the numbering indicated and the rings labeled with letters A-E, are given in formula 1 in Chart 1 below.
  • Figure US20140369927A1-20141218-C00001
  • Camptothecin Immunoconjugates
  • Methods are devised in the following ways for the preparation of immunoconjugates of chemotherapeutic drugs with antibodies (MAbs). The disclosed methods represent a preferred embodiment of the invention. (1) Solubility of the drug may be enhanced by placing a defined polyethyleneglycol (PEG) moiety (i.e., a PEG containing a defined number of monomeric units) between the drug and the targeting vector, wherein the defined PEG is a low molecular weight PEG, preferably containing 1-30 monomeric units, more preferably containing 1-12 monomeric units. (2) A first linker connects the drug at one end and terminates with an acetylene or an azide group at the other end. This first linker comprises a defined PEG moiety with an azide or acetylene group at one end and a different reactive group, such as carboxylic acid or hydroxyl group, at the other end. Said bifunctional defined PEG is attached to the amine group of an amino alcohol, and the hydroxyl group of the latter is attached to the hydroxyl group on the drug in the form of a carbonate. Alternatively, the non-azide (or acetylene) moiety of said defined bifunctional PEG is attached to the N-terminus of an L-amino acid or a polypeptide, with the C-terminus attached to the amino group of amino alcohol, and the hydroxy group of the latter is attached to the hydroxyl group of the drug in the form of carbonate or carbamate, respectively. (3) A second linker, comprising an antibody-coupling group and a reactive group complementary to the azide (or acetylene) group of the first linker, namely acetylene (or azide), reacts with the drug-(first linker) conjugate via acetylene-azide cycloaddition reaction to furnish the final bifunctional drug product that is useful for conjugating to the disease-targeting antibodies. (4) The antibody-coupling group is designed to be either a thiol or a thiol-reactive group. (5) Methods are devised for selective regeneration of the 10-hydroxyl group in the presence of the C-20 carbonate in preparations of drug-linker precursor involving CPT analogs such as SN-38. (6) Other protecting groups for reactive hydroxyl groups in drugs such as the phenolic hydroxyl in SN-38, for example, such as t-butyldimethylsilyl or t-butyldiphenylsilyl are also used, and these are deprotected by tetrabutylammonium fluoride prior to linking of the derivatized drug to a targeting-vector-coupling moiety. (7) The 10-hydroxyl group of CPT analogs is alternatively protected as an ester or carbonate, other than ‘BOC’, such that the bifunctional CPT is conjugated to an antibody without prior deprotection of this protecting group, and the protecting group is readily deprotected under physiological pH conditions after the bioconjugate is administered.
  • In the acetylene-azide coupling, referred to as ‘click chemistry’, the azide part may be on L2 with the acetylene part on L3. Alternatively, L2 may contain acetylene, with L3 containing azide. ‘Click chemistry’ is a copper (+1)-catalyzed cycloaddition reaction between an acetylene moiety and an azide moiety, and is a relatively recent technique in bioconjugation (Kolb HC and Sharpless KB, Drug Discov Today 2003; 8: 1128-37). Alternative methods of copper-free click chemistry are described below. Click chemistry takes place in aqueous solution at near-neutral pH conditions, and is thus amenable for drug conjugation. The advantage of click chemistry is that it is chemoselective, and complements other well-known conjugation chemistries such as the thiol-maleimide reaction. In the following discussion, where a conjugate comprises an antibody or antibody fragment, another type of binding moiety, such as an aptamer, avimer or targeting peptide, may be substituted.
  • An exemplary preferred embodiment is directed to a conjugate of a drug derivative and an antibody of the general formula 2,

  • MAb-[L2]-[L1]-[AA]m-[A′]-Drug  (2)
  • where MAb is a disease-targeting antibody, such as an anti-CD22 antibody; L2 is a component of the cross-linker comprising an antibody-coupling moiety and one or more of acetylene (or azide) groups; L1 comprises a defined PEG with azide (or acetylene) at one end, complementary to the acetylene (or azide) moiety in L2, and a reactive group such as carboxylic acid or hydroxyl group at the other end; AA is an L-amino acid; m is an integer with values of 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4; and A′ is an additional spacer, selected from the group of ethanolamine, 4-hydroxybenzyl alcohol, 4-aminobenzyl alcohol, or substituted or unsubstituted ethylenediamine. The L amino acids of ‘AA’ are selected from alanine, arginine, asparagine, aspartic acid, cysteine, glutamine, glutamic acid, glycine, histidine, isoleucine, leucine, lysine, methionine, phenylalanine, proline, serine, threonine, tryptophan, tyrosine, and valine. If the A′ group contains a hydroxyl, it is linked to the hydroxyl group or amino group of the drug in the form of a carbonate or carbamate, respectively.
  • In a preferred embodiment of formula 2, A′ is a substituted ethanolamine derived from an L-amino acid, wherein the carboxylic acid group of the amino acid is replaced by a hydroxymethyl moiety. A′ may be derived from any one of the following L-amino acids: alanine, arginine, asparagine, aspartic acid, cysteine, glutamine, glutamic acid, glycine, histidine, isoleucine, leucine, lysine, methionine, phenylalanine, proline, serine, threonine, tryptophan, tyrosine, and valine.
  • In an example of the immunoconjugate of the preferred embodiment of formula 2, m is 0, A′ is L-valinol, and the drug is exemplified by SN-38. The resultant structure is shown in formula 3.
  • Figure US20140369927A1-20141218-C00002
  • In another example of the immunoconjugate of the preferred embodiment of formula 2, m is 1 and represented by a derivatized L-lysine, A′ is L-valinol, and the drug is exemplified by SN-38. The structure is shown in formula 4.
  • Figure US20140369927A1-20141218-C00003
  • In this embodiment, an amide bond is first formed between the carboxylic acid of an amino acid such as lysine and the amino group of valinol, using orthogonal protecting groups for the lysine amino groups. The protecting group on the N-terminus of lysine is removed, keeping the protecting group on the side chain of lysine intact, and the N-terminus is coupled to the carboxyl group on the defined PEG with azide (or acetylene) at the other end. The hydroxyl group of valinol is then attached to the 20-chloroformate derivative of 10-hydroxy-protected SN-38, and this intermediate is coupled to an L2 component carrying the antibody-binding moiety as well as the complementary acetylene (or azide) group involved in the click cycloaddition chemistry. Finally, removal of protecting groups at both lysine side chain and SN-38 gives the product of this example, shown in formula 3.
  • While not wishing to be bound by theory, the small MW SN-38 product, namely valinol-SN-38 carbonate, generated after intracellular proteolysis, has the additional pathway of liberation of intact SN-38 through intramolecular cyclization involving the amino group of valinol and the carbonyl of the carbonate.
  • In another preferred embodiment, A′ of the general formula 2 is A-OH, whereby A-OH is a collapsible moiety such as 4-aminobenzyl alcohol or a substituted 4-aminobenzyl alcohol substituted with a C1-C10 alkyl group at the benzylic position, and the latter, via its amino group, is attached to an L-amino acid or a polypeptide comprising up to four L-amino acid moieties; wherein the N-terminus is attached to a cross-linker terminating in the antibody-binding group.
  • An example of a preferred embodiment is given below, wherein the A-OH embodiment of A′ of general formula (2) is derived from a substituted 4-aminobenzyl alcohol, and ‘AA’ is comprised of a single L-amino acid with m=1 in the general formula (2), and the drug is exemplified with SN-38. The structure is represented below (formula 5, referred to as MAb-CLX-SN-38). The single amino acid AA is selected from any one of the following L-amino acids: alanine, arginine, asparagine, aspartic acid, cysteine, glutamine, glutamic acid, glycine, histidine, isoleucine, leucine, lysine, methionine, phenylalanine, proline, serine, threonine, tryptophan, tyrosine, and valine. The substituent R on 4-aminobenzyl alcohol moiety (A-OH embodiment of A′) is hydrogen or an alkyl group selected from C1-C10 alkyl groups.
  • Figure US20140369927A1-20141218-C00004
  • An embodiment of MAb-CLX-SN-38 of formula 5, wherein the single amino acid AA is L-lysine and R=H, and the drug is exemplified by SN-38 (formula 6; referred to as MAb-CL2A-SN-38).
  • Figure US20140369927A1-20141218-C00005
  • Other embodiments are possible within the context of 10-hydroxy-containing camptothecins, such as SN-38. In the example of SN-38 as the drug, the more reactive 10-hydroxy group of the drug is derivatized leaving the 20-hydroxyl group unaffected. Within the general formula 2, A′ is a substituted ethylenediamine. An example of this embodiment is represented by the formula ‘7’ below, wherein the phenolic hydroxyl group of SN-38 is derivatized as a carbamate with a substituted ethylenediamine, with the other amine of the diamine derivatized as a carbamate with a 4-aminobenzyl alcohol, and the latter's amino group is attached to Phe-Lys dipeptide. In this structure (formula 7), R and R′ are independently hydrogen or methyl. It is referred to as MAb-CL17-SN-38 or MAb-CL2E-SN-38, when R=R′=methyl.
  • Figure US20140369927A1-20141218-C00006
  • In a preferred embodiment, AA comprises a polypeptide moiety, preferably a di, tri or tetrapeptide, that is cleavable by intracellular peptidase. Examples are: Ala-Leu, Leu-Ala-Leu, and Ala-Leu-Ala-Leu (SEQ ID NO:13) (Trouet et al., 1982).
  • In another preferred embodiment, the L1 component of the conjugate contains a defined polyethyleneglycol (PEG) spacer with 1-30 repeating monomeric units. In a further preferred embodiment, PEG is a defined PEG with 1-12 repeating monomeric units. The introduction of PEG may involve using heterobifunctionalized PEG derivatives which are available commercially. The heterobifunctional PEG may contain an azide or acetylene group. An example of a heterobifunctional defined PEG containing 8 repeating monomeric units, with ‘NHS’ being succinimidyl, is given below in formula 8:
  • Figure US20140369927A1-20141218-C00007
  • In a preferred embodiment, L2 has a plurality of acetylene (or azide) groups, ranging from 2-40, but preferably 2-20, and more preferably 2-5, and a single targeting vector-binding moiety.
  • A representative SN-38 conjugate of an antibody containing multiple drug molecules and a single targeting vector-binding moiety is shown below. The 12′ component of this structure is appended to 2 acetylenic groups, resulting in the attachment of two azide-appended SN-38 molecules. The bonding to MAb is represented as a succinimide.
  • Figure US20140369927A1-20141218-C00008
  • In preferred embodiments, when the bifunctional drug contains a thiol-reactive moiety as the antibody-binding group, the thiols on the antibody are generated on the lysine groups of the antibody using a thiolating reagent. Methods for introducing thiol groups onto antibodies by modifications of MAb's lysine groups are well known in the art (Wong in Chemistry of protein conjugation and cross-linking, CRC Press, Inc., Boca Raton, Fla. (1991), pp 20-22). Alternatively, mild reduction of interchain disulfide bonds on the antibody (Willner et al., Bioconjugate Chem. 4:521-527 (1993)) using reducing agents such as dithiothreitol (DTT) can generate 7-to-10 thiols on the antibody; which has the advantage of incorporating multiple drug moieties in the interchain region of the MAb away from the antigen-binding region.
  • In a preferred embodiment, the chemotherapeutic moiety is selected from the group consisting of doxorubicin (DOX), epirubicin, morpholinodoxorubicin (morpholino-DOX), cyanomorpholino-doxorubicin (cyanomorpholino-DOX), 2-pyrrolino-doxorubicin (2-PDOX), CPT, 10-hydroxy camptothecin, SN-38, topotecan, lurtotecan, 9-aminocamptothecin, 9-nitrocamptothecin, taxanes, geldanamycin, ansamycins, and epothilones. In a more preferred embodiment, the chemotherapeutic moiety is SN-38. Preferably, in the conjugates of the preferred embodiments, the antibody links to at least one chemotherapeutic moiety; preferably 1 to about 12 chemotherapeutic moieties; most preferably about 6 to about 12 chemotherapeutic moieties.
  • Furthermore, in a preferred embodiment, the linker component 12′ comprises a thiol group that reacts with a thiol-reactive residue introduced at one or more lysine side chain amino groups of said antibody. In such cases, the antibody is pre-derivatized with a thiol-reactive group such as a maleimide, vinylsulfone, bromoacetamide, or iodoacetamide by procedures well described in the art.
  • In the context of these embodiments, a process was surprisingly discovered by which CPT drug-linkers can be prepared wherein CPT additionally has a 10-hydroxyl group. This process involves, but is not limited to, the protection of the 10-hydroxyl group as a t-butyloxycarbonyl (BOC) derivative, followed by the preparation of the penultimate intermediate of the drug-linker conjugate. Usually, removal of BOC group requires treatment with strong acid such as trifluoroacetic acid (TFA). Under these conditions, the CPT 20-O-linker carbonate, containing protecting groups to be removed, is also susceptible to cleavage, thereby giving rise to unmodified CPT. In fact, the rationale for using a mildly removable methoxytrityl (MMT) protecting group for the lysine side chain of the linker molecule, as enunciated in the art, was precisely to avoid this possibility (Walker et al., 2002). It was discovered that selective removal of phenolic BOC protecting group is possible by carrying out reactions for short durations, optimally 3-to-5 minutes. Under these conditions, the predominant product was that in which the ‘BOC’ at 10-hydroxyl position was removed, while the carbonate at ‘20’ position was intact.
  • An alternative approach involves protecting the CPT analog's 10-hydroxy position with a group other than ‘BOC’, such that the final product is ready for conjugation to antibodies without a need for deprotecting the 10-OH protecting group. The 10-hydroxy protecting group, which converts the 10-OH into a phenolic carbonate or a phenolic ester, is readily deprotected by physiological pH conditions or by esterases after in vivo administration of the conjugate. The faster removal of a phenolic carbonate at the 10 position vs. a tertiary carbonate at the 20 position of 10-hydroxycamptothecin under physiological condition has been described by He et al. (He et al., Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry 12: 4003-4008 (2004)). A 10-hydroxy protecting group on SN-38 can be TOR′ where R can be a substituted alkyl such as “N(CH3)2—(CH2)n—” where n is 1-10 and wherein the terminal amino group is optionally in the form of a quaternary salt for enhanced aqueous solubility, or a simple alkyl residue such as “CH3—(CH2)n—” where n is 0-10, or it can be an alkoxy moiety such as “CH3—(CH2)n-O—” where n is 0-10, or “N(CH3)2—(CH2)n—O—” where n is 2-10, or “R1O—(CH2—CH2—O)n—CH2—CH2—O—” where R1 is ethyl or methyl and n is an integer with values of 0-10. These 10-hydroxy derivatives are readily prepared by treatment with the chloroformate of the chosen reagent, if the final derivative is to be a carbonate. Typically, the 10-hydroxy-containing camptothecin such as SN-38 is treated with a molar equivalent of the chloroformate in dimethylformamide using triethylamine as the base. Under these conditions, the 20-OH position is unaffected. For forming 10-O-esters, the acid chloride of the chosen reagent is used.
  • In a preferred process of the preparation of a conjugate of a drug derivative and an antibody of the general formula 2, wherein the descriptors L2, L1, AA and A-X are as described in earlier sections, the bifunctional drug moiety, [L2]-[L1]-[AA]m-[A-X]-Drug is first prepared, followed by the conjugation of the bifunctional drug moiety to the antibody.
  • In a preferred process of the preparation of a conjugate of a drug derivative and an antibody of the general formula 2, wherein the descriptors L2, L1, AA and A-OH are as described in earlier sections, the bifunctional drug moiety is prepared by first linking A-OH to the C-terminus of AA via an amide bond, followed by coupling the amine end of AA to a carboxylic acid group of L1. If AA is absent (i.e. m=0), A-OH is directly attached to L1 via an amide bond. The cross-linker, [L1]-[AA]m[A-OH], is attached to drug's hydroxyl or amino group, and this is followed by attachment to the L1 moiety, by taking recourse to the reaction between azide (or acetylene) and acetylene (or azide) groups in L1 and L2 via click chemistry.
  • In a preferred process of the preparation of a conjugate of a drug derivative and an antibody of the general formula 2, wherein the descriptors L2, L1, AA and A-OH are as described in earlier sections, the purified conjugate is contained in the pH range of 5.5 to 7.5 in any of the following Good's biological buffers derived from: 2-(N-morpholino)ethanesulfonic acid (MES), N-(2-acetamido)-2-iminodiacetic acid (ADA), 1,4-piperazinediethanesulfonic acid (PIPES), N-(2-acetamido)-2-aminoethanesulfonic acid (ACES), N,N-bis(2-hydroxyethyl)-2-aminoethanesulfonic acid (BES), N-tris(hydroxymethyl)methyl-2-aminoethanesulfonic acid (TES), and N-(2-hydroxyethyl)piperazine-N′-(2-ethanesulfonic acid) or HEPES. The most preferred buffer is 25 mM MES, pH 6.5. In a further preferred process of preparation of the specified conjugates, the conjugate solution is formulated with excipients such as trehalose and polysorbate 80 and lyophilized, and the lyophilized preparations are preferably stored at 2-8 deg.
  • In one embodiment, the antibody is a monoclonal antibody (MAb). In a further embodiment, the antibody may be a multivalent and/or multispecific MAb. The antibody may be a murine, chimeric, humanized, or human monoclonal antibody, and said antibody may be in intact, fragment (Fab, Fab′, F(ab)2, F(ab′)2), or sub-fragment (single-chain constructs) form, or of an IgG1, IgG2a, IgG3, IgG4, IgA isotype, or submolecules therefrom.
  • In a preferred embodiment, the intracellularly-cleavable moiety may be cleaved after it is internalized into the cell upon binding by the MAb-drug conjugate to a receptor thereof, and particularly cleaved by esterases and peptidases.
  • Preparation of Antibodies
  • The complexes described herein may comprise one or more monoclonal antibodies or fragments thereof. Rodent monoclonal antibodies to specific antigens may be obtained by methods known to those skilled in the art. (See, e.g., Kohler and Milstein, Nature 256: 495 (1975), and Coligan et al. (eds.), CURRENT PROTOCOLS IN IMMUNOLOGY, VOL. 1, pages 2.5.1-2.6.7 (John Wiley & Sons 1991)).
  • General techniques for cloning murine immunoglobulin variable domains have been disclosed, for example, by the publication of Orlandi et al., Proc. Nat'l Acad. Sci. USA 86: 3833 (1989). Techniques for constructing chimeric antibodies are well known to those of skill in the art. As an example, Leung et al., Hybridoma 13:469 (1994), disclose how they produced an LL2 chimera by combining DNA sequences encoding the Vk and VH domains of LL2 monoclonal antibody, an anti-CD22 antibody, with respective human and IgG1 constant region domains. This publication also provides the nucleotide sequences of the LL2 light and heavy chain variable regions, Vk and VH, respectively. Techniques for producing humanized antibodies are disclosed, for example, by Jones et al., Nature 321: 522 (1986), Riechmann et al., Nature 332: 323 (1988), Verhoeyen et al., Science 239: 1534 (1988), Carter et al., Proc. Nat'l Acad. Sci. USA 89: 4285 (1992), Sandhu, Crit. Rev. Biotech. 12: 437 (1992), and Singer et al., J. Immun. 150: 2844 (1993).
  • A chimeric antibody is a recombinant protein that contains the variable domains including the CDRs derived from one species of animal, such as a rodent antibody, while the remainder of the antibody molecule; i.e., the constant domains, is derived from a human antibody. Accordingly, a chimeric monoclonal antibody can also be humanized by replacing the sequences of the murine FR in the variable domains of the chimeric antibody with one or more different human FR. Specifically, mouse CDRs are transferred from heavy and light variable chains of the mouse immunoglobulin into the corresponding variable domains of a human antibody. As simply transferring mouse CDRs into human FRs often results in a reduction or even loss of antibody affinity, additional modification might be required in order to restore the original affinity of the murine antibody. This can be accomplished by the replacement of one or more some human residues in the FR regions with their murine counterparts to obtain an antibody that possesses good binding affinity to its epitope. (See, e.g., Tempest et al., Biotechnology 9:266 (1991) and Verhoeyen et al., Science 239: 1534 (1988)).
  • A fully human antibody can be obtained from a transgenic non-human animal. (See, e.g., Mendez et al., Nature Genetics, 15: 146-156, 1997; U.S. Pat. No. 5,633,425.) Methods for producing fully human antibodies using either combinatorial approaches or transgenic animals transformed with human immunoglobulin loci are known in the art (e.g., Mancini et al., 2004, New Microbiol. 27:315-28; Conrad and Scheller, 2005, Comb. Chem. High Throughput Screen. 8:117-26; Brekke and Loset, 2003, Curr. Opin. Pharmacol. 3:544-50). Such fully human antibodies are expected to exhibit even fewer side effects than chimeric or humanized antibodies and to function in vivo as essentially endogenous human antibodies. In certain embodiments, the claimed methods and procedures may utilize human antibodies produced by such techniques.
  • In one alternative, the phage display technique may be used to generate human antibodies (e.g., Dantas-Barbosa et al., 2005, Genet. Mol. Res. 4:126-40). Human antibodies may be generated from normal humans or from humans that exhibit a particular disease state, such as a hematopoietic cancer (Dantas-Barbosa et al., 2005). The advantage to constructing human antibodies from a diseased individual is that the circulating antibody repertoire may be biased towards antibodies against disease-associated antigens.
  • In one non-limiting example of this methodology, Dantas-Barbosa et al. (2005) constructed a phage display library of human Fab antibody fragments from osteosarcoma patients. Generally, total RNA was obtained from circulating blood lymphocytes (Id.) Recombinant Fab were cloned from the μ, γ and κ chain antibody repertoires and inserted into a phage display library (Id.) RNAs were converted to cDNAs and used to make Fab cDNA libraries using specific primers against the heavy and light chain immunoglobulin sequences (Marks et al., 1991, J. Mol. Biol. 222:581-97). Library construction was performed according to Andris-Widhopf et al. (2000, In: Phage Display Laboratory Manual, Barbas et al. (eds), 1st edition, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y. pp. 9.1 to 9.22). The final Fab fragments were digested with restriction endonucleases and inserted into the bacteriophage genome to make the phage display library. Such libraries may be screened by standard phage display methods. The skilled artisan will realize that this technique is exemplary only and any known method for making and screening human antibodies or antibody fragments by phage display may be utilized.
  • In another alternative, transgenic animals that have been genetically engineered to produce human antibodies may be used to generate antibodies against essentially any immunogenic target, using standard immunization protocols as discussed above. Methods for obtaining human antibodies from transgenic mice are described by Green et al., Nature Genet. 7:13 (1994), Lonberg et al., Nature 368:856 (1994), and Taylor et al., Int. Immun. 6:579 (1994). A non-limiting example of such a system is the XENOMOUSE® (e.g., Green et al., 1999, J. Immunol. Methods 231:11-23) from Abgenix (Fremont, Calif.). In the XENOMOUSE® and similar animals, the mouse antibody genes have been inactivated and replaced by functional human antibody genes, while the remainder of the mouse immune system remains intact.
  • The XENOMOUSE® was transformed with germline-configured YACs (yeast artificial chromosomes) that contained portions of the human IgH and Ig kappa loci, including the majority of the variable region sequences, along accessory genes and regulatory sequences. The human variable region repertoire may be used to generate antibody producing B cells, which may be processed into hybridomas by known techniques. A XENOMOUSE® immunized with a target antigen will produce human antibodies by the normal immune response, which may be harvested and/or produced by standard techniques discussed above. A variety of strains of XENOMOUSE® are available, each of which is capable of producing a different class of antibody. Transgenically produced human antibodies have been shown to have therapeutic potential, while retaining the pharmacokinetic properties of normal human antibodies (Green et al., 1999). The skilled artisan will realize that the claimed compositions and methods are not limited to use of the XENOMOUSE® system but may utilize any transgenic animal that has been genetically engineered to produce human antibodies.
  • Antibody Cloning and Production
  • Various techniques, such as production of chimeric or humanized antibodies, may involve procedures of antibody cloning and construction. The antigen-binding Vκ (variable light chain) and VH (variable heavy chain) sequences for an antibody of interest may be obtained by a variety of molecular cloning procedures, such as RT-PCR, 5′-RACE, and cDNA library screening. The V genes of an antibody from a cell that expresses a murine antibody can be cloned by PCR amplification and sequenced. To confirm their authenticity, the cloned VL and VH genes can be expressed in cell culture as a chimeric Ab as described by Orlandi et al., (Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., USA, 86: 3833 (1989)). Based on the V gene sequences, a humanized antibody can then be designed and constructed as described by Leung et al. (Mol. Immunol., 32: 1413 (1995)).
  • cDNA can be prepared from any known hybridoma line or transfected cell line producing a murine antibody by general molecular cloning techniques (Sambrook et al., Molecular Cloning, A laboratory manual, 2nd Ed (1989)). The Vκ sequence for the antibody may be amplified using the primers VK1BACK and VK1FOR (Orlandi et al., 1989) or the extended primer set described by Leung et al. (BioTechniques, 15: 286 (1993)). The VH sequences can be amplified using the primer pair VH1BACK/VH1FOR (Orlandi et al., 1989) or the primers annealing to the constant region of murine IgG described by Leung et al. (Hybridoma, 13:469 (1994)). Humanized V genes can be constructed by a combination of long oligonucleotide template syntheses and PCR amplification as described by Leung et al. (Mol. Immunol., 32: 1413 (1995)).
  • PCR products for Vκ can be subcloned into a staging vector, such as a pBR327-based staging vector, VKpBR, that contains an Ig promoter, a signal peptide sequence and convenient restriction sites. PCR products for VH can be subcloned into a similar staging vector, such as the pBluescript-based VHpBS. Expression cassettes containing the Vκ and VH sequences together with the promoter and signal peptide sequences can be excised from VKpBR and VHpBS and ligated into appropriate expression vectors, such as pKh and pG1g, respectively (Leung et al., Hybridoma, 13:469 (1994)). The expression vectors can be co-transfected into an appropriate cell and supernatant fluids monitored for production of a chimeric, humanized or human antibody. Alternatively, the Vκ and VH expression cassettes can be excised and subcloned into a single expression vector, such as pdHL2, as described by Gillies et al. (J. Immunol. Methods 125:191 (1989) and also shown in Losman et al., Cancer, 80:2660 (1997)).
  • In an alternative embodiment, expression vectors may be transfected into host cells that have been pre-adapted for transfection, growth and expression in serum-free medium. Exemplary cell lines that may be used include the Sp/EEE, Sp/ESF and Sp/ESF-X cell lines (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,531,327; 7,537,930 and 7,608,425; the Examples section of each of which is incorporated herein by reference). These exemplary cell lines are based on the Sp2/0 myeloma cell line, transfected with a mutant Bcl-EEE gene, exposed to methotrexate to amplify transfected gene sequences and pre-adapted to serum-free cell line for protein expression.
  • Antibody Allotypes
  • Immunogenicity of therapeutic antibodies is associated with increased risk of infusion reactions and decreased duration of therapeutic response (Baert et al., 2003, N Engl J Med 348:602-08). The extent to which therapeutic antibodies induce an immune response in the host may be determined in part by the allotype of the antibody (Stickler et al., 2011, Genes and Immunity 12:213-21). Antibody allotype is related to amino acid sequence variations at specific locations in the constant region sequences of the antibody. The allotypes of IgG antibodies containing a heavy chain γ-type constant region are designated as Gm allotypes (1976, J Immunol 117:1056-59).
  • For the common IgG1 human antibodies, the most prevalent allotype is G1m1 (Stickler et al., 2011, Genes and Immunity 12:213-21). However, the G1m3 allotype also occurs frequently in Caucasians (Id.). It has been reported that G1m1 antibodies contain allotypic sequences that tend to induce an immune response when administered to non-G1m1 (nG1m1) recipients, such as G1m3 patients (Id.). Non-G1m1 allotype antibodies are not as immunogenic when administered to G1m1 patients (Id.).
  • The human G1m1 allotype comprises the amino acids D12 (Kabat position 356) and L14 (Kabat position 358) in the CH3 sequence of the heavy chain IgG1. The nG1m1 allotype comprises the amino acids E12 and M14 at the same locations. Both G1m1 and nG1m1 allotypes comprise an E13 residue in between the two variable sites and the allotypes are sometimes referred to as DEL and EEM allotypes. A non-limiting example of the heavy chain constant region sequence for an nG1m1 (G1m3) allotype antibody is shown in Example 1 below for the exemplary antibody veltuzumab (SEQ ID NO:14).
  • With regard to therapeutic antibodies, veltuzumab (G1m3) and rituximab (G1m17,1) are, respectively, humanized and chimeric IgG1 antibodies against CD20, of use for therapy of a wide variety of hematological malignancies and/or autoimmune diseases. Table 1 compares the allotype sequences of the heavy chain constant region sequences of rituximab vs. veltuzumab. The light chain constant region sequences of the two antibodies are identical. As shown in Table 1, rituximab (G1m17,1) is a DEL allotype IgG1, with an additional sequence variation at Kabat position 214 (heavy chain CH1) of lysine in rituximab vs. arginine in veltuzumab. It has been reported that veltuzumab is less immunogenic in subjects than rituximab (see, e.g., Morchhauser et al., 2009, J Clin Oncol 27:3346-53; Goldenberg et al., 2009, Blood 113:1062-70; Robak & Robak, 2011, BioDrugs 25:13-25), an effect that has been attributed to the difference between humanized and chimeric antibodies. However, the difference in allotypes between the EEM and DEL allotypes likely also accounts for the lower immunogenicity of veltuzumab.
  • TABLE 1
    Allotypes of Rituximab vs. Veltuzumab
    Heavy chain position and associated allotypes
    Complete 214 356/358 431
    allotype (allotype) (allotype) (allotype)
    Rituximab G1m17,1 K 17 D/L 1 A —
    Veltuzumab G1m3 R 3 E/M — A —
  • In order to reduce the immunogenicity of therapeutic antibodies in individuals of nG1m1 genotype, it is desirable to select the allotype of the antibody to correspond to the EEM allotype, with a glutamate residue at Kabat position 356, a methionine at Kabat position 358, and preferably an arginine residue at Kabat position 214. Surprisingly, it was found that repeated subcutaneous administration of G1m3 antibodies over a long period of time did not result in a significant immune response.
  • Known Antibodies
  • In various embodiments, the claimed methods and compositions may utilize any of a variety of antibodies known in the art. Antibodies of use may be commercially obtained from a number of known sources. For example, a variety of antibody secreting hybridoma lines are available from the American Type Culture Collection (ATCC, Manassas, Va.). A large number of antibodies against various disease targets have been deposited at the ATCC and/or have published variable region sequences and are available for use in the claimed methods and compositions. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,312,318; 7,282,567; 7,151,164; 7,074,403; 7,060,802; 7,056,509; 7,049,060; 7,045,132; 7,041,803; 7,041,802; 7,041,293; 7,038,018; 7,037,498; 7,012,133; 7,001,598; 6,998,468; 6,994,976; 6,994,852; 6,989,241; 6,974,863; 6,965,018; 6,964,854; 6,962,981; 6,962,813; 6,956,107; 6,951,924; 6,949,244; 6,946,129; 6,943,020; 6,939,547; 6,921,645; 6,921,645; 6,921,533; 6,919,433; 6,919,078; 6,916,475; 6,905,681; 6,899,879; 6,893,625; 6,887,468; 6,887,466; 6,884,594; 6,881,405; 6,878,812; 6,875,580; 6,872,568; 6,867,006; 6,864,062; 6,861,511; 6,861,227; 6,861,226; 6,838,282; 6,835,549; 6,835,370; 6,824,780; 6,824,778; 6,812,206; 6,793,924; 6,783,758; 6,770,450; 6,767,711; 6,764,688; 6,764,681; 6,764,679; 6,743,898; 6,733,981; 6,730,307; 6,720,155; 6,716,966; 6,709,653; 6,693,176; 6,692,908; 6,689,607; 6,689,362; 6,689,355; 6,682,737; 6,682,736; 6,682,734; 6,673,344; 6,653,104; 6,652,852; 6,635,482; 6,630,144; 6,610,833; 6,610,294; 6,605,441; 6,605,279; 6,596,852; 6,592,868; 6,576,745; 6,572,856; 6,566,076; 6,562,618; 6,545,130; 6,544,749; 6,534,058; 6,528,625; 6,528,269; 6,521,227; 6,518,404; 6,511,665; 6,491,915; 6,488,930; 6,482,598; 6,482,408; 6,479,247; 6,468,531; 6,468,529; 6,465,173; 6,461,823; 6,458,356; 6,455,044; 6,455,040, 6,451,310; 6,444,206, 6,441,143; 6,432,404; 6,432,402; 6,419,928; 6,413,726; 6,406,694; 6,403,770; 6,403,091; 6,395,276; 6,395,274; 6,387,350; 6,383,759; 6,383,484; 6,376,654; 6,372,215; 6,359,126; 6,355,481; 6,355,444; 6,355,245; 6,355,244; 6,346,246; 6,344,198; 6,340,571; 6,340,459; 6,331,175; 6,306,393; 6,254,868; 6,187,287; 6,183,744; 6,129,914; 6,120,767; 6,096,289; 6,077,499; 5,922,302; 5,874,540; 5,814,440; 5,798,229; 5,789,554; 5,776,456; 5,736,119; 5,716,595; 5,677,136; 5,587,459; 5,443,953, 5,525,338, the Examples section of each of which is incorporated herein by reference. These are exemplary only and a wide variety of other antibodies and their hybridomas are known in the art. The skilled artisan will realize that antibody sequences or antibody-secreting hybridomas against almost any disease-associated antigen may be obtained by a simple search of the ATCC, NCBI and/or USPTO databases for antibodies against a selected disease-associated target of interest. The antigen binding domains of the cloned antibodies may be amplified, excised, ligated into an expression vector, transfected into an adapted host cell and used for protein production, using standard techniques well known in the art.
  • Exemplary known antibodies that may be of use for therapy of cancer or autoimmune disease within the scope of the claimed methods and compositions include, but are not limited to, LL1 (anti-CD74), LL2 and RFB4 (anti-CD22), RS7 (anti-epithelial glycoprotein-1 (EGP-1)), PAM4 and KC4 (both anti-mucin), MN-14 (anti-carcinoembryonic antigen (CEA or CEACAM5, also known as CD66e)), Mu-9 (anti-colon-specific antigen-p), Immu-31 (an anti-alpha-fetoprotein), TAG-72 (e.g., CC49), Tn, J591 or HuJ591 (anti-PSMA (prostate-specific membrane antigen)), AB-PG1-XG1-026 (anti-PSMA dimer), D2/B (anti-PSMA), G250 (an anti-carbonic anhydrase IX MAb), hL243 (anti-HLA-DR), R1 (anti-IGF-1R), A20 (anti-CD20), A19 (anti-CD19), MN-3 or MN-15 (anti-CEACAM6), alemtuzumab (anti-CD52), bevacizumab (anti-VEGF), cetuximab (anti-EGFR), gemtuzumab (anti-CD33), ibritumomab tiuxetan (anti-CD20); panitumumab (anti-EGFR); rituximab (anti-CD20); tositumomab (anti-CD20); GA101 (anti-CD20); and trastuzumab (anti-ErbB2). Such antibodies are known in the art (e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,686,072; 5,874,540; 6,107,090; 6,183,744; 6,306,393; 6,653,104; 6,730,300; 6,899,864; 6,926,893; 6,962,702; 7,074,403; 7,230,084; 7,238,785; 7,238,786; 7,256,004; 7,282,567; 7,300,655; 7,312,318; 7,585,491; 7,612,180; 7,642,239; and U.S. Patent Application Publ. No. 20040202666 (now abandoned); 20050271671; and 20060193865; the Examples section of each incorporated herein by reference.)
  • Specific known antibodies of use include, but are not limited to, hPAM4 (U.S. Pat. No. 7,282,567), hA20 (U.S. Pat. No. 7,251,164), hA19 (U.S. Pat. No. 7,109,304), hIMMU31 (U.S. Pat. No. 7,300,655), hLL1 (U.S. Pat. No. 7,312,318,), hLL2 (U.S. Pat. No. 7,074,403), hMu-9 (U.S. Pat. No. 7,387,773), hL243 (U.S. Pat. No. 7,612,180), hMN-14 (U.S. Pat. No. 6,676,924), hMN-15 (U.S. Pat. No. 7,541,440), hR1 (U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/689,336), hRS7 (U.S. Pat. No. 7,238,785), hMN-3 (U.S. Pat. No. 7,541,440), 15B8 (anti-CD40, U.S. Pat. No. 7,820,170), AB-PG1-XG1-026 (U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/983,372, deposited as ATCC PTA-4405 and PTA-4406) and D2/B (WO 2009/130575). Other known antibodies are disclosed, for example, in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,686,072; 5,874,540; 6,107,090; 6,183,744; 6,306,393; 6,653,104; 6,730.300; 6,899,864; 6,926,893; 6,962,702; 7,074,403; 7,230,084; 7,238,785; 7,238,786; 7,256,004; 7,282,567; 7,300,655; 7,312,318; 7,585,491; 7,612,180; 7,642,239; and U.S. Patent Application Publ. No. 20040202666 (now abandoned); 20050271671; and 20060193865. The text of each recited patent or application is incorporated herein by reference with respect to the Figures and Examples sections.
  • Anti-TNF-α antibodies are known in the art and may be of use to treat immune diseases, such as autoimmune disease, immune dysfunction (e.g., graft-versus-host disease, organ transplant rejection) or diabetes. Known antibodies against TNF-α include the human antibody CDP571 (Ofei et al., 2011, Diabetes 45:881-85); murine antibodies MTNFAI, M2TNFAI, M3TNFAI, M3TNFABI, M302B and M303 (Thermo Scientific, Rockford, Ill.); infliximab (Centocor, Malvern, Pa.); certolizumab pegol (UCB, Brussels, Belgium); and adalimumab (Abbott, Abbott Park, Ill.). These and many other known anti-TNF-α antibodies may be used in the claimed methods and compositions. Other antibodies of use for therapy of immune dysregulatory or autoimmune disease include, but are not limited to, anti-B-cell antibodies such as veltuzumab, epratuzumab, milatuzumab or hL243; tocilizumab (anti-IL-6 receptor); basiliximab (anti-CD25); daclizumab (anti-CD25); efalizumab (anti-CD11a); GA101 (anti-CD20; Glycart Roche); muromonab-CD3 (anti-CD3 receptor); Benlysta (Human Genome Sciences); anti-CD40L (UCB, Brussels, Belgium); natalizumab (anti-α4 integrin) and omalizumab (anti-IgE).
  • Type-1 and Type-2 diabetes may be treated using known antibodies against B-cell antigens, such as CD22 (epratuzumab), CD74 (milatuzumab), CD19 (hA19), CD20 (veltuzumab) or HLA-DR (hL243) (see, e.g., Winer et al., 2011, Nature Med 17:610-18). Anti-CD3 antibodies also have been proposed for therapy of type 1 diabetes (Cernea et al., 2010, Diabetes Metab Rev 26:602-05).
  • Macrophage migration inhibitory factor (MIF) is an important regulator of innate and adaptive immunity and apoptosis. It has been reported that CD74 is the endogenous receptor for MIF (Leng et al., 2003, J Exp Med 197:1467-76). The therapeutic effect of antagonistic anti-CD74 antibodies on MIF-mediated intracellular pathways may be of use for treatment of a broad range of disease states, such as cancers of the bladder, prostate, breast, lung, colon and chronic lymphocytic leukemia (e.g., Meyer-Siegler et al., 2004, BMC Cancer 12:34; Shachar & Haran, 2011, Leuk Lymphoma 52:1446-54); autoimmune diseases such as rheumatoid arthritis and systemic lupus erythematosus (Morand & Leech, 2005, Front Biosci 10:12-22; Shachar & Haran, 2011, Leuk Lymphoma 52:1446-54); kidney diseases such as renal allograft rejection (Lan, 2008, Nephron Exp Nephrol. 109:e79-83); and numerous inflammatory diseases (Meyer-Siegler et al., 2009, Mediators Inflamm epub Mar. 22, 2009; Takahashi et al., 2009, Respir Res 10:33; Milatuzumab (hLL1) is an exemplary anti-CD74 antibody of therapeutic use for treatment of MIF-mediated diseases.
  • Antibody Fragments
  • Antibody fragments which recognize specific epitopes can be generated by known techniques. The antibody fragments are antigen binding portions of an antibody, such as F(ab)2, Fab′, Fab, Fv, scFv and the like. Other antibody fragments include, but are not limited to, F(ab′)2 fragments which can be produced by pepsin digestion of the antibody molecule and Fab′ fragments which can be generated by reducing disulfide bridges of the F(ab′)2 fragments. Alternatively, Fab′ expression libraries can be constructed (Huse et al., 1989, Science, 246:1274-1281) to allow rapid and easy identification of monoclonal Fab′ fragments with the desired specificity.
  • A single chain Fv molecule (scFv) comprises a VL domain and a VH domain. The VL and VH domains associate to form a target binding site. These two domains are further covalently linked by a peptide linker (L). Methods for making scFv molecules and designing suitable peptide linkers are disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,704,692, U.S. Pat. No. 4,946,778, R. Raag and M. Whitlow, “Single Chain Fvs.” FASEB Vol 9:73-80 (1995) and R. E. Bird and B. W. Walker, “Single Chain Antibody Variable Regions,” TIBTECH, Vol 9: 132-137 (1991).
  • An antibody fragment can be prepared by known methods, for example, as disclosed by Goldenberg, U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,036,945 and 4,331,647 and references contained therein. Also, see Nisonoff et al., Arch Biochem. Biophys. 89: 230 (1960); Porter, Biochem. J. 73: 119 (1959), Edelman et al., in METHODS IN ENZYMOLOGY VOL. 1, page 422 (Academic Press 1967), and Coligan at pages 2.8.1-2.8.10 and 2.10.-2.10.4.
  • A single complementarity-determining region (CDR) is a segment of the variable region of an antibody that is complementary in structure to the epitope to which the antibody binds and is more variable than the rest of the variable region. Accordingly, a CDR is sometimes referred to as hypervariable region. A variable region comprises three CDRs. CDR peptides can be obtained by constructing genes encoding the CDR of an antibody of interest. Such genes are prepared, for example, by using the polymerase chain reaction to synthesize the variable region from RNA of antibody-producing cells. (See, e.g., Larrick et al., Methods: A Companion to Methods in Enzymology 2: 106 (1991); Courtenay-Luck, “Genetic Manipulation of Monoclonal Antibodies,” in MONOCLONAL ANTIBODIES: PRODUCTION, ENGINEERING AND CLINICAL APPLICATION, Ritter et al. (eds.), pages 166-179 (Cambridge University Press 1995); and Ward et al., “Genetic Manipulation and Expression of Antibodies,” in MONOCLONAL ANTIBODIES: PRINCIPLES AND APPLICATIONS, Birch et al., (eds.), pages 137-185 (Wiley-Liss, Inc. 1995).
  • Another form of an antibody fragment is a single-domain antibody (dAb), sometimes referred to as a single chain antibody. Techniques for producing single-domain antibodies are well known in the art (see, e.g., Cossins et al., Protein Expression and Purification, 2007, 51:253-59; Shuntao et al., Molec Immunol 2006, 43:1912-19; Tanha et al., J. Biol. Chem. 2001, 276:24774-780). Single domain antibodies may be obtained, for example, from camels, alpacas or llamas by standard immunization techniques. (See, e.g., Muyldermans et al., TIBS 26:230-235, 2001; Yau et al., J Immunol Methods 281:161-75, 2003; Maass et al., J Immunol Methods 324:13-25, 2007). They can have potent antigen-binding capacity and can interact with novel epitopes that are inaccessible to conventional VH-VL pairs. (Muyldermans et al., 2001). Alpaca serum IgG contains about 50% camelid heavy chain only IgG antibodies (HCAbs) (Maass et al., 2007). Alpacas may be immunized with known antigens, such as TNF-α, and single domain antibodies can be isolated that bind to and neutralize the target antigen (Maass et al., 2007). PCR primers that amplify virtually all alpaca antibody coding sequences have been identified and may be used to construct single domain phage display libraries, which can be used for antibody fragment isolation by standard biopanning techniques well known in the art (Maass et al., 2007).
  • In certain embodiments, the sequences of antibodies or antibody fragments, such as the Fc portions of antibodies, may be varied to optimize their physiological characteristics, such as the half-life in serum. Methods of substituting amino acid sequences in proteins are widely known in the art, such as by site-directed mutagenesis (e.g. Sambrook et al., Molecular Cloning, A laboratory manual, 2nd Ed, 1989). In preferred embodiments, the variation may involve the addition or removal of one or more glycosylation sites in the Fc sequence (e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,254,868, the Examples section of which is incorporated herein by reference). In other preferred embodiments, specific amino acid substitutions in the Fc sequence may be made (e.g., Hornick et al., 2000, J Nucl Med 41:355-62; Hinton et al., 2006, J Immunol 176:346-56; Petkova et al. 2006, Int Immunol 18:1759-69; U.S. Pat. No. 7,217,797).
  • Multispecific and Multivalent Antibodies
  • Various embodiments may concern use of multispecific and/or multivalent antibodies. For example, an anti-CD22 antibody or fragment thereof and an anti-CD20 antibody or fragment thereof may be joined together by means such as the dock-and-lock technique described above. Other combinations of antibodies or fragments thereof may be utilized. For example, the anti-CD22 antibody could be combined with another antibody against a different epitope of the same antigen, or alternatively with an antibody against another antigen, such as CD4, CD5, CD8, CD14, CD15, CD19, CD20, CD21, CD22, CD23, CD25, CD33, CD37, CD38, CD40, CD40L, CD46, CD52, CD54, CD74, CD80, CD126, CD138, B7, HM1.24, HLA-DR, an angiogenesis factor, tenascin, VEGF, PlGF, ED-B fibronectin, an oncogene, an oncogene product, NCA 66a-d, necrosis antigens, Ii (HLA-DR invariant chain), IL-2, T101, TAC, IL-6, MUC-1, TRAIL-R1 (DR4) or TRAIL-R2 (DR5).
  • Methods for producing bispecific antibodies include engineered recombinant antibodies which have additional cysteine residues so that they crosslink more strongly than the more common immunoglobulin isotypes. (See, e.g., FitzGerald et al, Protein Eng 10:1221-1225, 1997). Another approach is to engineer recombinant fusion proteins linking two or more different single-chain antibody or antibody fragment segments with the needed dual specificities. (See, e.g., Coloma et al., Nature Biotech. 15:159-163, 1997). A variety of bispecific antibodies can be produced using molecular engineering. In one form, the bispecific antibody may consist of, for example, a scFv with a single binding site for one antigen and a Fab fragment with a single binding site for a second antigen. In another form, the bispecific antibody may consist of, for example, an IgG with two binding sites for one antigen and two scFv with two binding sites for a second antigen.
  • Dock-and-Lock (DNL)
  • In preferred embodiments, multivalent monospecific or bispecific antibodies may be produced using the dock-and-lock (DNL) technology (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,521,056; 7,550,143; 7,534,866; 7,527,787 and 7,666,400; the Examples section of each of which is incorporated herein by reference). The DNL method exploits specific protein/protein interactions that occur between the regulatory (R) subunits of cAMP-dependent protein kinase (PKA) and the anchoring domain (AD) of A-kinase anchoring proteins (AKAPs) (Baillie et al., FEBS Letters. 2005; 579: 3264. Wong and Scott, Nat. Rev. Mol. Cell Biol. 2004; 5: 959). PKA, which plays a central role in one of the best studied signal transduction pathways triggered by the binding of the second messenger cAMP to the R subunits, was first isolated from rabbit skeletal muscle in 1968 (Walsh et al., J. Biol. Chem. 1968; 243:3763). The structure of the holoenzyme consists of two catalytic subunits held in an inactive form by the R subunits (Taylor, J. Biol. Chem. 1989; 264:8443). Isozymes of PKA are found with two types of R subunits (RI and RII), and each type has α β isoforms (Scott, Pharmacol. Ther. 1991; 50:123). Thus, there are four types of PKA regulatory subunits—RIα, RIβ, RIIα and RIIβ. The R subunits have been isolated only as stable dimers and the dimerization domain has been shown to consist of the first 44 amino-terminal residues (Newlon et al., Nat. Struct. Biol. 1999; 6:222). Binding of cAMP to the R subunits leads to the release of active catalytic subunits for a broad spectrum of serine/threonine kinase activities, which are oriented toward selected substrates through the compartmentalization of PKA via its docking with AKAPs (Scott et al., J. Biol. Chem. 1990; 265; 21561).
  • Since the first AKAP, microtubule-associated protein-2, was characterized in 1984 (Lohmann et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci USA. 1984; 81:6723), more than 50 AKAPs that localize to various sub-cellular sites, including plasma membrane, actin cytoskeleton, nucleus, mitochondria, and endoplasmic reticulum, have been identified with diverse structures in species ranging from yeast to humans (Wong and Scott, Nat. Rev. Mol. Cell Biol. 2004; 5:959). The AD of AKAPs for PKA is an amphipathic helix of 14-18 residues (Carr et al., J. Biol. Chem. 1991; 266:14188). The amino acid sequences of the AD are quite varied among individual AKAPs, with the binding affinities reported for RII dimers ranging from 2 to 90 nM (Alto et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA. 2003; 100:4445). AKAPs will only bind to dimeric R subunits. For human RIIα, the AD binds to a hydrophobic surface formed by the 23 amino-terminal residues (Colledge and Scott, Trends Cell Biol. 1999; 6:216). Thus, the dimerization domain and AKAP binding domain of human RIIα are both located within the same N-terminal 44 amino acid sequence (Newlon et al., Nat. Struct. Biol. 1999; 6:222; Newlon et al., EMBO J. 2001; 20:1651), which is termed the DDD herein.
  • We have developed a platform technology to utilize the DDD of human PKA regulatory subunit and the AD of AKAP as an excellent pair of linker modules for docking any two entities, referred to hereafter as A and B, into a noncovalent complex, which could be further locked into a stably tethered structure through the introduction of cysteine residues into both the DDD and AD at strategic positions to facilitate the formation of disulfide bonds. The general methodology of the “dock-and-lock” approach is as follows. Entity A is constructed by linking a DDD sequence to a precursor of A, resulting in a first component hereafter referred to as a. Because the DDD sequence would effect the spontaneous formation of a dimer, A would thus be composed of a2. Entity B is constructed by linking an AD sequence to a precursor of B, resulting in a second component hereafter referred to as b. The dimeric motif of DDD contained in a2 will create a docking site for binding to the AD sequence contained in b, thus facilitating a ready association of a2 and b to form a binary, trimeric complex composed of a2b. This binding event is made irreversible with a subsequent reaction to covalently secure the two entities via disulfide bridges, which occurs very efficiently based on the principle of effective local concentration because the initial binding interactions should bring the reactive thiol groups placed onto both the DDD and AD into proximity (Chmura et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA. 2001; 98:8480) to ligate site-specifically. Using various combinations of linkers, adaptor modules and precursors, a wide variety of DNL constructs of different stoichiometry may be produced and used, including but not limited to dimeric, trimeric, tetrameric, pentameric and hexameric DNL constructs (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,550,143; 7,521,056; 7,534,866; 7,527,787 and 7,666,400.)
  • By attaching the DDD and AD away from the functional groups of the two precursors, such site-specific ligations are also expected to preserve the original activities of the two precursors. This approach is modular in nature and potentially can be applied to link, site-specifically and covalently, a wide range of substances, including peptides, proteins, antibodies, antibody fragments, and other effector moieties with a wide range of activities. Utilizing the fusion protein method of constructing AD and DDD conjugated effectors described in the Examples below, virtually any protein or peptide may be incorporated into a DNL construct. However, the technique is not limiting and other methods of conjugation may be utilized.
  • A variety of methods are known for making fusion proteins, including nucleic acid synthesis, hybridization and/or amplification to produce a synthetic double-stranded nucleic acid encoding a fusion protein of interest. Such double-stranded nucleic acids may be inserted into expression vectors for fusion protein production by standard molecular biology techniques (see, e.g. Sambrook et al., Molecular Cloning, A laboratory manual, 2nd Ed, 1989). In such preferred embodiments, the AD and/or DDD moiety may be attached to either the N-terminal or C-terminal end of an effector protein or peptide. However, the skilled artisan will realize that the site of attachment of an AD or DDD moiety to an effector moiety may vary, depending on the chemical nature of the effector moiety and the part(s) of the effector moiety involved in its physiological activity. Site-specific attachment of a variety of effector moieties may be performed using techniques known in the art, such as the use of bivalent cross-linking reagents and/or other chemical conjugation techniques.
  • The skilled artisan will realize that the DNL technique may be utilized to produce complexes comprising multiple copies of the same anti-CD22 or anti-CD20 antibodies, or to attach one or more anti-CD22 antibodies to one or more anti-CD20 antibodies or an antibody against a different target antigen expressed by B-cells. Alternatively, the DNL technique may be used to attach antibodies to different effector moieties, such as toxins, cytokines, carrier proteins for siRNA and other known effectors.
  • Structure-Function Relationships in AD and DDD Moieties
  • For different types of DNL constructs, different AD or DDD sequences may be utilized. Exemplary DDD and AD sequences are provided below.
  • DDD1
    (SEQ ID NO: 15)
    SHIQIPPGLTELLQGYTVEVLRQQPPDLVEFAVEYFTRLREARA
    DDD2
    (SEQ ID NO: 16)
    CGHIQIPPGLTELLQGYTVEVLRQQPPDLVEFAVEYFTRLREARA
    AD1
    (SEQ ID NO: 17)
    QIEYLAKQIVDNAIQQA 
    AD2
    (SEQ ID NO: 18)
    CGQIEYLAKQIVDNAIQQAGC
  • The skilled artisan will realize that DDD1 and DDD2 are based on the DDD sequence of the human RIIα isoform of protein kinase A. However, in alternative embodiments, the DDD and AD moieties may be based on the DDD sequence of the human RIα form of protein kinase A and a corresponding AKAP sequence, as exemplified in DDD3, DDD3C and AD3 below.
  • DDD3
    (SEQ ID NO: 19)
    SLRECELYVQKHNIQALLKDSIVQLCTARPERPMAFLREYFERLEKEEAK
    DDD3C
    (SEQ ID NO: 20)
    MSCGGSLRECELYVQKHNIQALLKDSIVQLCTARPERPMAFLREYFERL
    EKEEAK 
    AD3
    (SEQ ID NO: 21)
    CGFEELAWKIAKMIWSDVFQQGC
  • In other alternative embodiments, other sequence variants of AD and/or DDD moieties may be utilized in construction of the DNL complexes. For example, there are only four variants of human PKA DDD sequences, corresponding to the DDD moieties of PKA RIα, RIIα, RIβ and RIIβ. The RIIα DDD sequence is the basis of DDD1 and DDD2 disclosed above. The four human PKA DDD sequences are shown below. The DDD sequence represents residues 1-44 of RIIα, 1-44 of RIIβ, 12-61 of RIα and 13-66 of RIβ. (Note that the sequence of DDD1 is modified slightly from the human PKA RIIα DDD moiety.)
  • PKA RIα
    (SEQ ID NO: 22)
    SLRECELYVQKHNIQALLKDVSIVQLCTARPERPMAFLREYFEKLEKEE
    AK
    PKA RIβ
    (SEQ ID NO: 23)
    SLKGCELYVQLHGIQQVLKDCIVHLCISKPERPMKFLREHFEKLEKEEN
    RQILA
    PKA RIIα
    (SEQ ID NO: 24)
    SHIQIPPGLTELLQGYTVEVGQQPPDLVDFAVEYFTRLREARRQ
    PKA RIIβ
    (SEQ ID NO: 25)
    SIEIPAGLTELLQGFTVEVLRHQPADLLEFALQHFTRLQQENER
  • The structure-function relationships of the AD and DDD domains have been the subject of investigation. (See, e.g., Burns-Hamuro et al., 2005, Protein Sci 14:2982-92; Carr et al., 2001, J Biol Chem 276:17332-38; Alto et al., 2003, Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 100:4445-50; Hundsrucker et al., 2006, Biochem J 396:297-306; Stokka et al., 2006, Biochem J 400:493-99; Gold et al., 2006, Mol Cell 24:383-95; Kinderman et al., 2006, Mol Cell 24:397-408.)
  • For example, Kinderman et al. (2006, Mol Cell 24:397-408) examined the crystal structure of the AD-DDD binding interaction and concluded that the human DDD sequence contained a number of conserved amino acid residues that were important in either dimer formation or AKAP binding, underlined in SEQ ID NO:15 below. (See FIG. 1 of Kinderman et al., 2006, incorporated herein by reference.) The skilled artisan will realize that in designing sequence variants of the DDD sequence, one would desirably avoid changing any of the underlined residues, while conservative amino acid substitutions might be made for residues that are less critical for dimerization and AKAP binding.
  • (SEQ ID NO: 15)
    SHIQIPPGLTELLQGYTVEVLRQQPPDLVEFAVEYFTRLREARA
  • As discussed in more detail below, conservative amino acid substitutions have been characterized for each of the twenty common L-amino acids. Thus, based on the data of Kinderman (2006) and conservative amino acid substitutions, potential alternative DDD sequences based on SEQ ID NO:15 are shown in Table 2. In devising Table 2, only highly conservative amino acid substitutions were considered. For example, charged residues were only substituted for residues of the same charge, residues with small side chains were substituted with residues of similar size, hydroxyl side chains were only substituted with other hydroxyls, etc. Because of the unique effect of proline on amino acid secondary structure, no other residues were substituted for proline. Even with such conservative substitutions, there are over twenty million possible alternative sequences for the 44 residue peptide (2×3×2×2×2×2×2×2×2×2×2×2×2×2×2×4×2×2×2×2×2×4×2×4). A limited number of such potential alternative DDD moiety sequences are shown in SEQ ID NO:26 to SEQ ID NO:45 below. The skilled artisan will realize that an almost unlimited number of alternative species within the genus of DDD moieties can be constructed by standard techniques, for example using a commercial peptide synthesizer or well known site-directed mutagenesis techniques. The effect of the amino acid substitutions on AD moiety binding may also be readily determined by standard binding assays, for example as disclosed in Alto et al. (2003, Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 100:4445-50).
  • TABLE 2 
    Conservative Amino Acid Substitutions in DDD1 (SEQ ID NO: 15).
    Consensus sequence disclosed as SEQ ID NO: 131.
    S H I Q I P P G L T E L L Q G Y T V E V L R
    T K N A S D N A S D K
    R
    Q Q P P D L V E F A V E Y F T R L R E A R A
    N N E D L D S K K D L K L
    I I I
    V V V
    THIQIPPGLTELLQGYTVEVLRQQPPDLVEFAVEYFTRLREARA (SEQ ID NO: 26)
    SKIQIPPGLTELLQGYTVEVLRQQPPDLVEFAVEYFTRLREARA (SEQ ID NO: 27)
    SRIQIPPGLTELLQGYTVEVLRQQPPDLVEFAVEYFTRLREARA (SEQ ID NO: 28)
    SHINIPPGLTELLQGYTVEVLRQQPPDLVEFAVEYFTRLREARA (SEQ ID NO: 29)
    SHIQIPPALTELLQGYTVEVLRQQPPDLVEFAVEYFTRLREARA (SEQ ID NO: 30)
    SHIQIPPGLSELLQGYTVEVLRQQPPDLVEFAVEYFTRLREARA (SEQ ID NO: 31)
    SHIQIPPGLTDLLQGYTVEVLRQQPPDLVEFAVEYFTRLREARA (SEQ ID NO: 32)
    SHIQIPPGLTELLNGYTVEVLRQQPPDLVEFAVEYFTRLREARA (SEQ ID NO: 33)
    SHIQIPPGLTELLQAYTVEVLRQQPPDLVEFAVEYFTRLREARA (SEQ ID NO: 34)
    SHIQIPPGLTELLQGYSVEVLRQQPPDLVEFAVEYFTRLREARA (SEQ ID NO: 35)
    SHIQIPPGLTELLQGYTVDVLRQQPPDLVEFAVEYFTRLREARA (SEQ ID NO: 36)
    SHIQIPPGLTELLQGYTVEVLKQQPPDLVEFAVEYFTRLREARA (SEQ ID NO: 37)
    SHIQIPPGLTELLQGYTVEVLRNQPPDLVEFAVEYFTRLREARA (SEQ ID NO: 38)
    SHIQIPPGLTELLQGYTVEVLRQNPPDLVEFAVEYFTRLREARA (SEQ ID NO: 39)
    SHIQIPPGLTELLQGYTVEVLRQQPPELVEFAVEYFTRLREARA (SEQ ID NO: 40)
    SHIQIPPGLTELLQGYTVEVLRQQPPDLVDFAVEYFTRLREARA (SEQ ID NO: 41)
    SHIQIPPGLTELLQGYTVEVLRQQPPDLVEFLVEYFTRLREARA (SEQ ID NO: 42)
    SHIQIPPGLTELLQGYTVEVLRQQPPDLVEFIVEYFTRLREARA (SEQ ID NO: 43)
    SHIQIPPGLTELLQGYTVEVLRQQPPDLVEFVVEYFTRLREARA (SEQ ID NO: 44)
    SHIQIPPGLTELLQGYTVEVLRQQPPDLVEFAVDYFTRLREARA (SEQ ID NO: 45)
  • Alto et al. (2003, Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 100:4445-50) performed a bioinformatic analysis of the AD sequence of various AKAP proteins to design an RII selective AD sequence called AKAP-IS (SEQ ID NO:17), with a binding constant for DDD of 0.4 nM. The AKAP-IS sequence was designed as a peptide antagonist of AKAP binding to PKA. Residues in the AKAP-IS sequence where substitutions tended to decrease binding to DDD are underlined in SEQ ID NO:17 below. The skilled artisan will realize that in designing sequence variants of the AD sequence, one would desirably avoid changing any of the underlined residues, while conservative amino acid substitutions might be made for residues that are less critical for DDD binding. Table 3 shows potential conservative amino acid substitutions in the sequence of AKAP-IS (AD1, SEQ ID NO:17), similar to that shown for DDD1 (SEQ ID NO:15) in Table 2 above.
  • Even with such conservative substitutions, there are over thirty-five thousand possible alternative sequences for the 17 residue AD1 (SEQ ID NO:17) peptide sequence (2×3×2×4×3×2×2×2×2×2×2×4). A limited number of such potential alternative AD moiety sequences are shown in SEQ ID NO:46 to SEQ ID NO:63 below. Again, a very large number of species within the genus of possible AD moiety sequences could be made, tested and used by the skilled artisan, based on the data of Alto et al. (2003). It is noted that FIG. 2 of Alto (2003) shows an even large number of potential amino acid substitutions that may be made, while retaining binding activity to DDD moieties, based on actual binding experiments.
  • AKAP-IS
    (SEQ ID NO: 17)
    QIEYLAKQIVDNAIQQA
  • TABLE 3 
    Conservative Amino Acid Substitutions in AD1 (SEQ ID NO: 17).
    Consensus sequence disclosed as SEQ ID NO: 132.
    Q I E Y L A K Q I V D N A I Q Q A
    N L D F I R N E Q N N L
    V T V I
    S V
    NIEYLAKQIVDNAIQQA (SEQ ID NO: 46)
    QLEYLAKQIVDNAIQQA (SEQ ID NO: 47)
    QVEYLAKQIVDNAIQQA (SEQ ID NO: 48)
    QIDYLAKQIVDNAIQQA (SEQ ID NO: 49)
    QIEFLAKQIVDNAIQQA (SEQ ID NO: 50)
    QIETLAKQIVDNAIQQA (SEQ ID NO: 51)
    QIESLAKQIVDNAIQQA (SEQ ID NO: 52)
    QIEYIAKQIVDNAIQQA (SEQ ID NO: 53)
    QIEYVAKQIVDNAIQQA (SEQ ID NO: 54)
    QIEYLARQIVDNAIQQA (SEQ ID NO: 55)
    QIEYLAKNIVDNAIQQA (SEQ ID NO: 56)
    QIEYLAKQIVENAIQQA (SEQ ID NO: 57)
    QIEYLAKQIVDQAIQQA (SEQ ID NO: 58)
    QIEYLAKQIVDNAINQA (SEQ ID NO: 59)
    QIEYLAKQIVDNAIQNA (SEQ ID NO: 60)
    QIEYLAKQIVDNAIQQL (SEQ ID NO: 61)
    QIEYLAKQIVDNAIQQI (SEQ ID NO: 62)
    QIEYLAKQIVDNAIQQV (SEQ ID NO: 63)
  • Gold et al. (2006, Mol Cell 24:383-95) utilized crystallography and peptide screening to develop a SuperAKAP-IS sequence (SEQ ID NO:64), exhibiting a five order of magnitude higher selectivity for the RII isoform of PKA compared with the RI isoform. Underlined residues indicate the positions of amino acid substitutions, relative to the AKAP-IS sequence, which increased binding to the DDD moiety of RIIα. In this sequence, the N-terminal Q residue is numbered as residue number 4 and the C-terminal A residue is residue number 20. Residues where substitutions could be made to affect the affinity for RIIα were residues 8, 11, 15, 16, 18, 19 and 20 (Gold et al., 2006). It is contemplated that in certain alternative embodiments, the SuperAKAP-IS sequence may be substituted for the AKAP-IS AD moiety sequence to prepare DNL constructs. Other alternative sequences that might be substituted for the AKAP-IS AD sequence are shown in SEQ ID NO:65-67. Substitutions relative to the AKAP-IS sequence are underlined. It is anticipated that, as with the AD2 sequence shown in SEQ ID NO:18, the AD moiety may also include the additional N-terminal residues cysteine and glycine and C-terminal residues glycine and cysteine.
  • SuperAKAP-IS
    (SEQ ID NO: 64)
    QIEYVAKQIVDYAIHQA
    Alternative AKAP sequences
    (SEQ ID NO: 65)
    QIEYKAKQIVDHAIHQA
    (SEQ ID NO: 66)
    QIEYHAKQIVDHAIHQA
    (SEQ ID NO: 67)
    QIEYVAKQIVDHAIHQA
  • FIG. 2 of Gold et al. disclosed additional DDD-binding sequences from a variety of AKAP proteins, shown below.
  • RII-Specific AKAPs
    AKAP-KL
    (SEQ ID NO: 68)
    PLEYQAGLLVQNAIQQAI
    AKAP79
    (SEQ ID NO: 69)
    LLIETASSLVKNAIQLSI
    AKAP-Lbc
    (SEQ ID NO: 70)
    LIEEAASRIVDAVIEQVK
    RI-Specific AKAPs
    AKAPce
    (SEQ ID NO: 71)
    ALYQFADRFSELVISEAL
    RIAD
    (SEQ ID NO: 72)
    LEQVANQLADQIIKEAT
    PV38
    (SEQ ID NO: 73)
    FEELAWKIAKMIWSDVF 
    Dual-Specificity AKAPs
    AKAP7
    (SEQ ID NO: 74)
    ELVRLSKRLVENAVLKAV
    MAP2D
    (SEQ ID NO: 75)
    TAEEVSARIVQVVTAEAV
    DAKAP1
    (SEQ ID NO: 76)
    QIKQAAFQLISQVILEAT
    DAKAP2
    (SEQ ID NO: 77)
    LAWKIAKMIVSDVMQQ
  • Stokka et al. (2006, Biochem J 400:493-99) also developed peptide competitors of AKAP binding to PKA, shown in SEQ ID NO:78-80. The peptide antagonists were designated as Ht31 (SEQ ID NO:78), RIAD (SEQ ID NO:79) and PV-38 (SEQ ID NO:80). The Ht-31 peptide exhibited a greater affinity for the RII isoform of PKA, while the RIAD and PV-38 showed higher affinity for RI.
  • Ht31
    (SEQ ID NO: 78)
    DLIEEAASRIVDAVIEQVKAAGAY
    RIAD
    (SEQ ID NO: 79)
    LEQYANQLADQIIKEATE
    PV-38
    (SEQ ID NO: 80)
    FEELAWKIAKMIWSDVFQQC
  • Hundsrucker et al. (2006, Biochem J 396:297-306) developed still other peptide competitors for AKAP binding to PKA, with a binding constant as low as 0.4 nM to the DDD of the RII form of PKA. The sequences of various AKAP antagonistic peptides are provided in Table 1 of Hundsrucker et al., reproduced in Table 4 below. AKAPIS represents a synthetic RII subunit-binding peptide. All other peptides are derived from the RII-binding domains of the indicated AKAPs.
  • TABLE 1 
    AKAP Peptide sequences
    Peptide Sequence
    AKAPIS QIEYLAKQIVDNAIQQA (SEQ ID NO: 17)
    AKAPIS-P QIEYLAKQIPDNAIQQA (SEQ ID NO: 81)
    Ht31 KGADLIEEAASRIVDAVIEQVKAAG
    (SEQ ID NO: 82)
    Ht31-P KGADLIEEAASRIPDAPIEQVKAAG
    (SEQ ID NO: 83)
    AKAP7δ- PEDAELVRLSKRLVENAVLKAVQQY
    wt-pep (SEQ ID NO: 84)
    AKAP7δ- PEDAELVRTSKRLVENAVLKAVQQY
    L304T-pep (SEQ ID NO: 85)
    AKAP7δ- PEDAELVRLSKRDVENAVLKAVQQY
    L308D-pep (SEQ ID NO: 86)
    AKAP7δ- PEDAELVRLSKRLPENAVLKAVQQY
    P-pep (SEQ ID NO: 87)
    AKAP7δ- PEDAELVRLSKRLPENAPLKAVQQY
    PP-pep (SEQ ID NO: 88)
    AKAP7δ- PEDAELVRLSKRLVENAVEKAVQQY
    L314E-pep (SEQ ID NO: 89)
    AKAP1-pep EEGLDRNEEIKRAAFQIISQVISEA
    (SEQ ID NO: 90)
    AKAP2-pep LVDDPLEYQAGLLVQNAIQQAIAEQ
    (SEQ ID NO: 91)
    AKAP5-pep QYETLLIETASSLVKNAIQLSIEQL
    (SEQ ID NO: 92)
    AKAP9-pep LEKQYQEQLEEEVAKVIVSMSIAFA
    (SEQ ID NO: 93)
    AKAP10-pep NTDEAQEELAWKIAKMIVSDIMQQA
    (SEQ ID NO: 94)
    AKAP11-pep VNLDKKAVLAEKIVAEAIEKAEREL
    (SEQ ID NO: 95)
    AKAP12-pep NGILELETKSSKLVQNIIQTAVDQF
    (SEQ ID NO: 96)
    AKAP14-pep TQDKNYEDELTQVALALVEDVINYA
    (SEQ ID NO: 97)
    Rab32-pep ETSAKDNINIEEAARFLVEKILVNH
    (SEQ ID NO: 98)
  • Residues that were highly conserved among the AD domains of different AKAP proteins are indicated below by underlining with reference to the AKAP IS sequence (SEQ ID NO:17). The residues are the same as observed by Alto et al. (2003), with the addition of the C-terminal alanine residue. (See FIG. 4 of Hundsrucker et al. (2006), incorporated herein by reference.) The sequences of peptide antagonists with particularly high affinities for the RII DDD sequence were those of AKAP-IS, AKAP7δ-wt-pep, AKAP7δ-L304T-pep and AKAP7δ-L308D-pep.
  • AKAP-IS
    (SEQ ID NO: 17)
    QIEYLAKQIVDNAIQQA
  • Carr et al. (2001, J Biol Chem 276:17332-38) examined the degree of sequence homology between different AKAP-binding DDD sequences from human and non-human proteins and identified residues in the DDD sequences that appeared to be the most highly conserved among different DDD moieties. These are indicated below by underlining with reference to the human PKA RIIα DDD sequence of SEQ ID NO:15. Residues that were particularly conserved are further indicated by italics. The residues overlap with, but are not identical to those suggested by Kinderman et al. (2006) to be important for binding to AKAP proteins. The skilled artisan will realize that in designing sequence variants of DDD, it would be most preferred to avoid changing the most conserved residues (italicized), and it would be preferred to also avoid changing the conserved residues (underlined), while conservative amino acid substitutions may be considered for residues that are neither underlined nor italicized.
  • (SEQ ID NO: 15)
    SHIQ IP P GL TELLQGYT V EVLR Q QP P DLVEFA VE YF TR L REA R A
  • A modified set of conservative amino acid substitutions for the DDD1 (SEQ ID NO:15) sequence, based on the data of Carr et al. (2001) is shown in Table 5. Even with this reduced set of substituted sequences, there are over 65,000 possible alternative DDD moiety sequences that may be produced, tested and used by the skilled artisan without undue experimentation. The skilled artisan could readily derive such alternative DDD amino acid sequences as disclosed above for Table 2 and Table 3.
  • TABLE 5
    Conservative Amino Acid Substitutions in DDD1 (SEQ ID NO:
    15). Consensus sequence disclosed as SEQ ID NO: 133.
    S H I Q
    Figure US20140369927A1-20141218-P00001
    Figure US20140369927A1-20141218-P00002
    		 P
    Figure US20140369927A1-20141218-P00003
    Figure US20140369927A1-20141218-P00004
    		 T E
    Figure US20140369927A1-20141218-P00004
    Figure US20140369927A1-20141218-P00004
    		 Q
    Figure US20140369927A1-20141218-P00003
    Figure US20140369927A1-20141218-P00005
    Figure US20140369927A1-20141218-P00006
    		 V
    Figure US20140369927A1-20141218-P00007
    Figure US20140369927A1-20141218-P00008
    Figure US20140369927A1-20141218-P00004
    Figure US20140369927A1-20141218-P00009
    T N S I
    L
    A
    Q
    Figure US20140369927A1-20141218-P00010
    Figure US20140369927A1-20141218-P00002
    		 P
    Figure US20140369927A1-20141218-P00011
    Figure US20140369927A1-20141218-P00004
    		 V E
    Figure US20140369927A1-20141218-P00012
    Figure US20140369927A1-20141218-P00013
    		 V E
    Figure US20140369927A1-20141218-P00005
    Figure US20140369927A1-20141218-P00012
    		 T R
    Figure US20140369927A1-20141218-P00004
    		 R E A
    Figure US20140369927A1-20141218-P00009
    		 A
    N I D S K K L L
    L I I
    A V V
  • The skilled artisan will realize that these and other amino acid substitutions in the DDD or AD amino acid sequences may be utilized to produce alternative species within the genus of AD or DDD moieties, using techniques that are standard in the field and only routine experimentation.
  • Amino Acid Substitutions
  • In various embodiments, the disclosed methods and compositions may involve production and use of proteins or peptides with one or more substituted amino acid residues. For example, the DDD and/or AD sequences used to make DNL constructs may be modified as discussed above.
  • The skilled artisan will be aware that, in general, amino acid substitutions typically involve the replacement of an amino acid with another amino acid of relatively similar properties (i.e., conservative amino acid substitutions). The properties of the various amino acids and effect of amino acid substitution on protein structure and function have been the subject of extensive study and knowledge in the art.
  • For example, the hydropathic index of amino acids may be considered (Kyte & Doolittle, 1982, J. Mol. Biol., 157:105-132). The relative hydropathic character of the amino acid contributes to the secondary structure of the resultant protein, which in turn defines the interaction of the protein with other molecules. Each amino acid has been assigned a hydropathic index on the basis of its hydrophobicity and charge characteristics (Kyte & Doolittle, 1982), these are: isoleucine (+4.5); valine (+4.2); leucine (+3.8); phenylalanine (+2.8); cysteine/cystine (+2.5); methionine (+1.9); alanine (+1.8); glycine (−0.4); threonine (−0.7); serine (−0.8); tryptophan (−0.9); tyrosine (−1.3); proline (−1.6); histidine (−3.2); glutamate (−3.5); glutamine (−3.5); aspartate (−3.5); asparagine (−3.5); lysine (−3.9); and arginine (−4.5). In making conservative substitutions, the use of amino acids whose hydropathic indices are within ±2 is preferred, within ±1 are more preferred, and within ±0.5 are even more preferred.
  • Amino acid substitution may also take into account the hydrophilicity of the amino acid residue (e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 4,554,101). Hydrophilicity values have been assigned to amino acid residues: arginine (+3.0); lysine (+3.0); aspartate (+3.0); glutamate (+3.0); serine (+0.3); asparagine (+0.2); glutamine (+0.2); glycine (0); threonine (−0.4); proline (−0.5.+−0.1); alanine (−0.5); histidine (−0.5); cysteine (−1.0); methionine (−1.3); valine (−1.5); leucine (−1.8); isoleucine (−1.8); tyrosine (−2.3); phenylalanine (−2.5); tryptophan (−3.4). Replacement of amino acids with others of similar hydrophilicity is preferred.
  • Other considerations include the size of the amino acid side chain. For example, it would generally not be preferred to replace an amino acid with a compact side chain, such as glycine or serine, with an amino acid with a bulky side chain, e.g., tryptophan or tyrosine. The effect of various amino acid residues on protein secondary structure is also a consideration. Through empirical study, the effect of different amino acid residues on the tendency of protein domains to adopt an alpha-helical, beta-sheet or reverse turn secondary structure has been determined and is known in the art (see, e.g., Chou & Fasman, 1974, Biochemistry, 13:222-245; 1978, Ann. Rev. Biochem., 47: 251-276; 1979, Biophys. J., 26:367-384).
  • Based on such considerations and extensive empirical study, tables of conservative amino acid substitutions have been constructed and are known in the art. For example: arginine and lysine; glutamate and aspartate; serine and threonine; glutamine and asparagine; and valine, leucine and isoleucine. Alternatively: Ala (A) leu, ile, val; Arg (R) gln, asn, lys; Asn (N) his, asp, lys, arg, gln; Asp (D) asn, glu; Cys (C) ala, ser; Gln (Q) glu, asn; Glu (E) gln, asp; Gly (G) ala; His (H) asn, gln, lys, arg; Ile (I) val, met, ala, phe, leu; Leu (L) val, met, ala, phe, ile; Lys (K) gln, asn, arg; Met (M) phe, ile, leu; Phe (F) leu, val, ile, ala, tyr; Pro (P) ala; Ser (S), thr; Thr (T) ser; Trp (W) phe, tyr; Tyr (Y) trp, phe, thr, ser; Val (V) ile, leu, met, phe, ala.
  • Other considerations for amino acid substitutions include whether or not the residue is located in the interior of a protein or is solvent exposed. For interior residues, conservative substitutions would include: Asp and Asn; Ser and Thr; Ser and Ala; Thr and Ala; Ala and Gly; Ile and Val; Val and Leu; Leu and Ile; Leu and Met; Phe and Tyr; Tyr and Trp. (See, e.g., PROWL website at rockefeller.edu) For solvent exposed residues, conservative substitutions would include: Asp and Asn; Asp and Glu; Glu and Gln; Glu and Ala; Gly and Asn; Ala and Pro; Ala and Gly; Ala and Ser; Ala and Lys; Ser and Thr; Lys and Arg; Val and Leu; Leu and Ile; Ile and Val; Phe and Tyr. (Id.) Various matrices have been constructed to assist in selection of amino acid substitutions, such as the PAM250 scoring matrix, Dayhoff matrix, Grantham matrix, McLachlan matrix, Doolittle matrix, Henikoff matrix, Miyata matrix, Fitch matrix, Jones matrix, Rao matrix, Levin matrix and Risler matrix (Idem.)
  • In determining amino acid substitutions, one may also consider the existence of intermolecular or intramolecular bonds, such as formation of ionic bonds (salt bridges) between positively charged residues (e.g., His, Arg, Lys) and negatively charged residues (e.g., Asp, Glu) or disulfide bonds between nearby cysteine residues.
  • Methods of substituting any amino acid for any other amino acid in an encoded protein sequence are well known and a matter of routine experimentation for the skilled artisan, for example by the technique of site-directed mutagenesis or by synthesis and assembly of oligonucleotides encoding an amino acid substitution and splicing into an expression vector construct.
  • Immunoconjugates
  • In certain embodiments, an antibody or antibody fragment may be directly attached to one or more therapeutic agents to form an immunoconjugate. Therapeutic agents may be attached, for example to reduced SH groups and/or to carbohydrate side chains. A therapeutic agent can be attached at the hinge region of a reduced antibody component via disulfide bond formation. Alternatively, such agents can be attached using a heterobifunctional cross-linker, such as N-succinyl 3-(2-pyridyldithio)propionate (SPDP). Yu et al., Int. J. Cancer 56: 244 (1994). General techniques for such conjugation are well-known in the art. See, for example, Wong, CHEMISTRY OF PROTEIN CONJUGATION AND CROSS-LINKING (CRC Press 1991); Upeslacis et al., “Modification of Antibodies by Chemical Methods,” in MONOCLONAL ANTIBODIES: PRINCIPLES AND APPLICATIONS, Birch et al. (eds.), pages 187-230 (Wiley-Liss, Inc. 1995); Price, “Production and Characterization of Synthetic Peptide-Derived Antibodies,” in MONOCLONAL ANTIBODIES: PRODUCTION, ENGINEERING AND CLINICAL APPLICATION, Ritter et al. (eds.), pages 60-84 (Cambridge University Press 1995). Alternatively, the therapeutic agent can be conjugated via a carbohydrate moiety in the Fc region of the antibody.
  • Methods for conjugating functional groups to antibodies via an antibody carbohydrate moiety are well-known to those of skill in the art. See, for example, Shih et al., Int. J. Cancer 41: 832 (1988); Shih et al., Int. J. Cancer 46: 1101 (1990); and Shih et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,057,313, the Examples section of which is incorporated herein by reference. The general method involves reacting an antibody having an oxidized carbohydrate portion with a carrier polymer that has at least one free amine function. This reaction results in an initial Schiff base (imine) linkage, which can be stabilized by reduction to a secondary amine to form the final conjugate.
  • The Fc region may be absent if the antibody component of the immunoconjugate is an antibody fragment. However, it is possible to introduce a carbohydrate moiety into the light chain variable region of a full length antibody or antibody fragment. See, for example, Leung et al., J. Immunol. 154: 5919 (1995); U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,443,953 and 6,254,868, the Examples section of which is incorporated herein by reference. The engineered carbohydrate moiety is used to attach the therapeutic or diagnostic agent.
  • An alternative method for attaching therapeutic agents to an antibody or fragment involves use of click chemistry reactions. The click chemistry approach was originally conceived as a method to rapidly generate complex substances by joining small subunits together in a modular fashion. (See, e.g., Kolb et al., 2004, Angew Chem Int Ed 40:3004-31; Evans, 2007, Aust J Chem 60:384-95.) Various forms of click chemistry reaction are known in the art, such as the Huisgen 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition copper catalyzed reaction (Tornoe et al., 2002, J Organic Chem 67:3057-64), which is often referred to as the “click reaction.” Other alternatives include cycloaddition reactions such as the Diels-Alder, nucleophilic substitution reactions (especially to small strained rings like epoxy and aziridine compounds), carbonyl chemistry formation of urea compounds and reactions involving carbon-carbon double bonds, such as alkynes in thiol-yne reactions.
  • The azide alkyne Huisgen cycloaddition reaction uses a copper catalyst in the presence of a reducing agent to catalyze the reaction of a terminal alkyne group attached to a first molecule. In the presence of a second molecule comprising an azide moiety, the azide reacts with the activated alkyne to form a 1,4-disubstituted 1,2,3-triazole. The copper catalyzed reaction occurs at room temperature and is sufficiently specific that purification of the reaction product is often not required. (Rostovstev et al., 2002, Angew Chem Int Ed 41:2596; Tornoe et al., 2002, J Org Chem 67:3057.) The azide and alkyne functional groups are largely inert towards biomolecules in aqueous medium, allowing the reaction to occur in complex solutions. The triazole formed is chemically stable and is not subject to enzymatic cleavage, making the click chemistry product highly stable in biological systems. Although the copper catalyst is toxic to living cells, the copper-based click chemistry reaction may be used in vitro for immunoconjugate formation.
  • A copper-free click reaction has been proposed for covalent modification of biomolecules. (See, e.g., Agard et al., 2004, J Am Chem Soc 126:15046-47.) The copper-free reaction uses ring strain in place of the copper catalyst to promote a [3+2] azide-alkyne cycloaddition reaction (Id.) For example, cyclooctyne is an 8-carbon ring structure comprising an internal alkyne bond. The closed ring structure induces a substantial bond angle deformation of the acetylene, which is highly reactive with azide groups to form a triazole. Thus, cyclooctyne derivatives may be used for copper-free click reactions (Id.)
  • Another type of copper-free click reaction was reported by Ning et al. (2010, Angew Chem Int Ed 49:3065-68), involving strain-promoted alkyne-nitrone cycloaddition. To address the slow rate of the original cyclooctyne reaction, electron-withdrawing groups are attached adjacent to the triple bond (Id.) Examples of such substituted cyclooctynes include difluorinated cyclooctynes, 4-dibenzocyclooctynol and azacyclooctyne (Id.) An alternative copper-free reaction involved strain-promoted akyne-nitrone cycloaddition to give N-alkylated isoxazolines (Id.) The reaction was reported to have exceptionally fast reaction kinetics and was used in a one-pot three-step protocol for site-specific modification of peptides and proteins (Id.) Nitrones were prepared by the condensation of appropriate aldehydes with N-methylhydroxylamine and the cycloaddition reaction took place in a mixture of acetonitrile and water (Id.) These and other known click chemistry reactions may be used to attach therapeutic agents to antibodies in vitro.
  • The specificity of the click chemistry reaction may be used as a substitute for the antibody-hapten binding interaction used in pretargeting with bispecific antibodies. In this alternative embodiment, the specific reactivity of e.g., cyclooctyne moieties for azide moieties or alkyne moieties for nitrone moieties may be used in an in vivo cycloaddition reaction. An antibody, antibody fragment or antibody-based complex is activated by incorporation of a substituted cyclooctyne, an azide or a nitrone moiety. A targetable construct is labeled with one or more diagnostic or therapeutic agents and a complementary reactive moiety. I.e., where the antibody comprises a cyclooctyne, the targetable construct will comprise an azide; where the antibody comprises a nitrone, the targetable construct will comprise an alkyne, etc. The activated antibody or fragment is administered to a subject and allowed to localize to a targeted cell, tissue or pathogen, as disclosed for pretargeting protocols. The reactive labeled targetable construct is then administered. Because the cyclooctyne, nitrone or azide on the targetable construct is unreactive with endogenous biomolecules and highly reactive with the complementary moiety on the antibody, the specificity of the binding interaction results in the highly specific binding of the targetable construct to the tissue-localized antibody.
  • Therapeutic Agents
  • A wide variety of therapeutic reagents can be administered concurrently or sequentially with the subject anti-CD22 antibodies or antibody combinations. For example, drugs, toxins, oligonucleotides, immunomodulators, cytokine or chemokine inhibitors, proapoptotic agents, tyrosine kinase inhibitors, sphingosine inhibitors, hormones, hormone antagonists, enzymes, enzyme inhibitors, radionuclides, angiogenesis inhibitors, other antibodies or fragments thereof, etc. The therapeutic agents recited here are those agents that also are useful for administration separately with an antibody or fragment thereof as described above. Therapeutic agents include, for example, cytotoxic agents such as vinca alkaloids, anthracyclines, gemcitabine, epipodophyllotoxins, taxanes, antimetabolites, alkylating agents, antibiotics, SN-38, COX-2 inhibitors, antimitotics, anti-angiogenic and pro-apoptotic agents, particularly doxorubicin, methotrexate, taxol, CPT-11, camptothecins, proteosome inhibitors, mTOR inhibitors, HDAC inhibitors, tyrosine kinase inhibitors, and others.
  • Other useful cytotoxic agents include nitrogen mustards, alkyl sulfonates, nitrosoureas, triazenes, folic acid analogs, COX-2 inhibitors, antimetabolites, pyrimidine analogs, purine analogs, platinum coordination complexes, mTOR inhibitors, tyrosine kinase inhibitors, proteosome inhibitors, HDAC inhibitors, camptothecins, hormones, and the like. Suitable cytotoxic agents are described in REMINGTON'S PHARMACEUTICAL SCIENCES, 19th Ed. (Mack Publishing Co. 1995), and in GOODMAN AND GILMAN'S THE PHARMACOLOGICAL BASIS OF THERAPEUTICS, 7th Ed. (MacMillan Publishing Co. 1985), as well as revised editions of these publications.
  • In a preferred embodiment, conjugates of camptothecins and related compounds, such as SN-38, may be conjugated to an antibody, for example as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 7,591,994, the Examples section of which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • The therapeutic agent may be selected from the group consisting of aplidin, azaribine, anastrozole, azacytidine, bleomycin, bortezomib, bryostatin-1, busulfan, calicheamycin, camptothecin, 10-hydroxycamptothecin, carmustine, celebrex, chlorambucil, cisplatin, irinotecan (CPT-11), SN-38, carboplatin, cladribine, cyclophosphamide, cytarabine, dacarbazine, docetaxel, dactinomycin, daunomycin glucuronide, daunorubicin, dexamethasone, diethylstilbestrol, doxorubicin, doxorubicin glucuronide, epirubicin glucuronide, ethinyl estradiol, estramustine, etoposide, etoposide glucuronide, etoposide phosphate, floxuridine (FUdR), 3′,5′-O-dioleoyl-FudR (FUdR-dO), fludarabine, flutamide, fluorouracil, fluoxymesterone, gemcitabine, hydroxyprogesterone caproate, hydroxyurea, idarubicin, ifosfamide, L-asparaginase, leucovorin, lomustine, mechlorethamine, medroprogesterone acetate, egestrol acetate, melphalan, mercaptopurine, 6-mercaptopurine, methotrexate, mitoxantrone, mithramycin, mitomycin, mitotane, phenyl butyrate, prednisone, procarbazine, paclitaxel, pentostatin, PSI-341, semustine streptozocin, tamoxifen, taxanes, taxol, testosterone propionate, thalidomide, thioguanine, thiotepa, teniposide, topotecan, uracil mustard, velcade, vinblastine, vinorelbine, vincristine, ricin, abrin, ribonuclease, onconase, rapLR1, DNase I, Staphylococcal enterotoxin-A, pokeweed antiviral protein, gelonin, diphtheria toxin, Pseudomonas exotoxin, and Pseudomonas endotoxin.
  • A toxin can be of animal, plant or microbial origin. A toxin, such as Pseudomonas exotoxin, may also be complexed to or form the therapeutic agent portion of an immunoconjugate. Other toxins include ricin, abrin, ribonuclease (RNase), DNase I, Staphylococcal enterotoxin-A, pokeweed antiviral protein, onconase, gelonin, diphtheria toxin, Pseudomonas exotoxin, and Pseudomonas endotoxin. See, for example, Pastan et al., Cell 47:641 (1986), Goldenberg, C A—A Cancer Journal for Clinicians 44:43 (1994), Sharkey and Goldenberg, C A—A Cancer Journal for Clinicians 56:226 (2006). Additional toxins suitable for use are known to those of skill in the art and are disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 6,077,499, the Examples section of which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • The therapeutic agent may be an enzyme selected from the group consisting of malate dehydrogenase, staphylococcal nuclease, delta-V-steroid isomerase, yeast alcohol dehydrogenase, alpha-glycerophosphate dehydrogenase, triose phosphate isomerase, horseradish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, asparaginase, glucose oxidase, beta-galactosidase, ribonuclease, urease, catalase, glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase, glucoamylase and acetylcholinesterase.
  • As used herein, the term “immunomodulator” includes cytokines, lymphokines, monokines, stem cell growth factors, lymphotoxins, hematopoietic factors, colony stimulating factors (CSF), interferons (IFN), parathyroid hormone, thyroxine, insulin, proinsulin, relaxin, prorelaxin, follicle stimulating hormone (FSH), thyroid stimulating hormone (TSH), luteinizing hormone (LH), hepatic growth factor, prostaglandin, fibroblast growth factor, prolactin, placental lactogen, OB protein, transforming growth factor (TGF), TGF-α, TGF-β, insulin-like growth factor (IGF), erythropoietin, thrombopoietin, tumor necrosis factor (TNF), TNF-α, TNF-β, mullerian-inhibiting substance, mouse gonadotropin-associated peptide, inhibin, activin, vascular endothelial growth factor, integrin, interleukin (IL), granulocyte-colony stimulating factor (G-CSF), granulocyte macrophage-colony stimulating factor (GM-CSF), interferon-α, interferon-β, interferon-γ, S1 factor, IL-1, IL-1cc, IL-2, IL-3, IL-4, IL-5, IL-6, IL-7, IL-8, IL-9, IL-10, IL-11, IL-12, IL-13, IL-14, IL-15, IL-16, IL-17, IL-18 IL-21, IL-23, IL-25, LIF, kit-ligand, FLT-3, angiostatin, thrombospondin, endostatin, and the like.
  • Exemplary anti-angiogenic agents may include angiostatin, endostatin, vasculostatin, canstatin, maspin, anti-VEGF binding molecules, anti-placental growth factor binding molecules, or anti-vascular growth factor binding molecules.
  • In certain embodiments, the antibody or complex may comprise one or more chelating moieties, such as NOTA, DOTA, DTPA, TETA, Tscg-Cys, or Tsca-Cys. In certain embodiments, the chelating moiety may form a complex with a therapeutic or diagnostic cation, such as Group II, Group III, Group IV, Group V, transition, lanthanide or actinide metal cations, Tc, Re, Bi, Cu, As, Ag, Au, At, or Pb.
  • The antibody or fragment thereof may be administered as an immunoconjugate comprising one or more radioactive isotopes useful for treating diseased tissue. Particularly useful therapeutic radionuclides include, but are not limited to 111In, 177Lu, 212Bi, 213Bi, 211At, 62Cu, 64Cu, 67Cu, 90Y, 125I, 131, 32P, 33P, 47Sc, 111Ag, 67Ga, 142Pr, 153Sm, 161Tb, 166Dy, 166Ho, 186Re, 188Re, 189Re, 212Pb, 223Ra, 225Ac, 59Fe, 75Se, 77As, 89Sr, 99Mo, 105Rh, 109Pd, 143Pr, 149Pm, 169Er, 194Ir, 198Au, 199Au, and 211Pb. The therapeutic radionuclide preferably has a decay energy in the range of 20 to 6,000 keV, preferably in the ranges 60 to 200 keV for an Auger emitter, 100-2,500 keV for a beta emitter and 4,000-6,000 keV for an alpha emitter. Maximum decay energies of useful beta-particle-emitting nuclides are preferably 20-5,000 keV, more preferably 100-4,000 keV and most preferably 500-2,500 keV. Also preferred are radionuclides that substantially decay with Auger-emitting particles. For example, Co-58, Ga-67, Br-80m, Tc-99m, Rh-103m, Pt-109, In-111, Sb-119, I-125, Ho-161, Os-189m and Ir-192. Decay energies of useful beta-particle-emitting nuclides are preferably <1,000 keV, more preferably <100 keV, and most preferably <70 keV. Also preferred are radionuclides that substantially decay with generation of alpha-particles. Such radionuclides include, but are not limited to: Dy-152, At-211, Bi-212, Ra-223, Rn-219, Po-215, Bi-211, Ac-225, Fr-221, At-217, Bi-213 and Fm-255. Decay energies of useful alpha-particle-emitting radionuclides are preferably 2,000-10,000 keV, more preferably 3,000-8,000 keV, and most preferably 4,000-7,000 keV.
  • Additional potential therapeutic radioisotopes include 11C, 13N, 15O, 75Br, 198Au, 224Ac, 126I, 133I, 77Br, 113mIn, 95Ru, 97Ru, 103Ru, 105Ru, 107Hg, 203Hg, 121mTe, 122mTe, 125mTe, 165Tm, 167Tm, 168Tm, 197Pt, 109Pd, 105Rh, 142Pr, 143Pr, 161Tb, 166Ho, 199Au, 57Co, 58Co, 51Cr, 59Fe, 75Se, 201Tl, 225Ac, 76Br, 169Yb, and the like.
  • Interference RNA
  • In certain preferred embodiments the therapeutic agent may be a siRNA or interference RNA species. The siRNA, interference RNA or therapeutic gene may be attached to a carrier moiety that is conjugated to an antibody or fragment thereof. A variety of carrier moieties for siRNA have been reported and any such known carrier may be incorporated into a therapeutic antibody for use. Non-limiting examples of carriers include protamine (Rossi, 2005, Nat Biotech 23:682-84; Song et al., 2005, Nat Biotech 23:709-17); dendrimers such as PAMAM dendrimers (Pan et al., 2007, Cancer Res. 67:8156-8163); polyethylenimine (Schiffelers et al., 2004, Nucl Acids Res 32:e149); polypropyleneimine (Taratula et al., 2009, J Control Release 140:284-93); polylysine (Inoue et al., 2008, J Control Release 126:59-66); histidine-containing reducible polycations (Stevenson et al., 2008, J Control Release 130:46-56); histone H1 protein (Haberland et al., 2009, Mol Biol Rep 26:1083-93); cationic comb-type copolymers (Sato et al., 2007, J Control Release 122:209-16); polymeric micelles (U.S. Patent Application Publ. No. 20100121043); and chitosan-thiamine pyrophosphate (Rojanarata et al., 2008, Pharm Res 25:2807-14). The skilled artisan will realize that in general, polycationic proteins or polymers are of use as siRNA carriers. The skilled artisan will further realize that siRNA carriers can also be used to carry other oligonucleotide or nucleic acid species, such as anti-sense oligonucleotides or short DNA genes.
  • Known siRNA species of potential use include those specific for IKK-gamma (U.S. Pat. No. 7,022,828); VEGF, Flt-1 and Flk-1/KDR (U.S. Pat. No. 7,148,342); Bcl2 and EGFR (U.S. Pat. No. 7,541,453); CDC20 (U.S. Pat. No. 7,550,572); transducin (beta)-like 3 (U.S. Pat. No. 7,576,196); K-ras (U.S. Pat. No. 7,576,197); carbonic anhydrase II (U.S. Pat. No. 7,579,457); complement component 3 (U.S. Pat. No. 7,582,746); interleukin-1 receptor-associated kinase 4 (IRAK4) (U.S. Pat. No. 7,592,443); survivin (U.S. Pat. No. 7,608,7070); superoxide dismutase 1 (U.S. Pat. No. 7,632,938); MET proto-oncogene (U.S. Pat. No. 7,632,939); amyloid beta precursor protein (APP) (U.S. Pat. No. 7,635,771); IGF-1R (U.S. Pat. No. 7,638,621); ICAM1 (U.S. Pat. No. 7,642,349); complement factor B (U.S. Pat. No. 7,696,344); p53 (U.S. Pat. No. 7,781,575), and apolipoprotein B (U.S. Pat. No. 7,795,421), the Examples section of each referenced patent incorporated herein by reference.
  • Additional siRNA species are available from known commercial sources, such as Sigma-Aldrich (St Louis, Mo.), Invitrogen (Carlsbad, Calif.), Santa Cruz Biotechnology (Santa Cruz, Calif.), Ambion (Austin, Tex.), Dharmacon (Thermo Scientific, Lafayette, Colo.), Promega (Madison, Wis.), Minis Bio (Madison, Wis.) and Qiagen (Valencia, Calif.), among many others. Other publicly available sources of siRNA species include the siRNAdb database at the Stockholm Bioinformatics Centre, the MIT/ICBP siRNA Database, the RNAi Consortium shRNA Library at the Broad Institute, and the Probe database at NCBI. For example, there are 30,852 siRNA species in the NCBI Probe database. The skilled artisan will realize that for any gene of interest, either a siRNA species has already been designed, or one may readily be designed using publicly available software tools. Any such siRNA species may be delivered using the subject antibodies, antibody fragments or antibody complexes.
  • Exemplary siRNA species known in the art are listed in Table 6. Although siRNA is delivered as a double-stranded molecule, for simplicity only the sense strand sequences are shown in Table 6.
  • TABLE 6 
    Exemplary siRNA Sequences
    Target Sequence SEQ ID NO
    VEGF R2 AATGCGGCGGTGGTGACAGTA SEQ ID NO: 99
    VEGF R2 AAGCTCAGCACACAGAAAGAC SEQ ID NO: 100
    CXCR4 UAAAAUCUUCCUGCCCACCdTdT SEQ ID NO: 101
    CXCR4 GGAAGCUGUUGGCUGAAAAdTdT SEQ ID NO: 102
    PPARC 1 AAGACCAGCCUCUUUGCCCAG SEQ ID NO: 103
    Dynamin 2 GGACCAGGCAGAAAACGAG SEQ ID NO: 104
    Catenin CUAUCAGGAUGACGCGG SEQ ID NO: 105
    E1A binding protein UGACACAGGCAGGCUUGACUU SEQ ID NO: 106
    Plasminogen GGTGAAGAAGGGCGTCCAA SEQ ID NO: 107
    activator
    K-ras GATCCGTTGGAGCTGTTGGCGTAGTT SEQ ID NO: 108
    CAAGAGACTCGCCAACAGCTCCAACT
    TTTGGAAA
    Sortilin 1 AGGTGGTGTTAACAGCAGAG SEQ ID NO: 109
    Apolipoprotein E AAGGTGGAGCAAGCGGTGGAG SEQ ID NO: 110
    Apolipoprotein E AAGGAGTTGAAGGCCGACAAA SEQ ID NO: 111
    Bcl-X UAUGGAGCUGCAGAGGAUGdTdT SEQ ID NO: 112
    Raf-1 TTTGAATATCTGTGCTGAGAACACA SEQ ID NO: 113
    GTTCTCAGCACAGATATTCTTTTT
    Heat shock AATGAGAAAAGCAAAAGGTGCCCTGTCTC SEQ ID NO: 114
    transcription factor 2
    IGFBP3 AAUCAUCAUCAAGAAAGGGCA SEQ ID NO: 115
    Thioredoxin AUGACUGUCAGGAUGUUGCdTdT SEQ ID NO: 116
    CD44 GAACGAAUCCUGAAGACAUCU SEQ ID NO: 117
    MMP14 AAGCCTGGCTACAGCAATATGCCTGTCTC SEQ ID NO: 118
    MAPKAPK2 UGACCAUCACCGAGUUUAUdTdT SEQ ID NO: 119
    FGFR1 AAGTCGGACGCAACAGAGAAA SEQ ID NO: 120
    ERBB2 CUACCUUUCUACGGACGUGdTdT SEQ ID NO: 121
    BCL2L1 CTGCCTAAGGCGGATTTGAAT SEQ ID NO: 122
    ABL1 TTAUUCCUUCUUCGGGAAGUC SEQ ID NO: 123
    CEACAM1 AACCTTCTGGAACCCGCCCAC SEQ ID NO: 124
    CD9 GAGCATCTTCGAGCAAGAA SEQ ID NO: 125
    CD151 CATGTGGCACCGTTTGCCT SEQ ID NO: 126
    Caspase 8 AACTACCAGAAAGGTATACCT SEQ ID NO: 127
    BRCA1 UCACAGUGUCCUUUAUGUAdTdT SEQ ID NO: 128
    p53 GCAUGAACCGGAGGCCCAUTT SEQ ID NO: 129
    CEACAM6 CCGGACAGTTCCATGTATA SEQ ID NO: 130
  • The skilled artisan will realize that Table 6 represents a very small sampling of the total number of siRNA species known in the art, and that any such known siRNA may be utilized in the claimed methods and compositions.
  • Immunotoxins Comprising Ranpirnase (Rap)
  • Ribonucleases, in particular, Rap (Lee, Exp Opin Biol Ther 2008; 8:813-27) and its more basic variant, amphinase (Ardelt et al., Curr Pharm Biotechnol 2008:9:215-25), are potential anti-tumor agents (Lee and Raines, Biodrugs 2008; 22:53-8). Rap is a single-chain ribonuclease of 104 amino acids originally isolated from the oocytes of Rana pipiens. Rap exhibits cytostatic and cytotoxic effects on a variety of tumor cell lines in vitro, as well as antitumor activity in vivo. The amphibian ribonuclease enters cells via receptor-mediated endocytosis and once internalized into the cytosol, selectively degrades tRNA, resulting in inhibition of protein synthesis and induction of apoptosis.
  • Rap has completed a randomized Phase Mb clinical trial, which compared the effectiveness of Rap plus doxorubicin with that of doxorubicin alone in patients with unresectable malignant mesothelioma, with the interim analysis showing that the MST for the combination was 12 months, while that of the monotherapy was 10 months (Mutti and Gaudino, Oncol Rev 2008; 2:61-5). Rap can be administered repeatedly to patients without an untoward immune response, with reversible renal toxicity reported to be dose-limiting (Mikulski et al., J Clin Oncol 2002; 20:274-81; Int J Oncol 1993; 3:57-64).
  • Conjugation or fusion of Rap to a tumor-targeting antibody or antibody fragment is a promising approach to enhance its potency, as first demonstrated for LL2-onconase (Newton et al., Blood 2001; 97:528-35), a chemical conjugate comprising Rap and a murine anti-CD22 monoclonal antibody (MAb), and subsequently for 2L-Rap-hLL1-γ4P, a fusion protein comprising Rap and a humanized anti-CD74 MAb (Stein et al., Blood 2004; 104:3705-11).
  • The method used to generate 2L-Rap-hLL1-γ4P allowed us to develop a series of structurally similar immunotoxins, referred to in general as 2L-Rap-X, all of which consist of two Rap molecules, each connected via a flexible linker to the N-terminus of one L chain of an antibody of interest (X). We have also generated another series of immunotoxins of the same design, referred to as 2LRap(Q)-X, by substituting Rap with its non-glycosylation form of Rap, designated as Rap(Q) to denote that the potential glycosylation site at Asn69 is changed to Gln (or Q, single letter code). For both series, we made the IgG as either IgG1(γ1) or IgG4(γ4), and to prevent the formation of IgG4 half molecules (Aalberse and Schuurman, Immunology 2002; 105:9-19), we converted the serine residue in the hinge region (S228) of IgG4 to proline (γ4P). A pyroglutamate residue at the N-terminus of Rap is required for the RNase to be fully functional (Liao et al., Nucleic Acids Res 2003; 31:5247-55).
  • The skilled artisan will recognize that the cytotoxic RNase moieties suitable for use in the present invention include polypeptides having a native ranpirnase structure and all enzymatically active variants thereof. These molecules advantageously have an N-terminal pyroglutamic acid resides that appears essential for RNase activity and are not substantially inhibited by mammalian RNase inhibitors. Nucleic acid that encodes a native cytotoxic RNase may be prepared by cloning and restriction of appropriate sequences, or using DNA amplification with polymerase chain reaction (PCR). The amino acid sequence of Rana pipiens ranpirnase can be obtained from Ardelt et al., J. Biol. Chem., 256: 245 (1991), and cDNA sequences encoding native ranpirnase, or a conservatively modified variation thereof, can be gene-synthesized by methods similar to the en bloc V-gene assembly method used in hLL2 humanization. (Leung et al., Mol. Immunol., 32: 1413, 1995). Methods of making cytotoxic RNase variants are known in the art and are within the skill of the routineer.
  • As described in the Examples below, Rap conjugates of targeting antibodies may be made using the DNL technology. The DNL Rap-antibody constructs show potent cytotoxic activity that can be targeted to disease-associated cells.
  • Diagnostic Agents
  • In various embodiments, the antibodies, antibody fragments or antibody complexes may be conjugated to, or may bind a targetable construct comprising one or more diagnostic agents. Diagnostic agents are preferably selected from the group consisting of a radionuclide, a radiological contrast agent, a paramagnetic ion, a metal, a fluorescent label, a chemiluminescent label, an ultrasound contrast agent and a photoactive agent. Such diagnostic agents are well known and any such known diagnostic agent may be used. Non-limiting examples of diagnostic agents may include a radionuclide such as 18F, 52Fe, 110In, 111In, 177Lu, 18F, 52Fe, 62Cu, 64Cu, 67Cu, 67Ga, 68Ga, 86Y, 90Y, 89Zr, 94mTc, 94Tc, 99mTc, 120I, 123I, 124I, 125I, 131I, 154-158Gd, 32P, 11C, 13N, 15O, 186Re, 188Re, 51Mn, 52mMn, 55Co, 72As, 75Br, 76Br, 82mRb, 83Sr, or other gamma-, beta-, or positron-emitters.
  • Paramagnetic ions of use may include chromium (III), manganese (II), iron (III), iron (II), cobalt (II), nickel (II), copper (II), neodymium (III), samarium (III), ytterbium (III), gadolinium (III), vanadium (II), terbium (III), dysprosium (III), holmium (III) or erbium (III). Metal contrast agents may include lanthanum (III), gold (III), lead (II) or bismuth (III).
  • Ultrasound contrast agents may comprise liposomes, such as gas filled liposomes. Radiopaque diagnostic agents may be selected from compounds, barium compounds, gallium compounds, and thallium compounds. A wide variety of fluorescent labels are known in the art, including but not limited to fluorescein isothiocyanate, rhodamine, phycoerytherin, phycocyanin, allophycocyanin, o-phthaldehyde and fluorescamine. Chemiluminescent labels of use may include luminol, isoluminol, an aromatic acridinium ester, an imidazole, an acridinium salt or an oxalate ester.
  • Methods of Therapeutic Treatment
  • The claimed methods and compositions are of use for treating disease states, such as B-cell lymphomas or leukemias, autoimmune disease or immune system dysfunction (e.g., graft-versus-host disease). The methods may comprise administering a therapeutically effective amount of an anti-CD22 antibody or fragment thereof or immunoconjugate, either alone or in combination with one or more other therapeutic agents, administered either concurrently or sequentially. In preferred embodiments, as described in the Examples below, the anti-CD22 antibody or fragment thereof may be administered in the form of a DNL complex in combination with one or more other therapeutic agents, such as a second antibody or fragment thereof.
  • Multimodal therapies may include therapy with other antibodies, such as antibodies against CD4, CD5, CD8, CD14, CD15, CD19, CD20, CD21, CD22, CD23, CD25, CD33, CD37, CD38, CD40, CD40L, CD46, CD52, CD54, CD74, CD80, CD126, CD138, B7, HM1.24, HLA-DR, an angiogenesis factor, tenascin, VEGF, PlGF, ED-B fibronectin, an oncogene, an oncogene product, NCA 66a-d, necrosis antigens, Ii, IL-2, T101, TAC, IL-6, MUC-1, TRAIL-R1 (DR4) or TRAIL-R2 (DR5) in the form of naked antibodies, fusion proteins, or as immunoconjugates. Various antibodies of use are known to those of skill in the art. See, for example, Ghetie et al., Cancer Res. 48:2610 (1988); Hekman et al., Cancer Immunol. Immunother. 32:364 (1991); Longo, Curr. Opin. Oncol. 8:353 (1996), U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,798,554; 6,187,287; 6,306,393; 6,676,924; 7,109,304; 7,151,164; 7,230,084; 7,230,085; 7,238,785; 7,238,786; 7,282,567; 7,300,655; 7,312,318; 7,612,180; 7,501,498; the Examples section of each of which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • In another form of multimodal therapy, subjects may receive therapeutic anti-CD22 antibodies or antibody combinations in conjunction with standard chemotherapy. For example, “CVB” (1.5 g/m2 cyclophosphamide, 200-400 mg/m2 etoposide, and 150-200 mg/m2 carmustine) is a regimen used to treat non-Hodgkin's lymphoma. Patti et al., Eur. J. Haematol. 51: 18 (1993). Other suitable combination chemotherapeutic regimens are well-known to those of skill in the art. See, for example, Freedman et al., “Non-Hodgkin's Lymphomas,” in CANCER MEDICINE, VOLUME 2, 3rd Edition, Holland et al. (eds.), pages 2028-2068 (Lea & Febiger 1993). As an illustration, first generation chemotherapeutic regimens for treatment of intermediate-grade non-Hodgkin's lymphoma (NHL) include C-MOPP (cyclophosphamide, vincristine, procarbazine and prednisone) and CHOP (cyclophosphamide, doxorubicin, vincristine, and prednisone). A useful second generation chemotherapeutic regimen is m-BACOD (methotrexate, bleomycin, doxorubicin, cyclophosphamide, vincristine, dexamethasone and leucovorin), while a suitable third generation regimen is MACOP-B (methotrexate, doxorubicin, cyclophosphamide, vincristine, prednisone, bleomycin and leucovorin). Additional useful drugs include phenyl butyrate, bendamustine, and bryostatin-1.
  • Therapeutic antibodies or complexes, such as DNL complexes, can be formulated according to known methods to prepare pharmaceutically useful compositions, whereby the therapeutic antibody complex is combined in a mixture with a pharmaceutically suitable excipient. Sterile phosphate-buffered saline is one example of a pharmaceutically suitable excipient. Other suitable excipients are well-known to those in the art. See, for example, Ansel et al., PHARMACEUTICAL DOSAGE FORMS AND DRUG DELIVERY SYSTEMS, 5th Edition (Lea & Febiger 1990), and Gennaro (ed.), REMINGTON'S PHARMACEUTICAL SCIENCES, 18th Edition (Mack Publishing Company 1990), and revised editions thereof.
  • The therapeutic antibody complex can be formulated for intravenous administration via, for example, bolus injection or continuous infusion. Preferably, the therapeutic antibody complex is infused over a period of less than about 4 hours, and more preferably, over a period of less than about 3 hours. For example, the first 25-50 mg could be infused within 30 minutes, preferably even 15 min, and the remainder infused over the next 2-3 hrs. Formulations for injection can be presented in unit dosage form, e.g., in ampoules or in multi-dose containers, with an added preservative. The compositions can take such forms as suspensions, solutions or emulsions in oily or aqueous vehicles, and can contain formulatory agents such as suspending, stabilizing and/or dispersing agents. Alternatively, the active ingredient can be in powder form for constitution with a suitable vehicle, e.g., sterile pyrogen-free water, before use.
  • The therapeutic antibody complex may also be administered to a mammal subcutaneously or even by other parenteral routes. Moreover, the administration may be by continuous infusion or by single or multiple boluses. In most preferred embodiments, the therapeutic antibody or combination is administered subcutaneously in a volume of 1, 2 or 3 ml and at a concentration of at least 80 mg/ml, at least 100 mg/ml, at least 125 mg/ml, at least 150 mg/ml, at least 200 mg/ml, at least 250 mg/ml or at least 300 mg/ml. Methods of antibody concentration and subcutaneous formulations are disclosed in provisional U.S. Patent No. 61/509,850, filed Jul. 20, 2011, the Examples section of which (from paragraph 0133, page 48 to paragraph 0195, page 64) is incorporated herein by reference.
  • More generally, the dosage of an administered therapeutic antibody complex for humans will vary depending upon such factors as the patient's age, weight, height, sex, general medical condition and previous medical history. It may be desirable to provide the recipient with a dosage of therapeutic antibody complex that is in the range of from about 1 mg/kg to 25 mg/kg as a single intravenous infusion, although a lower or higher dosage also may be administered as circumstances dictate. A dosage of 1-20 mg/kg for a 70 kg patient, for example, is 70-1,400 mg, or 41-824 mg/m2 for a 1.7-m patient. The dosage may be repeated as needed, for example, once per week for 4-10 weeks, once per week for 8 weeks, or once per week for 4 weeks. It may also be given less frequently, such as every other week for several months, or monthly or quarterly for many months, as needed in a maintenance therapy.
  • Alternatively, a therapeutic antibody complex may be administered as one dosage every 2 or 3 weeks, repeated for a total of at least 3 dosages. Or, the therapeutic antibody complex may be administered twice per week for 4-6 weeks. If the dosage is lowered to approximately 200-300 mg/m2 (340 mg per dosage for a 1.7-m patient, or 4.9 mg/kg for a 70 kg patient), it may be administered once or even twice weekly for 4 to 10 weeks. Alternatively, the dosage schedule may be decreased, namely every 2 or 3 weeks for 2-3 months. It has been determined, however, that even higher doses, such as 20 mg/kg once weekly or once every 2-3 weeks can be administered by slow i.v. infusion, for repeated dosing cycles. The dosing schedule can optionally be repeated at other intervals and dosage may be given through various parenteral routes, with appropriate adjustment of the dose and schedule.
  • Additional pharmaceutical methods may be employed to control the duration of action of the therapeutic immunoconjugate or naked antibody. Control release preparations can be prepared through the use of polymers to complex or adsorb the antibody. For example, biocompatible polymers include matrices of poly(ethylene-co-vinyl acetate) and matrices of a polyanhydride copolymer of a stearic acid dimer and sebacic acid. Sherwood et al., Bio/Technology 10: 1446 (1992). The rate of release of an antibody from such a matrix depends upon the molecular weight of the antibody, the amount of antibody within the matrix, and the size of dispersed particles. Saltzman et al., Biophys. J. 55: 163 (1989); Sherwood et al., supra. Other solid dosage forms are described in Ansel et al., PHARMACEUTICAL DOSAGE FORMS AND DRUG DELIVERY SYSTEMS, 5th Edition (Lea & Febiger 1990), and Gennaro (ed.), REMINGTON'S PHARMACEUTICAL SCIENCES, 18th Edition (Mack Publishing Company 1990), and revised editions thereof.
  • Cancer Therapy
  • In preferred embodiments, the anti-CD22 antibodies, combinations or complexes are of use for therapy of cancer. Examples of cancers include, but are not limited to, carcinoma, lymphoma, glioblastoma, melanoma, sarcoma, and leukemia, myeloma, or lymphoid malignancies. More particular examples of such cancers are noted below and include: squamous cell cancer (e.g., epithelial squamous cell cancer), Ewing sarcoma, Wilms tumor, astrocytomas, lung cancer including small-cell lung cancer, non-small cell lung cancer, adenocarcinoma of the lung and squamous carcinoma of the lung, cancer of the peritoneum, hepatocellular cancer, gastric or stomach cancer including gastrointestinal cancer, pancreatic cancer, glioblastoma multiforme, cervical cancer, ovarian cancer, liver cancer, bladder cancer, hepatoma, hepatocellular carcinoma, neuroendocrine tumors, medullary thyroid cancer, differentiated thyroid carcinoma, breast cancer, ovarian cancer, colon cancer, rectal cancer, endometrial cancer or uterine carcinoma, salivary gland carcinoma, kidney or renal cancer, prostate cancer, vulvar cancer, anal carcinoma, penile carcinoma, as well as head-and-neck cancer. The term “cancer” includes primary malignant cells or tumors (e.g., those whose cells have not migrated to sites in the subject's body other than the site of the original malignancy or tumor) and secondary malignant cells or tumors (e.g., those arising from metastasis, the migration of malignant cells or tumor cells to secondary sites that are different from the site of the original tumor).
  • Other examples of cancers or malignancies include, but are not limited to: Acute Childhood Lymphoblastic Leukemia, Acute Lymphoblastic Leukemia, Acute Lymphocytic Leukemia, Acute Myeloid Leukemia, Adrenocortical Carcinoma, Adult (Primary) Hepatocellular Cancer, Adult (Primary) Liver Cancer, Adult Acute Lymphocytic Leukemia, Adult Acute Myeloid Leukemia, Adult Hodgkin's Lymphoma, Adult Lymphocytic Leukemia, Adult Non-Hodgkin's Lymphoma, Adult Primary Liver Cancer, Adult Soft Tissue Sarcoma, AIDS-Related Lymphoma, AIDS-Related Malignancies, Anal Cancer, Astrocytoma, Bile Duct Cancer, Bladder Cancer, Bone Cancer, Brain Stem Glioma, Brain Tumors, Breast Cancer, Cancer of the Renal Pelvis and Ureter, Central Nervous System (Primary) Lymphoma, Central Nervous System Lymphoma, Cerebellar Astrocytoma, Cerebral Astrocytoma, Cervical Cancer, Childhood (Primary) Hepatocellular Cancer, Childhood (Primary) Liver Cancer, Childhood Acute Lymphoblastic Leukemia, Childhood Acute Myeloid Leukemia, Childhood Brain Stem Glioma, Childhood Cerebellar Astrocytoma, Childhood Cerebral Astrocytoma, Childhood Extracranial Germ Cell Tumors, Childhood Hodgkin's Disease, Childhood Hodgkin's Lymphoma, Childhood Hypothalamic and Visual Pathway Glioma, Childhood Lymphoblastic Leukemia, Childhood Medulloblastoma, Childhood Non-Hodgkin's Lymphoma, Childhood Pineal and Supratentorial Primitive Neuroectodermal Tumors, Childhood Primary Liver Cancer, Childhood Rhabdomyosarcoma, Childhood Soft Tissue Sarcoma, Childhood Visual Pathway and Hypothalamic Glioma, Chronic Lymphocytic Leukemia, Chronic Myelogenous Leukemia, Colon Cancer, Cutaneous T-Cell Lymphoma, Endocrine Pancreas Islet Cell Carcinoma, Endometrial Cancer, Ependymoma, Epithelial Cancer, Esophageal Cancer, Ewing's Sarcoma and Related Tumors, Exocrine Pancreatic Cancer, Extracranial Germ Cell Tumor, Extragonadal Germ Cell Tumor, Extrahepatic Bile Duct Cancer, Eye Cancer, Female Breast Cancer, Gaucher's Disease, Gallbladder Cancer, Gastric Cancer, Gastrointestinal Carcinoid Tumor, Gastrointestinal Tumors, Germ Cell Tumors, Gestational Trophoblastic Tumor, Hairy Cell Leukemia, Head and Neck Cancer, Hepatocellular Cancer, Hodgkin's Lymphoma, Hypergammaglobulinemia, Hypopharyngeal Cancer, Intestinal Cancers, Intraocular Melanoma, Islet Cell Carcinoma, Islet Cell Pancreatic Cancer, Kaposi's Sarcoma, Kidney Cancer, Laryngeal Cancer, Lip and Oral Cavity Cancer, Liver Cancer, Lung Cancer, Lymphoproliferative Disorders, Macroglobulinemia, Male Breast Cancer, Malignant Mesothelioma, Malignant Thymoma, Medulloblastoma, Melanoma, Mesothelioma, Metastatic Occult Primary Squamous Neck Cancer, Metastatic Primary Squamous Neck Cancer, Metastatic Squamous Neck Cancer, Multiple Myeloma, Multiple Myeloma/Plasma Cell Neoplasm, Myelodysplastic Syndrome, Myelogenous Leukemia, Myeloid Leukemia, Myeloproliferative Disorders, Nasal Cavity and Paranasal Sinus Cancer, Nasopharyngeal Cancer, Neuroblastoma, Non-Hodgkin's Lymphoma, Nonmelanoma Skin Cancer, Non-Small Cell Lung Cancer, Occult Primary Metastatic Squamous Neck Cancer, Oropharyngeal Cancer, Osteo-/Malignant Fibrous Sarcoma, Osteosarcoma/Malignant Fibrous Histiocytoma, Osteosarcoma/Malignant Fibrous Histiocytoma of Bone, Ovarian Epithelial Cancer, Ovarian Germ Cell Tumor, Ovarian Low Malignant Potential Tumor, Pancreatic Cancer, Paraproteinemias, Polycythemia vera, Parathyroid Cancer, Penile Cancer, Pheochromocytoma, Pituitary Tumor, Primary Central Nervous System Lymphoma, Primary Liver Cancer, Prostate Cancer, Rectal Cancer, Renal Cell Cancer, Renal Pelvis and Ureter Cancer, Retinoblastoma, Rhabdomyosarcoma, Salivary Gland Cancer, Sarcoidosis Sarcomas, Sezary Syndrome, Skin Cancer, Small Cell Lung Cancer, Small Intestine Cancer, Soft Tissue Sarcoma, Squamous Neck Cancer, Stomach Cancer, Supratentorial Primitive Neuroectodermal and Pineal Tumors, T-Cell Lymphoma, Testicular Cancer, Thymoma, Thyroid Cancer, Transitional Cell Cancer of the Renal Pelvis and Ureter, Transitional Renal Pelvis and Ureter Cancer, Trophoblastic Tumors, Ureter and Renal Pelvis Cell Cancer, Urethral Cancer, Uterine Cancer, Uterine Sarcoma, Vaginal Cancer, Visual Pathway and Hypothalamic Glioma, Vulvar Cancer, Waldenstrom's Macroglobulinemia, Wilms' Tumor, and any other hyperproliferative disease, besides neoplasia, located in an organ system listed above.
  • The methods and compositions described and claimed herein may be used to treat malignant or premalignant conditions and to prevent progression to a neoplastic or malignant state, including but not limited to those disorders described above. Such uses are indicated in conditions known or suspected of preceding progression to neoplasia or cancer, in particular, where non-neoplastic cell growth consisting of hyperplasia, metaplasia, or most particularly, dysplasia has occurred (for review of such abnormal growth conditions, see Robbins and Angell, Basic Pathology, 2d Ed., W. B. Saunders Co., Philadelphia, pp. 68-79 (1976)).
  • Dysplasia is frequently a forerunner of cancer, and is found mainly in the epithelia. It is the most disorderly form of non-neoplastic cell growth, involving a loss in individual cell uniformity and in the architectural orientation of cells. Dysplasia characteristically occurs where there exists chronic irritation or inflammation. Dysplastic disorders which can be treated include, but are not limited to, anhidrotic ectodermal dysplasia, anterofacial dysplasia, asphyxiating thoracic dysplasia, atriodigital dysplasia, bronchopulmonary dysplasia, cerebral dysplasia, cervical dysplasia, chondroectodermal dysplasia, cleidocranial dysplasia, congenital ectodermal dysplasia, craniodiaphysial dysplasia, craniocarpotarsal dysplasia, craniometaphysial dysplasia, dentin dysplasia, diaphysial dysplasia, ectodermal dysplasia, enamel dysplasia, encephalo-ophthalmic dysplasia, dysplasia epiphysialis hemimelia, dysplasia epiphysialis multiplex, dysplasia epiphysialis punctata, epithelial dysplasia, faciodigitogenital dysplasia, familial fibrous dysplasia of jaws, familial white folded dysplasia, fibromuscular dysplasia, fibrous dysplasia of bone, florid osseous dysplasia, hereditary renal-retinal dysplasia, hidrotic ectodermal dysplasia, hypohidrotic ectodermal dysplasia, lymphopenic thymic dysplasia, mammary dysplasia, mandibulofacial dysplasia, metaphysial dysplasia, Mondini dysplasia, monostotic fibrous dysplasia, mucoepithelial dysplasia, multiple epiphysial dysplasia, oculoauriculovertebral dysplasia, oculodentodigital dysplasia, oculovertebral dysplasia, odontogenic dysplasia, opthalmomandibulomelic dysplasia, periapical cemental dysplasia, polyostotic fibrous dysplasia, pseudoachondroplastic spondyloepiphysial dysplasia, retinal dysplasia, septo-optic dysplasia, spondyloepiphysial dysplasia, and ventriculoradial dysplasia.
  • Additional pre-neoplastic disorders which can be treated include, but are not limited to, benign dysproliferative disorders (e.g., benign tumors, fibrocystic conditions, tissue hypertrophy, intestinal polyps or adenomas, and esophageal dysplasia), leukoplakia, keratoses, Bowen's disease, Farmer's Skin, solar cheilitis, and solar keratosis.
  • In preferred embodiments, the method of the invention is used to inhibit growth, progression, and/or metastasis of cancers, in particular those listed above.
  • Additional hyperproliferative diseases, disorders, and/or conditions include, but are not limited to, progression, and/or metastases of malignancies and related disorders such as leukemia (including acute leukemias (e.g., acute lymphocytic leukemia, acute myelocytic leukemia (including myeloblastic, promyelocytic, myelomonocytic, monocytic, and erythroleukemia)) and chronic leukemias (e.g., chronic myelocytic (granulocytic) leukemia and chronic lymphocytic leukemia)), polycythemia vera, lymphomas (e.g., Hodgkin's disease and non-Hodgkin's disease), multiple myeloma, Waldenstrom's macroglobulinemia, heavy chain disease, and solid tumors including, but not limited to, sarcomas and carcinomas such as fibrosarcoma, myxosarcoma, liposarcoma, chondrosarcoma, osteogenic sarcoma, chordoma, angiosarcoma, endotheliosarcoma, lymphangiosarcoma, lymphangioendotheliosarcoma, synovioma, mesothelioma, Ewing's tumor, leiomyosarcoma, rhabdomyosarcoma, colon carcinoma, pancreatic cancer, breast cancer, ovarian cancer, prostate cancer, squamous cell carcinoma, basal cell carcinoma, adenocarcinoma, sweat gland carcinoma, sebaceous gland carcinoma, papillary carcinoma, papillary adenocarcinomas, cystadenocarcinoma, medullary carcinoma, bronchogenic carcinoma, renal cell carcinoma, hepatoma, bile duct carcinoma, choriocarcinoma, seminoma, embryonal carcinoma, Wilm's tumor, cervical cancer, testicular tumor, lung carcinoma, small cell lung carcinoma, bladder carcinoma, epithelial carcinoma, glioma, astrocytoma, medulloblastoma, craniopharyngioma, ependymoma, pinealoma, emangioblastoma, acoustic neuroma, oligodendroglioma, meningioma, melanoma, neuroblastoma, and retinoblastoma.
  • Therapy of Autoimmune Disease
  • The subject anti-CD22 antibodies, combinations or complexes thereof can be used to treat immune dysregulation disease and related autoimmune diseases. Immune diseases may include acute immune thrombocytopenia, Addison's disease, adult respiratory distress syndrome (ARDS), agranulocytosis, allergic conditions, allergic encephalomyelitis, allergic neuritis, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), ankylosing spondylitis, antigen-antibody complex mediated diseases, anti-glomerular basement membrane disease, anti-phospholipid antibody syndrome, aplastic anemia, arthritis, asthma, atherosclerosis, autoimmune disease of the testis and ovary, autoimmune endocrine diseases, autoimmune myocarditis, autoimmune neutropenia, autoimmune polyendocrinopathies, autoimmune polyglandular syndromes (or polyglandular endocrinopathy syndromes), autoimmune thrombocytopenia, Bechet disease, Berger's disease (IgA nephropathy), bronchiolitis obliterans (non-transplant), bullous pemphigoid, pemphigus vulgaris, Castleman's syndrome, Celiac sprue (gluten enteropathy), central nervous system (CNS) inflammatory disorders, chronic active hepatitis, chronic immune thrombocytopenia dermatomyositis, colitis, conditions involving infiltration of T cells and chronic inflammatory responses, coronary artery disease, Crohn's disease, cryoglobulinemia, dermatitis, dermatomyositis, diabetes mellitus, diseases involving leukocyte diapedesis, eczema, encephalitis, erythema multiforme, erythema nodosum, Factor VIII deficiency, fibrosing alveolitis, giant cell arteritis, glomerulonephritis, Goodpasture's syndrome, graft versus host disease (GVHD), granulomatosis, Grave's disease, Guillain-Barre Syndrome, Hashimoto's thyroiditis, hemophilia A, Henoch-Schonlein purpura, idiopathic hypothyroidism, immune thrombocytopenia (ITP), IgA nephropathy, IgA nephropathy, IgM mediated neuropathy, immune complex nephritis, immune hemolytic anemia including autoimmune hemolytic anemia (AIHA), immune responses associated with acute and delayed hypersensitivity mediated by cytokines and T-lymphocytes, immune-mediated thrombocytopenias, juvenile onset diabetes, juvenile rheumatoid arthritis, Lambert-Eaton Myasthenic Syndrome, large vessel vasculitis, leukocyte adhesion deficiency, leukopenia, lupus nephritis, lymphoid interstitial pneumonitis (HIV), medium vessel vasculitis, membranous nephropathy, meningitis, multiple organ injury syndrome, multiple sclerosis, myasthenia gravis, osteoarthritis, pancytopenia, pemphigoid bullous, pemphigus vulgaris, pernicious anemia, polyarteritis nodosa, polychondritis, polyglandular syndromes, polymyalgia, polymyositis, post-streptococcal nephritis, primary biliary cirrhosis, primary hypothyroidism, psoriasis, psoriatic arthritis, pure red cell aplasia (PRCA), rapidly progressive glomerulonephritis, Reiter's disease, respiratory distress syndrome, responses associated with inflammatory bowel disease, Reynaud's syndrome, rheumatic fever, rheumatoid arthritis, sarcoidosis, scleroderma, Sjogren's syndrome, solid organ transplant rejection, Stevens-Johnson syndrome, stiff-man syndrome, subacute thyroiditis, Sydenham's chorea, systemic lupus erythematosus (SLE), systemic scleroderma and sclerosis, tabes dorsalis, Takayasu's arteritis, thromboangitis obliterans, thrombotic thrombocytopenic purpura (TTP), thyrotoxicosis, toxic epidermal necrolysis, tuberculosis, Type I diabetes, ulcerative colitis, uveitis, vasculitis (including ANCA) and Wegener's granulomatosis.
  • Type-1 and Type-2 diabetes may be treated using known antibodies against B-cell antigens, such as CD22 (epratuzumab), CD74 (milatuzumab), CD19 (hA19), CD20 (veltuzumab) or HLA-DR (hL243) (see, e.g., Winer et al., 2011, Nature Med 17:610-18). Anti-CD3 antibodies also have been proposed for therapy of type 1 diabetes (Cernea et al., 2010, Diabetes Metab Rev 26:602-05).
  • Kits
  • Various embodiments may concern kits containing anti-CD22 antibodies, antibody combinations and/or antibody constructs and/or other components. Such components may include a targetable construct. In alternative embodiments it is contemplated that a targetable construct may be attached to one or more different therapeutic and/or diagnostic agents.
  • If the composition containing components for administration is not formulated for delivery via the alimentary canal, such as by oral delivery, a device capable of delivering the kit components through some other route may be included. One type of device, for applications such as parenteral delivery, is a syringe that is used to inject the composition into the body of a subject. Inhalation devices may also be used for certain applications.
  • The kit components may be packaged together or separated into two or more containers. In some embodiments, the containers may be vials that contain sterile, lyophilized formulations of a composition that are suitable for reconstitution. A kit may also contain one or more buffers suitable for reconstitution and/or dilution of other reagents. Other containers that may be used include, but are not limited to, a pouch, tray, box, tube, or the like. Kit components may be packaged and maintained sterilely within the containers. Another component that can be included is instructions to a person using a kit for its use.
    • EXAMPLES
  • Various embodiments of the present invention are illustrated by the following examples, without limiting the scope thereof.
  • General Procedures
  • Abbreviations used below are: DCC, dicyclohexylcarbodiimide; NHS, N-hydroxysuccinimide, DMAP, 4-dimethylaminopyridine; EEDQ, 2-ethoxy-1-ethoxycarbonyl-1,2-dihydroquinoline; MMT, monomethoxytrityl; PABOH, p-aminobenzyl alcohol; PEG, polyethylene glycol; SMCC, succinimidyl 4-(N-maleimidomethyl)cyclohexane-1-carboxylate; TBAF, tetrabutylammonium fluoride; TBDMS, tert-butyldimethylsilyl chloride.
  • Chloroformates of hydroxy compounds in the following examples were prepared using triphosgene and DMAP according to the procedure described in Moon et al. (J. Medicinal Chem. 51:6916-6926, 2008). Extractive work-up refers to extraction with chloroform, dichloromethane or ethyl acetate, and washing optionally with saturated bicarbonate, water, and with saturated sodium chloride. Flash chromatography was done using 230-400 mesh silica gel and a methanol-dichloromethane gradient, using up to 15% v/v methanol-dichloromethane, unless otherwise stated. Reverse phase HPLC was performed by Method A using a 7.8×300 mm C18 HPLC column, fitted with a precolumn filter, and using a solvent gradient of 100% solvent A to 100% solvent B in 10 minutes at a flow rate of 3 mL per minute and maintaining at 100% solvent B at a flow rate of 4.5 mL per minute for 5 or 10 minutes; or by Method B using a 4.6×30 mm C18, 2.5 μm, column, fitted with a precolumn filter, using the solvent gradient of 100% solvent A to 100% of solvent B at a flow rate of 1.5 mL per minutes for 4 min and 100% of solvent B at a flow rate of 2 mL per minutes for 1 minutes. Solvent A was 0.3% aqueous ammonium acetate, pH 4.46 while solvent B was 9:1 acetonitrile-aqueous ammonium acetate (0.3%), pH 4.46. HPLC was monitored by a dual in-line absorbance detector set at 360 nm and 254 nm.
    • Example 1 Preparation of CL6-SN-38
  • An exemplary synthetic protocol for CL6-SN-38 is presented in Scheme 1. Commercially available O-(2-azidoethyl)-O′—(N-diglycolyl-2-aminoethyl)heptaethyleneglycol (‘PEG-N3’; 227 mg) was activated with DCC (100 mg), NHS (56 mg), and a catalytic amount of DMAP in 10 mL of dichloromethane for 10 min. To this mixture was added L-valinol (46.3 mg), and the reaction mixture was stirred for 1 h at ambient temperature. Filtration, followed by solvent removal and flash chromatography yielded 214 mg of clear oily material. This intermediate (160 mg) was reacted with 10-O-BOC-SN-38-20-O-chloroformate, the latter generated from 10-O-BOC-SN-38 (123 mg) using triphosgene and DMAP. The coupling reaction was done in 4 mL of dichloromethane for 10 min, and the reaction mixture was purified by flash chromatography to obtain 130 mg (45% yield) of product as foamy material. HPLC: tR 11.80 min; electrospray mass spectrum: M+Na: m/z 1181.
  • A maleimide-containing acetylenic reagent, 4-(N-maleimidomethyl)-N-(2-propynyl)cyclohexane-1-carboxamide, required for click cycloaddition, was prepared by reacting 0.107 g of SMCC and 0.021 mL of propargylamine (0.018 g; 1.01 equiv.) in dichloromethane using 1.1 equiv. of diisopropylethylamine. After 1 h, the solvent was removed and the product was purified by flash chromatography to obtain 83 mg of the product (colorless powder). Electrospray mass spectrum showed peaks at m/e 275 (M+H) and a base peak at m/e 192 in the positive ion mode, consistent with the structure calculated for C15H18N2O3: 275.1390 (M+H). found: 275.1394 (exact mass).
  • The azido intermediate (126 mg) described above was dissolved in DMSO (1.5 mL) and water (0.4 mL), and reacted with 60 mg of 4-(N-maleimidomethyl)-N-(2-propynyl)cyclohexane-1-carboxamide and 15 mg of cuprous bromide and stirred for 30 min at ambient temperature. Flash chromatography, after work up of the reaction mixture, furnished 116 mg (75% yield) of the cycloaddition product. HPLC: tR 11.20 min; electrospray mass spectrum: M+H and M+Na at m/z 1433 and 1456, respectively. Finally, deprotection with a mixture of TFA (5 mL), dichloromethane (1 mL), anisole (0.1 mL) and water (0.05 mL), followed by precipitation with ether and subsequent flash chromatography yielded the product, CL6-SN-38, as a gummy material. HPLC: tR 9.98 min; electrospray mass spectrum: M+H and M−H (negative ion mode) at m/z 1333 and 1356, respectively.
  • Figure US20140369927A1-20141218-C00009
    Figure US20140369927A1-20141218-C00010
    Figure US20140369927A1-20141218-C00011
    • Example 2 Preparation of CL7-SN-38
  • The synthesis of CL7-SN-38 is schematically shown in Scheme 2. L-Valinol (40 mg) was reacted with commercially available Fmoc-Lys(MMT)-OH (253 mg) and EEDQ (107 mg) in 10 mL of anhydrous dichloromethane at ambient temperature, under argon, for 3 h. Extractive work up followed by flash chromatography furnished the product Fmoc-Lys(MMT)-valinol as a pale yellow liquid (200 mg; ˜70% yield). HPLC: tR 14.38 min; electrospray mass spectrum: M+H: m/z 727. This intermediate (200 mg) was deprotected with diethylamine (10 mL), and the product (135 mg) was obtained in ˜90% purity after flash chromatography. HPLC: tR 10.91 min; electrospray mass spectrum: M+Na at m/z 527. This product (135 mg) was coupled with the commercially available O-(2-azidoethyl)-O′—(N-diglycolyl-2-aminoethyl)heptaethyleneglycol (‘PEG-N3’; 150 mg, 1.1 equiv.) in presence of EEDQ (72 mg, 1.1 equiv.) in 10 mL of dichloromethane, and stirred overnight at ambient temperature. The crude material was purified by flash chromatography to obtain 240 mg of the purified product as a light yellow oil (˜87% yield). HPLC: tR 11.55 min; electrospray mass spectrum: M+H and M+Na at m/z 1041 and 1063, respectively.
  • This intermediate (240 mg) was reacted with 10-O-TBDMS-SN-38-20-O-chloroformate, the latter generated from 10-O-TBDMS-SN-38 (122 mg) using triphosgene and DMAP. The coupling reaction was done in 5 mL of dichloromethane for 10 min, and the reaction mixture was purified by flash chromatography to obtain 327 mg of product as pale yellow foam. Electrospray mass spectrum: M+H at m/z 1574. The entire product was reacted with 0.25 mmol of TBAF in 10 mL of dichloromethane for 5 min, and the reaction mixture was diluted to 100 mL and washed with brine. Crude product (250 mg) was dissolved in DMSO (2 mL) and water (0.4 mL), and reacted with 114 mg of 4-(N-maleimidomethyl)-N-(2-propynyl)cyclohexane-1-carboxamide (prepared as described in Example 1) and 30 mg of cuprous bromide and stirred for 1 h at ambient temperature. Flash chromatography furnished 150 mg of the penultimate intermediate. Finally, deprotection of the MMT group with a mixture of TFA (0.5 mL) and anisole (0.05 mL) in dichloromethane (5 mL) for 3 min, followed by purification by flash chromatography yielded 69 mg of CL7-SN-38 as a gummy material. HPLC: tR 9.60 min; electrospray mass spectrum: M+H and M−H (negative ion mode) at m/z 1461 and 1459, respectively.
  • Figure US20140369927A1-20141218-C00012
    Figure US20140369927A1-20141218-C00013
    Figure US20140369927A1-20141218-C00014
    • Example 3 Preparation of CL6-SN-38-10-O-CO2Et
  • The CL6-SN-38 of Example 1 (55.4 mg) was dissolved in dichloromethane (5 mL), and reacted with ethylchloroformate (13.1 mg; 11.5 μL) and diisopropylethylamine (52.5 mg; 71 μL), and stirred for 20 min under argon. The reaction mixture was diluted with 100 mL of dichloromethane, and washed with 100 mL each of 0.1 M HCl, half saturated sodium bicarbonate and brine, and dried. Flash chromatography, after solvent removal, furnished 59 mg of the title product. HPLC: tR 10.74 min; exact mass: calc. 1404.6457 (M+H) and 1426.6276 (M+Na). found: 1404.6464 (M+H) and 1426.6288 (M+Na).
    • Example 4 Preparation of CL7-SN-38-10-O-CO2Et
  • The precursor of CL7-SN-38 of Example 2 (80 mg) was converted to the 10-O-chloroformate using the procedure and purification as described in Example 3. Yield: 60 mg. HPLC: tR 12.32 min; electrospray mass spectrum: M+H and M−H (negative ion mode) at m/z 1806 and 1804, respectively. Deprotection of this material using dichloroacetic acid and anisole in dichloromethane gave CL7-SN-38-10-O-CO2Et. HPLC: tR 10.37 min; electrospray mass spectrum: M+H at m/z 1534.
    • Example 5 Preparations of CL6-SN-38-10-O-COR and CL7-SN-38-10-O-COR
  • This Example shows that the 10-OH group of SN-38 is protected as a carbonate or an ester, instead of as ‘BOC’, such that the final product is ready for conjugation to antibodies without need for deprotecting the 10-OH protecting group. This group is readily deprotected under physiological pH conditions after in vivo administration of the protein conjugate. In these conjugates, ‘R’ can be a substituted alkyl such as (CH2)n—N(CH3)2 where n is 2-10, or a simple alkyl such as (CH2)n-CH3 where n is 0-10, or it can be an alkoxy moiety such as “CH3—(CH2)n-O—” where n is 0-10, or a substituted alkoxy moiety such as such as O—(CH2)n—N(CH3)2 where n is 2-10 and wherein the terminal amino group is optionally in the form of a quaternary salt for enhanced aqueous solubility, or “R1O—(CH2—CH2—O)n—CH2—CH2—O—” where R1 is ethyl or methyl and n is an integer with values of 0-10. In the simplest version of the latter category, R=“—O—(CH2)2—OCH3”. These 10-hydroxy derivatives are readily prepared by treatment with the chloroformate of the chosen reagent, if the final derivative is to be a carbonate. Typically, the 10-hydroxy-containing camptothecin such as SN-38 is treated with a molar equivalent of the chloroformate in dimethylformamide using triethylamine as the base. Under these conditions, the 20-OH position is unaffected. For forming 10-O-esters, the acid chloride of the chosen reagent is used. Such derivatizations are conveniently accomplished using advanced intermediates as illustrated for simple ethyl carbonates of Examples 3 and 4.
    • Example 6 Preparation of CL6-paclitaxel
  • Valinol is coupled to ‘PEG-N3’ of Scheme 1 according to the procedure described in Example 1. The product is reacted with 0.4 molar equivalent of triphosgene, 3.1 molar equivalent of DMAP, in dichloromethane. After 5 minutes, the chloroformate so formed is reacted with an equimolar amount of paclitaxel for 15 minutes at ambient temperature. The reactive 2′-hydroxyl group of paclitaxel (the side chain secondary hydroxyl group) reacts with the chloroformate of the cross-linker. The product is isolated by flash chromatography. This intermediate (0.1 mmol) is dissolved in DMSO (1.5 mL) and water (0.4 mL), and reacted with 60 mg of 4-(N-maleimidomethyl)-N-(2-propynyl)cyclohexane-1-carboxamide (prepared as described in Example 1) and 15 mg of cuprous bromide and stirred for 30 min at ambient temperature. Flash chromatography, after work up of the reaction mixture, furnishes the bifunctional paclitaxel, namely CL6-paclitaxel.
    • Example 7 Preparation of CL7-paclitaxel
  • L-Valinol (40 mg) is reacted with commercially available Fmoc-Lys(MMT)-OH, and the product is then reacted with O-(2-azidoethyl)-O′—(N-diglycolyl-2-aminoethyl)heptaethyleneglycol (‘PEG-N3’), as described in Example 2. The chloroformate of this derivative is formed by the method of Example-6, and reacted with an equimolar amount of paclitaxel. The reactive 2′-hydroxyl group of paclitaxel (the side chain secondary hydroxyl group) reacts with the chloroformate of the cross-linker. Click cycloaddition, using 4-(N-maleimidomethyl)-N-(2-propynyl)cyclohexane-1-carboxamide (prepared as described in Example 1) is then performed in a manner similar to that described in Example 6, and the product is finally treated with dichloroacetic acid and anisole to effect removal of the ‘MMT’ group under mild conditions. This process furnishes CL7-paclitaxel.
    • Example 8 Preparation of CL6-[morpholino doxorubicin]
  • Valinol is coupled to ‘PEG-N3’ of Scheme 1 according to the procedure described in Example 1. The product is reacted with 0.4 molar equivalent of triphosgene, 3.1 molar equivalent of DMAP, in dichloromethane. After 5 minutes, the chloroformate so formed is reacted with an equimolar amount of morpholino doxorubicin for 15 minutes at ambient temperature. The primary hydroxyl group of morpholino doxorubicin reacts with the chloroformate of the cross-linker. The product is isolated by flash chromatography. This intermediate (0.1 mmol) is dissolved in DMSO (1.5 mL) and water (0.4 mL), and reacted with 60 mg of 4-(N-maleimidomethyl)-N-(2-propynyl)cyclohexane-1-carboxamide (prepared as described in Example 1) and 15 mg of cuprous bromide and stirred for 30 min at ambient temperature. Flash chromatography, after work up of the reaction mixture, furnishes the bifunctional paclitaxel, namely CL6-[morpholino doxorubicin].
    • Example 9 Preparation of CL7-[morpholino doxorubicin]
  • L-Valinol (40 mg) is reacted with commercially available Fmoc-Lys(MMT)-OH, and the product is then reacted with O-(2-azidoethyl)-O′—(N-diglycolyl-2-aminoethyl)heptaethyleneglycol (‘PEG-N3’), as described in Example 2. The chloroformate of this derivative is formed by the method of Example-6, and reacted with an equimolar amount of morpholino doxorubicin. The primary hydroxyl group of morpholino doxorubicin reacts with the chloroformate of the cross-linker. Click cycloaddition, using 4-(N-maleimidomethyl)-N-(2-propynyl)cyclohexane-1-carboxamide (prepared as described in Example 1) is then performed in a manner similar to that described in Example 6, and the product is finally treated with dichloroacetic acid and anisole to effect removal of the ‘MMT’ group under mild conditions. This process furnishes CL7-[morpholino doxorubicin].
    • Example 10 Preparation of CL2A-SN-38
  • An exemplary method for preparing CL2A-SN-38 is shown in Scheme 3. EEDQ (0.382 g) was added to a mixture of commercially available Fmoc-Lys(MMT)-OH (0.943 g), p-aminobenzyl alcohol (0.190 g) in methylene chloride (10 mL) at room temperature and stirred for 4 h. Extractive work up followed by flash chromatograph yielded 1.051 g of material as white foam. All HPLC analyses were performed by Method B as stated in ‘General Procedures’. HPLC retention time was 3.53 min. Electrospray mass spectrum showed peaks at m/e 745.8 (M+H) and m/e 780.3 (M+Cl−), consistent with structure. This intermediate (0.93 g) was dissolved in diethylamine (10 mL) and stirred for 2 h. After solvent removal, the residue was washed in hexane to obtain 0.6 g of the intermediate ((2) in Scheme 3) as a colorless precipitate (91.6% pure by HPLC). HPLC retention time was 2.06 min. Electrospray mass spectrum showed peaks at m/e 523.8 (M+H), m/e 546.2 (M+Na) and m/e 522.5 (M−H). This crude intermediate (0.565 g) was coupled with commercially available O-(2-azidoethyl)-O′—(N-diglycolyl-2-aminoethyl)heptaethyleneglycol (‘PEG-N3’, 0.627 g) using EEDQ in methylene chloride (10 mL). Solvent removal and flash chromatography yielded 0.99 g of the product ((3) in Scheme 3; light yellow oil; 87% yield). HPLC retention time was 2.45 min. Electrospray mass spectrum showed peaks at m/e 1061.3 (M+H), m/e 1082.7 (M+Na) and m/e 1058.8 (M−H), consistent with structure. This intermediate (0.92 g) was reacted with 10-O-TBDMS-SN-38-20-O-chloroformate ((5) in Scheme 3) in methylene chloride (10 mL) for 10 min under argon. The mixture was purified by flash chromatography to obtain 0.944 g as a light yellow oil ((6) in Scheme 3; yield=68%). HPLC retention time was 4.18 min. To this intermediate (0.94 g) in methylene chloride (10 mL) was added a mixture of TBAF (1M in THF, 0.885 mL) and acetic acid (0.085 mL) in methylene chloride (3 mL), then stirred for 10 min. The mixture was diluted with methylene chloride (100 mL) and washed with 0.25 M sodium citrate and brine. The solvent removal yielded 0.835 g of yellow oily product. HPLC retention time was 2.80 min (99% purity). Electrospray mass spectrum showed peaks at m/e 1478 (M+H), m/e 1500.6 (M+Na), m/e 1476.5 (M−H), m/e 1590.5 (M+TFA), consistent with structure.
  • This azido-derivatized SN-38 intermediate (0.803 g) was reacted with 4-(N-maleimidomethyl)-N-(2-propynyl)cyclohexane-1-carboxamide (0.233 g) in methylene chloride (10 mL) in the presence of CuBr (0.0083 g), DIEA (0.01 mL) and triphenylphosphine (0.015 g), for 18 h. Extractive work up, including washing with 0.1M EDTA (10 mL), and flash chromatography yielded 0.891 g as yellow foam (yield=93%). HPLC retention time was 2.60 min. The electrospray mass spectrum showed peaks at m/e 1753.3 (M+H), m/e 1751.6 (M−H), 1864.5 (M+TFA), consistent with structure. Finally, deprotection of the penultimate intermediate (0.22 g) with a mixture of dichloroacetic acid (0.3 mL) and anisole (0.03 mL) in methylene chloride (3 mL), followed by precipitation with ether yielded 0.18 g (97% yield) of CL2A-SN-38; (7) in Scheme 3) as a light yellow powder. HPLC retention time was 1.88 min. Electrospray mass spectrum showed peaks at m/e 1480.7 (M+H), 1478.5 (M−H), consistent with structure.
  • Figure US20140369927A1-20141218-C00015
    Figure US20140369927A1-20141218-C00016
    Figure US20140369927A1-20141218-C00017
    • Example 11 Preparation of CL2E-SN-38
  • An exemplary method for preparing CL2E-SN-38 is shown in Scheme 4. N,N′-dimethylethylenediamine (3 mL) in methylene chloride (50 mL) was reacted with monomethoxytrityl chloride (1.7 g). After 1 h of stirring, the solvent was removed under reduced pressure, and the crude product was recovered by extractive work up (yellow oil; 2.13 g). All HPLC analyses were performed by Method B as stated in ‘General Procedures’. HPLC retention time was 2.28 min. This intermediate ((1) in Scheme 4; 0.93 g) was added in situ to activated SN-38, and the latter ((2) in Scheme 4) was prepared by reacting SN-38 (0.3 g) with p-nitrophenylchloroformate (0.185 g) and DIEA (0.293 mL) in DMF for 1 h. After removing solvent, the residue was purified on deactivated silica gel to obtain 0.442 g as white solid. This intermediate (0.442 g) was deprotected with a mixture of trifluoroacetic acid (1 mL) and anisole (0.1 mL) in methylene chloride (5 mL), followed by precipitation with ether to obtain 0.197 g of the product ((3) in Scheme 4) as white solid.
  • This intermediate (0.197 g) was coupled with activated azide-containing-dipeptide incorporated-PEG-linker ((5) in Scheme 4), which activation was done by reacting PEG-linker ((4) in Scheme 4; 0.203 g) with bis(4-nitrophenyl) carbonate (0.153 g) and DIEA (0.044 mL) in methylene chloride (8 mL). Flash chromatography yielded 0.2 g of azide-derivatized SN-38 intermediate product ((6) in Scheme 4) as a glassy solid. HPLC ret. time: 2.8 min. Electrospray mass spectrum showed peaks at m/e 1740.5 (M+H), m/e 1762.9 (M+Na), m/e 1774.9 (M+Cl−), consistent with structure. This intermediate ((6) in Scheme 4; 0.2 g) was subjected to click cycloaddition with 4-(N-maleimidomethyl)-N-(2-propynyl)cyclohexane-1-carboxamide (0.067 g) in methylene chloride in the presence of CuBr (0.007 g), DIEA (0.008 mL) and triphenylphosphine (0.012 g) for 18 h. Work up of the reaction mixture, which included treatment with 0.1M EDTA, followed by flash chromatography yielded 0.08 g of the penultimate intermediate as a light yellow foam. HPLC: tR=2.63 min. Electrospray mass spectrum showed peaks at m/e 2035.9 (M+Na+), m/e 2047.9 (M+Cl−), consistent with structure. Finally, deprotection of this intermediate (0.08 g) with a mixture of trifluoroacetic acid (0.2 mL), anisole (0.12 mL) and water (0.06 mL) in methylene chloride (2 mL), followed by precipitation with ether yielded 0.051 g of product, CL17-SN-38 (also referred to as CL2E-SN-38), as a light yellow powder (yield=69%). HPLC ret. time: 1.95 min., ˜99% purity. Electrospray mass spectrum showed peaks at m/e 1741.1 (M+H), 1775.5 (M+Cl−, consistent with structure.
  • Figure US20140369927A1-20141218-C00018
    Figure US20140369927A1-20141218-C00019
    Figure US20140369927A1-20141218-C00020
    • Example 12 Conjugation of Bifunctional SN-38 Products to Mildly Reduced Antibodies
  • The anti-CEACAM5 humanized MAb, hMN-14, the anti-CD22 humanized MAb, hLL2, the anti-CD20 humanized MAb, hA20, the anti-EGP-1 humanized MAb, hRS7, and anti-mucin humanized MAb, hPAM4, were used in these studies. Each antibody was reduced with dithiothreitol (DTT), used in a 50-to-70-fold molar excess, in 40 mM PBS, pH 7.4, containing 5.4 mM EDTA, in a 37° C. bath for 45 min. The reduced product was purified by size-exclusion chromatography and/or diafiltration, and was buffer-exchanged into a suitable buffer at pH 6.5. The thiol content was determined by Ellman's assay, and was in the 6.5-to-8.5 SH/IgG range. Alternatively, the antibodies were reduced with Tris(2-carboxyethyl) phosphine (TCEP) in phosphate buffer at a pH in the range of 5 to 7, followed by in situ conjugation. The reduced MAb was reacted with ˜10-to-15-fold molar excess of CL6-SN-38 of Example 1, or CL7-SN-38 of Example 2, or CL6-SN-38-10-O-CO2Et of Example 3, or CL7-SN-38-10-O-CO2Et of Example 4, or CL2A-SN-38 of Example 10, or CL2E-SN-38 of Example 11 using DMSO at 7-15% v/v as a co-solvent, and incubating for 20 min at ambient temperature. The conjugate was purified by centrifuged SEC, passage through a hydrophobic column, and finally by ultrafiltration-diafiltration. The product was assayed for SN-38 by absorbance at 366 nm and correlating with standard values, while the protein concentration was deduced from absorbance at 280 nm, corrected for spillover of SN-38 absorbance at this wavelength. The SN-38/MAb substitution ratios were determined. The purified conjugates were stored as lyophilized formulations in glass vials, capped under vacuum and stored in a −20° C. freezer. SN-38 molar substitution ratios (MSR) obtained for some of these conjugates, which were typically in the 5 to 7 range, are shown in Table 7.
  • TABLE 7
    SN-38/MAb Molar substitution ratios (MSR) in some conjugates
    MAb Conjugate MSR
    hMN-14 hMN-14-[CL2A-SN-38], using drug-linker of Example 10 6.1
    hMN-14-[CL6-SN-38], using drug-linker of Example 1 6.8
    hMN-14-[CL7-SN-38], using drug-linker of Example 2 5.9
    hMN-14-[CL7-SN-38-10-O—CO2Et], using drug-linker of Example 4 5.8
    hMN-14-[CL2E-SN-38], using drug-linker of Example 11 5.9
    hRS7 hRS7-CL2A-SN-38 using drug-linker of Example 10 5.8
    hRS7-CL7-SN-38 using drug-linker of Example 2 5.9
    hRS7-CL7-SN-38 (Et) using drug-linker of Example 4 6.1
    hA20 hA20-CL2A-SN-38 using drug-linker of Example 10 5.8
    hLL2 hLL2-CL2A-SN-38 using drug-linker of Example 10 5.7
    hPAM4 hPAM4-CL2A-SN-38 using drug-linker of Example 10 5.9
    • Example 13 Lyophilized Preparations of SN-38 Immunoconjugates
  • In a preferred embodiment of the immunoconjugates described in Example 12 above, the purified conjugates are contained in the pH range of 5.5 to 7.5 in any of the following Good's biological buffers derived from: 2-(N-morpholino)ethanesulfonic acid (MES), N-(2-acetamido)-2-iminodiacetic acid (ADA), 1,4-piperazinediethanesulfonic acid (PIPES), N-(2-acetamido)-2-aminoethanesulfonic acid (ACES), N,N-bis(2-hydroxyethyl)-2-aminoethanesulfonic acid (BES), N-tris(hydroxymethyl)methyl-2-aminoethanesulfonic acid (TES), and N-(2-hydroxyethyl)piperazine-N′-(2-ethanesulfonic acid) or HEPES. The most preferred buffer is 25 mM MES, pH 6.5. In an exemplary preparation of a lyophilized conjugate, a solution (69 mL; 16.78 mg/mL protein concentration) of the purified CL2A-SN-38 conjugate of the anti-CD22 antibody, hLL2, namely hLL2-CL2A-SN-38, in 25 mM MES, pH 6.5 buffer, was diluted with 34.1 mL of the same buffer, and mixed with 11.6 mL of 250 mM trehalose and 1.16 mL of 1% polysorbate 80. The formulated solution was aliquotted in 50-mg aliquots in various vials, and lyophilized. The vials containing lyophilized immunoconjugate were sealed under vacuum, and stored at 2-8° C. in a refrigerator. The lyophilized immunoconjugate was stable under these conditions.
    • Example 14 In Vivo Therapeutic Efficacies in Preclinical Models of Human Pancreatic or Colon Carcinoma
  • Immune-compromised athymic nude mice (female), bearing subcutaneous human pancreatic or colon tumor xenografts were treated with either specific CL2A-SN-38 conjugate or control conjugate or were left untreated. The therapeutic efficacies of the specific conjugates were observed. FIG. 1 shows a Capan 1 pancreatic tumor model, wherein specific CL2A-SN-38 conjugates of hRS7 (anti-EGP-1), hPAM4 (anti-mucin), and hMN-14 (anti-CEACAM5) antibodies showed better efficacies than control hA20-CL2A-SN-38 conjugate (anti-CD20) and untreated control. Similarly in a BXPC3 model of human pancreatic cancer, the specific hRS7-CL2A-SN-38 showed better therapeutic efficacy than control treatments (FIG. 2). Likewise, in an aggressive LS174T model of human colon carcinoma, treatment with specific hMN-14-CL2A-SN-38 was more efficacious than control treatment (FIG. 3).
    • Example 15 Humanized Anti-CD22 MAb (Epratuzumab) Conjugated with SN-38, Alone or in Combination with Anti-CD20 MAb (Veltuzumab), Shows Potent Efficacy for Therapy of Hematologic Tumors
  • Monoclonal antibody therapy has had a significant impact on the management of B-cell malignancies, but is most often used in combination with chemotherapy. We developed an antibody-drug conjugate (ADC) that combines SN-38, the active component of irinotecan, a topoisomerase I inhibitor, with an internalizing, humanized anti-CD22 IgG (epratuzumab) and determined its activity alone and in combination with an anti-CD20 antibody (veltuzumab).
  • The CD22 antigen is expressed in most NHL and ALL specimens. Epratuzumab (humanized anti-CD22 MAb) is an internalizing antibody that has been shown to be safe and therapeutically effective as a naked antibody alone and in combination with rituximab. Epratuzumab is currently being studied in pediatric ALL, as well as a radioconjugate in NHL. (See, e.g., Leonard et al., 2008, Cancer 113:2714-23; Raetz et al., 2008, J Clin Oncol 26:3756-62; Morschhauser et al., 2010, J Clin Oncol 28:3709-16). Therapeutic use of epratuzumab is not limited to B cell malignancies, but has also been proposed for autoimmune diseases such as systemic lupus erythematosus (SLE) (Domer et al., 2006, Arthritis Res Ther 8:R74; Daridon et al., 2010, Arthritis Res Ther 12:R204).
  • Veltuzumab (humanized anti-CD20) has shown anti-proliferative, apoptotic and ADCC effects in vitro similar to rituximab, but with significantly slower off-rates and increased CDC in several human lymphoma cell lines (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 7,919,273, incorporated herein by reference from Col. 34, line 15 to Col. 72, line 2). Very low doses of veltuzumab, given either intravenously or subcutaneously, depleted B cells in normal cynomolgus monkeys and controlled tumor growth in mice bearing human lymphomas. Veltuzumab has been clinically studied in over 150 patients with lymphomas and autoimmune diseases. In non-Hodgkin lymphoma (NHL), infusions of 80-750 mg/m2 were well tolerated when given once-weekly for four doses, with the only toxicity being transient mild-moderate infusion reactions. Objective tumor responses, including durable complete responses, occurred at all dose levels. Subcutaneous injections of low doses (80-320 mg) have also proved to be safe and pharmacologically active, producing objective responses, including durable complete responses, at rates comparable to those reported with rituximab, in patients with NHL and immune thrombocytopenia. (See, e.g., Goldenberg et al., 2010, J Clin Oncol 28:3709-16; Goldenberg et al., 2010, Leuk Lymphoma 51:747-55; Negrea et al., 2011, Haematologica 96:567-73; Goldenberg et al., 2009, Blood 113:1062-70; Morchhauser et al., 2009, J Clin Oncol 27:3346-53; Sharkey et al., 2009, J Nucl Med 50:444-53.)
  • Epratuzumab was conjugated with SN-38 (E-SN-38) at a mole ratio of ˜6:1, using a CL2A linker as described in Examples 10 and 12 above. Conjugation had no effect on the affinity of the antibody for the target antigen (data not shown). The conjugate was designed to be released slowly in the presence of serum (50% released over ˜1.5 days), allowing liberation of the drug when internalized, but also being released locally after binding to the tumor. In vitro and in vivo studies were performed to assess the activity of the conjugate against several subcutaneously- or intravenously-inoculated B-cell lymphoma cell lines. In vivo studies also examined combination therapy using E-SN-38 and the anti-CD20 antibody veltuzumab (V).
  • In vitro studies in 4 B-cell lymphoma cells lines (Daudi, Raji, Ramos, WSU-FSCCL) and 4 acute lymphoblastic lymphoma cell lines (697, REH, MN-60 and RS4;11) expressing varying amounts of CD22 showed an IC50 for E-SN-38 in the nanomolar range, confirming potent activity. As shown in Table 8, the IC50 for E-SN-38 did not strictly correlate with CD22 expression or with saensitivity to non-targeted SN-38.
  • TABLE 8
    Expression of CD20 and CD22 and in vitro
    cytotoxicity of SN-38 and E-SN-38
    CD20 Expression CD22 Expression SN-38 E-SN-38
    % % IC50 IC50
    Cell Line FACS positive FACS positive (nM) (nM)
    Raji 283.6 99.3 47.7 89.3 1.42 2.10
    Ramos 27.2 91.6 7.1 2.2 0.40 2.92
    Daudi 18.7 20.3 10.7 3.1 0.13 0.52
    WSU- 8.8 7.8 6.2 0.8 0.50 0.68
    FSCCL
    REH 92.0 55.1 52.9 99.7 0.47 1.22
    697 12.0 22.0 42.2 100 2.23 2.67
    RS4; 11 8.4 15.0 34.3 94.5 2.28 1.68
    MN-60 N.D. N.D. 1.23 3.65
  • Nude or SCID mice were implanted SC with Ramos cells (Burkitt's lymphoma) or IV with WSU-FSCCL (follicular lymphoma, FIG. 4, FIG. 5) or 697 (ALL, FIG. 6) cell lines. All doses of immunoconjugates or drugs were given intraperitoneally, twice weekly for 4 weeks. Irinotecan (CPT-11) was administered at the same mole equivalent as the antibody-conjugated SN-38. All dose levels were well tolerated in mice, with toxicity only found at doses of 2×30 mg (2×1500 mg/kg) For Ramos, the endpoint was time to progression to 3.0 cm3 tumor size. For WSU-FSCCL and 697, therapy was started 5 days after tumor cell injection. The end of study was progression to hind-leg paralysis, 20% or greater loss in body weight, or other signs of stress. Statistical analysis was by log-rank test.
  • E-SN-38 was active in mice at a dose of 2 x<0.5 mg weekly for 4 weeks (50 mg/kg per week). Toxicology studies in monkeys and rabbits of other IgG-SN-38 conjugatesw have found a human equivalent of 40 mg/kg/week to be non-toxic, which is approximately 25 mg SN-38 equivalents/m2. Thus, the therapeutic window of emab-SN-38 is at least 10:1.
  • Nude mice bearing SC Ramos human lymphoma had significant selective anti-tumor activity compared to a control, non-targeting, IgG-SN-38 conjugate, at a dosing regimen of 75 to 250 μg of the conjugates given twice-weekly for 4 weeks (FIG. 7). Responses improved in a dose-dependent manner for both the specific and irrelevant immunoconjugates.
  • Significant anti-tumor activity was also found in several other cell lines. When combined with veltuzumab, significant improvement in therapeutic activity was observed (FIG. 4, FIG. 5). For example, median survival in a WSU-FSCCL human follicular B-cell lymphoma IV model with treatment initiated 5 days after implantation was 41d ( 0/10 surviving at 160d) and 91d ( 2/10 surviving at 160 d) for untreated and veltuzumab-treated animals, respectively; 63 d ( 0/10 surviving after 160 d) and >160 d ( 6/10 surviving after 160 d) for E-SN-38 and E-SN-38+V, respectively; and 63 d ( 0/10) and 91d ( 2/10) for non-targeting IgG-SN-38 conjugate alone and combined with V, respectively. The E-SN-38 conjugate combined with V was significantly better than all other treatment or control groups (P<0.05). We conclude that E-SN-38 ADC is a potent therapeutic, even at non-toxic dose levels, and shows significantly enhanced efficacy when combined with anti-CD20 immunotherapy, representing an important new ADC treatment regimen for B cell diseases.
    • Example 16 Preparation of hLL1, hLL2, hA20 and hL243 Antibodies
  • The hLL1, hLL2, hA20 and hL243 antibodies were prepared as previously described and as summarized below. The constant region sequences of each of the hLL1, hLL2, hA20 and hL243 antibodies are as shown below in SEQ ID NO:14 (heavy chain constant region amino acid sequence); SEQ ID NO:134 (heavy chain constant region DNA sequence); SEQ ID NO:135 (light chain constant region amino acid sequence); and SEQ ID NO:136 (light chain constant region amino acid sequence). Although the constant region sequences are derived from the hLL2 antibody, they are identical in each of hLL1, hLL2, hA20 and hL243. Therefore, each of the hLL1, hLL2, hA20 and hL243 antibodies is a G1m3 allotype antibody.
  • Heavy chain constant region amino acid sequence (CH1-Hinge-CH2-CH3)
    (SEQ ID NO: 14)
    ASTKGPSVFPLAPSSKSTSGGTAALGCLVKDYFPEPVTVSWNSGALTSGVHTFPAVLQ
    SSGLYSLSSVVTVPSSSLGTQTYICNVNHKPSNTKVDKRVEPKSCDKTHTCPPCPAPEL
    LGGPSVFLFPPKPKDTLMISRTPEVTCVVVDVSHEDPEVKFNWYVDGVEVHNAKTKP
    REEQYNSTYRVVSVLTVLHQDWLNGKEYKCKVSNKALPAPIEKTISKAKGQPREPQV
    YTLPPSREEMTKNQVSLTCLVKGFYPSDIAVEWESNGQPENNYKTTPPVLDSDGSFFL
    YSKLTVDKSRWQQGNVFSCSVMHEALHNHYTQKSLSLSPGK 
    Heavy chain constant region DNA sequence
    (SEQ ID NO: 134)
    GCCTCCACCAAGGGCCCATCGGTCTTCCCCCTGGCACCCTCCTCCAAGAGCACCT
    CTGGGGGCACAGCGGCCCTGGGCTGCCTGGTCAAGGACTACTTCCCCGAACCGGT
    GACGGTGTCGTGGAACTCAGGCGCCCTGACCAGCGGCGTGCACACCTTCCCGGCT
    GTCCTACAGTCCTCAGGACTCTACTCCCTCAGCAGCGTGGTGACCGTGCCCTCCA
    GCAGCTTGGGCACCCAGACCTACATCTGCAACGTGAATCACAAGCCCAGCAACA
    CCAAGGTGGACAAGAGAGTTGAGCCCAAATCTTGTGACAAAACTCACACATGCC
    CACCGTGCCCAGCACCTGAACTCCTGGGGGGACCGTCAGTCTTCCTCTTCCCCCC
    AAAACCCAAGGACACCCTCATGATCTCCCGGACCCCTGAGGTCACATGCGTGGTG
    GTGGACGTGAGCCACGAAGACCCTGAGGTCAAGTTCAACTGGTACGTGGACGGC
    GTGGAGGTGCATAATGCCAAGACAAAGCCGCGGGAGGAGCAGTACAACAGCACG
    TACCGGGTGGTCAGCGTCCTCACCGTCCTGCACCAGGACTGGCTGAATGGCAAGG
    AGTACAAGTGCAAGGTCTCCAACAAAGCCCTCCCAGCCCCCATCGAGAAAACCA
    TCTCCAAAGCCAAAGGGCAGCCCCGAGAACCACAGGTGTACACCCTGCCCCCATC
    CCGGGAGGAGATGACCAAGAACCAGGTCAGCCTGACCTGCCTGGTCAAAGGCTT
    CTATCCCAGCGACATCGCCGTGGAGTGGGAGAGCAATGGGCAGCCGGAGAACAA
    CTACAAGACCACGCCTCCCGTGCTGGACTCCGACGGCTCCTTCTTCCTCTATAGCA
    AGCTCACCGTGGACAAGAGCAGGTGGCAGCAGGGGAACGTCTTCTCATGCTCCGT
    GATGCATGAGGCTCTGCACAACCACTACACGCAGAAGAGCCTCTCCCTGTCTCCG
    GGTAAA
    Light chain constant region amino acid sequence
    (SEQ ID NO: 135)
    TVAAPSVFIFPPSDEQLKSGTASVVCLLNNFYPREAKVQWKVDNALQSGNSQESVTE
    QDSKDSTYSLSSTLTLSKADYEKHKVYACEVTHQGLSSPVTKSFNRGEC
    Light chain constant region DNA sequence
    (SEQ ID NO: 136)
    ACTGTGGCTGCACCATCTGTCTTCATCTTCCCGCCATCTGATGAGCAGTTGAAATC
    TGGAACTGCCTCTGTTGTGTGCCTGCTGAATAACTTCTATCCCAGAGAGGCCAAA
    GTACAGTGGAAGGTGGATAACGCCCTCCAATCGGGTAACTCCCAGGAGAGTGTC
    ACAGAGCAGGACAGCAAGGACAGCACCTACAGCCTCAGCAGCACCCTGACGCTG
    AGCAAAGCAGACTACGAGAAACACAAAGTCTACGCCTGCGAAGTCACCCATCAG
    GGCCTGAGCTCGCCCGTCACAAAGAGCTTCAACAGGGGAGAGTGT
  • hLL1 Antibody
  • The hLL1 anti-CD74 antibody was prepared as described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,772,373 (incorporated by reference from Col. 3, line 54 to Col. 5, line 32 and Col. 34, line 15 to Col. 40, line 45, FIGS. 1A, 1B, 2A, 2B, 3A, 3B, 4A, 4B). The variable region sequences of the light and heavy chains of the hLL1 antibody are as described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,772,373 (e.g., FIG. 3 and FIG. 4).
  • A modified strategy as described by Leung et al. (1994, Hybridoma 13:469-76) was used to construct the VK and VH genes for hLL1 using a combination of long oligonucleotide synthesis and PCR. For the construction of the hLL1 VH domain, two long oligonucleotides, hLL1VHA (176 mer) and hLL1VHB (165-mer) (U.S. Pat. No. 7,772,373) were synthesized on an automated DNA synthesizer. The hLL1VHA sequence represented nt 20 to 195 of the hLL1VH domain. The hLL1 VHB sequence represented the minus strand of the hLL1 VH domain complementary to nt 173 to 337. The 3′-terminal sequences (22 nt residues) of hLL1VHA and B were complementary to each other. Under PCR condition, the 3′-ends of hLL1 VHA and B annealed to form a short double stranded DNA. Each annealed end served as a primer for the transcription of single stranded DNA, resulting in a double strand DNA composed of the nt 20 to 337 of hLL1VH. This DNA was further amplified in the presence of two short oligonucleotides, hLL1VHBACK and hLL1VHFOR (U.S. Pat. No. 7,772,373) to form the full-length hLL1VH. Double-stranded PCR-amplified product for hLL1VH was gel-purified, restriction-digested with PstI and BstEII and cloned into the complementary PstI/BstEII sites of the heavy chain staging vector, VHpBS2.
  • For constructing the full length DNA of the humanized VK sequence, hLL1VKA (159-mer) and hLL1VKB (169-mer) (U.S. Pat. No. 7,772,373) were synthesized. The hLL1 VKA sequence represented nt 16 to 174 of the hLL1VK domain. The hLL1VKB sequence represented the minus strand of the hLL1VK domain complementary to nt 153 to 321. hLL1VKA and B were amplified by two short oligonucleotides hLL1VKBACK and hLL1VKFOR (U.S. Pat. No. 7,772,373) to form double-stranded DNA. Further amplification produced the full length VK gene (U.S. Pat. No. 7,772,373). Gel-purified PCR products for hLL1VK were restriction-digested with PvuII and BglIII and cloned into the complementary PvuI/BclI sites of the light chain staging vector, VKpBR2.
  • The final expression vector hLL1pdHL2 was constructed by sequentially subcloning the XbaI-BamHI and XhoI/BamHI fragments of hLL1VK and VH, respectively, into pdHL2. The pdHL2 vector is known in the art (see, e.g., Gillies et al., 1989, J Immunol Methods 125:191). The pdHL2 vector provides expression of both IgG heavy and light chain genes that are independently controlled by two metallothionine promoters and IgH enhancers. Use of pdHL2 as an expression vector for antibody production has been disclosed, for example, in Losman et al., 1999, Clin Cancer Res 5:3101s-05s.
  • The fragment containing the VK sequence of hLL1, together with the signal peptide sequence, was excised from LL1VKpBR2 by double restriction digestion with XbaI and BamHI. The ˜550 bp VK fragment was then subcloned into the XbaI/BamHI site of a mammalian expression vector, pdHL2. The resulting vector was designated as hLL1VKpdHL2. Similarly, the ˜750 bp fragment encoding hLL1 VH, together with the signal peptide sequence, was excised from LL1VHpBS2 by XhoI and BamHI digestion and isolated by electrophoresis in an agarose gel. The fragment was subcloned into the XhoI and HindIII site of hLL1VKpdHL2 with the aid of linker comparable to both BamHI and HindIII ends, resulting in the final expression vector, designated as hLL1pdHL2.
  • Approximately 30 μg of hLL1pdHL2 was linearized by digestion with Sal I and transfected into Sp2/0-Ag14 cells by electroporation. The transfected cells were plated into 96-well plate for 2 days and then selected for MTX resistance. Supernatants from colonies surviving selection were monitored for chimeric antibody secretion by ELISA assay. Positive cell clones were expanded and hLL1 was purified from cell culture supernatant.
  • hLL2 Antibody
  • The hLL2 anti-CD22 antibody was prepared as described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,187,287 (incorporated by reference from Col. 3, line 35 to Col. 4, line 34 and Col. 11, line 40 to Col. 20, line 38, FIGS. 1, 4A, 4B, 5A, 5B). The variable region sequences of the light and heavy chains of the hLL2 antibody are as described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,187,287 (e.g., FIG. 1, FIG. 5). The LL2 antibody was deposited on May 27, 2005, with the American Type Culture Collection, Manassas, Va. (ATCC Accession No. PTA-6735), formerly the EPB-2 monoclonal antibody, which was produced against human Raji cells derived from a Burkitt lymphoma. (Pawlak-Byczkowska et al., 1989, Cancer Res. 49:4568.) The cloning, transfection and protein production were performed as described above for the hLL1 antibody.
  • hA20 Antibody
  • The hA20 anti-CD20 antibody was prepared as described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,919,273 (incorporated by reference from Col. 7, line 25 to Col. 9, line 4 and Col. 34, line 15 to Col. 72, line 2, FIGS. 1A, 1B, 2A, 2B, 3A, 3B). The variable region sequences of the light and heavy chains of the hA20 antibody are as described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,919,273 (e.g., FIG. 2, FIG. 3). The cloning, transfection and protein production were performed as described above for the hLL1 antibody.
  • hL243 Antibody
  • The hL243 anti-HLA-DR antibody was prepared as described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,612,180 (incorporated by reference from Col. 4, line 16 to Col. 6, line 38 and Col. 46, line 50 to Col. 60, line 67, FIGS. 1 to 6). The variable region sequences of the light and heavy chains of the hL243 antibody are as described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,612,180 (e.g., FIG. 3, FIG. 4, FIG. 5, FIG. 6). The cloning, transfection and protein production were performed as described above for the hLL1 antibody.
  • Other known antibodies, such as hPAM4 (U.S. Pat. No. 7,282,567), hA19 (U.S. Pat. No. 7,109,304), hIMMU31 (U.S. Pat. No. 7,300,655), hMu-9 (U.S. Pat. No. 7,387,773), hMN-14 (U.S. Pat. No. 6,676,924), hMN-15 (U.S. Pat. No. 7,541,440), hR1 (U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/689,336), hRS7 (U.S. Pat. No. 7,238,785), hMN-3 (U.S. Pat. No. 7,541,440), 15B8 (anti-CD40, U.S. Pat. No. 7,820,170), AB-PG1-XG1-026 (U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/983,372, deposited as ATCC PTA-4405 and PTA-4406) and D2/B (WO 2009/130575), may be prepared as described above, using the techniques disclosed herein.
    • Example 17 Preparation of Dock-and-Lock (DNL) Constructs
  • DDD and AD Fusion Proteins
  • The DNL technique can be used to make dimers, trimers, tetramers, hexamers, etc. comprising virtually any antibody, antibody fragment, immunomodulator, cytokine, enzyme, peptide, PEG moiety, toxin, xenoantigen or other effector moiety. For certain preferred embodiments, antibodies, cytokines or toxins (such as ranpirnase) may be produced as fusion proteins comprising either a dimerization and docking domain (DDD) or anchoring domain (AD) sequence. Although in preferred embodiments the DDD and AD moieties may be joined to antibodies, antibody fragments, cytokines, toxins or other effector moieties as fusion proteins, the skilled artisan will realize that other methods of conjugation exist, such as chemical cross-linking, click chemistry reaction, etc.
  • The technique is not limiting and any protein or peptide of use may be produced as an AD or DDD fusion protein for incorporation into a DNL construct. Where chemical cross-linking is utilized, the AD and DDD conjugates may comprise any molecule that may be cross-linked to an AD or DDD sequence using any cross-linking technique known in the art. In certain exemplary embodiments, a dendrimer or other polymeric moiety such as polyethyleneimine or polyethylene glycol (PEG), may be incorporated into a DNL construct, as described in further detail below.
  • Expression Vectors
  • The plasmid vector pdHL2 has been used to produce a number of antibodies and antibody-based constructs. See Gillies et al., J Immunol Methods (1989), 125:191-202; Losman et al., Cancer (Phila) (1997), 80:2660-6. The di-cistronic mammalian expression vector directs the synthesis of the heavy and light chains of IgG. The vector sequences are mostly identical for many different IgG-pdHL2 constructs, with the only differences existing in the variable domain (VH and VL) sequences. Using molecular biology tools known to those skilled in the art, these IgG expression vectors can be converted into Fab-DDD or Fab-AD expression vectors.
  • To generate Fab-DDD expression vectors, the coding sequences for the hinge, CH2 and CH3 domains of the heavy chain were replaced with a sequence encoding the first 4 residues of the hinge, a 14 residue Gly-Ser linker and a DDD moiety, such as the first 44 residues of human RIIα (referred to as DDD1, SEQ ID NO:15). To generate Fab-AD expression vectors, the sequences for the hinge, CH2 and CH3 domains of IgG were replaced with a sequence encoding the first 4 residues of the hinge, a 15 residue Gly-Ser linker and an AD moiety, such as a 17 residue synthetic AD called AKAP-IS (referred to as AD1, SEQ ID NO:17), which was generated using bioinformatics and peptide array technology and shown to bind RIIα dimers with a very high affinity (0.4 nM). See Alto, et al. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., U.S.A (2003), 100:4445-50.
  • Two shuttle vectors were designed to facilitate the conversion of IgG-pdHL2 vectors to either Fab-DDD1 or Fab-AD1 expression vectors, as described below.
  • Preparation of CH1
  • The CH1 domain was amplified by PCR using the pdHL2 plasmid vector as a template. The left PCR primer consisted of the upstream (5′) end of the CH1 domain and a SacII restriction endonuclease site, which is 5′ of the CH1 coding sequence. The right primer consisted of the sequence coding for the first 4 residues of the hinge followed by four glycines and a serine, with the final two codons (GS) comprising a Bam HI restriction site. The 410 bp PCR amplimer was cloned into the PGEMT® PCR cloning vector (PROMEGA®, Inc.) and clones were screened for inserts in the T7 (5′) orientation.
  • A duplex oligonucleotide was synthesized to code for the amino acid sequence of DDD1 preceded by 11 residues of the linker peptide, with the first two codons comprising a BamHI restriction site. A stop codon and an EagI restriction site are appended to the 3′ end. The encoded polypeptide sequence is shown below.
  • (SEQ ID NO: 137)
    GSGGGGSGGGGSHIQIPPGLTELLQGYTVEVLRQQPPDLVEFAVEYFTR
    LREARA
  • Two oligonucleotides, designated RIIA1-44 top and RIIA1-44 bottom, which overlap by 30 base pairs on their 3′ ends, were synthesized and combined to comprise the central 154 base pairs of the 174 bp DDD1 sequence. The oligonucleotides were annealed and subjected to a primer extension reaction with Taq polymerase. Following primer extension, the duplex was amplified by PCR. The amplimer was cloned into PGEMT® and screened for inserts in the T7 (5′) orientation.
  • A duplex oligonucleotide was synthesized to code for the amino acid sequence of AD1 preceded by 11 residues of the linker peptide with the first two codons comprising a BamHI restriction site. A stop codon and an EagI restriction site are appended to the 3′ end. The encoded polypeptide sequence is shown below.
  • (SEQ ID NO: 138)
    GSGGGGSGGGGSQIEYLAKQIVDNAIQQA 
  • Two complimentary overlapping oligonucleotides encoding the above peptide sequence, designated AKAP-IS Top and AKAP-IS Bottom, were synthesized and annealed. The duplex was amplified by PCR. The amplimer was cloned into the PGEMT® vector and screened for inserts in the T7 (5′) orientation.
  • Ligating DDD1 with CH1
  • A 190 bp fragment encoding the DDD1 sequence was excised from PGEMT® with BamHI and NotI restriction enzymes and then ligated into the same sites in CH1-PGEMT® to generate the shuttle vector CH1-DDD1-PGEMT®.
  • Ligating AD1 with CH1
  • A 110 bp fragment containing the AD1 sequence was excised from PGEMT® with BamHI and NotI and then ligated into the same sites in CH1-PGEMT® to generate the shuttle vector CH1-AD1-PGEMT®.
  • Cloning CH1-DDD1 or CH1-AD1 into pdHL2-Based Vectors
  • With this modular design either CH1-DDD1 or CH1-AD1 can be incorporated into any IgG construct in the pdHL2 vector. The entire heavy chain constant domain is replaced with one of the above constructs by removing the SacII/EagI restriction fragment (CH1-CH3) from pdHL2 and replacing it with the SacII/EagI fragment of CH1-DDD1 or CH1-AD1, which is excised from the respective PGEMT® shuttle vector.
  • Construction of h679-Fd-AD1-pdHL2
  • h679-Fd-AD1-pdHL2 is an expression vector for production of h679 Fab with AD1 coupled to the carboxyl terminal end of the CH1 domain of the Fd via a flexible Gly/Ser peptide spacer composed of 14 amino acid residues. A pdHL2-based vector containing the variable domains of h679 was converted to h679-Fd-AD1-pdHL2 by replacement of the SacII/EagI fragment with the CH1-AD1 fragment, which was excised from the CH1-AD1-SV3 shuttle vector with SacII and EagI.
  • Production and Purification of h679-Fab-AD1
  • The h679-Fd-AD1-pdHL2 vector was linearized by digestion with Sal I restriction endonuclease and transfected into Sp/EEE myeloma cells (U.S. Pat. No. 7,785,880) by electroporation. The di-cistronic expression vector directs the synthesis and secretion of both h679 kappa light chain and h679 Fd-AD1, which combine to form h679 Fab-AD1. Following electroporation, the cells were plated in 96-well tissue culture plates and transfectant clones were selected with 0.05 μM methotrexate (MTX). Clones were screened for protein expression by ELISA using microtiter plates coated with a BSA-IMP260 (HSG) conjugate and detection with HRP-conjugated goat anti-human Fab. BIACORE® analysis using an HSG (IMP239) sensorchip was used to determine the productivity by measuring the initial slope obtained from injection of diluted media samples. The highest producing clone had an initial productivity of approximately 30 mg/L. A total of 230 mg of h679-Fab-AD1 was purified from 4.5 liters of roller bottle culture by single-step IMP291 affinity chromatography. Culture media was concentrated approximately 10-fold by ultrafiltration before loading onto an IMP291-affigel column. The column was washed to baseline with PBS and h679-Fab-AD1 was eluted with 1 M imidazole, 1 mM EDTA, 0.1 M NaAc, pH 4.5. SE-HPLC analysis of the eluate shows a single sharp peak with a retention time consistent with a 50 kDa protein (not shown). Only two bands, which represent the polypeptide constituents of h679-AD1, were evident by reducing SDS-PAGE analysis (not shown).
  • Construction of C-DDD1-Fd-hMN-14-pdHL2
  • C-DDD1-Fd-hMN-14-pdHL2 is an expression vector for production of a stable dimer that comprises two copies of a fusion protein C-DDD1-Fab-hMN-14, in which DDD1 is linked to hMN-14 Fab at the carboxyl terminus of CH1 via a flexible peptide spacer. The plasmid vector hMN-14(I)-pdHL2, which has been used to produce hMN-14 IgG, was converted to C-DDD1-Fd-hMN-14-pdHL2 by digestion with SacII and EagI restriction endonucleases to remove the CH1-CH3 domains and insertion of the CH1-DDD1 fragment, which was excised from the CH1-DDD1-SV3 shuttle vector with SacII and EagI.
  • The same technique has been utilized to produce plasmids for Fab expression of a wide variety of known antibodies, such as hLL1, hLL2, hPAM4, hR1, hRS7, hMN-14, hMN-15, hA19, hA20 and many others. Generally, the antibody variable region coding sequences were present in a pdHL2 expression vector and the expression vector was converted for production of an AD- or DDD-fusion protein as described above. The AD- and DDD-fusion proteins comprising a Fab fragment of any of such antibodies may be combined, in an approximate ratio of two DDD-fusion proteins per one AD-fusion protein, to generate a trimeric DNL construct comprising two Fab fragments of a first antibody and one Fab fragment of a second antibody.
  • Production and Purification of C-DDD1-Fab-hMN-14
  • The C-DDD1-Fd-hMN-14-pdHL2 vector was transfected into Sp2/0-derived myeloma cells by electroporation. C-DDD1-Fd-hMN-14-pdHL2 is a di-cistronic expression vector, which directs the synthesis and secretion of both hMN-14 kappa light chain and hMN-14 Fd-DDD1, which combine to form C-DDD1-hMN-14 Fab. The fusion protein forms a stable homodimer via the interaction of the DDD1 domain.
  • Following electroporation, the cells were plated in 96-well tissue culture plates and transfectant clones were selected with 0.05 μM methotrexate (MTX). Clones were screened for protein expression by ELISA using microtiter plates coated with WI2 (a rat anti-id monoclonal antibody to hMN-14) and detection with HRP-conjugated goat anti-human Fab. The initial productivity of the highest producing C-DDD1-Fab-hMN14 Fab clone was 60 mg/L.
  • Affinity Purification of C-DDD1-hMN-14 with AD1-Affigel
  • The DDD/AD interaction was utilized to affinity purify DDD1-containing constructs. AD1-C is a peptide that was made synthetically consisting of the AD1 sequence and a carboxyl terminal cysteine residue, which was used to couple the peptide to Affigel following reaction of the sulfhydryl group with chloroacetic anhydride. DDD-containing dimer structures specifically bind to the AD1-C-Affigel resin at neutral pH and can be eluted at low pH (e.g., pH 2.5).
  • A total of 81 mg of C-DDD1-Fab-hMN-14 was purified from 1.2 liters of roller bottle culture by single-step AD1-C affinity chromatography. Culture media was concentrated approximately 10-fold by ultrafiltration before loading onto an AD1-C-affigel column. The column was washed to baseline with PBS and C-DDD1-Fab-hMN-14 was eluted with 0.1 M Glycine, pH 2.5. SE-HPLC analysis of the eluate showed a single protein peak with a retention time consistent with a 107 kDa protein (not shown). The purity was also confirmed by reducing SDS-PAGE, showing only two bands of molecular size expected for the two polypeptide constituents of C-DDD1-Fab-hMN-14 (not shown).
  • The binding activity of C-DDD1-Fab-hMN-14 was determined by SE-HPLC analysis of samples in which the test article was mixed with various amounts of WI2. A sample prepared by mixing WI2 Fab and C-DDD1-Fab-hMN-14 at a molar ratio of 0.75:1 showed three peaks, which were attributed to unbound C-DDD1-Fab-hMN14 (8.71 min), C-DDD1-Fab-hMN-14 bound to one WI2 Fab (7.95 min), and C-DDD1-Fab-hMN14 bound to two WI2 Fabs (7.37 min) (not shown). When a sample containing WI2 Fab and C-DDD1-Fab-hMN-14 at a molar ratio of 4 was analyzed, only a single peak at 7.36 minutes was observed (not shown). These results demonstrated that hMN14-Fab-DDD1 is dimeric and has two active binding sites. Very similar results were obtained when this experiment was repeated with an hMN-14 Fab construct with DDD1 linked to the amino terminal instead of the carboxyl terminal end (not shown).
  • A competitive ELISA demonstrated that C-DDD1-Fab-hMN-14 binds to CEA with an avidity similar to hMN-14 IgG, and significantly stronger than monovalent hMN-14 Fab (not shown). ELISA plates were coated with a fusion protein containing the epitope (A3B3) of CEA for which hMN-14 is specific.
  • C-DDD2-Fd-hMN-14-pdHL2
  • C-DDD2-Fd-hMN-14-pdHL2 is an expression vector for production of C-DDD2-Fab-hMN-14, which possesses a dimerization and docking domain sequence of DDD2 (SEQ ID NO:16) appended to the carboxyl terminus of the Fd of hMN-14 via a 14 amino acid residue Gly/Ser peptide linker. The fusion protein secreted is composed of two identical copies of hMN-14 Fab held together by non-covalent interaction of the DDD2 domains.
  • The expression vector was engineered as follows. Two overlapping, complimentary oligonucleotides, which comprise the coding sequence for part of the linker peptide and residues 1-13 of DDD2, were made synthetically. The oligonucleotides were annealed and phosphorylated with T4 PNK, resulting in overhangs on the 5′ and 3′ ends that are compatible for ligation with DNA digested with the restriction endonucleases BamHI and PstI, respectively.
  • The duplex DNA was ligated with the shuttle vector CH1-DDD1-PGEMT®, which was prepared by digestion with BamHI and PstI, to generate the shuttle vector CH1-DDD2-PGEMT®. A 507 bp fragment was excised from CH1-DDD2-PGEMT® with SacII and EagI and ligated with the IgG expression vector hMN-14(I)-pdHL2, which was prepared by digestion with SacII and EagI. The final expression construct was designated C-DDD2-Fd-hMN-14-pdHL2. Similar techniques have been utilized to generated DDD2-fusion proteins of the Fab fragments of a number of different humanized antibodies.
  • h679-Fd-AD2-pdHL2
  • h679-Fab-AD2, was designed to pair to C-DDD2-Fab-hMN-14. h679-Fd-AD2-pdHL2 is an expression vector for the production of h679-Fab-AD2, which possesses an anchoring domain sequence of AD2 (SEQ ID NO:18) appended to the carboxyl terminal end of the CH1 domain via a 14 amino acid residue Gly/Ser peptide linker. AD2 has one cysteine residue preceding and another one following the anchor domain sequence of AD1.
  • The expression vector was engineered as follows. Two overlapping, complimentary oligonucleotides (AD2 Top and AD2 Bottom), which comprise the coding sequence for AD2 and part of the linker sequence, were made synthetically. The oligonucleotides were annealed and phosphorylated with T4 PNK, resulting in overhangs on the 5′ and 3′ ends that are compatible for ligation with DNA digested with the restriction endonucleases BamHI and SpeI, respectively.
  • The duplex DNA was ligated into the shuttle vector CH1-AD1-PGEMT®, which was prepared by digestion with BamHI and SpeI, to generate the shuttle vector CH1-AD2-PGEMT®. A 429 base pair fragment containing CH1 and AD2 coding sequences was excised from the shuttle vector with SacII and EagI restriction enzymes and ligated into h679-pdHL2 vector that prepared by digestion with those same enzymes. The final expression vector is h679-Fd-AD2-pdHL2.
    • Example 18 Generation of Trimeric DNL Constructs
  • TF2 DNL Construct
  • A trimeric DNL construct designated TF2 was obtained by reacting C-DDD2-Fab-hMN-14 with h679-Fab-AD2. A pilot batch of TF2 was generated with >90% yield as follows. Protein L-purified C-DDD2-Fab-hMN-14 (200 mg) was mixed with h679-Fab-AD2 (60 mg) at a 1.4:1 molar ratio. The total protein concentration was 1.5 mg/ml in PBS containing 1 mM EDTA. Subsequent steps involved TCEP reduction, HIC chromatography, DMSO oxidation, and IMP 291 affinity chromatography. Before the addition of TCEP, SE-HPLC did not show any evidence of a2b formation. Addition of 5 mM TCEP rapidly resulted in the formation of a2b complex consistent with a 157 kDa protein expected for the binary structure. TF2 was purified to near homogeneity by IMP 291 affinity chromatography (not shown). IMP 291 is a synthetic peptide containing the HSG hapten to which the 679 Fab binds (Rossi et al., 2005, Clin Cancer Res 11:7122s-29s). SE-HPLC analysis of the IMP 291 unbound fraction demonstrated the removal of a4, a2 and free kappa chains from the product (not shown).
  • The functionality of TF2 was determined by BIACORE® assay. TF2, C-DDD1-hMN-14+h679-AD1 (used as a control sample of noncovalent a2b complex), or C-DDD2-hMN-14+h679-AD2 (used as a control sample of unreduced a2 and b components) were diluted to 1 μg/ml (total protein) and passed over a sensorchip immobilized with HSG. The response for TF2 was approximately two-fold that of the two control samples, indicating that only the h679-Fab-AD component in the control samples would bind to and remain on the sensorchip. Subsequent injections of WI2 IgG, an anti-idiotype antibody for hMN-14, demonstrated that only TF2 had a DDD-Fab-hMN-14 component that was tightly associated with h679-Fab-AD as indicated by an additional signal response. The additional increase of response units resulting from the binding of WI2 to TF2 immobilized on the sensorchip corresponded to two fully functional binding sites, each contributed by one subunit of C-DDD2-Fab-hMN-14. This was confirmed by the ability of TF2 to bind two Fab fragments of WI2 (not shown).
  • TF10 DNL Construct
  • A similar protocol was used to generate a trimeric TF10 DNL construct, comprising two copies of a C-DDD2-Fab-hPAM4 and one copy of C-AD2-Fab-679. The TF10 bispecific ([hPAM4]2 x h679) antibody was produced using the method disclosed for production of the (anti CEA)2 x anti HSG bsAb TF2, as described above. The TF10 construct bears two humanized PAM4 Fabs and one humanized 679 Fab.
  • The two fusion proteins (hPAM4-DDD2 and h679-AD2) were expressed independently in stably transfected myeloma cells. The tissue culture supernatant fluids were combined, resulting in a two-fold molar excess of hPAM4-DDD2. The reaction mixture was incubated at room temperature for 24 hours under mild reducing conditions using 1 mM reduced glutathione. Following reduction, the DNL reaction was completed by mild oxidation using 2 mM oxidized glutathione. TF10 was isolated by affinity chromatography using IMP291-affigel resin, which binds with high specificity to the h679 Fab.
    • Example 19 Production of AD- and DDD-Linked Fab and IgG Fusion Proteins from Multiple Antibodies
  • Using the techniques described in the preceding Examples, the IgG and Fab fusion proteins shown in Table 7 were constructed and incorporated into DNL constructs. The fusion proteins retained the antigen-binding characteristics of the parent antibodies and the DNL constructs exhibited the antigen-binding activities of the incorporated antibodies or antibody fragments.
  • TABLE 7
    Fusion proteins comprising IgG or Fab
    Fusion Protein Binding Specificity
    C-AD1-Fab-h679 HSG
    C-AD2-Fab-h679 HSG
    C-(AD)2-Fab-h679 HSG
    C-AD2-Fab-h734 Indium-DTPA
    C-AD2-Fab-hA20 CD20
    C-AD2-Fab-hA20L CD20
    C-AD2-Fab-hL243 HLA-DR
    C-AD2-Fab-hLL2 CD22
    N-AD2-Fab-hLL2 CD22
    C-AD2-IgG-hMN-14 CEACAM5
    C-AD2-IgG-hR1 IGF-1R
    C-AD2-IgG-hRS7 EGP-1
    C-AD2-IgG-hPAM4 MUC
    C-AD2-IgG-hLL1 CD74
    C-DDD1-Fab-hMN-14 CEACAM5
    C-DDD2-Fab-hMN-14 CEACAM5
    C-DDD2-Fab-h679 HSG
    C-DDD2-Fab-hA19 CD19
    C-DDD2-Fab-hA20 CD20
    C-DDD2-Fab-hAFP AFP
    C-DDD2-Fab-hL243 HLA-DR
    C-DDD2-Fab-hLL1 CD74
    C-DDD2-Fab-hLL2 CD22
    C-DDD2-Fab-hMN-3 CEACAM6
    C-DDD2-Fab-hMN-15 CEACAM6
    C-DDD2-Fab-hPAM4 MUC
    C-DDD2-Fab-hR1 IGF-1R
    C-DDD2-Fab-hRS7 EGP-1
    N-DDD2-Fab-hMN-14 CEACAM5
    • Example 20 Antibody-Dendrimer DNL Complex for siRNA
  • Cationic polymers, such as polylysine, polyethylenimine, or polyamidoamine (PAMAM)-based dendrimers, form complexes with nucleic acids. However, their potential applications as non-viral vectors for delivering therapeutic genes or siRNAs remain a challenge. One approach to improve selectivity and potency of a dendrimeric nanoparticle may be achieved by conjugation with an antibody that internalizes upon binding to target cells.
  • We synthesized and characterized a novel immunoconjugate, designated E1-G5/2, which was made by the DNL method to comprise half of a generation 5 (G5) PAMAM dendrimer (G5/2) site-specifically linked to a stabilized dimer of Fab derived from hRS7, a humanized antibody that is rapidly internalized upon binding to the Trop-2 antigen expressed on various solid cancers.
  • Methods
  • E1-G5/2 was prepared by combining two self-assembling modules, AD2-G5/2 and hRS7-Fab-DDD2, under mild redox conditions, followed by purification on a Protein L column. To make AD2-G5/2, we derivatized the AD2 peptide with a maleimide group to react with the single thiol generated from reducing a G5 PAMAM with a cystamine core and used reversed-phase HPLC to isolate AD2-G5/2. We produced hRS7-Fab-DDD2 as a fusion protein in myeloma cells, as described in the Examples above.
  • The molecular size, purity and composition of E1-G5/2 were analyzed by size-exclusion HPLC, SDS-PAGE, and Western blotting. The biological functions of E1-G5/2 were assessed by binding to an anti-idiotype antibody against hRS7, a gel retardation assay, and a DNase protection assay.
  • Results
  • E1-G5/2 was shown by size-exclusion HPLC to consist of a major peak (>90%) flanked by several minor peaks (not shown). The three constituents of E1-G5/2 (Fd-DDD2, the light chain, and AD2-G5/2) were detected by reducing SDS-PAGE and confirmed by Western blotting (not shown). Anti-idiotype binding analysis revealed E1-G5/2 contained a population of antibody-dendrimer conjugates of different size, all of which were capable of recognizing the anti-idiotype antibody, thus suggesting structural variability in the size of the purchased G5 dendrimer (not shown). Gel retardation assays showed E1-G5/2 was able to maximally condense plasmid DNA at a charge ratio of 6:1 (+/−), with the resulting dendriplexes completely protecting the complexed DNA from degradation by DNase I (not shown).
  • Conclusion
  • The DNL technique can be used to build dendrimer-based nanoparticles that are targetable with antibodies. Such agents have improved properties as carriers of drugs, plasmids or siRNAs for applications in vitro and in vivo. In preferred embodiments, anti-B-cell antibodies, such as anti-CD22 and/or anti-CD20, may be utilized to deliver cytotoxic or cytostatic siRNA species to targeted B-cells for therapy of lymphoma, leukemia, autoimmune or other diseases and conditions.
    • Example 21 Targeted Delivery of siRNA Using Protamine Linked Antibodies
  • Summary
  • RNA interference (RNAi) has been shown to down-regulate the expression of various proteins such as HER2, VEGF, Raf-1, bcl-2, EGFR and numerous others in preclinical studies. Despite the potential of RNAi to silence specific genes, the full therapeutic potential of RNAi remains to be realized due to the lack of an effective delivery system to target cells in vivo.
  • To address this critical need, we developed novel DNL constructs having multiple copies of human protamine tethered to a tumor-targeting, internalizing hRS7 (anti-Trop-2) antibody for targeted delivery of siRNAs in vivo. A DDD2-L-thP14 module comprising truncated human protamine (thP1, residues 8 to 29 of human protamine 1) was produced, in which the sequences of DDD2 and thP1 were fused respectively to the N- and C-terminal ends of a humanized antibody light chain (not shown). The sequence of the truncated hP1 (thP1) is shown below. Reaction of DDD2-L-thP1 with the antibody hRS7-IgG-AD2 under mild redox conditions, as described in the Examples above, resulted in the formation of an E1-L-thP1 complex (not shown), comprising four copies of thP1 attached to the carboxyl termini of the hRS7 heavy chains.
  • tHP1
    (SEQ ID NO: 139)
    RSQSRSRYYRQRQRSRRRRRRS 
  • The purity and molecular integrity of E1-L-thP1 following Protein A purification were determined by size-exclusion HPLC and SDS-PAGE (not shown). In addition, the ability of E1-L-thP1 to bind plasmid DNA or siRNA was demonstrated by the gel shift assay (not shown). E1-L-thP1 was effective at binding short double-stranded oligonucleotides (not shown) and in protecting bound DNA from digestion by nucleases added to the sample or present in serum (not shown).
  • The ability of the E1-L-thP1 construct to internalize siRNAs into Trop-2-expressing cancer cells was confirmed by fluorescence microscopy using FITC-conjugated siRNA and the human Calu-3 lung cancer cell line (not shown).
  • Methods
  • The DNL technique was employed to generate E1-L-thP1. The hRS7 IgG-AD module, constructed as described in the Examples above, was expressed in myeloma cells and purified from the culture supernatant using Protein A affinity chromatography. The DDD2-L-thP1 module was expressed as a fusion protein in myeloma cells and was purified by Protein L affinity chromatography. Since the CH3-AD2-IgG module possesses two AD2 peptides and each can bind to a DDD2 dimer, with each DDD2 monomer attached to a protamine moiety, the resulting E1-L-thP1 conjugate comprises four protamine groups. E1-L-thp1 was formed in nearly quantitative yield from the constituent modules and was purified to near homogeneity (not shown) with Protein A.
  • DDD2-L-thP1 was purified using Protein L affinity chromatography and assessed by size exclusion HPLC analysis and SDS-PAGE under reducing and nonreducing conditions (data not shown). A major peak was observed at 9.6 min (not shown). SDS-PAGE showed a major band between 30 and 40 kDa in reducing gel and a major band about 60 kDa (indicating a dimeric form of DDD2-L-thP1) in nonreducing gel (not shown). The results of Western blotting confirmed the presence of monomeric DDD2-L-tP1 and dimeric DDD2-L-tP1 on probing with anti-DDD antibodies (not shown).
  • To prepare the E1-L-thP1, hRS7-IgG-AD2 and DDD2-L-thP1 were combined in approximately equal amounts and reduced glutathione (final concentration 1 mM) was added. Following an overnight incubation at room temperature, oxidized glutathione was added (final concentration 2 mM) and the incubation continued for another 24 h. E1-L-thP1 was purified from the reaction mixture by Protein A column chromatography and eluted with 0.1 M sodium citrate buffer (pH 3.5). The product peak (not shown) was neutralized, concentrated, dialyzed with PBS, filtered, and stored in PBS containing 5% glycerol at 2 to 8° C. The composition of E1-L-thP1 was confirmed by reducing SDS-PAGE (not shown), which showed the presence of all three constituents (AD2-appended heavy chain, DDD2-L-htP1, and light chain).
  • The ability of DDD2-L-thP1 and E1-L-thP1 to bind DNA was evaluated by gel shift assay. DDD2-L-thP1 retarded the mobility of 500 ng of a linear form of 3-kb DNA fragment in 1% agarose at a molar ratio of 6 or higher (not shown). E1-L-thP1 retarded the mobility of 250 ng of a linear 200-bp DNA duplex in 2% agarose at a molar ratio of 4 or higher (not shown), whereas no such effect was observed for hRS7-IgG-AD2 alone (not shown). The ability of E1-L-thP1 to protect bound DNA from degradation by exogenous DNase and serum nucleases was also demonstrated (not shown).
  • The ability of E1-L-thP1 to promote internalization of bound siRNA was examined in the Trop-2 expressing ME-180 cervical cell line (not shown). Internalization of the E1-L-thP1 complex was monitored using FITC conjugated goat anti-human antibodies. The cells alone showed no fluorescence (not shown). Addition of FITC-labeled siRNA alone resulted in minimal internalization of the siRNA (not shown). Internalization of E1-L-thP1 alone was observed in 60 minutes at 37° C. (not shown). E1-L-thP1 was able to effectively promote internalization of bound FITC-conjugated siRNA (not shown). E1-L-thP1 (10 μg) was mixed with FITC-siRNA (300 nM) and allowed to form E1-L-thP1-siRNA complexes which were then added to Trop-2-expressing Calu-3 cells. After incubation for 4 h at 37° C. the cells were checked for internalization of siRNA by fluorescence microscopy (not shown).
  • The ability of E1-L-thP1 to induce apoptosis by internalization of siRNA was examined. E1-L-thP1 (10 μg) was mixed with varying amounts of siRNA (AllStars Cell Death siRNA, Qiagen, Valencia, Calif.). The E1-L-thP1-siRNA complex was added to ME-180 cells. After 72 h of incubation, cells were trypsinized and annexin V staining was performed to evaluate apoptosis. The Cell Death siRNA alone or E1-L-thP1 alone had no effect on apoptosis (not shown). Addition of increasing amounts of E1-L-thP1-siRNA produced a dose-dependent increase in apoptosis (not shown). These results show that E1-L-thP1 could effectively deliver siRNA molecules into the cells and induce apoptosis of target cells.
  • Conclusions
  • The DNL technology provides a modular approach to efficiently tether multiple protamine molecules to the anti-Trop-2 hRS7 antibody resulting in the novel molecule E1-L-thP1. SDS-PAGE demonstrated the homogeneity and purity of E1-L-thP1. DNase protection and gel shift assays showed the DNA binding activity of E1-L-thP1. E1-L-thP1 internalized in the cells like the parental hRS7 antibody and was able to effectively internalize siRNA molecules into Trop-2-expressing cells, such as ME-180 and Calu-3.
  • The skilled artisan will realize that the DNL technique is not limited to any specific antibody or siRNA species. Rather, the same methods and compositions demonstrated herein can be used to make targeted delivery complexes comprising any antibody, any siRNA carrier and any siRNA species. The use of a bivalent IgG in targeted delivery complexes would result in prolonged circulating half-life and higher binding avidity to target cells, resulting in increased uptake and improved efficacy.
    • Example 22 Ribonuclease Based DNL Immunotoxins Comprising Quadruple Ranpirnase (Rap) Conjugated to B-Cell Targeting Antibodies
  • We applied the DNL method to generate a novel class of immunotoxins, each of which comprises four copies of Rap site-specifically linked to a bivalent IgG. We combined a recombinant Rap-DDD module, produced in E. coli, with recombinant, humanized IgG-AD modules, which were produced in myeloma cells and targeted B-cell lymphomas and leukemias via binding to CD20 (hA20, veltuzumab), CD22 (hLL2, epratuzumab) or HLA-DR (hL243, IMMU-114), to generate 20-Rap, 22-Rap and C2-Rap, respectively. For each construct, a dimer of Rap was covalently tethered to the C-terminus of each heavy chain of the respective IgG. A control construct, 14-Rap, was made similarly, using labetuzumab (hMN-14), that binds to an antigen (CEACAM5) not expressed on B-cell lymphomas/leukemias.
  • Rap-DDD2
    (SEQ ID NO: 140)
    pQDWLTFQKKHITNTRDVDCDNIMSTNLFHCKDKNTFIYSRPEPVKAIC
    KGIIASKNVLTTSEFYLSDCNVTSRPCKYKLKKSTNKFCVTCENQAPVH
    FVGVGSC GGGGSLE CGHIQIPPGLTELLQGYTVEVLRQQPPDLVEFAVE
    YFTRLREARA VEHHHHHH 
  • The deduced amino acid sequence of secreted Rap-DDD2 is shown above (SEQ ID NO:140). Rap, underlined; linker, italics; DDD2, bold; pQ, amino-terminal glutamine converted to pyroglutamate. Rap-DDD2 was produced in E. coli as inclusion bodies, which were purified by IMAC under denaturing conditions, refolded and then dialyzed into PBS before purification by anion exchange chromatography. SDS-PAGE under reducing conditions resolved a protein band with a Mr appropriate for Rap-DDD2 (18.6 kDa) (not shown). The final yield of purified Rap-DDD2 was 10 mg/L of culture.
  • The DNL method was employed to rapidly generate a panel of IgG-Rap conjugates. The IgG-AD modules were expressed in myeloma cells and purified from the culture supernatant using Protein A affinity chromatography. The Rap-DDD2 module was produced and mixed with IgG-AD2 to form a DNL complex. Since the CH3-AD2-IgG modules possess two AD2 peptides and each can tether a Rap dimer, the resulting IgG-Rap DNL construct comprises four Rap groups and one IgG. IgG-Rap is formed nearly quantitatively from the constituent modules and purified to near homogeneity with Protein A.
  • Prior to the DNL reaction, the CH3-AD2-IgG exists as both a monomer, and a disulfide-linked dimer (not shown). Under non-reducing conditions, the IgG-Rap resolves as a cluster of high molecular weight bands of the expected size between those for monomeric and dimeric CH3-AD2-IgG (not shown). Reducing conditions, which reduces the conjugates to their constituent polypeptides, show the purity of the IgG-Rap and the consistency of the DNL method, as only bands representing heavy-chain-AD2 (HC-AD2), kappa light chain and Rap-DDD2 were visualized (not shown). Reversed phase HPLC analysis of 22-Rap (not shown) resolved a single protein peak at 9.10 min eluting between the two peaks of CH3-AD2-IgG-hLL2, representing the monomeric (7.55 min) and the dimeric (8.00 min) forms. The Rap-DDD2 module was isolated as a mixture of dimer and tetramer (reduced to dimer during DNL), which were eluted at 9.30 and 9.55 min, respectively (not shown).
  • LC/MS analysis of 22-Rap (not shown) showed that both the Rap-DDD2 and HC-AD2 polypeptides have an amino terminal glutamine that is converted to pyroglutamate (pQ) and that 22-Rap has 6 of its 8 constituent polypeptides modified by pQ.
  • In vitro cytotoxicity was evaluated in three NHL cell lines. Each cell line expresses CD20 at a considerably higher surface density compared to CD22; however, the internalization rate for hLL2 (anti-CD22) is much faster than hA20 (anti-CD20). 14-Rap shares the same structure as 22-Rap and 20-Rap, but its antigen (CEACAM5) is not expressed by the NHL cells. Cells were treated continuously with IgG-Rap as single agents or with combinations of the parental MAbs plus rRap. Both 20-Rap and 22-Rap killed each cell line at concentrations above 1 nM, indicating that their action is cytotoxic as opposed to merely cytostatic (not shown). 20-Rap was the most potent IgG-Rap, suggesting that antigen density may be more important than internalization rate. Similar results were obtained for Daudi and Ramos, where 20-Rap (EC50-0.1 nM) was 3-6-fold more potent than 22-Rap (not shown). The rituximab-resistant mantle cell lymphoma line, Jeko-1, exhibits increased CD20 but decreased CD22, compared to Daudi and Ramos. Importantly, 20-Rap exhibited very potent cytotoxicity (EC50˜20 pM) in Jeko-1, which was 25-fold more potent than 22-Rap (not shown).
  • The DNL method provides a modular approach to efficiently tether multiple cytotoxins onto a targeting antibody, resulting in novel immunotoxins that are expected to show higher in vivo potency due to improved pharmacokinetics and targeting specificity. Targeting Rap with a MAb to a cell surface antigen enhanced its tumor-specific cytotoxicity. Antigen density and internalization rate are both critical factors for the observed in vitro potency of IgG-Rap. In vitro results show that CD20-, CD22-, or HLA-DR-targeted IgG-Rap have potent biologic activity for therapy of B-cell lymphomas and leukemias. The skilled artisan will realize that the modular DNL technique may be utilized to produce Rap DNL constructs targeted to CD22.
    • Example 23 Production and Use of a DNL Construct Comprising Two Different Antibody Moieties and a Cytokine
  • In certain embodiments, trimeric DNL constructs may comprise three different effector moieties, for example two different antibody moieties and a cytokine moiety. We report here the generation and characterization of the first bispecific MAb-IFNα, designated 20-C2-2b, which comprises two copies of IFN-α2b and a stabilized F(ab)2 of hL243 (humanized anti-HLA-DR; IMMU-114) site-specifically linked to veltuzumab (humanized anti-CD20). In vitro, 20-C22b inhibited each of four lymphoma and eight myeloma cell lines, and was more effective than monospecific CD20-targeted MAb-IFNα or a mixture comprising the parental antibodies and IFNα in all but one (HLA-DR−/CD20−) myeloma line (not shown), suggesting that 20-C2-2b should be useful in the treatment of various hematopoietic disorders. The 20-C2-2b displayed greater cytotoxicity against KMS12-BM (CD20+/HLA-DR+ myeloma) than monospecific MAb-IFNα that targets only HLA-DR or CD20 (not shown), indicating that all three components in 20-C2-2b can contribute to toxicity. Our findings indicate that a given cell's responsiveness to MAb-IFNα depends on its sensitivity to IFNα and the specific antibodies, as well as the expression and density of the targeted antigens.
  • Because 20-C2-2b has antibody-dependent cellular cytotoxicity (ADCC), but not CDC, and can target both CD20 and HLA-DR, it is useful for therapy of a broad range of hematopoietic disorders that express either or both antigens.
  • Antibodies
  • The abbreviations used in the following discussion are: 20 (CH3-AD2-IgG-v-mab, anti-CD20 IgG DNL module); C2 (CH1-DDD2-Fab-hL243, anti-HLA-DR Fab2 DNL module); 2b (dimeric IFNα2B-DDD2 DNL module); 734 (anti-in-DTPA IgG DNL module used as non-targeting control). The following MAbs were provided by Immunomedics, Inc.: veltuzumab or v-mab (anti-CD20 IgG1), hL243γ4p (Immu-114, anti-HLA-DR IgG4), a murine anti-IFNα MAb, and rat anti-idiotype MAbs to v-mab (WR2) and hL243 (WT).
  • DNL Constructs
  • Monospecific MAb-IFNα (20-2b-2b, 734-2b-2b and C2-2b-2b) and the bispecific HexAb (20-C2-C2) were generated by combination of an IgG-AD2-module with DDD2-modules using the DNL method, as described in the preceding Examples. The 734-2b-2b, which comprises tetrameric IFNα2b and MAb h734 [anti-Indium-DTPA IgG1], was used as a non-targeting control MAb-IFNα.
  • The construction of the mammalian expression vector as well as the subsequent generation of the production clones and the purification of CH3-AD2-IgG-v-mab are disclosed in the preceding Examples. The expressed recombinant fusion protein has the AD2 peptide linked to the carboxyl terminus of the CH3 domain of v-mab via a 15 amino acid long flexible linker peptide. Co-expression of the heavy chain-AD2 and light chain polypeptides results in the formation of an IgG structure equipped with two AD2 peptides. The expression vector was transfected into Sp/ESF cells (an engineered cell line of Sp2/0) by electroporation. The pdHL2 vector contains the gene for dihydrofolate reductase, thus allowing clonal selection, as well as gene amplification with methotrexate (MTX). Stable clones were isolated from 96-well plates selected with media containing 0.2 μM MTX. Clones were screened for CH3-AD2-IgG-vmab productivity via a sandwich ELISA. The module was produced in roller bottle culture with serum-free media.
  • The DDD-module, IFNα2b-DDD2, was generated as discussed above by recombinant fusion of the DDD2 peptide to the carboxyl terminus of human IFNα2b via an 18 amino acid long flexible linker peptide. As is the case for all DDD-modules, the expressed fusion protein spontaneously forms a stable homodimer.
  • The CH1-DDD2-Fab-hL243 expression vector was generated from hL243-IgG-pdHL2 vector by excising the sequence for the CH1-Hinge-CH2-CH3 domains with SacII and EagI restriction enzymes and replacing it with a 507 bp sequence encoding CH1-DDD2, which was excised from the C-DDD2-hMN-14-pdHL2 expression vector with the same enzymes. Following transfection of CH1-DDD2-Fab-hL243-pdHL2 into Sp/ESF cells by electroporation, stable, MTX-resistant clones were screened for productivity via a sandwich ELISA using 96-well microtiter plates coated with mouse anti-human kappa chain to capture the fusion protein, which was detected with horseradish peroxidase-conjugated goat anti-human Fab. The module was produced in roller bottle culture.
  • Roller bottle cultures in serum-free H-SFM media and fed-batch bioreactor production resulted in yields comparable to other IgG-AD2 modules and cytokine-DDD2 modules generated to date. CH3-AD2-IgG-v-mab and IFNα2b-DDD2 were purified from the culture broths by affinity chromatography using MABSELECT™ (GE Healthcare) and HIS-SELECT® HF Nickel Affinity Gel (Sigma), respectively, as described previously (Rossi et al., Blood 2009, 114:3864-71). The culture broth containing the CH1-DDD2-Fab-hL243 module was applied directly to KAPPASELECT® affinity gel (GE-Healthcare), which was washed to baseline with PBS and eluted with 0.1 M Glycine, pH 2.5.
  • The purity of the DNL modules was assessed by SDS-PAGE and SE-HPLC (not shown). Analysis under non-reducing conditions showed that, prior to the DNL reaction, IFNα2b-DDD2 and CH1-DDD2-Fab-hL243 exist as disulfide-linked dimers (not shown). This phenomenon, which is always seen with DDD-modules, is beneficial, as it protects the reactive sulfhydryl groups from irreversible oxidation. In comparison, CH3-AD2-IgG-v-mab (not shown) exists as both a monomer and a disulfide-linked dimer, and is reduced to monomer during the DNL reaction. Reducing SDS-PAGE demonstrated that each module was purified to near homogeneity and identified the component polypeptides comprising each module (not shown).
  • Generation of 20-C2-2b by DNL
  • Three DNL modules (CH3-AD2-IgG-v-mab, CH1-DDD2-Fab-hL243, and IFN-α2b-DDD2) were combined in equimolar quantities to generate the bsMAb-IFNα, 20-C2-2b. Following an overnight docking step under mild reducing conditions (1 mM reduced glutathione) at room temperature, oxidized glutathione was added (2 mM) to facilitate disulfide bond formation (locking). The 20-C2-2b was purified to near homogeneity using three sequential affinity chromatography steps, first with Protein A (MABSELECT™), second by IMAC using HIS-SELECT® HF Nickel Affinity Gel, and third by an hL243-anti-idiotype affinity chromatography. Only those DNL constructs comprising each of the 3 desired monomers bound to all three columns.
  • The skilled artisan will realize that affinity chromatography may be used to purify DNL complexes comprising any combination of effector moieties, so long as ligands for each of the three effector moieties can be obtained and attached to the column material. The selected DNL construct is the one that binds to each of three columns containing the ligand for each of the three effector moieties and can be eluted after washing to remove unbound complexes.
  • Generation and Characterization of 20-C2-2b
  • The bispecific MAb-IFNα was generated by combining the IgG-AD2 module, CH3-AD2-IgG-v-mab, with two different dimeric DDD-modules, CH1-DDD2-Fab-hL243 and IFNα2b-DDD2. Due to the random association of either DDD-module with the two AD2 groups, two side-products, 20-C2-C2 and 20-2b-2b are expected to form, in addition to 20-C2-2b.
  • Non-reducing SDS-PAGE (not shown) resolved 20-C2-2b (˜305 kDa) as a cluster of bands positioned between those of 20-C2-C2 (˜365 kDa) and 20-2b-2b (255 kDa). Reducing SDS-PAGE resolved the five polypeptides (v-mab HC-AD2, hL243 Fd-DDD2, IFNα2b-DDD2 and co-migrating v-mab and hL243 kappa light chains) comprising 20-C2-2b (not shown). IFNα2b-DDD2 and hL243 Fd-DDD2 are absent in 20-C2-C2 and 20-2b-2b. MABSELECT™ binds to all three of the major species produced in the DNL reaction, but removes any excess IFNα2b-DDD2 and CH1-DDD2-Fab-hL243. The HIS-SELECT® unbound fraction contained mostly 20-C2-C2 (not shown). The unbound fraction from WT affinity chromatography comprised 20-2b-2b (not shown). Each of the samples was subjected to SE-HPLC and immunoreactivity analyses, which corroborated the results and conclusions of the SDS-PAGE analysis.
  • SE-HPLC analysis of 20-C2-2b resolved a predominant protein peak with a retention time (6.7 min) consistent with its calculated mass and between those of the larger 20-C2-C2 (6.6 min) and smaller 20-2b-2b (6.85 min), as well as some higher molecular weight peaks that likely represent non-covalent dimers formed via self-association of IFNα2b (not shown).
  • Immunoreactivity assays demonstrated the homogeneity of 20-C2-2b with each molecule containing the three functional groups (not shown). Incubation of 20-C2-2b with an excess of antibodies to any of the three constituent modules resulted in quantitative formation of high molecular weight immune complexes and the disappearance of the 20-C2-2b peak (not shown). The MAb-IFNα showed similar binding avidity to their parental MAbs (not shown).
  • IFNα Biological Activity
  • The specific activities for various MAb-IFNα were measured using a cell-based reporter gene assay and compared to peginterferon alfa-2b (not shown). Expectedly, the specific activity of 20-C2-2b (2454 IU/pmol), which has two IFNα2b groups, was significantly lower than those of 20-2b-2b (4447 IU/pmol) or 734-2b-2b (3764 IU/pmol), yet greater than peginterferon alfa-2b (P<0.001) (not shown). The difference between 20-2b-2b and 734-2b-2b was not significant. The specific activity among all agents varies minimally when normalized to IU/pmol of total IFNα. Based on these data, the specific activity of each IFNα2b group of the MAb-IFNα is approximately 30% of recombinant IFNα2b (4000 IU/pmol).
  • In the ex-vivo setting, the 20-C2-2b DNL construct depleted lymphoma cells more effectively than normal B cells and had no effect on T cells (not shown). However, it did efficiently eliminate monocytes (not shown). Where v-mab had no effect on monocytes, depletion was observed following treatment with hL243α4p and MAb-IFNα, with 20-2b-2b and 734-2b-2b exhibiting similar toxicity (not shown). Therefore, the predictably higher potency of 20-C2-2b is attributed to the combined actions of anti-HLA-DR and IFNα, which may be augmented by HLA-DR targeting.
  • The skilled artisan will realize that the approach described here to produce and use bispecific immunocytokine, or other DNL constructs comprising three different effector moieties, may be utilized with any combinations of antibodies, antibody fragments, cytokines or other effectors that may be incorporated into a DNL construct, for example the combination of anti-CD20 and anti-CD22 with IFNα2b.
    • Example 24 Hexavalent DNL Constructs
  • The DNL technology described above for formation of trivalent DNL complexes was applied to generate hexavalent IgG-based DNL structures (HIDS). Because of the increased number of binding sites for target antigens, hexavalent constructs are expected to show greater affinity and/or efficacy against target cells. Two types of modules, which were produced as recombinant fusion proteins, were combined to generate a variety of HIDS. Fab-DDD2 modules were as described above. The Fab-DDD2 modules form stable homodimers that bind to AD2-containing modules. To generate HIDS, C-H-AD2-IgG modules were created to pair with the Fab-DDD2 modules.
  • C-H-AD2-IgG modules have an AD2 peptide fused to the carboxyl terminus (C) of the heavy (H) chain of IgG via a peptide linker. The DNA coding sequences for the linker peptide followed by the AD2 peptide are coupled to the 3′ end of the CH3 (heavy chain constant domain 3) coding sequence by standard recombinant DNA methodologies, resulting in a contiguous open reading frame. When the heavy chain-AD2 polypeptide is co-expressed with a light chain polypeptide, an IgG molecule is formed possessing two AD2 peptides, which can therefore bind two Fab-DDD2 dimers. The C-H-AD2-IgG module can be combined with any Fab-DDD2 module to generate a wide variety of hexavalent structures composed of an Fc fragment and six Fab fragments. If the C-H-AD2-IgG module and the Fab-DDD2 module are derived from the same parental monoclonal antibody (MAb) the resulting HIDS is monospecific with 6 binding arms to the same antigen. If the modules are instead derived from two different MAbs then the resulting HIDS are bispecific, with two binding arms for the specificity of the C-H-AD2-IgG module and 4 binding arms for the specificity of the Fab-DDD2 module.
  • The same technique has been utilized to produce DNL complexes comprising an IgG moiety attached to four effector moieties, such as cytokines. In an exemplary embodiment, an IgG moiety was attached to four copies of interferon-α2b. The antibody-cytokine DNL construct exhibited superior pharmacokinetic properties and/or efficacy compared to PEGylated forms of interferon-α2b.
  • Creation of C-H-AD2-IgG-pdHL2 Expression Vectors
  • The pdHL2 mammalian expression vector has been used to mediate the expression of many recombinant IgGs. A plasmid shuttle vector was produced to facilitate the conversion of any IgG-pdHL2 vector into a C-H-AD2-IgG-pdHL2 vector. The gene for the Fc (CH2 and CH3 domains) was amplified using the pdHL2 vector as a template and a pair of primers. The amplimer was cloned in the PGEMT® PCR cloning vector. The Fc insert fragment was excised from PGEMT® with XbaI and BamHI restriction enzymes and ligated with AD2-pdHL2 vector that was prepared by digestion of h679-Fab-AD2-pdHL2 with XbaI and BamHI, to generate the shuttle vector Fc-AD2-pdHL2.
  • To convert any IgG-pdHL2 expression vector to a C-H-AD2-IgG-pdHL2 expression vector, an 861 bp BsrGI/NdeI restriction fragment is excised from the former and replaced with a 952 bp BsrGI/NdeI restriction fragment excised from the Fc-AD2-pdHL2 vector. BsrGI cuts in the CH3 domain and NdeI cuts downstream (3′) of the expression cassette.
  • Production of C-H-AD2-hLL2 IgG
  • Epratuzumab, or hLL2 IgG, is a humanized anti-human CD22 MAb. An expression vector for C-H-AD2-hLL2 IgG was generated from hLL2 IgG-pdHL2, as described above, and used to transfect Sp2/0 myeloma cells by electroporation. Following transfection, the cells were plated in 96-well plates and transgenic clones were selected in media containing methotrexate. Clones were screened for C-H-AD2-hLL2 IgG productivity by a sandwich ELISA using 96-well microtiter plates coated with an hLL2-specific anti-idiotype MAb and detection with peroxidase-conjugated anti-human IgG. Clones were expanded to roller bottles for protein production and C-H-AD2-hLL2 IgG was purified from the spent culture media in a single step using Protein-A affinity chromatography. SDS-PAGE analysis demonstrated that the purified C-H-AD2-hLL2-IgG consisted of both monomeric and disulfide-linked dimeric forms of the module (not shown). Protein bands representing these two forms are evident by SDS-PAGE under non-reducing conditions, while under reducing conditions all of the forms are reduced to two bands representing the constituent polypeptides (Heavy chain-AD2 and kappa chain) (not shown). No other contaminating bands were detected.
  • Production of C-H-AD2-hA20 IgG
  • hA20 IgG is a humanized anti-human CD20 MAb. An expression vector for C-H-AD2-hA20 IgG was generated from hA20 IgG-pDHL2, as described above, and used to transfect Sp2/0 myeloma cells by electroporation. Following transfection, the cells were plated in 96-well plates and transgenic clones were selected in media containing methotrexate. Clones were screened for C-H-AD2-hA20 IgG productivity by a sandwich ELISA using 96-well microtiter plates coated with a hA20-specific anti-idiotype MAb and detection with peroxidase-conjugated anti-human IgG. Clones were expanded to roller bottles for protein production and C-H-AD2-hA20 IgG was purified from the spent culture media in a single step using Protein-A affinity chromatography. SE-HPLC and SDS-PAGE analyses gave very similar results to those obtained for C-H-AD2-hLL2 IgG (not shown).
    • Example 25 Generation of Hexavalent DNL Constructs
  • Generation of Hex-hA20
  • The DNL method was used to create Hex-hA20, a monospecific anti-CD20 HIDS, by combining C-H-AD2-hA20 IgG with hA20-Fab-DDD2. The Hex-hA20 structure contains six anti-CD20 Fab fragments and an Fc fragment, arranged as four Fab fragments and one IgG antibody. Hex-hA20 was made as described below.
  • A 210% molar equivalent of (hA20-Fab-DDD2)2 was mixed with C-H-AD2-hA20 IgG. This molar ratio was used because two Fab-DDD2 dimers are coupled to each C-H-AD2-hA20 IgG molecule and an additional 10% excess of the former to ensure that the coupling reaction is complete. The mixture was typically made in phosphate buffered saline, pH 7.4 (PBS) with 1 mM EDTA. Then reduced glutathione (GSH) was added to a final concentration of 1 mM and the solution was held at room temperature (16-25° C.) for 1-24 hours. Following reduction, oxidized glutathione (GSSH) was added directly to the reaction mixture to a final concentration of 2 mM and the solution was held at room temperature for 1-24 hours.
  • After oxidation, the reaction mixture was loaded directly onto a Protein-A affinity chromatography column. The column was washed with PBS and the Hex-hA20 was eluted with 0.1 M glycine, pH 2.5. Since excess hA20-Fab-DDD2 was used in the reaction, there was no unconjugated C-H-AD2-hA20 IgG, or incomplete DNL structures containing only one (hA20-Fab-DDD2)2 moiety. The unconjugated excess hA20-Fab-DDD2 does not bind to the affinity resin. The calculated molecular weight from the deduced amino acid sequences of the constituent polypeptides is 386 kDa. Size exclusion HPLC analysis showed a single protein peak with a retention time consistent with a protein structure of 375-400 kDa (not shown).
  • Generation of Hex-hLL2
  • The DNL method was used to create a monospecific anti-CD22 HIDS (Hex-hLL2) by combining C-H-AD2-hLL2 IgG with hLL2-Fab-DDD2. The DNL reaction was accomplished as described above for Hex-hA20. The calculated molecular weight from the deduced amino acid sequences of the constituent polypeptides is 386 kDa. Size exclusion HPLC analysis showed a single protein peak with a retention time consistent with a protein structure of 375-400 kDa (not shown). SDS-PAGE analysis under non-reducing conditions showed a cluster of high molecular weight bands, which were eliminated under reducing conditions to leave only the three expected polypeptide chains: HC-AD2, Fd-DDD2, and the kappa chain (not shown).
  • Generation of DNL1 and DNL
  • The DNL method was used to create bispecific HIDS by combining C-H-AD2-hLL2 IgG with either hA20-Fab-DDD2 to obtain DNL1 or hMN-14-DDD2 to obtain DNL1C. DNL1 has four binding arms for CD20 and two for CD22. As hMN-14 is a humanized MAb to carcinoembryonic antigen (CEACAM5), DNL1C has four binding arms for CEACAM5 and two for CD22. The DNL reactions were accomplished as described for Hex-hA20 above. HPLC and SDS-PAGE were consistent with the desired products.
  • Generation of DNL2 and DNL2C
  • The DNL method was used to create bispecific HIDS by combining C-H-AD2-hA20 IgG with either hLL2-Fab-DDD2 to obtain DNL2 or hMN-14-DDD2 to obtain DNL2C. DNL2 has four binding arms for CD22 and two for CD20. DNL2C has four binding arms for CEACAM5 and two for CD20. The DNL reactions were accomplished as described for Hex-hA20. HPLC and SDS-PAGE were consistent with the desired products.
  • Stability in Serum
  • The stability of DNL1 and DNL2 in human serum was determined using a bispecific ELISA assay. The protein structures were incubated at 10 μg/ml in fresh pooled human sera at 37° C. and 5% CO2 for five days. For day 0 samples, aliquots were frozen in liquid nitrogen immediately after dilution in serum. ELISA plates were coated with an anti-Id to hA20 IgG and bispecific binding was detected with an anti-Id to hLL2 IgG. Both DNL1 and DNL2 were highly stable in serum and maintained complete bispecific binding activity (not shown).
  • Binding Activity
  • The HIDS generated as described above retained the binding properties of their parental Fab/IgGs. Competitive ELISAs were used to investigate the binding avidities of the various HIDS using either a rat anti-idiotype MAb to hA20 (WR2) to assess the binding activity of the hA20 components or a rat anti-idiotype MAb to hLL2 (WN) to assess the binding activity of the hLL2 components. To assess hA20 binding, ELISA plates were coated with hA20 IgG and the HIDS were allowed to compete with the immobilized IgG for WR2 binding. To assess hLL2 binding, plates were coated with hLL2 IgG and the HIDS were allowed to compete with the immobilized IgG for WN binding. The relative amount of anti-Id bound to the immobilized IgG was detected using peroxidase-conjugated anti-Rat IgG.
  • Examining the relative CD20 binding avidities, DNL2, which has two CD20 binding groups, showed a similar binding avidity to hA20 IgG, which also has two CD20-binding arms (not shown). DNL1, which has four CD20-binding groups, had a stronger (˜4-fold) relative avidity than DNL2 or hA20 IgG (not shown). Hex-hA20, which has six CD20-binding groups, had an even stronger (˜10-fold) relative avidity than hA20 IgG (not shown).
  • Similar results were observed for CD22 binding. DNL1, which has two CD20 binding groups, showed a similar binding avidity to hLL2 IgG, which also has two CD22-binding arms (not shown). DNL2, which has four CD22-binding groups, had a stronger (>5-fold) relative avidity than DNL1 or hLL2 IgG. Hex-hLL2, which has six CD22-binding groups, had an even stronger (>10-fold) relative avidity than hLL2 IgG (not shown). As both DNL2 and DNL3 contain two hA20 Fabs and four hLL2 Fabs, they showed similar strength in binding to the same anti-id antibody (not shown).
  • In Vivo Anti-Tumor Activity
  • The HIDS were shown to have therapeutic efficacy in vivo using a human Burkitt Lymphoma model in mice. Low doses (12 μg) of DNL2 and Hex-hA20 more than doubled the survival times of tumor bearing mice. Treatment with higher doses (60 μg) resulted in long-term survivors.
  • In Vitro Activity
  • Some of the HIDS were observed to have potent anti-proliferative activity on lymphoma cell lines. DNL1, DNL2 and Hex-hA20 inhibited cell growth of Daudi Burkitt Lymphoma cells in vitro (not shown). Treatment of the cells with 10 nM concentrations was substantially more effective for the HIDS compared to rituximab (not shown). Using a cell counting assay, the potency of DNL1 and DNL2 was estimated to be more than 100-fold greater than that of rituximab, while the Hex-hA20 was shown to be even more potent (not shown). This was confirmed with an MTS proliferation assay in which dose-response curves were generated for Daudi cells treated with a range of concentrations of the HIDS (not shown). Compared to rituximab, the bispecific HIDS (DNL1 and DNL2) and Hex-hA20 were >100-fold and >10000-fold more potent, respectively.
  • Dose-response curves for HIDS (DNL1, DNL2, Hex-hA20) versus a parent IgG (hA20 IgG) were compared for three different lymphoma cell lines, using an MTS proliferation assay. In Daudi lymphoma cells, the bispecific structures DNL1 and DNL2 showed >100-fold more potent anti-proliferative activity and Hex-hA20 showed >10.000-fold more potent activity than the parent hA20 IgG (not shown). Hex-hLL2 and the control structures (DNL1-C and DNL2-C) had very little anti-proliferative activity in this assay (not shown).
  • In Raji lymphoma cells, Hex-hA20 displayed potent anti-proliferative activity, but DNL2 showed only minimal activity compared with hA20 IgG (not shown). In Ramos lymphoma cells, both DNL2 and Hex-hA20 displayed potent anti-proliferative activity, compared with hA20 IgG (not shown). These results show that the increased potency of HIDS relative to the parent IgGs is not limited to particular cell lines, but rather is a general phenomenon for cells displaying the appropriate targets.
  • CDC and ADCC Activity of Hexavalent DNL Constructs
  • In vivo, anti-CD20 monoclonal antibodies such as rituximab and hA20 can utilize complement-dependent cytotoxicity (CDC), antibody-dependent cellular cytotoxicity (ADCC) and signal transduction induced growth inhibition/apoptosis for tumor cell killing. The hexavalent DNL structures (DNL1, DNL2, Hex-hA20) were tested for CDC activity using Daudi cells in an in vitro assay. Surprisingly, none of the hexavalent structures that bind CD20 exhibited CDC activity (not shown). The parent hA20 IgG exhibited potent CDC activity (not shown), while as expected the hLL2 antibody against CD22 showed no activity (not shown). The lack of effect of DNL2 and Hex-hA20 was of interest, since they comprise hA20-IgG-Ad2, which showed similar positive CDC activity to hA20 IgG (not shown).
  • DNL1 was assayed for ADCC activity using freshly isolated peripheral blood mononuclear cells. Both rituximab and hA20 IgG showed potent activity on Daudi cells, while DNL1 did not exhibit any detectable ADCC activity (not shown).
  • These data suggest that the Fc region may become inaccessible for effector functions (CDC and ADCC) when four additional Fab groups are tethered to its carboxyl termini. Therefore, the hexavalent DNL structures appear to rely only on signal transduction induced growth inhibition/apoptosis for in vivo anti-tumor activity.
  • It will be readily apparent to one skilled in the art that varying substitutions and modifications may be made to the invention disclosed herein without departing from the scope and spirit of the invention. Thus, such additional embodiments are within the scope of the present invention.

Claims (24)

What is claimed is:
1. A method of treating a B cell lymphoma or B cell leukemia comprising administering to an individual with a B cell lymphoma or B cell leukemia, an immunoconjugate consisting of (i) an anti-CD22 antibody or antigen binding fragment thereof; and (ii) at least one therapeutic agent attached by a linker to the anti-CD22 antibody or fragment thereof, wherein the therapeutic agent is an alpha-emitting radionuclide.
2. The method of claim 1, wherein the radionuclide has a decay energy in the range of 2,000 to 10,000 keV.
3. The method of claim 1, wherein the radionuclide has a decay energy in the range of 3,000 to 8,000 keV.
4. The method of claim 1, wherein the radionuclide has a decay energy in the range of 4,000 to 7,000 keV.
5. The method of claim 1, wherein the radionuclide is selected from the group consisting of Dy-152, At-211, Bi-212, Ra-223, Rn-219, Po-215, Bi-211, Ac-225, Fr-221, At-217, Bi-213 and Fm-255.
6. The method of claim 1, wherein the anti-CD22 antibody or fragment thereof comprises the light chain complementarity determining region (CDR) sequences CDR1 (KSSQSVLYSANHKYLA, SEQ ID NO:1), CDR2 (WASTRES, SEQ ID NO:12), and CDR3 (HQYLSSWTF, SEQ ID NO:3) and the heavy chain CDR sequences CDR1 (SYWLH, SEQ ID NO:4), CDR2 (YINPRNDYTEYNQNFKD, SEQ ID NO:5), and CDR3 (RDITTFY, SEQ ID NO:6).
7. The method of claim 1, wherein the anti-CD22 antibody or fragment thereof competes with, blocks binding to, or binds to the same epitope of CD22 as an LL2 antibody comprising the light chain CDR sequences CDR1 (KSSQSVLYSANHKYLA, SEQ ID NO:1), CDR2 (WASTRES, SEQ ID NO:2), and CDR3 (HQYLSSWTF, SEQ ID NO:3) and the heavy chain CDR sequences CDR1 (SYWLH, SEQ ID NO:4), CDR2 (YINPRNDYTEYNQNFKD, SEQ ID NO:5), and CDR3 (RDITTFY, SEQ ID NO:6).
8. The method of claim 1, wherein the anti-CD22 antibody or fragment thereof is selected from the group consisting of epratuzumab, 1F5, HIB22, FPC1, LT22, MEM-1, RFB4, bu59, fpc1, mc64-12 and IS7.
9. The method of claim 1, further comprising administering to said individual an anti-B cell antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof that binds to an antigen selected from the group consisting of CD19, CD20, CD21, CD22, CD23, CD37, CD40, CD40L, CD52, CD80 and HLA-DR.
10. The method of claim 9, wherein the anti-B cell antibody or fragment thereof binds to CD20.
11. The method of claim 10, wherein the anti-B cell antibody is selected from the group consisting of GA101, BCX-301, DXL 625, L26, B-Ly1, MEM-97, LT20, 2H7, AT80, B-H20, HI20a, HI47, 13.6E12, 4f11, 5c11, 7d1, rituximab and veltuzumab.
12. The method of claim 10, wherein the anti-B cell antibody is rituximab or veltuzumab.
13. The method of claim 10, wherein the anti-B cell antibody or fragment thereof competes with, blocks binding to, or binds to the same epitope of CD20 as an hA20 antibody comprising the light chain complementarity-determining region (CDR) sequences CDR1 (RASSSVSYIH; SEQ ID NO:7), CDR2 (ATSNLAS; SEQ ID NO:8), and CDR3 (QQWTSNPPT; SEQ ID NO:9) and the heavy chain variable region CDR sequences CDR1 (SYNMH; SEQ ID NO:10), CDR2 (AIYPGNGDTSYNQKFKG; SEQ ID NO:11), and CDR3 (STYYGGDWYFDV; SEQ ID NO:12).
14. The method of claim 10, wherein the anti-B cell antibody or fragment thereof comprises the light chain complementarity-determining region (CDR) sequences CDR1 (RASSSVSYIH; SEQ ID NO:7), CDR2 (ATSNLAS; SEQ ID NO:8), and CDR3 (QQWTSNPPT; SEQ ID NO:9) and the heavy chain variable region CDR sequences CDR1 (SYNMH; SEQ ID NO:10), CDR2 (AIYPGNGDTSYNQKFKG; SEQ ID NO:11), and CDR3 (STYYGGDWYFDV; SEQ ID NO:12).
15. The method of claim 1, wherein the B cell lymphoma or leukemia is selected from the group consisting of mantle cell lymphoma, multiple myeloma, Hodgkin's lymphoma, non-Hodgkin's lymphoma, diffuse large B cell lymphoma, Burkitt lymphoma, follicular lymphoma, acute lymphocytic leukemia, chronic lymphocytic leukemia and hairy cell leukemia.
16. The method of claim 23, wherein the disease is mantle cell lymphoma.
17. The method of claim 1, further comprising killing B cells by a mechanism selected from the group consisting of homotypic adhesion, loss of mitochondrial membrane potential, production of reactive oxygen species, increased phosphorylation of ERKs and JNK, downregulation of pAkt and Bcl-xL, and enlargement of lysosomes.
18. The method of claim 1, wherein the anti-CD22 antibody is a G1m3 allotype.
19. The method of claim 1, wherein the anti-CD22 antibody is a chimeric, humanized or human antibody.
20. The method of claim 1, wherein the anti-CD22 antibody or fragment thereof comprises human IgG1, IgG2, IgG3, or IgG4 constant regions.
21. The method of claim 1, further comprising storing the immunoconjugate prior to administration at a pH in the range of 5.5 to 7.5 in a solution comprising a buffer selected from the group consisting of 2-(N-morpholino)ethanesulfonic acid (MES), N-(2-acetamido)-2-iminodiacetic acid (ADA), 1,4-piperazinediethanesulfonic acid (PIPES), N-(2-acetamido)-2-aminoethanesulfonic acid (ACES), N,N-bis(2-hydroxyethyl)-2-aminoethanesulfonic acid (BES), N-tris(hydroxymethyl)methyl-2-aminoethanesulfonic acid (TES), and N-(2-hydroxyethyl)piperazine-N′-(2-ethanesulfonic acid) or HEPES.
22. The method of claim 21, wherein the buffer is 25 mM MES, pH 6.5.
23. The method of claim 21, wherein the solution further comprises trehalose and polysorbate 80.
24. The method of claim 23, further comprising lyophilizing the solution and storing the lyophilized antibody at 2-8° C.
US14/337,336 2002-12-13 2014-07-22 Camptothecin Conjugates of Anti-CD22 Antibodies for Treatment of B Cell Diseases Abandoned US20140369927A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US14/337,336 US20140369927A1 (en) 2002-12-13 2014-07-22 Camptothecin Conjugates of Anti-CD22 Antibodies for Treatment of B Cell Diseases
US15/432,278 US20170151356A1 (en) 2002-12-13 2017-02-14 Camptothecin Conjugates of Anti-CD22 Antibodies for Treatment of B Cell Diseases

Applications Claiming Priority (14)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US43301702P 2002-12-13 2002-12-13
US10/734,589 US7585491B2 (en) 2002-12-13 2003-12-15 Immunoconjugates with an intracellularly-cleavable linkage
US66860305P 2005-04-06 2005-04-06
US72829205P 2005-10-19 2005-10-19
US75119605P 2005-12-16 2005-12-16
US11/388,032 US8877901B2 (en) 2002-12-13 2006-03-23 Camptothecin-binding moiety conjugates
US12/026,811 US7591994B2 (en) 2002-12-13 2008-02-06 Camptothecin-binding moiety conjugates
US20789009P 2009-02-13 2009-02-13
US12/629,404 US7999083B2 (en) 2002-12-13 2009-12-02 Immunoconjugates with an intracellularly-cleavable linkage
US37506810P 2010-08-19 2010-08-19
US13/164,275 US8080250B1 (en) 2002-12-13 2011-06-20 Immunoconjugates with an intracellularly-cleavable linkage
US13/213,245 US8420086B2 (en) 2002-12-13 2011-08-19 Camptothecin conjugates of anti-CD22 antibodies for treatment of B cell diseases
US13/774,526 US20130177526A1 (en) 2002-12-13 2013-02-22 Camptothecin Conjugates of Anti-CD22 Antibodies for Treatment of B Cell Diseases
US14/337,336 US20140369927A1 (en) 2002-12-13 2014-07-22 Camptothecin Conjugates of Anti-CD22 Antibodies for Treatment of B Cell Diseases

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US13/774,526 Division US20130177526A1 (en) 2002-12-13 2013-02-22 Camptothecin Conjugates of Anti-CD22 Antibodies for Treatment of B Cell Diseases

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US15/432,278 Continuation US20170151356A1 (en) 2002-12-13 2017-02-14 Camptothecin Conjugates of Anti-CD22 Antibodies for Treatment of B Cell Diseases

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20140369927A1 true US20140369927A1 (en) 2014-12-18

Family

ID=45096373

Family Applications (4)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US13/213,245 Expired - Lifetime US8420086B2 (en) 2002-12-13 2011-08-19 Camptothecin conjugates of anti-CD22 antibodies for treatment of B cell diseases
US13/774,526 Abandoned US20130177526A1 (en) 2002-12-13 2013-02-22 Camptothecin Conjugates of Anti-CD22 Antibodies for Treatment of B Cell Diseases
US14/337,336 Abandoned US20140369927A1 (en) 2002-12-13 2014-07-22 Camptothecin Conjugates of Anti-CD22 Antibodies for Treatment of B Cell Diseases
US15/432,278 Abandoned US20170151356A1 (en) 2002-12-13 2017-02-14 Camptothecin Conjugates of Anti-CD22 Antibodies for Treatment of B Cell Diseases

Family Applications Before (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US13/213,245 Expired - Lifetime US8420086B2 (en) 2002-12-13 2011-08-19 Camptothecin conjugates of anti-CD22 antibodies for treatment of B cell diseases
US13/774,526 Abandoned US20130177526A1 (en) 2002-12-13 2013-02-22 Camptothecin Conjugates of Anti-CD22 Antibodies for Treatment of B Cell Diseases

Family Applications After (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US15/432,278 Abandoned US20170151356A1 (en) 2002-12-13 2017-02-14 Camptothecin Conjugates of Anti-CD22 Antibodies for Treatment of B Cell Diseases

Country Status (1)

Country Link
US (4) US8420086B2 (en)

Families Citing this family (54)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20160279239A1 (en) 2011-05-02 2016-09-29 Immunomedics, Inc. Subcutaneous administration of anti-cd74 antibody for systemic lupus erythematosus and autoimmune disease
US9770517B2 (en) 2002-03-01 2017-09-26 Immunomedics, Inc. Anti-Trop-2 antibody-drug conjugates and uses thereof
US9481878B2 (en) 2004-02-13 2016-11-01 Immunomedics, Inc. Compositions and methods of use of immunotoxins comprising ranpirnase (Rap) show potent cytotoxic activity
US8551480B2 (en) * 2004-02-13 2013-10-08 Immunomedics, Inc. Compositions and methods of use of immunotoxins comprising ranpirnase (Rap) show potent cytotoxic activity
US20160355591A1 (en) 2011-05-02 2016-12-08 Immunomedics, Inc. Subcutaneous anti-hla-dr monoclonal antibody for treatment of hematologic malignancies
US10058621B2 (en) 2015-06-25 2018-08-28 Immunomedics, Inc. Combination therapy with anti-HLA-DR antibodies and kinase inhibitors in hematopoietic cancers
US9707302B2 (en) 2013-07-23 2017-07-18 Immunomedics, Inc. Combining anti-HLA-DR or anti-Trop-2 antibodies with microtubule inhibitors, PARP inhibitors, bruton kinase inhibitors or phosphoinositide 3-kinase inhibitors significantly improves therapeutic outcome in cancer
US8158129B2 (en) 2005-04-06 2012-04-17 Ibc Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Dimeric alpha interferon PEGylated site-specifically shows enhanced and prolonged efficacy in vivo
JP2010509235A (en) * 2006-11-03 2010-03-25 ノースウェスタン ユニバーシティ Treatment of multiple sclerosis
CA2831572C (en) 2011-05-02 2019-11-26 Immunomedics, Inc. Ultrafiltration concentration of allotype selected antibodies for small-volume administration
US9757458B2 (en) * 2011-12-05 2017-09-12 Immunomedics, Inc. Crosslinking of CD22 by epratuzumab triggers BCR signaling and caspase-dependent apoptosis in hematopoietic cancer cells
WO2013092998A1 (en) 2011-12-23 2013-06-27 Innate Pharma Enzymatic conjugation of antibodies
US9056141B2 (en) * 2012-05-31 2015-06-16 Synchem, Inc. Thiol-ene click chemistry for drug conjugates
WO2014009426A2 (en) 2012-07-13 2014-01-16 Innate Pharma Screening of conjugated antibodies
US9382329B2 (en) 2012-08-14 2016-07-05 Ibc Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Disease therapy by inducing immune response to Trop-2 expressing cells
EP2916872B1 (en) 2012-11-09 2019-02-27 Innate Pharma Recognition tags for tgase-mediated conjugation
US10206918B2 (en) 2012-12-13 2019-02-19 Immunomedics, Inc. Efficacy of anti-HLA-DR antiboddy drug conjugate IMMU-140 (hL243-CL2A-SN-38) in HLA-DR positive cancers
US10137196B2 (en) 2012-12-13 2018-11-27 Immunomedics, Inc. Dosages of immunoconjugates of antibodies and SN-38 for improved efficacy and decreased toxicity
US9492566B2 (en) 2012-12-13 2016-11-15 Immunomedics, Inc. Antibody-drug conjugates and uses thereof
US9931417B2 (en) 2012-12-13 2018-04-03 Immunomedics, Inc. Antibody-SN-38 immunoconjugates with a CL2A linker
WO2017004144A1 (en) 2015-07-01 2017-01-05 Immunomedics, Inc. Antibody-sn-38 immunoconjugates with a cl2a linker
HUE057977T2 (en) 2012-12-13 2022-06-28 Immunomedics Inc Dosages of immunoconjugates of antibodies and sn-38 for improved efficacy and decreased toxicity
US10413539B2 (en) 2012-12-13 2019-09-17 Immunomedics, Inc. Therapy for metastatic urothelial cancer with the antibody-drug conjugate, sacituzumab govitecan (IMMU-132)
WO2015012904A2 (en) 2012-12-13 2015-01-29 Immunomedics, Inc. Antibody-sn-38 immunoconjugates with a cl2a linker
US10744129B2 (en) 2012-12-13 2020-08-18 Immunomedics, Inc. Therapy of small-cell lung cancer (SCLC) with a topoisomerase-I inhibiting antibody-drug conjugate (ADC) targeting Trop-2
KR20150119848A (en) 2012-12-21 2015-10-26 바이오얼라이언스 씨.브이. Hydrophilic self-immolative linkers and conjugates thereof
WO2014140300A1 (en) 2013-03-15 2014-09-18 Innate Pharma Solid phase tgase-mediated conjugation of antibodies
PL2992015T3 (en) * 2013-05-02 2019-01-31 F.Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Combination therapy of an afucosylated cd20 antibody with a cd22 antibody-drug conjugate
AU2014275010B2 (en) * 2013-06-04 2020-10-29 Tribiotica Llc Methods and compositions for templated assembly of nucleic acid specific heterocompounds
US10071169B2 (en) 2013-06-20 2018-09-11 Innate Pharma Enzymatic conjugation of polypeptides
AU2014283185B2 (en) 2013-06-21 2019-05-02 Innate Pharma Enzymatic conjugation of polypeptides
AU2014293670B2 (en) * 2013-07-23 2019-08-01 Immunomedics, Inc. Antibody-SN-38 immunoconjugates with a CL2A linker
US11253606B2 (en) 2013-07-23 2022-02-22 Immunomedics, Inc. Combining anti-HLA-DR or anti-Trop-2 antibodies with microtubule inhibitors, PARP inhibitors, Bruton kinase inhibitors or phosphoinositide 3-kinase inhibitors significantly improves therapeutic outcome in cancer
US9956299B2 (en) 2013-10-11 2018-05-01 Medimmune Limited Pyrrolobenzodiazepine—antibody conjugates
TN2016000137A1 (en) 2013-10-18 2017-10-06 Deutsches Krebsforsch Labeled inhibitors of prostate specific membrane antigen (psma), their use as imaging agents and pharmaceutical agents for the treatment of prostate cancer.
US9139649B2 (en) 2014-02-25 2015-09-22 Immunomedics, Inc. Humanized anti-CD22 antibody
JP2017528418A (en) 2014-06-20 2017-09-28 バイオアライアンス コマンディテール フェンノートシャップ Antifolate receptor alpha (FRA) antibody-drug conjugates and methods of use thereof
WO2015196089A1 (en) * 2014-06-20 2015-12-23 Bioalliance C.V. Anti-cd22 antibody-drug conjugates and methods of using thereof
GB201412658D0 (en) 2014-07-16 2014-08-27 Ucb Biopharma Sprl Molecules
US9714288B2 (en) 2014-09-30 2017-07-25 The Regents Of The University Of California Antisense compounds and uses thereof
EP3280453A1 (en) * 2015-04-07 2018-02-14 Immunomedics, Inc. Y-90-labeled anti-cd22 antibody (epratuzumab tetraxetan) in refractory/relapsed adult cd22+ b-cell acute lymphoblastic leukemia
CA2981543A1 (en) 2015-04-22 2016-10-27 Immunomedics, Inc. Isolation, detection, diagnosis and/or characterization of circulating trop-2-positive cancer cells
US10195175B2 (en) 2015-06-25 2019-02-05 Immunomedics, Inc. Synergistic effect of anti-Trop-2 antibody-drug conjugate in combination therapy for triple-negative breast cancer when used with microtubule inhibitors or PARP inhibitors
GB201601075D0 (en) 2016-01-20 2016-03-02 Ucb Biopharma Sprl Antibodies molecules
GB201601077D0 (en) 2016-01-20 2016-03-02 Ucb Biopharma Sprl Antibody molecule
GB201601073D0 (en) 2016-01-20 2016-03-02 Ucb Biopharma Sprl Antibodies
JP7078536B2 (en) 2016-01-08 2022-05-31 アルトゥルバイオ， インコーポレイテッド Tetravalent anti-PSGL-1 antibody and its use
US20170224837A1 (en) 2016-02-10 2017-08-10 Immunomedics, Inc. Combination of abcg2 inhibitors with sacituzumab govitecan (immu-132) overcomes resistance to sn-38 in trop-2 expressing cancers
RU2725292C2 (en) 2016-04-27 2020-06-30 Иммьюномедикс, Инк. Efficacy of conjugates of anti-trop-2 antibody with drug sn-38 for therapy of recurrent/refractory to inhibitors of tumor control point
JP2020512314A (en) 2017-03-27 2020-04-23 イミューノメディクス、インコーポレイテッドＩｍｍｕｎｏｍｅｄｉｃｓ， Ｉｎｃ． Treatment of Trop-2-expressing triple-negative breast cancer with sacituzumab gobitecan and RAD51 inhibitor
EP3606964A4 (en) 2017-04-03 2020-12-09 Immunomedics, Inc. Subcutaneous administration of antibody-drug conjugates for cancer therapy
MX2021013774A (en) 2019-05-14 2021-12-10 Nuvation Bio Inc Anti-cancer nuclear hormone receptor-targeting compounds.
JP2024510792A (en) 2021-03-23 2024-03-11 ニューベイション・バイオ・インコーポレイテッド Anti-cancer nuclear hormone receptor targeting compound
WO2023232745A1 (en) * 2022-05-30 2023-12-07 Mediterranea Theranostic S.R.L. Anti-idiotype antibodies and uses thereof

Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4200690A (en) * 1976-12-16 1980-04-29 Millipore Corporation Immunoassay with membrane immobilized antibody
US4867962A (en) * 1988-02-26 1989-09-19 Neorx Corporation Functionally specific antibodies
US5053503A (en) * 1989-02-17 1991-10-01 Centocor Chelating agents
US6117413A (en) * 1997-11-12 2000-09-12 Battelle Memorial Institute Radionuclide-binding compound, a radionuclide delivery system, a method of making a radium complexing compound, a method of extracting a radionuclide, and a method of delivering a radionuclide
WO2000074718A1 (en) * 1999-06-09 2000-12-14 Immunomedics, Inc. Immunotherapy of autoimmune disorders using antibodies which target b-cells
US20020041847A1 (en) * 1998-03-12 2002-04-11 Goldenberg David M. Immunotherapy of malignant and autoimmune disorders in domestic animals using naked antibodies, immunoconjugates and fusion proteins
US6846476B2 (en) * 2000-06-20 2005-01-25 Idec Pharmaceuticals Corporation Treatment of B-cell associated diseases
US20080248048A1 (en) * 2005-09-30 2008-10-09 Astrazeneca Ab Interleukin-13 Antibody Composition

Family Cites Families (89)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
GB1541435A (en) 1975-02-04 1979-02-28 Searle & Co Immunological materials
US4036945A (en) 1976-05-03 1977-07-19 The Massachusetts General Hospital Composition and method for determining the size and location of myocardial infarcts
US4331647A (en) 1980-03-03 1982-05-25 Goldenberg Milton David Tumor localization and therapy with labeled antibody fragments specific to tumor-associated markers
US5204095A (en) 1980-04-09 1993-04-20 National Research Development Corporation Monoclonal antibodies against hepatitis B virus
US4359457A (en) 1980-09-30 1982-11-16 Neville Jr David M Anti Thy 1.2 monoclonal antibody-ricin hybrid utilized as a tumor suppressant
US4916213A (en) 1983-02-22 1990-04-10 Xoma Corporation Ribosomal inhibiting protein-immunoglobulin conjugates with specificity for tumor cell surface antigens, and mixtures thereof
US4925922A (en) 1983-02-22 1990-05-15 Xoma Corporation Potentiation of cytotoxic conjugates
US4816567A (en) 1983-04-08 1989-03-28 Genentech, Inc. Recombinant immunoglobin preparations
US5672347A (en) 1984-07-05 1997-09-30 Genentech, Inc. Tumor necrosis factor antagonists and their use
US4824659A (en) 1985-06-07 1989-04-25 Immunomedics, Inc. Antibody conjugates
US5525338A (en) 1992-08-21 1996-06-11 Immunomedics, Inc. Detection and therapy of lesions with biotin/avidin conjugates
US5776093A (en) 1985-07-05 1998-07-07 Immunomedics, Inc. Method for imaging and treating organs and tissues
US4918163A (en) 1985-09-27 1990-04-17 Pfizer Inc. Monoclonal antibodies specific for lipid-A determinants of gram negative bacteria
US5618920A (en) 1985-11-01 1997-04-08 Xoma Corporation Modular assembly of antibody genes, antibodies prepared thereby and use
US4699784A (en) 1986-02-25 1987-10-13 Center For Molecular Medicine & Immunology Tumoricidal methotrexate-antibody conjugate
US5057313A (en) 1986-02-25 1991-10-15 The Center For Molecular Medicine And Immunology Diagnostic and therapeutic antibody conjugates
US4997913A (en) 1986-06-30 1991-03-05 Oncogen pH-sensitive immunoconjugates and methods for their use in tumor therapy
US4704692A (en) 1986-09-02 1987-11-03 Ladner Robert C Computer based system and method for determining and displaying possible chemical structures for converting double- or multiple-chain polypeptides to single-chain polypeptides
US4946778A (en) 1987-09-21 1990-08-07 Genex Corporation Single polypeptide chain binding molecules
US5567610A (en) 1986-09-04 1996-10-22 Bioinvent International Ab Method of producing human monoclonal antibodies and kit therefor
CA1320905C (en) * 1986-11-06 1993-08-03 Joseph M. Cummins Treatment of immuno-resistant disease
US4932412A (en) 1986-12-18 1990-06-12 Immunomedics, Inc. Intraoperative and endoscopic tumor detection and therapy
WO1988007553A1 (en) 1987-03-26 1988-10-06 Teijin Limited Process for preparing antibody complex
US4981979A (en) 1987-09-10 1991-01-01 Neorx Corporation Immunoconjugates joined by thioether bonds having reduced toxicity and improved selectivity
US5112954A (en) 1988-02-26 1992-05-12 Neorx Corporation Method of enhancing the effect of cytotoxic agents
US4861579A (en) 1988-03-17 1989-08-29 American Cyanamid Company Suppression of B-lymphocytes in mammals by administration of anti-B-lymphocyte antibodies
US5530101A (en) 1988-12-28 1996-06-25 Protein Design Labs, Inc. Humanized immunoglobulins
US5134075A (en) 1989-02-17 1992-07-28 Oncogen Limited Partnership Monoclonal antibody to novel antigen associated with human tumors
US5171665A (en) 1989-04-17 1992-12-15 Oncogen Monoclonal antibody to novel antigen associated with human tumors
JPH02283294A (en) 1989-04-24 1990-11-20 Sumitomo Chem Co Ltd Human monoclonal antibody
US5229275A (en) 1990-04-26 1993-07-20 Akzo N.V. In-vitro method for producing antigen-specific human monoclonal antibodies
US5633425A (en) 1990-08-29 1997-05-27 Genpharm International, Inc. Transgenic non-human animals capable of producing heterologous antibodies
GB9020075D0 (en) 1990-09-14 1990-10-24 Filler Aaron G Contrast agents for magnetic resonance imaging of axonal transport
US5679640A (en) 1991-02-12 1997-10-21 Cytel Corporation Immunosuppressant peptides
JP3105629B2 (en) 1991-04-23 2000-11-06 サングスタット メディカル コーポレイション Cell activity regulating conjugates of members of specific binding pairs
IE922437A1 (en) 1991-07-25 1993-01-27 Idec Pharma Corp Recombinant antibodies for human therapy
CA2116774C (en) 1991-09-19 2003-11-11 Paul J. Carter Expression in e. coli antibody fragments having at least a cysteine present as a free thiol. use for the production of bifunctional f(ab') 2 antibodies
US5622929A (en) 1992-01-23 1997-04-22 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Thioether conjugates
US5965132A (en) 1992-03-05 1999-10-12 Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas System Methods and compositions for targeting the vasculature of solid tumors
US6096289A (en) 1992-05-06 2000-08-01 Immunomedics, Inc. Intraoperative, intravascular, and endoscopic tumor and lesion detection, biopsy and therapy
ATE194916T1 (en) 1992-05-06 2000-08-15 Immunomedics Inc INTRAOPERATIVE, INTRAVASCULAR AND ENDOSCOPIC DETERMINATION AND TREATMENT OF INJURIES AND TUMORS
US5686072A (en) 1992-06-17 1997-11-11 Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas Epitope-specific monoclonal antibodies and immunotoxins and uses thereof
WO1994011026A2 (en) 1992-11-13 1994-05-26 Idec Pharmaceuticals Corporation Therapeutic application of chimeric and radiolabeled antibodies to human b lymphocyte restricted differentiation antigen for treatment of b cell lymphoma
JPH08507070A (en) 1993-02-22 1996-07-30 アルザ・コーポレーション Compositions for oral administration of active substances
US6214345B1 (en) 1993-05-14 2001-04-10 Bristol-Myers Squibb Co. Lysosomal enzyme-cleavable antitumor drug conjugates
KR100220864B1 (en) 1993-05-17 1999-09-15 오트리브 데이비스 더블유 Improved detection and therapy of lesions with biotin/avidin-metal chelating protein conjugates
US5484892A (en) 1993-05-21 1996-01-16 Dana-Farber Cancer Institute, Inc. Monoclonal antibodies that block ligand binding to the CD22 receptor in mature B cells
US5565215A (en) 1993-07-23 1996-10-15 Massachusettes Institute Of Technology Biodegradable injectable particles for imaging
US5417972A (en) 1993-08-02 1995-05-23 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University Method of killing B-cells in a complement independent and an ADCC independent manner using antibodies which specifically bind CDIM
US5824701A (en) 1993-10-20 1998-10-20 Enzon, Inc. Taxane-based prodrugs
US5443953A (en) 1993-12-08 1995-08-22 Immunomedics, Inc. Preparation and use of immunoconjugates
US5639725A (en) 1994-04-26 1997-06-17 Children's Hospital Medical Center Corp. Angiostatin protein
US5686578A (en) 1994-08-05 1997-11-11 Immunomedics, Inc. Polyspecific immunoconjugates and antibody composites for targeting the multidrug resistant phenotype
EP0771208B1 (en) 1994-08-12 2005-10-19 Immunomedics, Inc. Immunoconjugates and humanized antibodies specific for b-cell lymphoma and leukemia cells
US8771694B2 (en) * 1994-08-12 2014-07-08 Immunomedics, Inc. Immunoconjugates and humanized antibodies specific for B-cell lymphoma and leukemia cells
US5874540A (en) 1994-10-05 1999-02-23 Immunomedics, Inc. CDR-grafted type III anti-CEA humanized mouse monoclonal antibodies
US5798554A (en) 1995-02-24 1998-08-25 Consorzio Per La Ricerca Sulla Microelettronica Nel Mezzogiorno MOS-technology power device integrated structure and manufacturing process thereof
AUPO591797A0 (en) 1997-03-27 1997-04-24 Commonwealth Scientific And Industrial Research Organisation High avidity polyvalent and polyspecific reagents
US6441025B2 (en) 1996-03-12 2002-08-27 Pg-Txl Company, L.P. Water soluble paclitaxel derivatives
WO1997034632A1 (en) 1996-03-20 1997-09-25 Immunomedics, Inc. Glycosylated humanized b-cell specific antibodies
EP0954340B1 (en) 1996-05-03 2007-06-27 Immunomedics, Inc. Targeted combination immunotherapy of cancer
US6558669B1 (en) 1996-08-28 2003-05-06 Immunomedics, Inc. Stable radioiodine conjugates and methods for their synthesis
DE19640207A1 (en) 1996-09-30 1998-04-02 Bayer Ag Glycoconjugates of modified camptothecin derivatives (A or B ring linkage)
US6056973A (en) * 1996-10-11 2000-05-02 Sequus Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Therapeutic liposome composition and method of preparation
US6653104B2 (en) 1996-10-17 2003-11-25 Immunomedics, Inc. Immunotoxins, comprising an internalizing antibody, directed against malignant and normal cells
US7122636B1 (en) 1997-02-21 2006-10-17 Genentech, Inc. Antibody fragment-polymer conjugates and uses of same
US6183744B1 (en) 1997-03-24 2001-02-06 Immunomedics, Inc. Immunotherapy of B-cell malignancies using anti-CD22 antibodies
DE69831224T2 (en) 1997-05-02 2006-03-23 The Government Of The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Department Of Health And Human Services IMMUNTOXINES CONTAINING AN ONC PROTEIN AGAINST POORED CELLS
US6165440A (en) 1997-07-09 2000-12-26 Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas System Radiation and nanoparticles for enhancement of drug delivery in solid tumors
US6051228A (en) 1998-02-19 2000-04-18 Bristol-Myers Squibb Co. Antibodies against human CD40
US7387779B2 (en) 1998-06-17 2008-06-17 Beth Israel Deaconess Medical Center Anti-angiogenic proteins and fragments and methods of use thereof
US6201104B1 (en) * 1998-12-04 2001-03-13 Entremed, Inc. Angiogenesis—inhibiting protein binding peptides and proteins and methods of use
US6379698B1 (en) 1999-04-06 2002-04-30 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Fusogenic lipids and vesicles
KR20020027311A (en) 1999-05-07 2002-04-13 제넨테크, 인크. Treatment of Autoimmune Diseases with Antagonists Which Bind to B Cell Surface Markers
US6530944B2 (en) 2000-02-08 2003-03-11 Rice University Optically-active nanoparticles for use in therapeutic and diagnostic methods
US20030133972A1 (en) 2000-10-11 2003-07-17 Targesome, Inc. Targeted multivalent macromolecules
US6716821B2 (en) 2001-12-21 2004-04-06 Immunogen Inc. Cytotoxic agents bearing a reactive polyethylene glycol moiety, cytotoxic conjugates comprising polyethylene glycol linking groups, and methods of making and using the same
RU2004127458A (en) * 2002-02-14 2005-10-27 Иммуномедикс, Инк. (Us) ANTI-CD20 ANTIBODIES, THEIR HYBRID PROTEINS AND WAYS OF THEIR USE
US7591994B2 (en) 2002-12-13 2009-09-22 Immunomedics, Inc. Camptothecin-binding moiety conjugates
EP2287201B1 (en) 2002-03-01 2018-12-12 Immunomedics, Inc. RS7 antibodies
ES2350477T5 (en) 2002-03-01 2020-05-06 Immunomedics Inc Internalization of anti-CD74 antibodies and methods of use
FR2840532B1 (en) 2002-06-11 2005-05-06 Ethypharm Sa FURENT LIPID NANOCAPSULES, PROCESS FOR THEIR PREPARATION AND USE AS VECTOR OF ACTIVE (S) PRINCIPLES
JP4959136B2 (en) 2002-12-13 2012-06-20 イミューノメディクス、インコーポレイテッド Immunoconjugates with cleavable linkages in cells
US7902338B2 (en) 2003-07-31 2011-03-08 Immunomedics, Inc. Anti-CD19 antibodies
CA2555661C (en) 2004-02-13 2017-11-21 Immunomedics, Inc. Fusion proteins containing recombinant cytotoxic rnases
US8551480B2 (en) * 2004-02-13 2013-10-08 Immunomedics, Inc. Compositions and methods of use of immunotoxins comprising ranpirnase (Rap) show potent cytotoxic activity
US7612153B2 (en) 2004-10-25 2009-11-03 Intezyne Technologies, Inc. Heterobifunctional poly(ethylene glycol) and uses thereof
US8349332B2 (en) * 2005-04-06 2013-01-08 Ibc Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Multiple signaling pathways induced by hexavalent, monospecific and bispecific antibodies for enhanced toxicity to B-cell lymphomas and other diseases
DK3903829T3 (en) 2009-02-13 2023-06-26 Immunomedics Inc IMMUNE CONJUGATES WITH AN INTRACELLULAR CLEAVABLE BOND

Patent Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4200690A (en) * 1976-12-16 1980-04-29 Millipore Corporation Immunoassay with membrane immobilized antibody
US4867962A (en) * 1988-02-26 1989-09-19 Neorx Corporation Functionally specific antibodies
US5053503A (en) * 1989-02-17 1991-10-01 Centocor Chelating agents
US6117413A (en) * 1997-11-12 2000-09-12 Battelle Memorial Institute Radionuclide-binding compound, a radionuclide delivery system, a method of making a radium complexing compound, a method of extracting a radionuclide, and a method of delivering a radionuclide
US20020041847A1 (en) * 1998-03-12 2002-04-11 Goldenberg David M. Immunotherapy of malignant and autoimmune disorders in domestic animals using naked antibodies, immunoconjugates and fusion proteins
WO2000074718A1 (en) * 1999-06-09 2000-12-14 Immunomedics, Inc. Immunotherapy of autoimmune disorders using antibodies which target b-cells
US6846476B2 (en) * 2000-06-20 2005-01-25 Idec Pharmaceuticals Corporation Treatment of B-cell associated diseases
US20080248048A1 (en) * 2005-09-30 2008-10-09 Astrazeneca Ab Interleukin-13 Antibody Composition

Non-Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
Exhibit A (XOFIGO� Solution for Injection Product Information, dated 07/10/2014) *
Juweid et al. (Clin. Cancer Res., 5: 3292s-3303s, 1999) *
Kameoka et al. (J. Biochem., 142: 383-391, 2007) *
Leung et al. (Mol. Immunol., 32:1413-1427, IDS) *
Magdelaine-Beuzelin et al. (Pharmacogenetics and Genomics, 19(5):383-387, May 2009) *
Morschhauser et al. (Journal of Clinical Oncology, 27: 3346-3353, July 2009) *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US8420086B2 (en) 2013-04-16
US20110305631A1 (en) 2011-12-15
US20130177526A1 (en) 2013-07-11
US20170151356A1 (en) 2017-06-01

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US8420086B2 (en) Camptothecin conjugates of anti-CD22 antibodies for treatment of B cell diseases
US9359443B2 (en) Combination therapy with anti-CD74 and anti-CD20 antibodies provides enhanced toxicity to B-cell diseases
US9737617B2 (en) Multiple signaling pathways induced by hexavalent, monospecific and bispecific antibodies for enhanced toxicity to B-cell lymphomas and other diseases
US8551480B2 (en) Compositions and methods of use of immunotoxins comprising ranpirnase (Rap) show potent cytotoxic activity
US9770517B2 (en) Anti-Trop-2 antibody-drug conjugates and uses thereof
AU2011203890B2 (en) Enhanced cytotoxicity of anti-CD74 and anti-HLA-DR antibodies with interferon-gamma
US20120276100A1 (en) Compositions and Methods of Use of Immunotoxins Comprising Ranpirnase (Rap) Show Potent Cytotoxic Activity
US20110123436A1 (en) Dock-and-Lock (DNL) Complexes for Delivery of Interference RNA
CA2770351A1 (en) Compositions and methods of use of immunotoxins comprising ranpirnase (rap) show potent cytotoxic activity
EP2605788B1 (en) Combination therapy with anti-cd74 antibodies provides enhanced toxicity to malignancies, autoimmune disease and other diseases
US20160375108A1 (en) Compositions and Methods of Use of Immunotoxins Comprising Ranpirnase (Rap) Show Potent Cytotoxic Activity
AU2013203542B8 (en) Enhanced cytotoxicity of anti-CD74 and anti-HLA-DR antibodies with interferon-gamma
AU2013203542B2 (en) Enhanced cytotoxicity of anti-CD74 and anti-HLA-DR antibodies with interferon-gamma
AU2010286496B2 (en) Compositions and methods of use of immunotoxins comprising ranpirnase (Rap) show potent cytotoxic activity

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: IMMUNOMEDICS, INC., NEW JERSEY

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:GOVINDAN, SERENGULAM V.;GOLDENBERG, DAVID M.;REEL/FRAME:033972/0539

Effective date: 20111221

STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION